Nissan - NAVARA - Owners Manual - 2021 - 2021

Getting The Most From Your NISSAN NAVARA OWNER’S MANUAL WELCOME TO YOUR NEW NISSAN NAVARA CONTENTS Illustrated table of contents 0 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 Instruments and controls 2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3 Heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4 Starting and driving 5 In case of emergency 6 Appearance and care 7 Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8 Technical information 9 Index 10 Foreword This manual was prepared to help you understand the operation and maintenance of your vehicle so that you may enjoy many kilometers (miles) of driving pleasure. Please read through this manual before operating your vehicle. A separate Warranty Information & Maintenance Booklet explains details about the warranties covering your vehicle. Your NISSAN dealer knows your vehicle best. When you require any service or have any questions, we will be glad to assist you with the extensive resources available for you. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION Reminders for safety! Follow these important driving rules to help ensure a safe and complete trip for you and your passengers! y NEVER drive under the influence of alcohol or drugs. y ALWAYS observe posted speed limits and never drive too fast for conditions. y ALWAYS use your seat belts and appropriate child restraint systems. Preteen children should be seated in the rear seat (if equipped). y ALWAYS provide information about the proper use of vehicle safety features to all occupants of the vehicle. y ALWAYS review this Owner's Manual for important safety information. When reading the manual This manual includes information for all options available on this model. Therefore, you may find some information that does not apply to your vehicle. Throughout this manual, some illustrations may only show the layout for Right-Hand Drive (RHD) models. For Left-Hand Drive (LHD) models, the illustrated shape and location of some components may differ. All information, specifications and illustrations in this manual are those in effect at the time of printing. NISSAN reserves the right to change specifications or designs without notice and without obligation. MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE This vehicle should not be modified. Modification could affect its performance, safety or durability, and may even violate governmental regulations. In addition, damage or performance problems resulting from modifications may not be covered under NISSAN warranties. Read first — then drive safely Before driving your vehicle, read this Owner's Manual carefully. This will ensure familiarity with controls and maintenance requirements, assisting you in the safe operation of your vehicle. Throughout this manual we have used the symbol followed by the word WARNING. This is used to indicate the presence of a hazard that could cause death or serious personal injury. To avoid or reduce the risk, the procedures must be followed precisely. The symbol 0-Foreword.indd 1 is also used throughout this manual to indicate the presence of a hazard that could cause minor or moderate personal injury or damages to your vehicle. To avoid or reduce the risk, the procedures must be followed carefully. sic0697 If you see this symbol, it means “Do not do this” or “Do not let this happen”. If you see a symbol similar to these in an illustration, it means the arrow points to the front of the vehicle. Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these indicate movement or action. Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these call attention to an item in the illustration. followed by the word CAUTION 2021/01/06 09:12:00 AM ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROAD DRIVING Air bag warning labels (if equipped): This vehicle will handle and maneuver differently from an ordinary passenger car, because it has a higher center of gravity. As with other vehicles with features of this type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or an accident. Be sure to read "On-pavement and off-road driving precautions" (P.5-6). JVR0243X “NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur.” Be sure to read "Air bag warning labels" (P.1-28). 0-Foreword.indd 2 Bluetooth® is a trademark owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and licensed to Visteon Corporation and Panasonic Corporation. © 2021 NISSAN SOUTH AFRICA PTY LTD 2021/01/06 09:12:00 AM 0 Illustrated table of contents Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system (SRS) ........................................................................................................................ 0-2 Exterior front .................................................................................................... 0-3 Exterior rear ...................................................................................................... 0-4 Passenger compartment........................................................................ 0-5 Cockpit .................................................................................................................. 0-6 Left-hand drive (LHD) model ....................................................... 0-6 Right-hand drive (RHD) model ................................................... 0-7 Instrument panel .......................................................................................... 0-8 Left-hand drive (LHD) model 0-8 Right-hand drive (RHD) model ................................................... 0-9 Meters and gauges ................................................................................... 0-10 Engine compartment ............................................................................. 0-12 YD25DDTi engine ............................................................................. 0-12 QR25DE engine ................................................................................. 0-13 0-Chapter 0.indd 1 2021/01/22 08:37:40 AM SEATS, SEAT BELTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) WAA0242X 1. Child restraint anchor point* (for top tether strap child restraint) (Page 1-19) 7. Armrest* (P.1-5) 2. Head restraints (P.1-6) 8. ISOFIX child restraint system* (P.1-19) 3. Seat belts (P.1-8) 9. Supplemental side-impact air bags* (P.1-25) 4. Supplemental curtain side-impact air bags* (P.1-25) 10. Pre-tensioner seat belt system* (P.1-34) 5. Supplemental front-impact air bags (P. 1-25) 6. Rear seats* (P.1-5) 12. Supplemental driver's knee air bag* (P.1-25) 0-2 11. Front seats (P.1-2) *: if equipped Illustrated table of contents 0-Chapter 0.indd 2 2021/01/22 08:37:40 AM EXTERIOR FRONT 10. Tyres — Tyres and wheels (P.8-30) — Flat Tyre (P.6-2) — Specifications (P.9-7) — Four-Wheel Drive (4WD)*1 (P.5-16) 11. Side turn signal lights (fender or outside rear view mirror) — Bulb replacement (P.8-24) 12. Outside rear view mirrors (P.3-24) 13. Side view camera*1 (P.4-8) 14. Doors — Keys (P.3-2) — Door locks (P.3-4) — Remote key less entry system*1 (P.3-5) — Intelligent Key system*1 (P.3-6) — Security system*1 (P.3-15) 15. Child safety rear door locks*1 (P.3-5) *1: if equipped WAA0231X 1. Hood (P.3-16) 7. Towing hook*2 (P.6-13) 2. Antenna*1 (P.4-58) 8. Front fog lights*1 3. Windshield wipers and washers — Switch operation (P.2-36) — Switch operation (P.2-36) — Wiper blade replacement (P.8-17) *2: The layout illustrated is for the Right-Hand Drive (RHD) model. On the Left-Hand Drive (LHD) model, the towing hook is located on the opposite side. — Bulb replacement (P.8-24) 9. Headlights and turn signal lights — Window washer fluid (P.8-17) — Switch operation (P.2-32) 4. Windows (P.2-39) — Bulb replacement (P.8-24) 5. Roof rack*1 (P.2-44) 6. Front view camera*1 (P.4-8) Illustrated table of contents 0-Chapter 0.indd 3 0-3 2021/01/22 08:37:41 AM EXTERIOR REAR WAA0232X 1. Fuel-filler lid* or Fuel-filler cap* (P.3-17) 6. Truck box (P.3-19) — Fuel information (P.9-4) 7. Power outlet* (P.2-41) 2. Rear window defogger* (P.2-38)/Auto slide back windows system* (P.2-40) 8. Rear combination lights (bulb replacement) (P.8-28) 3. Antenna* (P.4-58) 9. 4. High-mounted stop light* (P.8-23) License plate lights (bulb replacement) (P.8-29) 5. Rear view camera* — Rear view monitor* (P.4-3) 10. Parking sensor (sonar) system* (P.5-61) *: if equipped — Intelligent Around View Monitor* (P.4-8) 0-4 Illustrated table of contents 0-Chapter 0.indd 4 2021/01/22 08:37:43 AM PASSENGER COMPARTMENT — Outside rear view mirror remote control switch (driver's door)* (P.3-24) *1: if equipped **: See the separate NissanConnect Owner's Manual (if equipped). WAA0243X 1. Room light* (P.2-47) 6. Inside rear view mirror (P.3-23) 2. Sun visors (P.2-45) 7. Rear cup holders* (P.2-44) 3. Map lights (P.2-46) 8. Console box* (P.2-43) 4. Microphone* — Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System* (P.4-59, P.4-65 or **) 5. Sunglasses holder* (P.2-43) — Power outlet (P.2-41) — USB charging connector* (P.2-42) 9. Cup holders* (P.2-43) 10. Door armrest — Power window controls* (P.2-39) — Power door lock switch (driver's door)* (P.3-4) Illustrated table of contents 0-Chapter 0.indd 5 0-5 2021/01/22 08:37:44 AM COCKPIT LEFT-HAND DRIVE (LHD) MODEL — Vehicle information display control switch* (P.2-18) 7. Wiper and washer switch (P.2-36) 8. Steering-wheel-mounted controls* (right side) — Cruise control system* (P.5-41) — Hands-Free Phone System switch* (P.4-59, P.4-65 or **) — Voice recognition system switch**1 9. Shift lever — Automatic Transmission (AT) (P.5-13) — Manual Transmission (MT) (P.5-16) 10. Parking sensor (sonar) system off switch* (P.5-62) 11. Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch* (P.5-24) 12. Auto slide back windows system* (P.2-40) 13. Tilting steering wheel lever* (P.3-23) *: if equipped **: See the separate NissanConnect Owner's Manual (if equipped). WAA0233X 1. Instrument brightness control switch (models with color display) (P.2-11) 2. TRIP/RESET switch for twin trip odometer (models with color display) (P.2-9) 5. 3. Instrument brightness control switch (P.2-11)/Trip computer mode switch (models without color display) (P.2-30) TRIP/RESET switch for twin trip odometer (P.2-9)/Trip computer mode switch (models without color display) (P.2-30) 6. Steering-wheel-mounted controls* (left side) 4. Headlight, fog light and turn signal switch — Headlight (P.2-32) 0-6 — Turn signal (P.2-35) — Fog light* (P.2-36) — Audio control steering switch* (P.4-56 or **) Illustrated table of contents 0-Chapter 0.indd 6 2021/01/22 08:37:46 AM RIGHT-HAND DRIVE (RHD) MODEL 6. Headlight, fog light and turn signal switch — Headlight (P.2-32) — Turn signal (P.2-35) — Fog light* (P.2-36) 7. TRIP/RESET switch for twin trip odometer (P.2-9)/Trip computer mode switch (models without color display) (P.2-30) 8. TRIP/RESET switch for twin trip odometer (models with color display) (P.2-9) 9. Instrument brightness control switch (models with color display) (P.2-11) 10. Cup holders (for bench seat models) (P.2-43) 11. Tilting steering wheel lever* (P.3-23) 12. Auto slide back windows system* (P.2-40) 13. Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch* (P.5-24) 14. Parking sensor (sonar) system off switch* (P.5-62) *: WAA0234X 1. Shift lever 3. Wiper and washer switch (P.2-36) — Automatic Transmission (AT) (P.5-13) 4. Steering-wheel-mounted controls* (right side) — Manual Transmission (MT) (P.5-16) 2. Steering-wheel-mounted side) controls* — Cruise control system* (P.5-41) (left — Hands-Free Phone System switch* (P.4-59, P.4-65 or **) — Audio control steering switch* (P.4-56) or **) — Vehicle information display control switch* (P.2-29) 0-Chapter 0.indd 7 if equipped **: See the separate NissanConnect Owner's Manual (if equipped). — Voice recognition system switch** 5. Instrument brightness control switch (P.2-11)/Trip computer mode switch (models without color display (P.2-30) Illustrated table of contents 0-7 2021/01/22 08:37:47 AM INSTRUMENT PANEL LEFT-HAND DRIVE (LHD) MODEL 9. Ignition switch (models without intelligent Key system) (P.5-8) 10. Power outlet (P.2-41) 11. Parking brake — Operation (P.3-25) — Check (P.8-12) 12. Hill descent control switch* (P.5-24) 13. Differential lock mode switch* (P.5-22) 14. USB (Universal Serial Bus) connection port (P.4-55 or **)/Auxiliary (AUX) input jack (P.4-55 or **) 15. Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) mode switch* (P.5-16) 16. Heater and air conditioner control (P.4-18) 17. Glove box (P.2-43) — Fuse box (P.8-21) 18. Side ventilator (P.4-17) : 4WD models : 2WD models *: WAA0235X 1. Meters and gauges (P.2-7) 5. Centre ventilator (P.4-17) (P.2-18, 6. Front passenger's supplemental front impact air bag (P.1-25) Push-button ignition switch (models with intelligent Key system) (P.5-9) 7. Hood release handle (P.3-17) — Vehicle P.2-29) 2. 3. information display Audio system* (P.4-23 or **) — Rear view monitor* (P.4-3) 4. 8. Steering wheel — Horn (P.2-39) — Intelligent Around View Monitor* (P.4-8) — Driver's supplemental front-impact air bag (P.1-25) Hazard indicator flasher switch (P.6-2) — Power steering (P.5-65) 0-8 if equipped **: See the separate NissanConnect Owner's Manual (if equipped) Illustrated table of contents 0-Chapter 0.indd 8 2021/01/22 08:37:49 AM RIGHT-HAND DRIVE (RHD) MODEL 11. Hill descent control switch* (P.5-24) 12. Differential lock mode switch* (P.5-22) 13. Parking brake — Operation (P.3-25) — Check (P.8-12) 14. USB (Universal Serial Bus) connection port* (P.4-55 or ***)/Auxiliary (AUX) input jack* (P.4-55 or ***) 15. Four-wheel Drive (4WD) mode switch* (P.5-16) 16. Steering wheel — Horn (P.2-39) — Driver's supplemental front-impact air bag (P.1-25) — Power steering (P.5-65) 17. Hood release handle (P.3-17) 18. Ignition switch (models without intelligent Key system) (P.5-8) : 4WD models : 2WD models : Except for front bench seat models WAA0236X 1. Front passenger's supplemental impact air bag (P.1-25) front- 2. Centre ventilator (P.4-17) 3. Hazard indicator flasher switch (P.6-2) 4. Audio system* (P.4-23 or ***) or Navigation system** or *** — Rear view monitor* (P.4-3) — Intelligent Around View Monitor* (P.4-8) 5. Push-button ignition switch (models with intelligent Key system) (P.5-9) 6. Meters and gauges (P.2-7) — Vehicle information display (P.2-18, P.2-29) 7. Side ventilator (P.4-17) 8. Glove box (P.2-43) : For front bench seat models *: if equipped **: See the separate Navigation System Owner's Manual (if equipped) ***: See the separate NissanConnect Owner's Manual (if equipped) — Fuse box (P.8-21) 9. Heater* and air conditioner control (P.4-18) 10. Power outlet (P.2-41) Illustrated table of contents 0-Chapter 0.indd 9 0-9 2021/01/22 08:37:50 AM METERS AND GAUGES Model with color display WAA0208X 1. Tachometer (P.2-9) — Instrument brightness control (P.2-11) 2. Warning/Indicator lights (P.2-12) 3. Vehicle information display (P.2-18) — Automatic Transmission (AT) position indicator (AT model) (P.2-25, P.5-13) — Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) mode indicator* (P.5-16) 4. Speedometer (P.2-9) 5. Engine coolant temperature gauge (P.2-9) — Oil control system* (P.2-30) 6. Fuel gauge (P.2-10) — Odometer/twin trip odometer (P.2-9) *: if equipped — Trip computer (P.2-30) 0-10 Illustrated table of contents 0-Chapter 0.indd 10 2021/01/22 08:37:51 AM Model without color display WAA0237X 1. Tachometer (P.2-9) — Odometer/twin trip odometer (P.2-9) 2. Warning/Indicator lights (P.2-12) — Trip computer (P.2-30) 3. Vehicle information display (P.2-29) — Engine (P.2-9) coolant temperature — Instrument brightness control (P.2-11) gauge — Automatic Transmission (AT) position indicator (AT model) (P.2-25, P.5-13) — Fuel gauge (P.2-10) 4. Speedometer (P.2-9) — Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) mode indicator* (P.5-16) *: if equipped — Oil control system* (P.2-30) Illustrated table of contents 0-Chapter 0.indd 11 0-11 2021/01/22 08:37:51 AM ENGINE COMPARTMENT YD25DDTI ENGINE **2: The layout illustrated is for the Right-Hand Drive (RHD) model. On the Left-Hand Drive (LHD) model, brake (and clutch) fluid reservoir is located on the opposite side. WAA0238X 1. Window washer fluid reservoir (P.8-17) 8. Air cleaner (P.8-16) 2. Brake and clutch*1 reservoir*2 (P.8-14) 9. Power steering fluid reservoir (P.8-15) 3. Engine oil dipstick (P.8-8) 10. Engine drive belt location (P.8-11) 4. Fuel filter (P.8-11) 11. Radiator filler cap (P.8-6) 5. Engine oil filler cap (P.8-8) 6. Fuse/fusible link holder (P.8-21) 12. Engine coolant reservoir (P.8-6) 7. Battery (P.8-18) *1: For manual Transmission (MT) model — Vehicle overheat (P.6-10) — Jump starting (P.6-7) 0-12 Illustrated table of contents 0-Chapter 0.indd 12 2021/01/22 08:37:51 AM QR25DE ENGINE JVC0772X 1. Window washer fluid reservoir (P.8-17) 7. Air cleaner (P.8-16) 2. Brake and clutch* fluid reservoir (P.8-14) 8. Engine coolant reservoir (P.8-6) 3. Engine oil filler cap (P.8-8) 9. Engine drive belt location (P.8-11) 4. Engine oil dipstick (P.8-8) 10. Radiator filler cap (P.8-6) 5. Fuse/Fusible link holder (P.8-21) 6. Battery (P.8-18) 11. Power steering fluid reservoir (P.8-15) — Jump starting (P.6-7) *1: For manual Transmission (MT) model — Vehicle overheat (P.6-10) Illustrated table of contents 0-Chapter 0.indd 13 0-13 2021/01/22 08:37:51 AM MEMO 0-14 Illustrated table of contents 0-Chapter 0.indd 14 2021/01/22 08:37:51 AM 1 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system Seats ....................................................................................................................... 1-2 Front seats ................................................................................................ 1-2 Rear seats (Double Cab models) .............................................. 1-5 Armrest (if equipped for Double Cab model) .................. 1-5 Head restraints (if equipped) ................................................................ 1-6 Adjustable head restraint components ............................. 1-6 Non-adjustable head restraint components.................. 1-6 Remove ....................................................................................................... 1-6 Install............................................................................................................. 1-7 Adjust ............................................................................................................ 1-7 Seat belts............................................................................................................. 1-8 Precautions on seat belt usage ................................................ 1-8 Child safety............................................................................................... 1-9 Pregnant women.............................................................................. 1-10 Injured persons .................................................................................. 1-10 Center mark on seat belts (if equipped).......................... 1-10 Three-point type seat belts ...................................................... 1-10 Two-point type seat belts (if equipped)........................... 1-11 Seat belt maintenance ................................................................. 1-12 Child restraints............................................................................................. 1-12 Precautions on child restraint usage................................. 1-12 Universal child restraints for front seat and rear seats (Double Cab models) ....................................................... 1-14 ISOFIX child restraint system (if equipped) ................... 1-18 Child restraint anchorage (if equipped)........................... 1-19 Child restraint installation using ISOFIX (if equipped)................................................................................................ 1-19 Child restraint installation using three-point type seat belt ................................................................................................... 1-21 Supplemental restraint system (SRS) ......................................... 1-25 1-Chapter 1.indd 1 Precautions on Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ............................................................................................................ 1-25 Supplemental air bag systems .............................................. 1-30 SRS air bag deployment conditions ................................... 1-31 Pre-tensioner seat belt system (if equipped) .............. 1-34 Repair and replacement procedure ................................... 1-34 2021/01/06 02:21:11 PM SEATS Manual seat adjustment (if equipped) WARNING: After adjusting a seat, gently shake the seat to confirm that the seat is locked securely. If the seat is not locked securely, it may move suddenly and could cause the loss of control of the vehicle. SSS0133A WARNING: y y Do not drive and/or ride in the vehicle with the seatback reclined. This can be dangerous. The shoulder belt will not be properly against the body. In an accident, you and your passengers could be thrown into the shoulder belt and receive neck or other serious injuries. You and your passengers could also slide under the lap belt and receive serious injuries. For the most effective protection while the vehicle is in motion, the seatback should be upright. Always sit well back in the seat and adjust the seat belt properly. (See “Seat belts” (P.1-8).) y Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle. They could unknowingly activate switches or controls. Unattended children could become involved in serious accidents. y To help avoid risk of injury or death through unintended operation of the vehicle and/or its systems, do not leave children, people who require the 1-2 assistance of others or pets unattended in your vehicle. Additionally, the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a warm day can quickly become high enough to cause a significant risk of injury or death to people and pets. CAUTION: When adjusting the seat positions, be sure not to contact any moving parts to avoid possible injuries and/or damages. FRONT SEATS WARNING: Do not adjust the driver's seat while driving so that full attention may be given to vehicle operation. Safety - seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-Chapter 1.indd 2 2021/01/06 02:21:11 PM JVR0392X Forward and backward: 1. Pull up the adjusting lever . 2. Slide the seat to the desired position. 3. Release the adjusting lever to lock the seat in position. Reclining bench seat (front bench seat models) Reclining: 1. Pull up the adjusting lever 2. Tilt the seatback to the desired position. . 3. Release the adjusting lever to lock the seatback in position. The reclining feature allows the adjustment of the seatback for occupants of different sizes to help obtain the proper seat belt fit. (See "Seat belts" (P.1-8).) The seatback may be reclined to allow occupants to rest when the vehicle is parked. JVR0417X The bench seat can be reclined to make it easier to remove the jacking tools from the storage area. To recline the seatback, pull the lever up . Seat lifter (if equipped): Pull up or push down the adjusting lever to adjust the seat height until the desired position is achieved. Safety - seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-Chapter 1.indd 3 1-3 2021/01/06 02:21:11 PM Power seat adjustment (if equipped) Operating tips: y The power seat motor has an auto-reset overload protection circuit. If the motor stops during the seat adjustment, wait 30 seconds, then reactivate the switch. y To avoid discharge of the battery, do not operate the power seats for a long period of time when the engine is not running. JVR0054X Forward and backward: Move forward or backward the adjusting switch to the desired position. Reclining: Move forward or backward the adjusting switch to the desired position. The reclining feature allows the adjustment of the seatback for occupants of different sizes to help obtain the proper seat belt fit. (See "Seat belts" (P.1-8).) The seatback may be reclined to allow occupants to rest when the vehicle is parked. WARNING: The seatback should not be reclined any more than needed for comfort. Seat belts are most effective when the passenger sits well back and straight up in the seat. If the seatback is reclined, the risk of sliding under the lap belt and being injured is increased. 1-4 JVR0055X Seat lifter: 1. Pull up or push down the adjusting switch to adjust the seat height until the desired position is achieved. 2. Tilt up or down the adjusting switch to adjust the front angle of the seat until the desired position is achieved. Safety - seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-Chapter 1.indd 4 2021/01/06 02:21:11 PM ARMREST (if equipped for Double Cab model) fold the rear seats in the following steps. 1. Lift up the seat cushion . 2. Secure the seat cushion with the strap . To remove the jack and tools, see "Preparing tools (P.6-2). Do not drive the vehicle with the rear seat folded. JVR0056X Lumbar support (if equipped): The lumbar support feature provides lower back support to the driver. Push each side of the adjusting switch and to adjust the seat lumbar area until the desired position is achieved. When returning the rear seat to the original position, be certain the seat belts and the buckles are positioned properly. The strap can be stored under the seat cushion using the hook-andloop fastener. WARNING: y Never allow anyone to ride on the rear seats when they are in the fold-up position. Use of this area by passengers without proper restraints could result in serious injury in an accident or sudden stop. y When folding or returning the rear seat, be careful not to squeeze your finger between the seat cushion and the body side. REAR SEATS (Double Cab models) Folding SIC4593 Pull the armrest forward until it is horizontal. JVR0427X The jack and tools are stored in the tool storage compartment located under the rear seat cushion. To access the tool storage compartment, Safety - seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-Chapter 1.indd 5 1-5 2021/01/06 02:21:12 PM HEAD RESTRAINTS (if equipped) WARNING: Head restraints supplement the other vehicle safety systems. They may provide additional protection against injury in certain rear end collisions. Adjustable head restraints must be adjusted properly, as specified in this section. Check the adjustment after someone else uses the seat. Do not attach anything to the head restraint stalks or remove the head restraint. Do not use the seat if the head restraint has been removed. If the head restraint was removed, reinstall and properly adjust the head restraint before an occupant uses the seating position. Failure to follow these instructions can reduce the effectiveness of the head restraint. This may increase the risk of serious injury or death in a collision. y Your vehicle is equipped with a head restraint that may be integrated, adjustable or non-adjustable. y Adjustable head restraints have multiple notches along the stalk to lock them in a desired adjustment position. y The non-adjustable head restraints have a single locking notch to secure them to the seat frame. y Proper Adjustment: y If the head restraint has been removed, ensure that it is reinstalled and locked in place before riding in that designated seating position. ADJUSTABLE HEAD RESTRAINT COMPONENTS JVR0203X SSS0992 1. Removable head restraint 2. Multiple notches 3. Lock knob 4. Stalks — For the adjustable type, align the head restraint so the center of your ear is approximately level with the center of the head restraint. — If your ear position is still higher than the recommended alignment, place the head restraint at the highest position. 1-6 NON-ADJUSTABLE HEAD RESTRAINT COMPONENTS 1. Removable head restraint 2. Single notch 3. Lock knob 4. Stalks REMOVE SSS1037 Use the following procedure to remove the head restraint. 1. Pull the head restraint up to the highest position. Safety - seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-Chapter 1.indd 6 2021/01/06 02:21:12 PM 2. Push and hold the lock knob. 3. Remove the head restraint from the seat. 4. Store the head restraint properly in a secure place so it is not loose in the vehicle. 5. Reinstall and properly adjust the head restraint before an occupant uses the seating position. ADJUST Raise INSTALL SSS0997 To raise the head restraint, pull it up. Adjust the head restraint so the center is level with the center of your ears. If your ear position is still higher than the recommended alignment, place the head restraint at the highest position. Make sure the head restraint is positioned from the stored position or any non-latch position so the lock knob is engaged in the notch before riding in that designated seating position. Lower SSS1038 1. Align the head restraint stalks with the holes in the seat. Make sure that the head restraint is facing the correct direction. The stalk with the notch must be installed in the hole with the lock knob . 2. Push and hold the lock knob and push the head restraint down. 3. Properly adjust the head restraint before an occupant uses the seating position. SSS1035 For adjustable head restraint JVR0259X For non-adjustable head restraint Make sure the head restraint is positioned from the stored position or any non-latch position so the lock knob is engaged in the notch before riding in that designated seating position. SSS1036 To lower, push and hold the lock knob and push the head restraint down. Make sure the head restraint is positioned so the lock knob is engaged in the notch before riding in that designated seating position. Safety - seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-Chapter 1.indd 7 1-7 2021/01/06 02:21:12 PM SEAT BELTS PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT USAGE If you are wearing the seat belt properly adjusted and sitting upright and well back in the seat, chances of being injured or killed in an accident and/or the severity of injury may be greatly reduced. NISSAN strongly encourages you and all of your passengers to buckle up every time you drive, even if your seating position includes the supplemental air bag systems. SSS0134A SSS0136A SSS0014 1-8 SSS0016 Safety - seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-Chapter 1.indd 8 2021/01/06 02:21:12 PM under your arm. Always route the shoulder belt over your shoulder and across your chest. The belt should be away from your face and neck, but not falling off your shoulder. Serious injury may occur if a seat belt is not worn properly. WARNING: y y y Seat belts are designed to bear upon the bony structure of the body, and should be worn low across the front of the pelvis or the pelvis, chest and shoulders, as applicable; wearing the lap section of the belt across the abdominal area must be avoided. Serious injury may occur if a seat belt is not worn properly. Position the lap belt as low and snug as possible around the hips, not the waist. A lap belt worn too high could increase the risk of internal injuries in an accident. y Do not allow more than one person to use the same seat belt. Each belt assembly must only be used by one occupant; it is dangerous to put a belt around a child being carried on the occupant’s lap. y Never carry more people in the vehicle than there are seat belts. y Never wear seat belts inside out. Belts should not be worn with straps twisted. Doing so may reduce their effectiveness. y Seat belts should be adjusted as firmly as possible, consistent with comfort, to provide the protection for which they have been designed. A slack belt will greatly reduce the protection afforded to the wearer. y Every person who drives or rides in this vehicle should use a seat belt at all times. Children should be properly restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) and, if appropriate, in a child restraint system. y y Do not put the belt behind your back or No modifications or additions should be made by the user which will either prevent the seat belt adjusting devices from operating to remove slack, or prevent the seat belt assembly from being adjusted to remove slack. Care should be taken to avoid contamination of the webbing with polishes, oils and chemicals, and particularly battery acid. Cleaning may safely be carried out using mild soap and water. The belt should be replaced if webbing becomes frayed, contaminated or damaged. y It is essential to replace the entire assembly after it has been worn in a severe impact even if damage to the assembly is not obvious. y All seat belt assemblies including retractors and attaching hardware should be inspected after any collision by a NISSAN dealer. NISSAN recommends that all seat belt assemblies in use during a collision be replaced unless the collision was minor and the belts show no damage and continue to operate properly. Seat belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and, when necessary, replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted. y Once the pre-tensioner seat belt (if equipped) has activated, it cannot be reused. It must be replaced together with the retractor. Contact a NISSAN dealer. y Removal and installation of the pre-tensioner seat belt system (if equipped) components should be done by a NISSAN dealer. CHILD SAFETY WARNING: y Infants and children need special protection. The vehicle’s seat belts may not fit them properly. The shoulder belt may come too close to the face or neck. The lap belt may not fit over their small hipbones. In an accident, an improperly fitted seat belt could cause serious or fatal injury. y Always use an appropriate child restraint system. Children need adults to help protect them. They need to be properly restrained. The proper restraint depends on the child’s size. Infants and small children SSS0099 NISSAN recommends that infants and small Safety - seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-Chapter 1.indd 9 1-9 2021/01/06 02:21:13 PM children be seated in a child restraint system. You should choose a child restraint system that fits your vehicle and the child, and always follow the manufacturer’s instructions for installation and use. Large children WARNING: y Never allow children to stand or kneel on any seats. y Never allow children in the luggage areas while the vehicle is moving. A child could be seriously injured in an accident or sudden stop. Children who are too large for a child restraint system should be seated and restrained by the seat belts that are provided. If the child’s seating position has a shoulder belt that fits close to the face or neck, the use of a booster seat (commercially available) may help overcome this. The booster seat should raise the child so that the shoulder belt is properly positioned across the top, middle portion of the shoulder and the lap belt is low on the hips. The booster seat should also fit the vehicle seat. Once the child has grown so that the shoulder belt is no longer on or near the face or neck of the child, use the shoulder belt without the booster seat. In addition, there are many types of child restraint systems available for larger children that should be used for maximum protection. 1-10 PREGNANT WOMEN THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELTS NISSAN recommends that pregnant women use seat belts. The seat belt should be worn snug, and always position the lap belt as low as possible around the hips, not the waist. Place the shoulder belt over your shoulder and across your chest. Never run the lap/shoulder belt over your abdominal area. Contact your doctor for specific recommendations. Fastening seat belts INJURED PERSONS NISSAN recommends that injured persons use seat belts. Contact your doctor for specific recommendations. CENTER MARK ON SEAT BELTS (if equipped) SSS0292 WARNING: Selecting correct set of seat belts SSS0703 The center seat belt buckle (and/or tongue, if equipped) is identified by the CENTER mark. The center seat belt tongue can be fastened only into the center seat belt buckle. The seatback should not be in a reclined position any more than needed for comfort. Seat belts are most effective when the passenger sits well back and straight up in the seat. 1. Adjust the seat. (See "Seats" (P.1-2).) 2. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractor and insert the tongue into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage. y The retractor is designed to lock during a sudden stop or on impact. A slow pulling motion permits the seat belt to move, and allows you some freedom of movement in the seat. y If the seat belt cannot be pulled from its fully retracted position, firmly pull the belt and release it. Then smoothly pull the belt out of the retractor. Safety - seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-Chapter 1.indd 10 2021/01/06 02:21:13 PM WARNING: y SSS0467 3. Position the lap belt portion low and snug on the hips as shown. 4. Pull the shoulder belt portion toward the retractor to take up extra slack. Be sure the shoulder belt is routed over your shoulder and is snug across your chest. Shoulder belt height adjustment (for front seats) The shoulder belt anchor height should be adjusted to the position best for you. Failure to do so may reduce the effectiveness of the entire restraint system and increase the chance or severity of injury in an accident. y The shoulder belt should rest on the middle of the shoulder. It must not rest against the neck. y Be sure that the seat belt is not twisted in any way. y Be sure that the shoulder belt anchor is secured by trying to move the shoulder belt anchor up and down after adjustment. check the operation by grasping the shoulder belt and pulling forward quickly. The retractor should lock and restrict further belt movement. If the retractor does not lock during this check, contact a NISSAN dealer immediately. TWO-POINT TYPE SEAT BELTS (if equipped) Fastening seat belts WARNING: Every person who drives or rides in this vehicle should use a seat belt at all times. To adjust, pull in the release button and move the shoulder belt anchor to the proper position , so that the belt passes over the center of the shoulder. The belt should be away from your face and neck, but not falling off your shoulder. Release the button to lock the shoulder belt anchor into position. Unfastening seat belts Push the button on the buckle. The seat belt automatically retracts. Checking seat belt operation SSS0448 1. Insert the tongue into the buckle marked CENTER until you hear and feel the latch engage. Seat belt retractors are designed to lock seat belt movement: SSS0351A y When the seat belt is pulled quickly from the retractor. y When the vehicle slows down rapidly. To increase your confidence in the seat belts, Safety - seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-Chapter 1.indd 11 1-11 2021/01/06 02:21:13 PM CHILD RESTRAINTS SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE Periodically check that the seat belt and all the metal components, such as buckles, tongues, retractors, flexible wires and anchors, work properly. If loose parts, deterioration, cuts or other damage on the seat belt webbing is found, the entire seat belt assembly should be replaced. SSS0541 2. Adjust the seat belt length. To shorten, hold the tongue and pull the upper belt as illustrated . To lengthen, hold the tongue and pull the under belt as illustrated . PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD RESTRAINT USAGE If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt guide of the seat belt anchors, the seat belts may retract slowly. Wipe the shoulder belt guide with a clean, dry cloth. To clean the seat belt webbing, apply a mild soap solution or any solution recommended for cleaning upholstery or carpet. Then wipe with a cloth and allow the seat belts to dry in the shade. Do not allow the seat belts to retract until they are completely dry. SSS0099 WARNING: y Infants and small children should never be carried on your lap. It is not possible for even the strongest adult to resist the forces of a severe accident. The child could be crushed between the adult and parts of the vehicle. Also, do not put the same seat belt around both your child and yourself. y Infants and children need special protection. The vehicle’s seat belts may not fit them properly. The shoulder belt may come too close to the face or neck. The lap belt may not fit over their small hip bones. In an accident, an improperly fitting seat belt could cause serious or fatal injury. y Infants and small children should always be placed in an appropriate child restraint while riding in the vehicle. Failure to use a child restraint can result in serious injury or death. SSS0450 3. Position the lap belt portion low and snug on the hips as shown. Unfastening seat belts Push the button on the buckle. 1-12 Safety - seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-Chapter 1.indd 12 2021/01/06 02:21:13 PM y y y y y y Child restraint systems specially designed for infants and small children are available from several manufacturers. When selecting any child restraint systems, place your child in the child restraint system and check the various adjustments to be sure that the child restraint system is compatible with your child. Always follow the manufacturer’s instructions for installation and use. NISSAN recommends that the child restraints be installed in the rear seat (Double Cab model). According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat. Follow all of the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions for installation and use. When purchasing a child restraint, be sure to select one which will fit your child and vehicle. It may not be possible to properly install some types of child restraint in your vehicle. The direction of the child restraint, either front-facing or rear-facing, depends on the type of the child restraint and the size of the child. Refer to the child restraint manufacturer's instructions for details. For a front-facing child restraint system, check to make sure the shoulder belt does not fit close to child’s face or neck. If it does, put the shoulder belt behind the child restraint system. If you must install a front-facing child restraint system in the front seat, see "Installation on front passenger's seat" (P.1-23). Never install a rear-facing child restraint on the front passenger's seat when the front passenger's air bag is available. Supplemental front-impact air bags inflate with great force. A rear-facing child restraint could be struck by the supplemental front-impact air bags in an accident and could seriously injure or kill your child. y Adjustable seatbacks should be positioned to ensure full contact between child restraint and seatback. y If the seat belt in the position where a child restraint is installed requires a locking device and if it is not used, injuries could result from a child restraint system tipping over during normal vehicle braking or cornering. y After attaching a child restraint, test it before you place the child in it. Push it from side to side and tug it forward to make sure that it is held securely in place. The child restraint system should not move more than 25 mm (1 in). If the restraint is not secure, tighten the belt as necessary, or install the restraint in another seat and test it again. y Check the child restraint system in your vehicle to be sure that it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat belt system. y If a child restraint system is not anchored properly, the risk of a child being injured in a collision or a sudden stop greatly increases. y Improper use or improper installation of a child restraint can increase the risk or severity of injury for both the child and other occupants of the vehicle and can lead to serious injury or death in an accident. y Always use an appropriate child restraint system. An improperly installed child restraint system could lead to serious injury or death in an accident. y When the child restraint is not in use, keep it secured with the ISOFIX child restraint system (if equipped) or a seat belt to prevent it from being thrown around in case of a sudden stop or accident. NISSAN recommends that infants and small children be seated in a child restraint system. You should choose a child restraint system that fits your vehicle and always follow the manufacturer’s instructions for installation and use. In addition, there are many types of child restraint systems available for larger children that should be used for maximum protection. CAUTION: Remember that a child restraint system left in a closed vehicle can become very hot. Check the seating surface and buckles before placing your child in a child restraint system. Safety - seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-Chapter 1.indd 13 1-13 2021/01/06 02:21:13 PM UNIVERSAL CHILD RESTRAINTS FOR FRONT SEAT AND REAR SEATS (Double Cab models) Kind of child seats (example): NOTE: Universal child restraints approved to UN Regulation NO. 44 (UN R44) or UN Regulation NO. 129 (UN R129) are clearly marked “Universal”. When selecting any child restraint, keep the following points in mind: y Choose a child restraint that complies with UN R44 or UN R129. y Place your child in the child restraint and check the various adjustments to be sure the child restraint is compatible with your child. Always follow all of the recommended procedures. y Check the child restraint in your vehicle to be sure it is compatible with vehicle’s seat belt system. y Refer to the tables later in this section for a list of the recommended fitment positions. Child safety seat categories 0 and 0+ Child safety seat categories 0+ and I JVR0371X JVR0372X Mass group of child seat Mass group Group 0 Group 0+ 1-14 Child's weight up to 10 kg up to 13 kg Group I 9 to 18 kg Group II Group III 15 to 25 kg 22 to 36 kg Child safety seat categories II and III JVR0373X Safety - seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-Chapter 1.indd 14 2021/01/06 02:21:13 PM Approved child restraint positions (without ISOFIX) The following restriction is applied when using child restraints varying by infants weight and installation position. Seating position Mass Group Front passenger seat Second row left seat Second row center Second row right seat seat 0 (<10 kg) X U U U 0+ (<13 kg) X U U U I (9-18 kg) X U U U II (15-25 kg) X UF UF UF III (22-36 kg) X UF UF UF If you install a child restraint system in the rear seat, remove the rear seat head restraint. U: Suitable for universal category child restraint system approved for this weight group. UF: Suitable for forward-facing universal category child restraint system approved for this weight group. X: Not suitable for child restraint system. Safety - seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-Chapter 1.indd 15 1-15 2021/01/06 02:21:14 PM Permissible options for fitting an ISOFIX child restraint The following restriction is applied when using child restraints varying by infants weight and installation position. Mass group Size class Fixture Seating position F ISO/L1 Front passenger seat X G ISO/L2 X X X X 0 (<10 kg) E ISO/R1 X IL* X IL* E ISO/R1 X IL* X IL* 0+ (<13kg) D ISO/R2 X IL* X IL* C ISO/R3 X IL* X IL* D ISO/R2 X IL* X IL* C ISO/R3 X IL* X IL* B ISO/F2 X IUF X IUF B1 ISO/F2X X IUF X IUF A ISO/F3 X IUF X IUF II (15 - 25 kg) - - X IL X IL II (22 - 36 kg) - - X IL X IL Carry-cot I (9 - 18 kg) Second row left seat X Second row center seat X Second row right seat X If you install a child restraint system in the rear seat, remove the rear seat head restraint. *: Move the front seat forward, so there is enough space for the child restraint system and the child's legs. IUF: Suitable for universal category forward facing child restraint system approved for this weight group. IL: Suitable for particular ISOFIX category child restraint system (CRS) given in the below list of vehicle list of child seat manufacturer. X: Not suitable for child restraint system. 1-16 Safety - seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-Chapter 1.indd 16 2021/01/06 02:21:14 PM List of recommended ISOFIX child restraints Weight group Facing position Name of CRS Fixture of CRS Category 0+ (<13 kg) Rear facing Britax Romer Baby Safe SHR II Plus ISOFIX Base ISOFIX and support leg R1 I (9 - 18 kg) Front facing Britax Romer Duo Plus ISOFIX and top tether F2X Permissible options for fitting an i-Size child restraint Seating position i-Size Child Restraint System Front passenger seat Second row left seat X i-U* Second row center Second row right seat seat X i-U* If you install a child restraint system in the rear seat, remove the rear seat head restraint. *: Move the front seat forward, so there is enough space for the child restraint system and the child's legs. i-U: Suitable for i-Size "universal" Child Restraint Systems forward and rearward facing. i-UF: Suitable for forward-facing i-Size "universal" Child Restraint Systems only. X: Seating position not suitable for i-Size "universal" Child Restraint Systems. Safety - seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-Chapter 1.indd 17 1-17 2021/01/06 02:21:14 PM Permissible options for i-Size booster fixture Largest suitable booster fixture (B2/B3) Front passenger seat Seating position Second row left Second row center Second row right seat seat seat - B3 - ISOFIX child restraint anchor attachments B3 If you install a child restraint system in the rear seat, remove the rear seat head restraint. ISOFIX CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM (if equipped) Anchor attachment ISOFIX lower anchor location ISOFIX label location WAB0129X Your vehicle is equipped with special anchor points that are used with ISOFIX child restraint systems. ISOFIX lower anchor location. The ISOFIX anchors are located as shown. A label is attached to the seatback to help you locate the ISOFIX anchors. ISOFIX lower anchor point locations The ISOFIX anchor points are provided to install child restraints in the rear outboard seating positions only. Do not attempt to install a child restraint in the rear seat center position using the ISOFIX anchors. 1-18 SSS0637 SSS0644 ISOFIX child restraints include two rigid attachments that can be connected to two anchors located in the seat. With this system, you do not have to use a vehicle seat belt to secure the child restraint. Check your child restraint for a label stating that it is compatible with the ISOFIX child restraints. This information may also be in the instructions provided by the child restraint manufacturer. ISOFIX child restraints generally require the use of a top tether strap or other anti-rotation devices such as support legs. When installing ISOFIX child restraints, carefully read and follow the instructions in this manual and those supplied with the child restraints. See "Child restraint installation using ISOFIX" (P.1-19). Safety - seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-Chapter 1.indd 18 2021/01/06 02:21:14 PM CHILD RESTRAINT ANCHORAGE (if equipped) Your vehicle is designed to accommodate a child restraint system on the rear seat. When installing a child restraint system, carefully read and follow the instructions in this manual and those supplied with the child restraint system. strap be attached, attach and tighten the top tether strap to the top tether anchor (loop). Refer to the child restraint instructions and the following steps. 3. WARNING: Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used for adult seat belts, harnesses or for attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle. Doing so could damage the child restraint anchorages. The child restraint will not be properly installed using the damaged anchorage, and a child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision. JVR0422X On the rear right outboard seating position 1. On the rear right outboard seating position: 1. Remove the head restraints of the rear right outboard seat and rear center seat. 2. Route the top tether strap through the right top tether anchor (loop) and under the center shoulder belt . 3. Attach the top tether strap to the top tether anchor (loop) at the rear center seating position. 2. Remove the head restraint of the rear left (or right) outboard seat and rear center seat. 2. Route the top tether strap through the center top tether anchor (loop) . 3. Attach the top tether strap to the left top tether anchor (loop) (or right top tether anchor (loop) through under the center shoulder belt ). When the top tether strap is properly tightened, the top tether anchor (loop) may bend. This is normal and will not damage the vehicle. CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING ISOFIX (if equipped) WARNING: y Attach ISOFIX child restraints only at the specified locations. For the ISOFIX lower anchor locations, see . If a child restraint is not secured properly, your child could be seriously injured or killed in an accident. y Do not install child restraints that require the use of a top tether strap to seating positions that do not have a top tether anchor. y Do not secure a child restraint in the center rear seating position using the ISOFIX lower anchors. The child restraint will not be secured properly. y Inspect the lower anchors by inserting your fingers into the lower anchor area and feeling to make sure there are no On the rear left outboard seating position: 1. The anchor points (loops) are located on the top of the rear seatback. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends that the top tether 1. Tighten the top tether according to the child restraint manufacturer's instructions. Anchorage location WAB0134X On the rear center seating position: Remove the head restraints of the rear left outboard seat and rear center seat. 2. Route the top tether strap through the left top tether anchor (loop) . 3. Attach the top tether strap to the top tether anchor (loop) at the rear center seating position. Safety - seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-Chapter 1.indd 19 1-19 2021/01/06 02:21:14 PM obstructions over the ISOFIX anchors, such as seat belt webbing or seat cushion material. y The child restraint will not be secured properly if the ISOFIX anchors are obstructed. Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used for adult seat belts, harnesses or for attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle. Doing so could damage the child restraint anchorages. The child restraint will not be properly installed using the damaged anchorage, and a child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision. 1. Position the child restraint on the seat 2. Secure the child restraint anchor attachments to the ISOFIX lower anchors . 3. The back of the child restraint should be secured against the vehicle seatback. Remove the head restraint to obtain the correct child restraint fit. (See "Head restraints" (P.1-6).) Store the removed head restraint in a secure place. Be sure to install the head restraint when the child restraint is removed. If the seating position does not have an adjustable head restraint and it is interfering with the proper child restraint fit, try another seating position or a different child restraint. point. (See "Child restraint anchorage" (P.1-19).) . 6. If the child restraint is equipped with other anti-rotation devices such as support legs, use them instead of the top tether strap following the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions. Installation on rear outboard seats Front-facing: Front-facing: Step 7 Front-facing: Step 4 Front-facing: Steps 1 and 2 1-20 4. Shorten the rigid attachment to have the child restraint firmly tightened; press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint with your knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback. 5. If the child restraint is equipped with a top tether strap, route the top tether strap and secure the tether strap to the tether anchor SSS0646A Be sure to follow the manufacturer’s instructions for the proper use of your child restraint. Follow these steps to install a front-facing child restraint on the rear outboard seats using ISOFIX: SSS0754A SSS0755A 7. Test the child restraint before you place the child in it . Push the child restraint from side to side and tug it forward to make sure that it is held securely in place. 8. Check to make sure that the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the child restraint is loose, repeat steps 3 through 7. Safety - seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-Chapter 1.indd 20 2021/01/06 02:21:15 PM downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint with your hand to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback. Rear-facing: Rear-facing: Steps 1 and 2 4. If the child restraint is equipped with a top tether strap, route the top tether strap and secure the tether strap to the tether anchor point. (See "Child restraint anchorage" (P.1-19).) 5. If the child restraint is equipped with other anti-rotation devices such as support legs, use them instead of the top tether strap following the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions. SSS0649A Be sure to follow the manufacturer’s instructions for the proper use of your child restraint. Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child restraint on the rear outboard seats using ISOFIX: 1. Position the child restraint on the seat 2. Secure the child restraint anchor attachments to the ISOFIX lower anchors . CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT Installation on rear seats (Double Cab models) Front-facing: Be sure to follow the manufacturer’s instructions for the proper use of your child restraint. Follow these steps to install a front-facing child restraint on the rear seats using three-point type seat belt without automatic locking mode: . Front-facing: Step 1 1. Rear-facing: Step 6 Rear-facing: Step 3 3. SSS0756A Shorten the rigid attachment to have the child restraint firmly tightened; press SSS0758A Position the child restraint on the seat SSS0757A 6. Test the child restraint before you place the child in it . Push the child restraint from side to side and tug it forward to make sure that it is held securely in place. 7. Check to make sure that the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the child restraint is loose, repeat steps 3 through 6. Front-facing: Step 2 SSS0493A Safety - seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-Chapter 1.indd 21 . 1-21 2021/01/06 02:21:15 PM 2. Route the seat belt tongue through the child restraint and insert it into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage. 3. To prevent slack in the seat belt webbing, it is necessary to secure the seat belt in place with locking devices attached to the child restraint. 5. Test the child restraint before you place the child in it . Push the child restraint from side to side and tug it forward to make sure that it is held securely in place. 6. Check to make sure that the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the child restraint is loose, repeat steps 3 through 5. Rear-facing: Be sure to follow the manufacturer’s instructions for the proper use of your child restraint. Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child restraint on the rear seats using three-point type seat belt without automatic locking mode: Front-facing: Step 4 4. Rear-facing: Step 2 2. Route the seat belt tongue through the child restraint and insert it into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage. 3. To prevent slack in the seat belt webbing, it is necessary to secure the seat belt in place with locking devices attached to the child restraint. SSS0647A Remove any additional slack from the seat belt; press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint with your knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while pulling up on the seat belt. Rear-facing: Step 1 1. SSS0759A Position the child restraint on the seat . Rear-facing: Step 4 4. Front-facing: Step 5 1-22 SSS0638A SSS0654A SSS0639A Remove any additional slack from the seat belt; press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint with your hand to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while pulling up on the seat belt. Safety - seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-Chapter 1.indd 22 2021/01/06 02:21:15 PM Installation on front passenger’s seat Rear-facing: Step 5 5. 6. SSS0658A Test the child restraint before you place the child in it . Push the child restraint from side to side and tug it forward to make sure that it is held securely in place. SSS0300A WARNING: Front-facing: y Never install a rear facing child restraint system on the front seat. Supplemental front-impact air bags inflate with great force. A rear-facing child restraint system could be struck by the supplemental front-impact air bags in an accident and could seriously injure or kill your child. y NISSAN recommends that a child restraint be installed on the rear seat (Double Cab models). However, subject to local regulations, if you must install a front facing child restraint system on the front passenger’s seat, move the passenger’s seat to the rearmost position. y Child restraints for infants must be used in the rear-facing direction and therefore must not be used on the front seat. y Failure to use the seat belts will result in the child restraint system not being properly secured. It could tip over or otherwise be unsecured and cause injury to the child in a sudden stop or collision. Check to make sure that the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the child restraint is loose, repeat steps 3 through 5. Be sure to follow the manufacturer’s instructions for the proper use of your child restraint. Follow these steps to install a front-facing child restraint on the front passenger’s seat using three-point type seat belt without automatic locking mode: 1. Move the seat to the rearmost position Front-facing: Steps 1 and 2 1-Chapter 1.indd 23 SSS0627 2. Adjust or remove the head restraint 3. Position the child restraint in the seat. Safety - seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system . . 1-23 2021/01/06 02:21:15 PM Front-facing: Step 4 SSS0360C 4. Route the seat belt tongue through the child restraint and insert it into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage. 5. To prevent slack in the seat belt webbing, it is necessary to secure the seat belt in place with locking devices attached to the child restraint. Front-facing: Step 6 6. Front-facing: Step 7 SSS0302G 7. Test the child restraint before you place the child in it . Push the child restraint from side to side and tug it forward to make sure that it is held securely in place. 8. Check to make sure that the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the child restraint is loose, repeat steps 5 through 7. SSS0647B Remove any additional slack from the seat belt; press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint with your knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while pulling up on the seat belt. 1-24 Safety - seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-Chapter 1.indd 24 2021/01/06 02:21:16 PM SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) PRECAUTIONS ON SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) Supplemental curtain side-impact air bag system (if equipped) This Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) section contains important information concerning the driver's and passenger's supplemental front-impact air bags, supplemental driver's knee air bag (if equipped), supplemental side-impact air bags (if equipped), supplemental curtain side-impact air bags (if equipped) and pre-tensioner seat belts (if equipped). This system can help cushion the impact force to the head of the driver and passengers in front seating positions and rear outboard seating positions (if equipped) in certain side-impact collisions. The supplemental curtain side-impact air bag is designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted. Supplemental front-impact air bag system This system can help cushion the impact force to the head and chest area of the driver and/or front passenger in certain frontal collisions. The supplemental front-impact air bag is designed to inflate on the front where the vehicle is impacted. Supplemental driver's knee air bag system (if equipped) This system can help cushion the impact force to the knee area of the driver in certain frontal collisions. The supplemental driver's knee air bag is designed to inflate on the front where the vehicle is impacted. Supplemental side-impact air bag system (if equipped) This system can help cushion the impact force to the chest and pelvis area of the driver and front passenger in certain side-impact collisions. The supplemental side-impact air bag is designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted. The SRS is designed to supplement the accident protection provided by the driver’s and passenger’s seat belts and is not designed to substitute for them. The SRS can help save lives and reduce serious injuries. However, inflating air bags may cause abrasions or other injuries. Air bags do not provide protection to the lower body. Seat belts should always be correctly worn and the occupants should always be seated a suitable distance away from the steering wheel, instrument panel and door finishers. (See "Seat belts" (P.1-8).) The air bags inflate quickly in order to help protect the occupants. The force of the air bags inflating can increase the risk of injury if the occupants are too close to, or are against, the air bag modules during inflation. The air bags will deflate quickly after deployment. The SRS operates only when the ignition switch is in the “ON” position. When the ignition switch is in the “ON” position, the SRS air bag warning light illuminates for about 7 seconds and then turns off. This indicates that the SRS is operational. (See "Warning lights, indicator lights and audible reminders" (P.2-12).) Safety - seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-Chapter 1.indd 25 1-25 2021/01/06 02:21:16 PM WARNING: y y The supplemental front air bags ordinarily will not inflate in the event of a side impact, rear impact, rollover, or lower severity frontal collision. Always wear your seat belts to help reduce the risk or severity of injury in various kinds of accidents. The seat belts and the supplemental front-impact air bags are most effective when you are sitting well back and upright in the seat. The front-impact air bags inflate with great force. If you and your passengers are unrestrained, leaning forward, sitting sideways, or out of position 1-26 SSS0131A SSS0006 SSS0132A SSS0007 in any way, you and your passengers are at greater risk of injury or death in an accident. You and your passengers may also receive serious or fatal injuries from the supplemental front-impact air bag if you are up against it when it inflates. Always sit back against the seatback and as far away as practical from the steering wheel or instrument panel. Always use the seat belts. y Keep hands on the outside of the steering wheel. Placing them inside the steering wheel rim could increase the risk of injury if the supplemental front air bag inflates. SSS0008 Safety - seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-Chapter 1.indd 26 2021/01/06 02:21:16 PM WARNING: SSS0009 y Never let children ride unrestrained or extend their hands or face out of the window. Do not attempt to hold them in your lap or arms. Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the illustrations. y Children may be severely injured or killed when the air bags inflate if they are not properly restrained. y Never install a rear-facing child restraint system in the front seat. An inflating supplemental front-impact air bag could seriously injure or kill your child. (See "Child restraints" (P.1-12).) SSS0140 SSS0099 SSS0159 SSS0059A SSS0100 SSS0162 Safety - seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-Chapter 1.indd 27 1-27 2021/01/06 02:21:16 PM Be especially careful with children, who should always be properly restrained. The warning label is located on the surface of the driver’s and/or passenger’s sun visor. y Do not use seat covers on the front seatbacks. They may interfere with the supplemental side-impact air bag inflations. The warning label (if equipped) is located on the side of the passenger’s side instrument panel. y Do not attach the key with heavy objects, hard objects or objects with sharp edges. This may cause injury if the supplemental knee air bag inflates. The label(s) warn you not to fit a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat as such a restraint system used in this position could cause serious injury to the infant in case of air bag deployment during a collision. WARNING: y y y y The supplemental side-impact air bags (if equipped) and supplemental curtain side-impact air bags (if equipped) ordinarily will not inflate in the event of a front impact, rear impact, rollover, or lower severity side collision. Always wear the seat belts to help reduce the risk or severity of injury in accidents. The seat belts and the supplemental side-impact air bags and supplemental curtain side-impact air bags are most effective when you are sitting well back and upright in the seat. The supplemental side-impact air bags and supplemental curtain side-impact air bags inflate with great force. If you and your passengers are unrestrained, leaning forward, sitting sideways, or out of position in any way, you and your passengers are at greater risk of injury or death in an accident. Do not allow anyone to place their hands, legs or face near the supplemental side-impact air bags and supplemental curtain side-impact air bags located on the sides of the seatback of the front seats or near the side roof rails. Do not allow anyone sitting in the front seats or rear outboard seats to extend their hands out of the windows or lean against the doors. Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the illustrations. When sitting in the rear seats, do not hold onto the seatback of the front seats. If the supplemental side-impact air bags and supplemental curtain side-impact air bags inflate, you may be seriously injured. 1-28 Pre-tensioner seat belt system (if equipped) Type A: The pre-tensioner seat belt system may activate with the supplemental air bag system in certain types of collisions. Working with the front seat belt retractors and anchors, it helps tighten the seat belt the instant the vehicle becomes involved in certain types of collisions, helping to restrain front seat occupants. (See "Pre-tensioner seat belt system" (P.1-34).) Air bag warning labels j Air bag warning label (sample) The label model. JVR0260X design varies depending on the The label warns: “Extreme Hazard! Do not use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an airbag in front of it!” Label location SSS0603 Warning labels about the supplemental front-impact air bag system are placed in the vehicle as shown in the illustration. Safety - seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-Chapter 1.indd 28 2021/01/06 02:21:17 PM SRS air bag warning light Type B: j Air bag warning label JVR0243X The label warns: “NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur.” In vehicles equipped with a front-impact passenger air bag system, use a rear-facing child restraint system only on the rear seats (Double Cab models). When installing a child restraint system in your vehicle, always follow the child restraint system manufacturer’s instructions for installation. For additional information, see "Child restraints" (P.1-12). SPA1097 The supplemental air bag warning light, displaying in the instrument panel, monitors the circuits for the air bag systems, pre-tensioner seat belt system (if equipped) and all related wiring. When the ignition switch is in the “ON” position, the SRS air bag warning light illuminates for about 7 seconds and then turns off. This indicates that the SRS air bag systems are operational. If any of the following conditions occur, the air bag and/or pre-tensioner seat belt system need servicing: y The SRS air bag warning light remains on after approximately 7 seconds. y The SRS air bag warning light flashes intermittently. y The SRS air bag warning light does not illuminate at all. Under these conditions, the air bag and/or pre-tensioner seat belt system may not operate properly. They must be checked and repaired. Contact a NISSAN dealer immediately. Safety - seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-Chapter 1.indd 29 1-29 2021/01/06 02:21:17 PM SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS WARNING: y Do not place any objects on the steering wheel pad, on the instrument panel, under the steering column and near the front door finishers and the front seats. Do not place any objects between any occupants and the steering wheel pad, on the instrument panel, and near the front door finishers and the front seats. Such objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause injury if a supplemental air bag inflates. y Immediately after inflation, several supplemental air bag system components will be hot. Do not touch them: you may severely burn yourself. y No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the supplemental air bag systems. This is to prevent accidental inflation of the supplemental air bags or damage to the supplemental air bag systems. y Do not make unauthorized changes to your vehicle’s electrical system, suspension system, front end structure, and side panels. This could affect proper operation of the supplemental air bag systems. y Tampering with the supplemental air bag systems may result in serious personal injury. Tampering includes changes to the steering wheel and the instrument panel by placing materials over the steering wheel pad and above, around or on the instrument panel or by installing additional trim materials around the supplemental air bag systems. WAB0133X 1. Crash zone sensor 6. Air bag Control Unit (ACU) 2. Supplemental driver's knee air bag module (if equipped) 7. Satellite sensors (if equipped) 8. Seat belt equipped) Supplemental side-impact air bag modules (if equipped) pre-tensioner retractors (if 3. Supplemental front air bag modules 4. Supplemental curtain side-impact air bag inflators (if equipped) 9. 5. Supplemental curtain side-impact air bag modules (if equipped) 10. Door pressure sensors (if equipped for both driver's and passenger's side doors) 1-30 Safety - seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-Chapter 1.indd 30 2021/01/06 02:21:17 PM y y Work on and around the supplemental air bag systems should be done by a NISSAN dealer. The SRS wiring should not be modified or disconnected. Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the supplemental air bag systems. The SRS wiring harness connectors are yellow for easy identification. When the air bags inflate, a fairly loud noise may be heard, followed by the release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation and choking. Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly. Supplemental front-impact air bag system Supplemental driver's knee air bag system (if equipped) supplemental side-impact air bag system operation. The supplemental driver's knee air bag is located under the steering column. Supplemental curtain side-impact air bag system (if equipped) The supplemental driver's knee air bag system is designed to inflate in higher severity frontal collisions, although it may inflate if the forces in another type of collision are similar to those of a higher severity impact. It may not inflate in certain collisions. Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an indication of proper supplemental driver's knee air bag system operation. Supplemental side-impact air bag system (if equipped) The supplemental curtain side-impact air bag system is designed to inflate in higher severity side collisions, although it may inflate if the forces in another type of collision are similar to those of a higher severity side impact. It may not inflate in certain side collisions. Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an indication of proper supplemental curtain side-impact air bag system operation. SRS AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT CONDITIONS The SRS air bags activate in the event of a front or side impact in which the vehicle occupants may be severely injured even if they are wearing the seat belts properly. The driver’s supplemental front-impact air bag is located at the center of the steering wheel. The passenger’s supplemental front-impact air bag is located at the instrument panel above the glove box. The supplemental front-impact air bag system is designed to inflate in higher severity frontal collisions, although it may inflate if the forces in another type of collision are similar to those of a higher severity frontal impact. It may not inflate in certain frontal collisions. Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an indication of proper supplemental front-impact air bag system operation. The supplemental curtain side-impact air bag is located at the roof rails. SSS0978 The supplemental side-impact air bag is located at the outside of the front seats’ seatbacks. The supplemental side-impact air bag system is designed to inflate in higher severity side collisions, although it may inflate if the forces in another type of collision are similar to those of a higher severity side impact. It may not inflate in certain side collisions. Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an indication of proper They may not activate when the crash energy is absorbed and/or distributed by the vehicle body. Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an indication of proper SRS air bag system operation. When the SRS air bag will deploy Supplemental front-impact air bags and driver's knee air bag (if equipped): The supplemental front-impact air bag and driver's knee air bag (if equipped) systems are designed to inflate in higher severity frontal collisions. Some examples are shown in the following illustrations. Safety - seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-Chapter 1.indd 31 1-31 2021/01/06 02:21:17 PM JVR0161X (supplemental side-impact air bag system) JVR0423X The supplemental front-impact air bag and driver's knee air bag (if equipped) systems will deploy in the event of an impact which exceeds a 25 km/h (16 MPH) frontal collision with a solid wall that does not move or deform. The supplemental front-impact air bag and driver's knee air bag (if equipped) systems may also deploy when the vehicle receives severe damage to the undercarriage. JVR0162X (supplemental curtain side-impact air bag system) JVR0424X y Hitting a curb, pavement edge or hard surface at high speed y Falling into a deep hole or ditch y Landing hard on the ground after jumping Supplemental side-impact and curtain sideimpact air bags (if equipped): The supplemental side-impact and curtain side-impact air bag systems are designed to inflate in higher severity side collisions. Some examples are shown in the following illustrations. 1-32 y The supplemental side-impact and curtain side-impact air bags will deploy in the event of a side impact with a normal passenger vehicle that exceeds at a speed of 25 km/h (16 MPH). When the SRS air bag is unlikely to deploy The SRS air bags may not deploy in cases where the impact is not forceful enough to inflate the SRS air bags. For example, if the vehicle strikes an object, such as a parked vehicle or sign pole, which can move or deform on impact, the SRS air bags are unlikely to deploy. Safety - seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-Chapter 1.indd 32 2021/01/06 02:21:17 PM Supplemental front-impact air bags and driver's knee air bag (if equipped): Supplemental side-impact and curtain sideimpact air bags (if equipped): JVR0163X JVR0154X y y Striking a vehicle of the same class that is parked Crashing into a solid utility pole JVR0156X y A collision from the side at an angle y A side impact with a two-wheeled vehicle y A frontal offset impact to the guard rails y A collision with a pole When the SRS air bag will not deploy Once the SRS air bag has inflated, the air bag module will not function again if your vehicle collides with another vehicle or an object. Other examples where the SRS air bag will not deploy are shown in the following illustrations. Supplemental front-impact air bags and driver's knee air bag (if equipped): JVR0157X JVR0155X y Running under the tailgate of a truck y A frontal offset impact to the guard rails y A collision from the side impacting the vehicle engine room (truck box area) y Vehicle rollover JVR0159X y A collision from the side or rear Safety - seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-Chapter 1.indd 33 1-33 2021/01/06 02:21:17 PM y Vehicle rollover pre-tensioner seat belt system. Supplemental side-impact and curtain sideimpact air bags (if equipped): y y JVR0160X y A frontal collision with a parked or moving vehicle y A rear collision PRE-TENSIONER SEAT BELT SYSTEM (if equipped) WARNING: y The pre-tensioner seat belt cannot be reused after activation. It must be replaced together with the retractor and buckle as a unit. y If the vehicle becomes involved in a collision but the pre-tensioner is not activated, be sure to have the pre-tensioner system checked and, if necessary, replaced by a NISSAN dealer. y No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the pre-tensioner seat belt system. This is to prevent accidental activation of the pre-tensioner seat belt or damage to the 1-34 Work around or on the pre-tensioner seat belt system should be done by a NISSAN dealer. The SRS wiring should not be modified or disconnected. Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the pre-tensioner seat belt system. If you need to dispose of the pre-tensioner seat belt system, or scrap the vehicle, contact a NISSAN dealer. Correct pre-tensioner disposal procedures are set forth in the appropriate NISSAN Service Manual. Incorrect disposal procedures could cause personal injury. The pre-tensioner is encased with the front seat belt’s retractor and anchor. These seat belts are used the same as conventional seat belts. When the pre-tensioner seat belt activates, a fairly loud noise may be heard, followed by the release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation and choking. Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly. y The air bag systems should be inspected by a NISSAN dealer if there is any damage to the vehicle. y If you need to dispose of the SRS or scrap the vehicle, contact a NISSAN dealer. Correct disposal procedures are set forth in the appropriate NISSAN Service Manual. Incorrect disposal procedures could cause personal injury. The supplemental front-impact air bags and pre-tensioner seat belts (if equipped) are designed to activate on a one-time-only basis. As a reminder, unless the SRS air bag warning light is damaged, the SRS air bag warning light remains illuminated after inflation has occurred. The repair and replacement of the SRS should be done only by a NISSAN dealer. When maintenance work is required on the vehicle, information about the air bags, pre-tensioner seat belts and related parts should be pointed out to the person performing the maintenance. The ignition switch should always be in the “LOCK” position when working under the hood or inside the vehicle. REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE WARNING: y Once the supplemental front-impact air bags have been inflated, the air bag modules will not function and must be replaced. The air bag modules must be replaced by a NISSAN dealer. The inflated air bag modules cannot be repaired. Safety - seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-Chapter 1.indd 34 2021/01/06 02:21:18 PM 2 Instruments and controls Cockpit .................................................................................................................. 2-3 Left-Hand drive (LHD) model ...................................................... 2-3 Right-Hand drive (RHD) model................................................... 2-4 Instrument panel .......................................................................................... 2-5 Left-Hand drive (LHD) model ...................................................... 2-5 Right-Hand drive (RHD) model................................................... 2-6 Meters and gauges ...................................................................................... 2-7 Speedometer and odometer...................................................... 2-9 Tachometer.............................................................................................. 2-9 Engine coolant temperature gauge...................................... 2-9 Fuel gauge ............................................................................................. 2-10 Instrument brightness control ............................................... 2-11 Warning lights, indicator lights and audible reminders...................................................................................... 2-12 Checking lights................................................................................... 2-13 Warning lights .................................................................................... 2-13 Indicator lights ................................................................................. 2-16 Audible reminders ............................................................................ 2-17 Vehicle information display (models with color display) ................................................................................................. 2-18 How to use the vehicle information display ................. 2-18 Startup display ................................................................................... 2-19 Settings ................................................................................................... 2-19 Vehicle information display warnings and indicators ..................................................................................... 2-22 Trip computer...................................................................................... 2-27 Clock and outside air temperature (if equipped) ..... 2-29 Vehicle information display (models without color display) ................................................................................................. 2-29 2-Chapter 2.indd 1 Outside air temperature (if equipped) .............................. 2-30 Trip computer...................................................................................... 2-30 Oil control system (if equipped) ............................................. 2-30 Headlight and turn signal switch................................................... 2-32 Headlight switch ............................................................................... 2-32 Battery saver system..................................................................... 2-35 Turn signal switch ............................................................................ 2-35 Fog light switch (if equipped)............................................................ 2-36 Front fog lights (if equipped).................................................... 2-36 Wiper and washer switch..................................................................... 2-36 Windshield wiper and washer switch................................ 2-36 Rain-sensing auto wiper system (if equipped)........... 2-37 Defogger switch (if equipped) .......................................................... 2-38 Horn...................................................................................................................... 2-39 Windows............................................................................................................ 2-39 Manual windows (if equipped)................................................ 2-39 Power windows (if equipped) .................................................. 2-39 Auto slide back windows system (if equipped).......... 2-40 Power outlets ................................................................................................ 2-41 USB (Universal Serial Bus) charging connector (if equipped) .......................................................................................... 2-42 Storage .............................................................................................................. 2-43 Glove box ................................................................................................ 2-43 Console box (if equipped)........................................................... 2-43 Sunglasses holder (if equipped) ............................................ 2-43 Cup holders........................................................................................... 2-43 Roof rack (if equipped).................................................................. 2-44 Card holder (if equipped) ............................................................ 2-45 Sun visors......................................................................................................... 2-45 2021/01/22 11:46:57 AM Interior lights ................................................................................................. 2-45 Interior light switch (if equipped) ......................................... 2-45 Console light (if equipped) ......................................................... 2-46 Map lights ............................................................................................... 2-46 Map light control switch (if equipped) .............................. 2-46 Room light (if equipped) .............................................................. 2-47 Vanity mirror lights (if equipped) .......................................... 2-47 Battery saver system..................................................................... 2-47 2-Chapter 2.indd 2 2021/01/22 11:46:57 AM COCKPIT LEFT-HAND DRIVE (LHD) MODEL switch* 7. Wiper and washer switch 8. Steering-wheel-mounted controls* (right side) — Cruise control system* — Hands-Free Phone System switch* — Voice recognition system switch* 9. Shift lever — Automatic Transmission (AT) — Manual Transmission (MT) 10. Parking sensor (sonar) system off switch* 11. Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch* 12. Auto slide back window system* 13. Tilting steering wheel lever* *: if equipped WAA0233X 1. Instrument brightness control switch (models with color display) 2. TRIP/RESET switch for twin trip odometer (models with color display) 5. 3. Instrument brightness control switch/Trip computer mode switch (models without color display) TRIP/RESET switch for twin trip odometer/ Trip computer mode switch (models without color display) 6. Steering-wheel-mounted controls* (left side) 4. Headlight, fog light and turn signal switch — Headlight — Turn signal — Fog light* — Audio control steering switch* — Vehicle information display control Instruments and controls 2-Chapter 2.indd 3 2-3 2021/01/22 11:46:59 AM RIGHT-HAND DRIVE (RHD) MODEL — Headlight ) — Turn signal — Fog light* 7. TRIP/RESET switch for twin trip odometer / Trip computer mode switch (models without color display) 8. TRIP/RESET switch for twin trip odometer (models with color display) 9. Instrument brightness control switch (models with color display) 10. Cup holders (for bench seat models) 11. Tilting steering wheel lever* 12. Auto slide back window system* 13. Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch* 14. Parking sensor (sonar) system off switch* *: if equipped WAA0234X 1. Shift lever 3. Wiper and washer switch — Automatic Transmission (AT) 4. Steering-wheel-mounted controls* (right side) — Manual Transmission (MT) 2. — Cruise control system* Steering-wheel-mounted controls* (left side) — Hands-Free Phone System switch* — Audio control steering switch* — Vehicle information display control switch* 2-4 Instruments and controls 2-Chapter 2.indd 4 — Voice recognition system switch* 5. Instrument brightness control switch /Trip computer mode switch (models without color display 6. Headlight, fog light and turn signal switch 2021/01/22 11:47:00 AM INSTRUMENT PANEL LEFT-HAND DRIVE (LHD) MODEL Key system) 10. Power outlet 11. Parking brake — Operation — Check 12. Hill descent control switch* 13. Differential lock mode switch* 14. USB (Universal Serial Bus) connection port / Auxiliary (AUX) input jack 15. Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) mode switch* 16. Heater and air conditioner control 17. Glove box — Fuse box 18. Side ventilator : 4WD models : 2WD models *: if equipped WAA0235X 1. Meters and gauges — Vehicle information display 6. Front passenger's supplemental front impact air bag 7. Hood release handle 2. Push-button ignition switch (models with intelligent Key system) 3. Audio system* — Horn — Rear view monitor* — Driver's supplemental front-impact air bag 8. — Intelligent Around View Monitor* 4. Hazard indicator flasher switch 5. Centre ventilator Steering wheel — Power steering 9. Ignition switch (models without intelligent Instruments and controls 2-Chapter 2.indd 5 2-5 2021/01/22 11:47:02 AM RIGHT-HAND DRIVE (RHD) MODEL 13. Parking brake — Operation — Check 14. USB (Universal Serial Bus) connection port* /Auxiliary (AUX) input jack* 15. Four-wheel Drive (4WD) mode switch* ) 16. Steering wheel — Horn — Driver's supplemental front-impact air bag — Power steering 17. Hood release handle 18. Ignition switch (models without intelligent Key system) : 4WD models : 2WD models : Except for front bench seat models : For front bench seat models *: if equipped WAA0236X 1. Front passenger's supplemental frontimpact air bag 6. 2. Centre ventilator 3. Hazard indicator flasher switch 7. Side ventilator 4. Audio system* or Navigation system* 8. Glove box — Rear view monitor* — Intelligent Around View Monitor* 5. Push-button ignition switch (models with intelligent Key system) 2-6 Meters and gauges — Vehicle information display — Fuse box 9. Heater* and air conditioner control 10. Power outlet 11. Hill descent control switch* 12. Differential lock mode switch* Instruments and controls 2-Chapter 2.indd 6 2021/01/22 11:47:04 AM METERS AND GAUGES Model with color display WAA0208X 1. Tachometer 4. Speedometer 2. Warning/Indicator lights 5. Engine coolant temperature gauge 3. Vehicle information display 6. Fuel gauge — Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) mode indicator* *: if equipped — Odometer/twin trip odometer The needle indicators may move slightly after the ignition switch is placed in the "OFF" position. This is not a malfunction. — Trip computer — Instrument brightness control — Automatic Transmission (AT) position indicator (AT model) Instruments and controls 2-Chapter 2.indd 7 2-7 2021/01/22 11:47:07 AM Model without color display WAA0237X 1. Tachometer — Instrument brightness control 2. Warning/Indicator lights 3. Vehicle information display — Automatic Transmission (AT) position indicator (AT model) — Engine coolant temperature gauge — Fuel gauge — Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) mode indicator* — Oil control system* — Odometer/twin trip odometer 4. Speedometer *: if equipped The needle indicators may move slightly after the ignition switch is placed in the "OFF" position. This is not a malfunction. — Trip computer 2-8 Instruments and controls 2-Chapter 2.indd 8 2021/01/22 11:47:09 AM SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER individual trips. Speedometer Changing display: TRIP A g TRIP B g Trip computer mode g TRIP A Push the TRIP RESET switch (located on the instrument panel) to change the display as follows: For trip computer information, see "Trip computer (P.2-30). Resetting trip odometer: TRIP A g TRIP B g ODO g TRIP A Push the trip odometer reset switch for approximately 1 second to reset the trip odometer to zero. Resetting twin trip odometer: Push the TRIP RESET switch for more than 1 second to reset the trip odometer to zero. TACHOMETER Odometer (models without color display) JVI1107X The speedometer indicates the vehicle speed. Odometer (models with color display) JVI0278X JVI1233X Odometer/twin trip odometer: WAC0500X Odometer/twin trip odometer: The odometer/twin trip odometer is displayed when the ignition switch is in the “ON” position. The odometer displays the total distance the vehicle has been driven. The odometer and twin trip odometer are displayed below the vehicle information display when the ignition switch is in the “ON” position. The twin trip odometer of individual trips. The odometer records the total distance the vehicle has been driven. Push the trip odometer reset switch change the display as follows: The twin trip odometer records the distance of displays the distance The tachometer indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute (rpm). Do not rev the engine into the red zone . The red zone varies with models. ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE CAUTION: y If the gauge indicates the engine coolant temperature is near the hot (H) end of the normal range, reduce vehicle speed to decrease the temperature. y If the gauge is over the normal range, stop Changing trip odometer display: to Instruments and controls 2-Chapter 2.indd 9 2-9 2021/01/22 11:47:09 AM the vehicle as soon as safely possible and let the engine idle. y Models without color display The fuel gauge indicates the approximate fuel level in the tank when the ignition switch is in the “ON” position. If the engine is overheated, continued operation of the vehicle may seriously damage the engine. (See "If your vehicle overheats" (P.6-10) for immediate action required.) The gauge may move slightly during braking, turning, accelerating, or going up and down hills due to movement of fuel in the tank. The low fuel warning appears on the vehicle information display when the fuel level in the tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is convenient, preferably before the gauge reads the empty (0) position. Models with color display JVI1234X The engine coolant temperature gauge cates the engine coolant temperature. indi- The engine coolant temperature is normal when the gauge is within the zone shown in the illustration. WAC0645X The engine coolant temperature gauge indicates the engine coolant temperature. The engine coolant temperature is normal when the gauge needle points within the zone shown in the illustration. The engine coolant temperature will vary with the outside air temperature and driving conditions. The arrow, , indicates that the fuel-filler lid is located on the left side of the vehicle. CAUTION: Refuel before the gauge reads the empty (0) position. There is a small reserve of fuel in the tank when the fuel gauge reads the empty (0) position. Models without color display FUEL GAUGE Models with color display The engine coolant temperature will vary with the outside air temperature and driving conditions. JVI1235X JVI0602X 2-10 The fuel gauge indicates the approximate fuel level in the tank when the ignition switch is in the “ON” position. The gauge may move slightly during braking, Instruments and controls 2-Chapter 2.indd 10 2021/01/22 11:47:09 AM Models without color display turning, accelerating, or going up and down hills due to movement of fuel in the tank. The low fuel warning light illuminates when the fuel level in the tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is convenient, preferably before the gauge reads 0. The arrow, , indicates that the fuel-filler lid is located on the left side of the vehicle. CAUTION: Refuel before the gauge reads 0 (empty). There is a small reserve of fuel in the tank when the fuel gauge reads 0 (empty). INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESS CONTROL Models with color display WAC0501X The instrument brightness control switch can be operated when the ignition switch is in the “ON” position. When the switch is operated, the vehicle information display switches to the brightness adjustment mode. Push the + side of the switch to brighten the meter panel lights. The bar moves to the right side. Push the - side of the switch to dim the lights. The bar moves to the left side. The vehicle information display returns to the normal display when the instrument brightness control switch is not operated for more than 5 seconds. JVI1236X The instrument brightness control operates when the ignition switch is in the “ON” position and the headlight switch is in either the or position. Turn the instrument brightness control switch to adjust the brightness of the meter. The brightness indicator will be shown briefly in the vehicle information display when the control is turned. When the brightness level reaches the maximum or minimum, a beep will sound. JVI1042X Instruments and controls 2-Chapter 2.indd 11 2-11 2021/01/22 11:47:11 AM WARNING LIGHTS, INDICATOR LIGHTS AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning light* Automatic Transmission (AT) check warning light (AT model) Automatic Transmission (AT) oil temperature warning light (AT model) Automatic Transmission (AT) park warning light (AT model) Brake warning light High beam indicator light Master warning light* Hill descent control system on indicator light* Seat belt warning light* Malfunction indicator light (MIL) Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) air bag warning light Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) warning light* Security indicator light* Small light indicator light* Charge warning light Water-in-fuel-filter warning light Turn signals/hazard indicator lights Door open warning light* Differential lock indicator light* Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off indicator light* Engine oil pressure warning light Front fog lights indicator light* Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) warning light (4WD model) Intelligent Emergency Braking system warning light* 2-12 Low fuel warning light* *: if equipped Glow plug indicator light High beam assist indicator light* Instruments and controls 2-Chapter 2.indd 12 2021/01/22 11:47:11 AM CHECKING LIGHTS With all doors closed, apply the parking brake, fasten the seat belts and place the ignition switch in the "ON" position without starting the engine. The following lights (if equipped) will come on: , , , , , . The following lights (if equipped) will come on briefly and then go off: , (YD25DDTi engine model), (YD25DDTi engine model) , , , , , . If any light does not come on or operates in a way other than described, it may indicate a burned-out bulb and/or a system malfunction. Have the system checked, and if necessary repaired, by a NISSAN dealer promptly. Models with color display: Some indicators and warnings are also displayed on the vehicle information display between the speedometer and tachometer. (See "Vehicle information display (models with color display)" (P.2-18).) WARNING LIGHTS Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning light (if equipped) When the ignition switch is in the “ON” position, the Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning light illuminates and then turns off. This indicates the ABS is operational. If the ABS warning light illuminates while the engine is running, or while driving, it may indicate the ABS is not functioning properly. Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer promptly. If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-lock function is turned off. The brake system then operates normally, but without anti-lock assistance. (See "Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)" (P.5-66).) While the differential lock (if equipped) is engaged, the ABS warning light illuminates. This indicates that the anti-lock function is not fully operating. (See "Rear differential locking system" (P.5-22) for the rear differential lock function.) Automatic Transmission (AT) check warning light (AT model) When the ignition switch is in the “ON” position, the Automatic Transmission (AT) check warning light illuminates and then turns off. This indicates that the AT is operational. If the AT check warning light illuminates while the engine is running, or while driving, it may indicate that the AT is not functioning properly and may need servicing. Have the system checked, and if necessary repaired, by a NISSAN dealer promptly. Automatic Transmission (AT) oil temperature warning light (AT model) This light illuminates when the Automatic Transmission (AT) oil temperature is too high. If the light illuminates while driving, reduce the vehicle speed as soon as safely possible until the light turns off. Automatic Transmission (AT) park warning light (if equipped) If the ATP warning light is on, this indicates that the automatic transmission P (Park) position will not function and the transfer case is in neutral. If the transfer control is not secured in any driving position while the AT shift lever is in the “P” (Park) position, the transmission will disengage and the wheels will not lock. If the ATP warning light illuminates with the shift lever in the “P” (Park) position, shift the Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) mode switch to the 2WD, 4H or 4LO position again with the shift lever in the N (Neutral) position. (See "FourWheel Drive (4WD)" (P.5-16).) WARNING: If the 4WD mode indicator (see "4WD mode indicator" (P.5-20)) is “OFF” or the ATP warning light is “ON”, this indicates that the automatic transmission P (Park) position will not function and could result in the vehicle moving unexpectedly, causing serious personal injury or property damage. Always set the parking brake. Brake warning light WARNING: y If the brake fluid level is below the minimum mark on the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive the vehicle until the brake system has been checked by a NISSAN dealer. y Even if you judge it to be safe, have your vehicle towed because driving it could be dangerous. CAUTION: Continued vehicle operation when the AT oil temperature warning light is on may damage the AT. Instruments and controls 2-Chapter 2.indd 13 2-13 2021/01/22 11:47:12 AM y Depressing the brake pedal without the engine running and/or with a low brake fluid level could increase the stopping distance and require greater pedal travel distance and effort. The brake warning light indicates the parking brake system operation, a low brake fluid level of the brake system and an Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) malfunction. Parking brake warning indicator: When the ignition switch is placed in the “ON” position, the brake warning light illuminates. When the engine is started and the parking brake is released, the brake warning light turns off. If the parking brake is not fully released, the brake warning light remains on. Be sure that the brake warning light has turned off before driving. (See "Parking brake" (P.3-25).) Low brake fluid warning indicator: If the brake warning light illuminates while the engine is running, or while driving, and the parking brake is released, it may indicate the brake fluid level is low. When the brake warning light illuminates while driving, stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible. Stop the engine and check the brake fluid level. If the brake fluid level is at the minimum mark, add brake fluid as necessary. (See "Brake fluid" (P.8-14).) If the brake fluid level is sufficient, have the brake system checked by a NISSAN dealer promptly. Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning indicator (if equipped): When the parking brake is released and the brake fluid level is sufficient, if both the brake warning light and the Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning light illuminate, it may indicate the ABS is not functioning properly. Have the brake system checked, and if necessary repaired, by a NISSAN dealer promptly. (See "Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning light" (P.2-13).) Charge warning light When the ignition switch is in the “ON” position, the charge warning light illuminates. After starting the engine, the charge warning light turns off. This indicates that the charging system is operational. If the charge warning light illuminates while the engine is running, or while driving, it may indicate that the charging system is not functioning properly and may need servicing. When the charge warning light illuminates while driving, stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible. Stop the engine and check the alternator belt. If the alternator belt is loose, broken or missing, the charging system needs repair. (See "Drive belt" (P.8-11).) If the alternator belt appears to be functioning correctly but the charge warning light remains illuminated, have the charging system checked by a NISSAN dealer promptly. CAUTION: Do not continue driving if the alternator belt is loose, broken or missing. Door open warning light (if equipped) When the ignition switch is in the “ON” position, the door open warning light illuminates if any of the doors are open or not closed securely. Engine oil pressure warning light When the ignition switch is in the “ON” position, the engine oil pressure warning light illuminates. After starting the engine, the engine oil pressure warning light turns off. This indicates that the oil pressure sensors in the engine are operational. If the engine oil pressure warning light illuminates or blinks while the engine is running, it may indicate that the engine oil pressure is low. Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible. Stop the engine immediately and call a NISSAN dealer. CAUTION: y Running the engine with the engine oil pressure warning light illuminated could cause serious damage to the engine. y The engine oil pressure warning light is not designed to indicate a low oil level. The oil level should be checked using the dipstick. (See "Engine oil" (P.8-8).) Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) warning light (4WD model) When the ignition switch is in the “ON” position, the Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) warning light illuminates. After starting the engine, the 4WD warning light turns off. If the 4WD system malfunctions or the revolu- 2-14 Instruments and controls 2-Chapter 2.indd 14 2021/01/22 11:47:12 AM tion or radius of the front and the rear wheel differs, the warning light will either remain illuminated or blink. (See "Four-Wheel Drive (4WD)" (P.5-16).) CAUTION: y y If the 4WD warning light illuminates or blinks while driving, reduce the vehicle speed and have your vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible. Do not drive on dry and hard surface roads in the 4H or 4LO position. If the 4WD warning light turns on when you are driving on dry and hard surface roads: — in the 4H position, shift the 4WD mode switch to 2WD. — in the 4LO position, stop the vehicle and shift the transmission lever to the “N” (Neutral) position with the brake pedal depressed and shift the 4WD mode switch to 2WD. ligent Emergency Braking" (P.5-43). See "Vehicle information display (models with color display)" (P.2-18). Low fuel warning light (if equipped) The low fuel warning light illuminates when the fuel level in the tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is convenient, preferably before the fuel gauge reaches the empty (0) position. There will be a small reserve of fuel remaining in the tank when the fuel gauge reaches the empty (0) position. Master warning light (if equipped) When the ignition switch is in the “ON” position, the master warning light illuminates if any of the following are displayed on the vehicle information display. y No Key Detected warning (if equipped) y Key ID Incorrect warning (if equipped) y Release Parking Brake warning If the warning light is still on after the above operations, have your vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible. y Door open warning y Key System Error warning (if equipped) y Low Oil Pressure warning (if equipped) Intelligent Emergency Braking system warning light (if equipped) y 4WD Error (if equipped) y Shipping Mode On Push Storage Fuse warning (if equipped) y Headlight equipped) y Automatic Transmission (AT) Error warning (Automatic Transmission (AT) models) y Parking Sensor Error (if equipped) y ITS malfunction (if equipped) y Driver Attention Alert warning (if equipped) When the ignition switch is in the “ON” position, the Intelligent Emergency Braking system warning light illuminates. After starting the engine, the warning light turns off. This light illuminates when the Intelligent Emergency Braking system is set to OFF on the vehicle information display. If the light illuminates when the Intelligent Emergency Braking system is ON, it may indicate that the system is unavailable. See "Intel- System Error warning Seat belt warning light (if equipped) When the ignition switch is in the “ON” position, the seat belt warning light illuminates. The light will continue to illuminate until the driver’s and/ or the front passenger’s (if equipped) seat belts are fastened. When the vehicle speed exceeds 15 km/h (10 MPH), the light will blink and the chime will sound unless the driver’s and/or the front passenger's (if equipped) seat belts are securely fastened. The chime will continue to sound for about 95 seconds until the seat belt is fastened. For precautions on seat belt usage, see "Seat belts" (P.1-8). Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) air bag warning light (if equipped) When the ignition switch is in the “ON” position, the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) air bag warning light illuminates for about 7 seconds and then turns off. This indicates the SRS air bag system is operational. (if If any of the following conditions occur, the SRS air bag system and/or pre-tensioner seat belt (if equipped) need servicing. Have the system checked, and if necessary repaired, by a NISSAN dealer promptly. y The SRS air bag warning light remains illuminated after about 7 seconds. y The SRS air bag warning light flashes intermittently. y The SRS air bag warning light does not come on at all. Instruments and controls 2-Chapter 2.indd 15 2-15 2021/01/22 11:47:13 AM Unless checked and repaired, the SRS air bag system and/or pre-tensioner seat belt may not function properly. (See "Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)" (P.1-25).) INDICATOR LIGHTS Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) warning light (if equipped) When the differential lock mode switch is in the “ON” position, the differential lock indicator light will blink and then stay on after the differential gear is completely locked. When the ignition switch is in the “ON” position, the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) warning light illuminates and then turns off. Differential lock indicator light (if equipped) See "Rear differential locking system" (P.5-22). The warning light blinks when the VDC system is operating. Front fog light indicator light (if equipped) When the warning light blinks while driving, the driving condition is slippery and the vehicle’s traction limit is about to be exceeded. The front fog light indicator light illuminates when the front fog lights are on. (See "Fog light switch" (P.2-36).) If the VDC warning light illuminates while the engine is running or while driving, it may indicate that the VDC system is not functioning properly and may need servicing. Have the system checked, and if necessary repaired, by a NISSAN dealer promptly. If a malfunction occurs, the VDC function is turned off, but the vehicle is still drivable. (See "Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system" (P.5-24).) Water-in-fuel-filter warning light YD25DDTi engine model: If the water-in-fuel-filter warning light illuminates while the engine is running, drain the water from the fuel filter promptly. (See "Fuel filter (YD25DDTi engine model)" (P.8-11).) CAUTION: Continuing vehicle operation without properly draining could cause serious damage to the engine. 2-16 Glow plug indicator light YD25DDTi engine model: When the ignition switch is in the “ON” position, the glow plug indicator light illuminates and turns off after the glow plugs have warmed up. If the glow plugs have already warmed up, the glow plug indicator flashes briefly and then turns off. High beam assist indicator light (if equipped) This indicator light illuminates when the headlights come on while the headlight switch is in the “AUTO” position with the high beam selected. This indicates that the high beam assist system is operational. (See "Headlight and turn signal switch (P.2-32).) High beam indicator light The high beam indicator light illuminates when the headlight high beam is on. The indicator turns off when the low beam is selected. (See "Headlight and turn signal switch" (P.2-32).) Hill descent control system ON indicator light (if equipped) When the ignition switch is in the “ON” position the hill descent control system on indicator light illuminates briefly and then turns off. This indicates that the hill descent control system is operational. The light illuminates when the hill descent control system is activated. If the hill descent control switch is on and the indicator light blinks, the system is not engaged. If the indicator light does not illuminate or blink when the hill descent control switch is on, the system may not be functioning properly. Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer. For additional information, see "Hill descent control system" (P.5-24). Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) CAUTION: y Continuing vehicle operation without proper servicing of the engine control system could lead to poor driveability, reduced fuel economy, and damage to the engine control system, which may affect the vehicle’s warranty coverage. y Incorrect setting of the engine control system may lead to non-compliance of local and national emission laws and regulations. When the ignition switch is in the “ON” position, the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) illuminates. Instruments and controls 2-Chapter 2.indd 16 2021/01/22 11:47:13 AM After starting the engine, the MIL turns off. This indicates that the engine control system is operational. If the Malfunction Indicator Light illuminates or blinks while the engine is running, it may indicate that the engine control system is not functioning properly and may need servicing. Have the system checked, and if necessary repaired, by a NISSAN dealer promptly. Precautions: Turn signal/hazard indicator lights The turn signal/hazard indicator lights blink when the turn signal switch lever or hazard indicator flasher switch is on. (See "Headlight and turn signal switch" (P.2-32) or "Hazard indicator flasher switch" (P.6-2).) Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off indicator light (if equipped) ing sound is heard. Have the system checked, and if necessary repaired, by a NISSAN dealer promptly. (See "Brakes" (P.8-12).) Door lock warning chime The chime will sound if any of the following operations are detected: Models with Intelligent Key system: To reduce or avoid possible damage to the engine control system when the MIL blinks: When the ignition switch is in the “ON” position, the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off indicator light illuminates and then turns off. The chime sounds if the driver's side door is opened while the ignition switch is placed in the “ACC” position. y Avoid driving at speeds above 70 km/h (43 MPH). The VDC off indicator light illuminates when the VDC OFF switch is pushed to the “OFF” position. y Avoid sudden acceleration or deceleration. y Avoid going up steep uphill grades. When the VDC OFF switch is pushed to the “OFF” position, the VDC system is turned off. When the chime sounds, be sure to check both the vehicle and the Intelligent Key. (See "Troubleshooting guide" (P.3-11).) y Avoid carrying or towing unnecessary loads. Security indicator light (if equipped) The security indicator light blinks when the ignition switch is in the “ACC”, “OFF” or “LOCK” position. This function indicates that the security system equipped on the vehicle is operational. If the security system is malfunctioning, this light will remain on while the ignition switch is in the “ON” position. (See "Security system" (P.3-15) for additional information.) Small light indicator light (if equipped) The light illuminates when the headlight switch is turned to the position. When the rear differential lock is engaged with the differential lock mode switch or the 4LO position is selected with the Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) mode switch, the VDC system is disabled and the VDC off indicator light illuminates. (See "Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system" (P.5-24) and "Rear differential locking system" (P.5-22).) AUDIBLE REMINDERS Brake pad wear warning The disc brake pads have audible wear warnings. When a brake pad requires replacement, it will make a high pitched scraping sound when the vehicle is in motion. This scraping sound will first occur only when the brake pedal is depressed. After more wear of the brake pad, the sound will always be heard even if the brake pedal is not depressed. Have the brakes checked as soon as possible if the wear warn- Models without Intelligent Key system: The chime sounds if the driver's side door is opened while the key is left in the ignition switch and the ignition switch is in the “ACC”, “OFF” or “LOCK” position. Remove the key and take it with you when leaving the vehicle. Light reminder chime The light reminder chime will sound if the driver’s side door is opened and the headlight switch is in either the or position, and the ignition switch is in the “ACC”, “OFF” or “LOCK” position. Be sure to turn the headlight switch to the “OFF” (if equipped) or “AUTO” (if equipped) position when you leave the vehicle. Parking brake reminder chime The parking brake reminder chime will sound if the vehicle is driven at more than 7 km/h (4 MPH) with the parking brake applied. Stop the Instruments and controls 2-Chapter 2.indd 17 2-17 2021/01/22 11:47:15 AM VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY (models with color display) vehicle and release the parking brake. y Seat belt warning chime (if equipped) The displayed icons/messages in the vehicle information display may differ depending on the model. When the vehicle speed exceeds 15 km/h (10 MPH), the chime will sound unless the driver’s and/or the front passenger’s (if equipped) seat belts are securely fastened. The chime will continue to sound for about 95 seconds until the seat belt is fastened. Other information For language settings, see "Unit/Language" (P.2-21). HOW TO USE THE VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY WAC0397X The vehicle information display is located between the tachometer and the speedometer, and it displays the warnings and information. The following items are also displayed if the vehicle is equipped with them: y Automatic Transmission (AT) — "Driving with Automatic Transmission (AT)" (P.5-13) y Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) — "Four-wheel Drive (4WD)" (P.5-16) y Clock and outside air temperature — "Clock and outside air temperature" (P.2-29) y Trip computer — "Trip computer" (P.2-18) y Cruise control — "Cruise control" (P.5-41) y Intelligent Key system — "Intelligent Key system" (P.3-6) y JVI1566X The vehicle information display can be changed using the buttons OK , , , and located on the left side of the steering wheel. OK - change or select an item in the vehicle information display - navigate through the items in vehicle information display - go back to the previous menu - change from one display screen to the next (i.e. trip, Fuel economy) Oil control system — "Oil control system" (P.2-30) 2-18 Instruments and controls 2-Chapter 2.indd 18 2021/01/22 11:47:15 AM STARTUP DISPLAY Warning (LDW)" (P.5-26) Cross Traffic Alert (if equipped): When the ignition switch is placed in the “ON” position, the screens that appear in the vehicle information display include: Blind Spot (if equipped): The following sub-menus are displayed under the Blind Spot menu. Select this sub-menu to enable/disable the Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) system. y Trip computer y Warnings Warnings will only display if there are any present. For more information on warnings and indicators, see "Vehicle information display warnings and indicators" (P.2-22). SETTINGS Settings cannot be made while driving. The , , and OK buttons are used in the setting mode. Use the Driver Assistance The following sub-menus are displayed under the Driver Assistance menu. Emergency Brake (if equipped): Select this sub-menu to enable/disable the Intelligent Emergency Braking system. For additional information, see "Intelligent Emergency Braking" (P.5-43). Lane (if equipped): The following sub-menus are displayed under the Lane menu. Warning (LDW) Select this sub-menu to enable/disable the Lane Departure Warning system. For additional information, see "Lane Departure Warning (BSW) Select this sub-menu to enable/disable the Blind Spot Warning (BSW) system. For additional information, see "Blind Spot Warning (BSW)" (P.5-30). Parking Aids (if equipped): The following sub-menus are displayed under the Parking Aids menu. y button to select a menu. Push OK to decide a menu. y y y Select this sub-menu to enable/disable the Intelligent Driver Alertness system. For additional information, see "Intelligent Driver Alertness" (P.5-56). Timer Alert: Select this sub-menu to set an alert to notify the driver that the set time has been reached. Select this sub-menu to enable/disable the Moving Object Detection (MOD). The following sub-menus are displayed under the Timer Alert menu. Sensor y ---min / ---min y Reset Select this sub-menu to enable/disable the parking sensor (sonar) system. To change the timer amount, use the button and push the OK button to save the selected time amount. Volume Low Temp. Alert: Select this sub-menu to change the parking sensor (sonar) buzzer volume. y Driver Attention Alert (if equipped): Moving Object (if equipped) For additional information, see "Moving Object Detection (MOD)" (P.4-14). y For additional information, see "Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)" (P.5-36). Distance Select this sub-menu to change the parking sensor (sonar) detection range. For additional information, see "Parking sensor (sonar) system" (P.5-61). Select this sub-menu to enable/disable the Low Temperature Alert. For additional information, see "Outside air temperature (˚C or ˚F)" (P.2-19). ECO Mode Setting The following sub-menus are displayed under the ECO Mode Setting menu. ECO Drive Report: Select this sub-menu to enable/disable the ECO Drive Report in the vehicle information display. Instruments and controls 2-Chapter 2.indd 19 2-19 2021/01/22 11:47:15 AM The light sensitivity can be set to illuminate earlier or later based on the brightness outside the vehicle. View History: Select this sub-menu to reset the past history of the fuel economy and the best fuel economy. See "ECO drive report" (P.5-58). Clock Clock Mode (if equipped): The adjustment settings can be selected from “Manual”. y Manual Turn indicator: Select this sub-menu to enable/disable the “3 Flash Pass” lane change signal feature. Daylight Saving (if equipped): Turns the Daylight Saving Time on or off. Vehicle Settings y Ext. Door Switch Select this sub-menu to activate/deactivate the request switch on the door. Wipers (if equipped): The following sub-menu is displayed. y Speed Dependent Select this sub-menu to activate/deactivate the speed dependent wiper speed feature. y Rain Sensor (if equipped) Select this sub-menu to activate/deactivate the rain sensor feature. The following sub-menus are displayed under the Vehicle Settings menu. Mirrors (if equipped): Lighting: y The following sub-menus are displayed. Auto Room Lamp Select this sub-menu to enable/disable the auto room lamp feature. The interior lights will be ON if any door is unlocked when the Auto Room Lamp is enabled. y Auto Headlight (if equipped) 2-20 Auto Fold Off When this item is turned on, the auto fold feature for the outside rear view mirrors is disabled. Use the OK button to select this function. The following sub-menus are displayed. y The following sub-menus are displayed under the Maintenance menu. The following sub-menu is displayed. Set Clock Manually: The clock setting can be changed using the and the OK buttons. Maintenance Locking (if equipped): Clock Format: The time setting can be selected from 12 hour and 24 hour formats. function. y WAC0563X 1. Oil and Filter: Select this sub-menu to set or reset the distance for replacing the engine oil and oil filter. Unfold at Ignition When this item is turned on, the outside rear view mirrors automatically fold when the doors are locked, and unfold when the ignition switch is placed in the “ACC” or “ON” position. Use the OK button to select this Instruments and controls 2-Chapter 2.indd 20 2021/01/22 11:47:16 AM NOTE: Main Menu Selection: Language (if equipped): Be sure to reset the distance for replacing the engine oil and oil filter after replacing. Otherwise, the oil and filter replacement indicator will continue to be displayed. Displays available screens that can be shown in the vehicle information display. The language of the vehicle information display can be changed. Route Guidance (if equipped): Use the and the OK buttons to select and change the language of the vehicle information display. 2. Tyre: Select this sub-menu to set or reset the distance for replacing tyres. WARNING: y Alerts The “Alerts” allows you to turn the route guidance alerts on or off. Welcome Effect: The tyre replacement indicator is not a substitute for regular tyre checks, including tyre pressure checks. See "Changing tyres and wheels" (P.8-32). Many factors including tyre inflation, alignment, driving habits and road conditions affect tyre wear and when tyres should be replaced. Setting the tyre replacement indicator for a certain driving distance does not mean your tyres will last that long. Use the tyre replacement indicator as a guide only and always perform regular tyre checks. Failure to perform regular tyre checks, including tyre pressure checks could result in tyre failure. Serious vehicle damage could occur and may lead to a collision, which could result in serious personal injury or death. The “Welcome Effect” displays the available welcome effect settings. 3. Other Mileage/Fuel: Select this sub-menu to set or reset the distance for replacing items other than the engine oil, oil filter and tyres. The unit for the mileage that is shown in the vehicle information display can be changed. y km, km/l Customize Display y km, l/100km The display settings allows you to choose from the various meter selections. y miles, MPG(UK) (if equipped) y miles, MPG(US) (if equipped) The display settings can be changed using the button and the OK buttons. Use the and the OK and change the unit. y Gauges y Animation Unit/Language Factory Reset The settings in the vehicle information display can be reset back to the factory default. To reset the vehicle information display: 1. Select “Factory Reset” using the and press the OK button . 2. Select “YES” to return all settings back to default by pressing the OK button . The units that are shown in the vehicle information display can be changed: y Mileage/Fuel y Temperature y Language (if equipped) Use the and the OK buttons to select and change the units of the vehicle information display. buttons to select Instruments and controls 2-Chapter 2.indd 21 button 2-21 2021/01/22 11:47:17 AM VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY WARNINGS AND INDICATORS WAC0541X 2-22 Instruments and controls 2-Chapter 2.indd 22 2021/01/22 11:47:20 AM 1. Engine start operation indicator (if equipped for Automatic Transmission (AT) models) This indicator appears when the shift lever is in the “P” (Park) position. This indicator means that the engine will start by pushing the ignition switch with the brake pedal depressed. You can start the engine directly in any position of the ignition switch. 2. Engine start operation indicator (if equipped for Manual Transmission (MT) models) This indicator means that the engine will start by pushing the ignition switch with the clutch pedal depressed. You can start the engine directly in any position of the ignition switch. You can also start the engine by pushing the ignition switch with the brake pedal depressed when the shift lever is in the “N” (Neutral) position. 3. Steering lock release malfunction indicator (if equipped) This indicator appears when the steering wheel cannot be released from the “LOCK” position. If this indicator appears, push the ignition switch while lightly turning the steering wheel right and left. See "Steering lock" (P.5-10). WAC0542X 4. No Key Detected warning (if equipped) This warning appears when the door is closed with the Intelligent Key left outside the vehicle and the ignition switch in the “ON” position. Make sure that the Intelligent Key is inside the Instruments and controls 2-Chapter 2.indd 23 2-23 2021/01/22 11:47:21 AM vehicle. See "Intelligent Key system" (P.3-6) for more details. 5. Key reminder warning (if equipped) This warning appears if the driver's side door is opened while the key is left in the ignition switch and ignition switch is in the “ACC”, “OFF” or “LOCK” position. Remove the key and take it with you when leaving the vehicle. 6. Shift to Park warning (if equipped for AT models) This warning appears when the ignition switch is pushed to stop the engine with the shift lever in any position except the “P” (Park) position. If this warning appears, move the shift lever to the “P” (Park) position or push the ignition switch to the “ON” position. An inside warning chime will also sound. (See "Intelligent Key system" (P.3-6).) 7. “PUSH” warning (if equipped for AT models) This warning appears when the shift lever is moved to the “P” (Park) position with the ignition switch in the “ACC” position after the Shift to Park warning appears. To push the ignition switch to the “OFF” position, perform the following procedure: Shift to Park warning g (Move the shift lever to “P”) g PUSH warning g (Push the ignition switch g ignition switch position is turned to “ON”) g PUSH warning g (Push the ignition switch g ignition switch position is turned to “OFF”) 2-24 8. Key Battery Low warning (if equipped) This warning appears when the Intelligent Key battery is running out of power. If this warning appears, replace the battery with a new one. (See "Intelligent Key battery" (P.8-20).) 9. Engine start operation for Intelligent Key system indicator (if equipped) This indicator appears when the Intelligent Key battery is running out of power and when the Intelligent Key system and vehicle are not normally communicated. If this indicator appears, touch the ignition switch with the Intelligent Key while depressing the brake pedal. (See "Intelligent Key battery discharge" (P.5-11).) 10. Key ID Incorrect warning (if equipped) This warning appears when the ignition switch is placed from the “LOCK” position and the Intelligent Key cannot be recognized by the system. You cannot start the engine with an unregistered key. Use the registered Intelligent Key. See "Intelligent Key system" (P.3-6). 11. Release Parking Brake warning This warning appears when the vehicle speed is above 7 km/h (4 MPH) and the parking brake is applied. Stop the vehicle and release the parking brake. There will be a small reserve of fuel remaining in the tank when the fuel gauge reaches the empty (0) position. 13. Door open warning This warning appears if any of the doors are open or not closed securely. The vehicle icon indicates which door is open on the display. Make sure that all of the doors are closed. 14. 4WD mode indicator (if equipped) This indicator shows the drive mode of the Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) system. See "Four-Wheel Drive (4wD)" (P.5-16) for details. 15. 4WD Error warning (if equipped) This warning appears when the Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) system is not functioning properly while the engine is running. Reduce vehicle speed and have your vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer. See "4WD warning" (P.5-20). 16. Key System Error warning (if equipped) This warning appears if there is a malfunction in the Intelligent Key system. If this warning appears while the engine is stopped, the engine cannot be started. If this warning appears while the engine is running, the vehicle can be driven. However, contact a NISSAN dealer for repair as soon as possible. 12. Low fuel warning This warning appears when the fuel level in the tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is convenient, preferably before the fuel gauge reaches the empty (0) position. Instruments and controls 2-Chapter 2.indd 24 2021/01/22 11:47:21 AM 17. Oil Level Low indicator (if equipped) If the low level indicator is displayed, the engine oil level is low. If the low level indicator is displayed, check the level using the engine oil dipstick. (See "Engine oil" (P.8-8).) CAUTION: The oil level should be checked regularly using the engine oil dipstick. Operating with an insufficient amount of oil can damage the engine and such damage is not covered by the warranty. 18. Oil level sensor warning (if equipped) If the oil level sensor warning is displayed, the engine oil level sensor may be malfunctioning. Contact a NISSAN dealer immediately. 19. Low Oil Pressure Stop vehicle warning (if equipped) This warning appears if low engine oil pressure is detected. If the warning appears during normal driving, pull off the road in a safe area, stop the engine immediately and call a NISSAN dealer. The low oil pressure warning is not designed to indicate a low oil level. Use the dipstick to check the oil level. (See Engine oil" (P.8-8).) CAUTION: Running the engine with the engine oil pressure warning displayed could cause serious damage to the engine. 20. Shipping Mode On Push Storage Fuse warning (if equipped) This warning may appear if the extended stor- age fuse switch is not pushed in (switched on). When this warning appears, push in (switch on) the extended storage fuse switch to turn off the warning. For more information, see "Extended storage fuse switch" (P.8-23). 21. Headlight System Error warning (if equipped) This warning appears if the LED headlights are malfunctioning. Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer. 26. Automatic Transmission (AT) position indicator (AT models) This indicator shows the automatic shift position. In the manual shift mode, when the transmission does not shift to the selected gear due to a transmission protection mode, the AT position indicator will blink and a chime will sound. For further details, see "Driving with Automatic Transmission (AT)" (P.5-13). 22. Reminder Turn OFF Headlights warning 27. Automatic Transmission (AT) Error warning (AT models) This warning appears when the driver side door is opened with the headlight switch is left ON and the ignition switch is placed in the “OFF”, “ACC” or “LOCK” position. Place the headlight switch in “OFF” (if equipped) or “AUTO” (if equipped) position. For additional information, see "Headlight and turn signal switch" (P.2-32). If the Automatic Transmission (AT) Error warning appears while the engine is running, or while driving, it may indicate that the AT is not functioning properly and may need servicing. Have the system checked, and if necessary repaired, by a NISSAN dealer promptly. 23. Time for a driver break? indicator This indicator appears when the set “Timer Alert” alarm activates. You can set the time for up to 6 hours. (See "Settings" (P.2-19).) 24. Take a break? indicator (if equipped) This indicator appears when the system has detected that the driver may by displaying fatigue or a lack of attention. (See "Intelligent Driver Alertness" (P.5-56).) 25. Cruise control indicator (if equipped) This indicator shows the cruise control system status. The status is shown by the color. See "Cruise control" (P.5-41) for details. 28. Automatic Transmission (AT) park warning (if equipped) If the Automatic Transmission park warning appears, it indicates that the automatic transmission P (Park) position will not function and the transfer case is in neutral. If the transfer control is not secured in any driving position while the AT shift lever is in the “P” (Park) position, the transmission will disengage and the wheels will not lock. If the ATP warning appears with the shift lever in the “P” (Park) position, shift the Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) mode switch to the 2WD, 4H or 4LO position again with the shift lever in the N (Neutral) position. (See "Four-Wheel Drive (4WD)" (P.5-16).) Instruments and controls 2-Chapter 2.indd 25 2-25 2021/01/22 11:47:22 AM WARNING: If the 4WD mode indicator (see "4WD MODE INDICATOR" (P.5-20)) is “OFF” or the ATP warning light is “ON”, this indicates that the automatic transmission P (Park) position will not function and could result in the vehicle moving unexpectedly, causing serious personal injury or property damage. Always set the parking brake. 29. Parking Sensor Error warning (if equipped) This warning appears when the parking sensor (sonar) system is not functioning properly. If the warning appears, have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer. 30. Unavailable High Cabin Temperature warning (if equipped) This warning appears if the interior temperature of the vehicle has reached such a high temperature that the sensor for the following system(s) can no longer function reliably. Once the interior temperature has reached normal levels, the warning should disappear. y Lane Departure Warning (LDW) system If the warning continues to appear, have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer. For more details, see "Lane Departure Warning (LDW) (P.5-26). 31–32. Unavailable Side Radar Obstruction warning (if equipped) This message appears when the Blind Spot Warning (BSW)/Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) system becomes unavailable because a radar blockage is detected. For more details, see 2-26 "Blind Spot Warning (BSW)" (P.5-30) or "Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)" (P.5-36). 33. Not Available Front Radar Blocked warning (if equipped) This message appears when the Intelligent Emergency Braking system or the Intelligent Forward Collision Warning system becomes unavailable because the front radar is obstructed. For more details, see "Intelligent Emergency Braking" (P.5-43) or "Intelligent Forward Collision Warning system" (P.5-49). 38. System Fault warning (if equipped) If the Intelligent Driver Alertness system malfunctions, the warning message will appear in the vehicle information display and the function will be stopped automatically. For more details, see "Intelligent Driver Alertness" (P.5-56). 34–37. Not Available System Malfunction warning (if equipped) This warning appears when there is a malfunction with the following system(s) if the vehicle is equipped with them. y Lane Departure Warning (LDW) system y Blind Spot Warning (BSW) system y Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) system y Intelligent Emergency Braking system y Intelligent Forward Collision Warning system If this warning appears, stop the vehicle in a safe location, turn off and restart the engine. If the warning continues to appear, have the system(s) checked by a NISSAN dealer. For more details, see "Lane Departure Warning (LDW)" (P.5-26), "Blind Spot Warning (BSW)" (P.5-30), "Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)" (P.5-36), "Intelligent Emergency Braking" (P.5-43) or Intelligent Forward Collision Warning system" (P.5-49) Instruments and controls 2-Chapter 2.indd 26 2021/01/22 11:47:22 AM TRIP COMPUTER WAC0506X Instruments and controls 2-Chapter 2.indd 27 2-27 2021/01/22 11:47:24 AM Average vehicle speed: The average vehicle speed display is updated every 30 seconds. The first 30 seconds after a reset, the display shows “——”. To reset the average speed, push the OK button for longer than 1 second. To reset the fuel economy and average speed, push the OK button for longer than 3 seconds or more. JVI1566X The vehicle information display can be changed using the buttons OK , , , and located on the left side of the steering wheel. 2. Fuel economy (l (liter)/100 km, km/l (liter) or MPG) The average fuel consumption mode shows the average fuel consumption since the last reset. OK - change or select an item in the vehicle information display The display is updated every 30 seconds. For about the first 500 m (1/3 mile) after a reset, the display shows “———”. - navigate through the items in vehicle information display To reset the fuel economy, push the OK button for longer than 1 second. - go back to the previous menu - change from one display screen to the next (i.e. trip, Fuel economy 1. Vehicle speed (km/h or MPH) The vehicle speed mode shows the current vehicle speed and the average vehicle speed since the last reset. button for longer than 1 second. (The elapsed time is also reset at the same time.) 4. Navigation (if equipped) When the route guidance is set in the navigation system, this item shows the navigation route information. For more details, see the separate NissanConnect Owner’s Manual. 5. Audio (if equipped) The audio mode shows the status of audio information. 6. Driving Aids (if equipped) The Driving Aids mode shows the operating condition for the following systems. y Lane Departure Warning (LDW) (if equipped) y Blind Spot Warning (BSW) (if equipped) To reset the fuel economy and average speed, push the OK button for longer than 3 seconds or more. y Intelligent Emergency Braking system y Intelligent Forward Collision Warning system 3. Elapsed time and trip odometer (km or mile) For more details, see "Lane Departure Warning (LDW)" (P.5-26), "Blind Spot Warning (BSW)" (P.5-30), "Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)" (P.5-36), "Intelligent Emergency Braking" (P.5-43) or Intelligent Forward Collision Warning system" (P.5-49) Elapsed time: The elapsed time mode shows the time since the last reset. The displayed time can be reset by pushing the OK button for longer than 1 second. (The trip odometer is also reset at the same time.) Trip odometer: The trip odometer mode shows the total distance the vehicle has been driven since the last reset. Resetting is done by pushing the OK 2-28 Instruments and controls 2-Chapter 2.indd 28 2021/01/22 11:47:24 AM VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY (models without color display) CLOCK AND OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE (IF EQUIPPED) differ from the actual outside temperature or the temperature displayed on various signs or billboards. JVI1031X JVI0932X The clock and outside air temperature (if equipped) are displayed on the upper side of the vehicle information display. Clock For clock adjustment, see "Settings" (P.2-19), the separate Navigation System Owner's Manual (if equipped) or the NissanConnect Owner's Manual (if equipped). Outside air temperature (°C or °F) (if equipped) The outside air temperature is displayed in °C or °F in the range of −40 to 60°C (−40 to 140°F). The outside air temperature mode includes a low temperature warning feature. If the outside air temperature is below 3°C (37°F), the warning is displayed on the screen. The outside temperature sensor is located in front of the radiator. The sensor may be affected by road or engine heat, wind directions and other driving conditions. The display may When the ignition switch is placed in the “ON” position, the vehicle information display shows the following information: y Engine coolant temperature gauge — "Engine coolant temperature gauge" (P.2-9) y Fuel gauge — "Fuel gauge" (P.2-10) y Odometer — "Odometer (models without color display)" (P.2-9) y Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) (if equipped) — "4WD mode indicator" (P.5-20) y Outside air temperature (if equipped) — "Outside air temperature" (P.2-30) y Trip computer — "Trip computer" (P.2-30) y Oil control system (if equipped) — "Oil control system" (P.2-30) y Automatic Transmission (AT) position indicator (AT model) Instruments and controls 2-Chapter 2.indd 29 2-29 2021/01/22 11:47:25 AM — "Driving with Automatic Transmission (AT)" (P.5-13) y Cruise control (if equipped) — "Cruise control" (P.5-41) y Other information OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE (if equipped) The outside air temperature is displayed in °C. Current fuel consumption y If the amount of fuel added is small, the display just before the ignition switch is turned off may continue to be displayed. Push the trip computer mode switch to toggle the fuel consumption display between l/ 100 km and km/l (if equipped). y When driving uphill or rounding curves, the fuel in the tank shifts, which may momentarily change the display. Average fuel consumption (l/100 km, km/l or mpg) OIL CONTROL SYSTEM (if equipped) The current fuel consumption mode shows the current fuel consumption. The average fuel consumption mode shows the average fuel consumption since the last reset. Resetting is done by pushing the trip computer mode switch for longer than 1 second. TRIP COMPUTER The display is updated every 30 seconds. At about the first 500 m (1/3 miles) after a reset, the display shows “----”. Push the trip computer mode switch to toggle the fuel consumption display between l/ 100 km and km/l (if equipped). JVI1238X Distance to empty (dte - km or miles) JVI1237X The switch for the trip computer is located on the meter panel. When the ignition switch is placed in the “ON” position, modes of the trip computer can be selected by pushing the trip computer mode switch . Each time the trip computer mode switch pushed, the display will change as follows: is (TRIP A g TRIP B) g Current fuel consumption g Average fuel consumption g Distance to empty (dte) g (TRIP A) 2-30 The distance to empty (dte) mode provides you with an estimation of the distance that can be driven before refueling. The dte is constantly being calculated, based on the amount of fuel in the fuel tank and the actual fuel consumption. The display is updated every 30 seconds. The dte mode includes a low range warning feature: when the fuel level is low, the dte mode is automatically selected and the digits and the low fuel warning light blink in order to draw the driver’s attention. Push the trip computer mode switch to return to the mode that was selected before the warning occurred. When the fuel level drops even lower, the dte display will change to “----” Instruments and controls 2-Chapter 2.indd 30 2021/01/22 11:47:25 AM 1. Distance to oil change 2. When the ignition switch is placed in the “ON” position, the distance to oil change is displayed. 2. Oil replacement indicator If adjusting the distance from zero (0): Push the trip computer mode switch . The default distance to oil change will be restored. CAUTION: If the oil replacement indicator is displayed, change the engine oil as soon as possible. Operating your vehicle with oil that has deteriorated can damage the engine. 3. If no further action is taken, the display will switch to the oil level indication and the new interval will be set. Setting distance to oil change: 1. Refer to the separate maintenance booklet for the appropriate distance to oil change interval. When the ignition switch is in the “ON” position, engine oil information is displayed. Engine oil information informs you of the distance to oil change, oil level indication and oil level sensor malfunctions. To reset the oil control system, push and hold the trip computer mode switch for more than 3 seconds when the engine oil information is displayed. Turn the trip computer mode switch clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the interval. Each turn increases or decreases the interval by 1,000 km (500 miles). When the distance to oil change information showing zero (0) or less is displayed: When the ignition switch is placed in the “ON” position, a wrench symbol blinks and the distance to oil change information showing zero (0) is displayed for approximately 5 seconds. To cancel oil change reminder: The distance to oil change interval can be adjusted or disabled using the trip computer mode switch . JVI0438X While the display is flashing, push and hold the trip computer mode switch for more than 3 seconds to enter the adjustment mode. To adjust oil change interval: 1. Push and hold the trip computer mode switch for more than 3 seconds while the wrench symbol and distance to oil change information are displayed. If adjusting the distance from zero (0): Push and hold the trip computer mode switch for more than 3 seconds within 5 seconds of placing the ignition switch in the “ON” position. The wrench symbol start flashing. and the distance will Push and hold the trip computer mode switch for more than 3 seconds while the wrench symbol and distance to oil change information are displayed. The wrench symbol start flashing. and the distance will 2. While the display is flashing, push the trip computer mode switch again to enter the adjustment mode. 3. Turn the trip computer mode switch counterclockwise until the interval reads 0. If no further action is taken, the display will switch to the oil level indication and the oil change reminder is canceled. No wrench symbol or distance will be displayed when the ignition switch is placed in the “ON” position. To reactivate the reminder, set the distance to oil change interval to a value above zero (0). Instruments and controls 2-Chapter 2.indd 31 2-31 2021/01/22 11:47:25 AM HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCH 3. Oil level display HEADLIGHT SWITCH When the ignition switch is placed in the “ON” position, the engine oil level status is displayed. 4. Low level reminder If the low level indicator is displayed, the engine oil level is low. If the low level reminder is displayed, check the level using the engine oil dipstick. (See “Engine oil” (P.8-8).) CAUTION: The oil level should be checked regularly using the engine oil dipstick. Operating the vehicle with an insufficient amount of oil can damage the engine and such damage is not covered by the warranty. Example C Example A WAC0558X JVI0370X (See “Engine oil” (P.8-8).) 5. Oil level sensor warning If the oil sensor warning is displayed, the engine oil level sensor may be malfunctioning. Contact a NISSAN dealer immediately. CAUTION: y y Even if “Oil Good” appears on the engine oil maintenance display, be sure to replace the engine oil when the engine oil level gauge shows that the oil level exceeds the Hi level by approximately 10 mm (0.4 in) because the oil performance has decreased. Always reset the oil control system after replacing the engine oil. 2-32 Example D Example B SIC3782 SIC3783 The headlight switch varies depending on the model. NISSAN recommends that you consult the local regulations concerning the use of lights. AUTO position (if equipped) When the ignition switch is in the “ON” position and the headlight switch is in the “AUTO” position, the headlights, front clearance lights, instrument panel lights, rear combination lights and other lights turn on automatically depending on the brightness of the Instruments and controls 2-Chapter 2.indd 32 2021/01/22 11:47:26 AM surroundings. The headlights will turn on automatically at twilight or in rainy weather (when the windshield wiper is operated continuously). Headlight beam The lever can be pulled 4 times for up to 2 minutes. High beam assist (if equipped) The high beam assist system will operate when the vehicle is driven at speeds of approximately 40 km/h (25 MPH) and above. If an oncoming vehicle or leading vehicle appears in front of your vehicle when the headlight high beam is on, the headlight will be switched to the low beam automatically. When the ignition switch is placed in the “OFF” position, the lights will turn off automatically. Precautions on high beam assist: WARNING: CAUTION: Example y The high beam assist system is a convenience but it is not a substitute for safe driving operation. The driver should re- main alert at all times, ensure safe driving practices and switch the high beam and low beam manually when necessary. y The high beam or low beam may not switch automatically under the following conditions. Switch the high beam and low beam manually. JVI1104X Do not place any objects on top of the sensor . The sensor senses the brightness level and controls the Intelligent Auto Headlight function. If the sensor is covered, it reacts as if it is dark, and the headlights will illuminate. position The position turns on the front clearance, instrument panel, tail and license plate lights. position The position turns on the headlights in addition to the other lights. SIC3785 To turn on the high beam, push the lever towards the front position . — During bad weather (rain, fog, snow, wind, etc.). To turn off the high beam, return the lever to the neutral position . — When a light source similar to a headlight or tail light is in the vicinity of the vehicle. — When the headlights of the oncoming vehicle or the leading vehicle are turned off, when the color of the light is affected due to foreign materials on the lights, or when the light beam is out of position. — When there is a sudden, continuous To flash the headlights, pull the lever towards the rearmost position . The headlights can be flashed even when the headlights are not on. If equipped, when the lever is pulled towards the rearmost position after the ignition switch is placed in the “OFF” or “LOCK” position, the headlight will turn on and stay on for 30 seconds. Instruments and controls 2-Chapter 2.indd 33 2-33 2021/01/22 11:47:28 AM change in brightness. y — When driving on a road that passes over rolling hills, or a road that has level differences. — When driving on a road with many curves. — When a sign or mirror-like surface is reflecting intense light towards the front of the vehicle. — When the container, etc. being towed by a leading vehicle is reflecting intense light. — When a headlight on your vehicle is damaged or dirty. — When the vehicle is leaning at an angle due to a punctured tire, being towed, etc. — The number of passengers and the amount of luggage. cate that the system is not functioning properly. Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer. When the vehicle speed lowers to less than approximately 30 km/h (19 MPH), the headlight remains the low beam. High beam assist operations: To turn off the high beam assist system, turn the headlight switch to the position or select the low beam position by placing the lever in the neutral position. Camera unit maintenance: Example A WAC0149X The timing of switching the low beam and high beam may change under the following situations. — The brightness of the headlights of the oncoming vehicle or leading vehicle. — The movement and direction of the oncoming vehicle and the leading vehicle. — — — 2-34 When only one light on the oncoming vehicle or the leading vehicle is illuminated. When the oncoming vehicle or the leading vehicle is a two-wheeled vehicle. Road conditions (incline, curve, the road surface, etc.). WAF0635X Example B WAC0502X To activate the high beam assist system, turn the headlight switch to the “AUTO” position and push the lever forward (high beam position). The high beam assist indicator light in the meter will illuminate while the headlights are turned on. If the high beam assist indicator light does not illuminate in the above condition, it may indi- The camera unit for the high beam assist system is located in front of the inside rear view mirror. To keep the proper operation of the high beam assist system and prevent a system malfunction, be sure to observe the following: y Always keep the windshield clean. y Do not attach a sticker (including transparent material) or install an accessory near the camera unit. y Do not strike or damage the areas around the camera unit. Do not touch the camera lens. Instruments and controls 2-Chapter 2.indd 34 2021/01/22 11:47:28 AM If the camera unit is damaged due to an accident, contact a NISSAN dealer. TURN SIGNAL SWITCH cancels automatically. Lane change signal Daytime running light system (if equipped) To turn on the lane change signals, move the lever up or down to the point where the light begins to flash. Even if the headlight switch is in the OFF position (if equipped), the daytime running lights will come on after starting the engine. If the lever is moved back to its original position right after moving up or down, the light will flash 3 times. When the light switch is turned to the or position, the daytime running light will turn off. To cancel the flashing, move the lever to the opposite direction. BATTERY SAVER SYSTEM The light reminder chime will sound if the headlight switch is in either the or position and when the driver’s door is opened with the ignition switch in the “ACC”, “OFF” or “LOCK” position. If the ignition switch is in the “OFF” or “LOCK” position and the doors are closed and locked while the headlight switch is in either the or position, the battery saver function will turn off the lights to prevent the battery from being discharged. The lights will turn on when the doors are being opened. CAUTION: Do not leave the lights on when the engine is not running for extended periods of time to prevent the battery from being discharged. SIC3786 CAUTION: The turn signal switch will not be canceled automatically if the steering wheel turning angle does not exceed the preset amount. After the turn or lane change, make sure that the turn signal switch is returned to its original position. Turn signal To turn on the turn signals, move the lever up or down to the point where the lever latches. When the turn is completed, the turn signal Instruments and controls 2-Chapter 2.indd 35 2-35 2021/01/22 11:47:29 AM FOG LIGHT SWITCH (if equipped) WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH WARNING: In freezing temperatures, the washer fluid may freeze on the windshield and obscure your vision. Warm the windshield with the defogger before you wash the windshield. CAUTION: Type A y Do not operate the washer continuously for longer than 30 seconds. y Do not operate the washer if the window washer fluid reservoir is empty. y If the wiper operation is interrupted by snow or ice, the wiper may stop moving to protect its motor. If this occurs, turn the wiper switch to the “OFF” position and remove the snow or ice on and around the wiper arms. In approximately 1 minute, turn the switch on again to operate the wiper. SIC3811 Type B JVI1222X WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH Type B SIC3813 Type C WAC0530X FRONT FOG LIGHTS (if equipped) To turn on the front fog lights, turn the fog light switch to the position with the headlight switch in the or or AUTO (if equipped) position. To turn off the fog lights, turn the fog light switch to the “OFF” position. Type A JVI1105X Type D 2-36 WAC0531X Instruments and controls 2-Chapter 2.indd 36 2021/01/22 11:47:29 AM The windshield wiper and washer operate when the ignition switch is in the “ON” position. RAIN-SENSING AUTO WIPER SYSTEM (if equipped) by turning the knob toward (Low). (High) or toward Wiper operation y High — High sensitive operation The lever position “AUTO” (Type C/Type D) operates the rain-sensing auto wiper system (if equipped). (See “Rain-sensing auto wiper system” (P.2-37).) y Low — Low sensitive operation To turn the rain-sensing auto wiper system off, push up the lever to the “OFF” position, or pull down the lever to the “LO” or “HI” position. The lever position “INT” (Type A/Type B/Type E) operates the wiper intermittently. y The intermittent operation can be adjusted by turning the adjustment control knob, (longer) or (shorter) . (Type A or Type B) y The speed of the intermittent operation varies depending on the vehicle speed. This function can be turned on or off (if equipped). See “Settings” (P.2-19). (Type A or Type B) The lever position “LO” low speed. operates the wiper at The lever position “HI” high speed. operates the wiper at CAUTION: Type A Washer operation To operate the washer, pull the lever toward the back of the vehicle until the desired amount of washer fluid is spread on the windshield. The wiper will automatically operate several times. Type B Do not touch the rain sensor and around it when the wiper switch is in the “AUTO” position and the ignition switch is in the “ON” position. The wipers may operate unexpectedly and cause an injury or may damage a wiper. y The rain-sensing auto wipers are intended for use during rain. If the switch is left in the “AUTO” position, the wipers may operate unexpectedly when dirt, fingerprints, oil film or insects are stuck on or around the sensor. The wipers may also operate when exhaust gas or moisture affect the rain sensor. y When the windshield glass is coated with water repellent, the speed of the rainsensing auto wipers may be higher even though the amount of the rainfall is small. y Be sure to turn off the rain-sensing auto wiper system when you use a car wash. y The rain-sensing auto wipers may not operate if rain does not hit the rain sensor even if it is raining. WAC0511X To stop the wiper operation, move the lever up to the “OFF” position. The lever position “MIST” operates the wiper one sweep. The lever automatically returns to its original position. y WAC0512X The rain-sensing auto wiper system can automatically turn on the wipers and adjust the wiper speed depending on the rainfall and the vehicle speed by using the rain sensor located on the upper part of the windshield. To set the rain-sensing auto wiper system, push the lever down to the “AUTO” position . The wiper will sweep once while the ignition switch is in the “ON” position. The rain sensor sensitivity level can be adjusted Instruments and controls 2-Chapter 2.indd 37 2-37 2021/01/22 11:47:29 AM DEFOGGER SWITCH (if equipped) y To turn off manually, push the defogger switch again Using genuine wiper blades is recommended for proper operation of the rain-sensing auto wiper system. (See “Wiper blades” (P.8-17) for wiper blade replacement.) CAUTION: Type A Type B SIC3537 y When operating the defogger continuously, be sure to start the engine. Otherwise, it may cause the battery to discharge. y When cleaning the inner side of the window, be careful not to scratch or damage the electrical conductors on the surface of the window. JVI1022X The rear window defogger switch operates when the ignition switch is in the "ON" position. The defogger is used to reduce the moisture, fog or frost on the rear window and outside rear view mirror (if equipped) surfaces to improve the rear view. When the defogger switch is pushed, the indicator light illuminates and the rear window defogger operates for approximately 15 minutes. After the preset time has passed, the defogger will turn off automatically. 2-38 Instruments and controls 2-Chapter 2.indd 38 2021/01/22 11:47:29 AM HORN WINDOWS MANUAL WINDOWS (if equipped) To open a window, push down the power window switch. To close a window, pull up the power window switch Driver’s window switch JVI1569X The horn switch operates regardless of the ignition switch position except when the battery is discharged. When the horn switch is pushed and held, the horn will sound. Releasing the horn switch will cease the horn sound. SIC4435 The side windows can be opened or closed by turning the hand crank on each door. POWER WINDOWS (if equipped) WARNING: y y Make sure that all passengers have their hands, etc. inside the vehicle before operating the power windows. To help avoid risk of injury or death through unintended operation of the vehicle and or its systems, including entrapment in windows or inadvertent door lock activation, do not leave children, people who require the assistance of others or pets unattended in your vehicle. Additionally, the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a warm day can quickly become high enough to cause a significant risk of injury or death to people and pets. JVI1223X The driver’s switch, the main switch, can control all windows. Locking passenger’s windows: When the lock button is pushed in, the passenger’s windows cannot be operated. To cancel the passenger’s windows lock, push the lock button again. The power windows operate when the ignition switch is in the “ON” position. Instruments and controls 2-Chapter 2.indd 39 2-39 2021/01/22 11:47:30 AM Passenger’s window switch down or up. To fully open the window, push the power window switch down to the second detent and release the switch. To fully close the window, pull the power window switch up to the second detent and release the switch. The switch does not have to be held during window operation. To stop the window open/close operation during the automatic function, push down or pull up the switch in opposite directions. Window timer (if equipped): SIC4523 The passenger's switch can control its corresponding window. When the passenger’s windows lock button on the driver’s switch is pushed in, the passenger’s switch cannot be operated. Automatic function The window timer allows the window switch to be operated for a period of time even if the ignition switch is placed in the “OFF” position. The window timer will be canceled when the driver’s or front passenger’s door is opened or the preset time has expired. Auto-reverse function: WARNING: There is a small distance just before the closed position which cannot be detected. Make sure that all passengers have their hands, etc. inside the vehicle before closing the windows. JVI1224X The automatic function is available for the switch that has an mark on its surface. The automatic function enables a window to fully open or close without holding the switch 2-40 If the window does not close automatically If the power window automatic function (closing only) does not operate properly, perform the following procedure to initialize the power window system. 1. Start the engine. 2. Close the door. 3. Open the window completely by operating the power window switch. 4. Pull the power window switch and hold it to close the window, and then hold the switch more than 3 seconds after the window is closed completely. 5. Release the power window switch. Operate the window by the automatic function to confirm the initialization is complete. If the power window automatic function does not operate properly after performing the procedure above, have your vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer. AUTO SLIDE BACK WINDOWS SYSTEM (if equipped) The auto-reverse function enables a window to automatically reverse when something is caught in the window as it is closing by the automatic function. When the control unit detects an obstacle, the window will be lowered immediately. Depending on the environment or driving conditions, the auto-reverse function may activate if an impact or load similar to something being caught in the window occurs. JVI1209X Instruments and controls 2-Chapter 2.indd 40 2021/01/22 11:47:30 AM POWER OUTLETS The power outlet is used for powering electrical accessories. Use the cutout between the lid and the console box to use a powering cable with the console box lid closed. WARNING: JVI1210X WARNING: y Make sure that all passengers have their hands, etc. inside the vehicle before operating the auto slide back window. y Never leave children or adults who would normally require the support of others alone in the vehicle. They could unknowingly activate switches or controls and inadvertently become involved in an accident. The auto slide back window operates when the ignition switch is in the "ON" position. To open the back windows, push down auto slide back window switch. To close the back window, pull up slide back window switch. the Instrument panel (lower) (if equipped) Console box (if equipped) JVI1024X CAUTION: WAC0503X the auto Truck box (if equipped) Do not place any objects on the instrument panel. Such objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause injury if a supplemental air bag inflates (if equipped). JVI1211X y Do not leave a power cable on the instrument panel in direct sunlight. The surface of the instrument panel may become very hot resulting in damage to the power cable. y Do not put a liquid container near the power outlet. Spilled contents may get into the power outlet and can result in a malfunction. y The outlet and plug may be hot during or immediately after use. y This power outlet is not designed for use with a cigarette lighter unit. y Do not use accessories that exceed a combined power draw of 12 volt, 120W (10A). Do not use double adapters or more than one electrical accessory. y Use this power outlet with the engine running to avoid discharging the vehicle battery. y Avoid using when the air conditioner, headlights or rear window defogger is on (if equipped). Instruments and controls 2-Chapter 2.indd 41 2-41 2021/01/22 11:47:31 AM y y y Push the plug in as far as it will go. If good contact is not made, the plug may overheat or the internal temperature fuse may blow. USB (Universal Serial Bus) CHARGING CONNECTOR (if equipped) Before inserting or disconnecting a plug, be sure that the electrical accessory being used is turned OFF. Some mobile devices cannot be charged depending on their specifications. Use the cutout between the lid and the console box to use a cable with the console box lid closed. CAUTION: When not in use, be sure to close the cap. Do not allow water or any liquid to contact the outlet. Console box Behind the console box WAC0499X y Do not force a USB device into the connector. Inserting the USB device tilted or up-side-down (USB Type-A) into the connector may damage the connector. Make sure that the USB device is connected correctly into the connector. y Do not use a reversible USB cable. Using the reversible USB cable may damage the connector. WAC0507X The USB charging connector can be used only for charging an external device. Connect a USB device into the connector. Charging will start automatically (maximum output up to 5 volt, 12 W, 2.4 A (USB Type-A), 5 volt, 15 W, 3 A (USB Type-C)). The external device will be charged continuously while the ignition switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position. 2-42 Instruments and controls 2-Chapter 2.indd 42 2021/01/22 11:47:31 AM STORAGE WARNING: y y The storages should not be used while driving so that the full attention may be given to vehicle operation. Keep the storage lids closed while driving to help prevent injury in an accident or a sudden stop. To open the console box lid, push up the knob and pull up the lid. To close, push the lid down until the lock latches. SUNGLASSES HOLDER (if equipped) JVI0619X To open the sunglasses holder, push and release. Only store one pair of sunglasses in the holder. JVI1102X . To close, push the lid in until the lock latches. CONSOLE BOX (if equipped) WARNING: The driver must not remove or insert cups into the cup holder while driving so that full attention may be given to vehicle operation. CAUTION: GLOVE BOX To open the glove box, pull the handle CUP HOLDERS y Avoid abrupt starting and braking especially when the cup holder is being used to prevent spilling the contents. If the contents are hot, they could scald you or your passengers. y Use only soft cups in the cup holder. Hard objects can injure you in an accident. Center console (front separate seat models) WARNING: Keep the sunglasses holder closed while driving to avoid obstructing the driver’s view and to help prevent an accident. CAUTION: y Do not use for anything other than sunglasses. y Do not leave sunglasses in the sunglasses holder while parking in direct sunlight. The heat may damage the sunglasses. JVI1027X JVI1026X Instruments and controls 2-Chapter 2.indd 43 2-43 2021/01/22 11:47:31 AM Lower instrument panel (front bench seat models JVI1212X Rear seat (Double Cab models) Soft bottle holder Example ROOF RACK (if equipped) JVI1241X The front and rear (if equipped) soft bottle holders are located on the doors. CAUTION: y y Do not use bottle holder for any other objects that could be thrown about in the vehicle and possibly injure people during sudden braking or an accident. Do not use bottle holder for open liquid containers. JVI1103X Do not apply any load directly to the roof side rails. Cross bars must be installed before applying load/cargo/luggage to the roof of the vehicle. Genuine NISSAN accessory cross bars may be available through a NISSAN dealer. Contact a NISSAN dealer for additional information. The service load capacity for the roof side rails is 56 kg (125 lb), however do not exceed the accessory cross bars load capacity. WARNING: y Always install the cross bars onto the roof side rails before loading cargo of any kind. Loading cargo directly onto the roof side rails or the vehicle’s roof may cause vehicle damage. y Drive extra carefully when the vehicle is loaded at or near the cargo carrying capacity, especially if the significant portion of that load is carried on the roof rack. y Heavy loading of the roof rack has the potential to affect the vehicle stability and handling during sudden or unusual SIC4593 2-44 Instruments and controls 2-Chapter 2.indd 44 2021/01/22 11:47:31 AM SUN VISORS INTERIOR LIGHTS handling maneuvers. load should be CAUTION: y Roof rack distributed. evenly y y Do not exceed maximum roof rack load weight capacity. Turn off the lights when you leave the vehicle. y y Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury. Do not use the lights for extended periods of time with the engine stopped. This could result in a discharged battery. INTERIOR LIGHT SWITCH (if equipped) CARD HOLDER (if equipped) JVI1037X JVI1240X Slide a card in the card holder . SIC2872 1. To block out glare from the front, swing down the sun visor . 2. To block glare from the side, remove the sun visor from the center mount and swing it to the side . The interior light can be turned ON regardless of door position. The light will go off after a period of time unless the ignition switch is placed in the “ON” position when any door is opened. The interior lights can be set to operate when the doors are opened. To turn off the interior lights when a door open, push the switch, the interior lights will not illuminate, regardless of door position. The lights will go off when the ignition switch is placed in the “ON” position, or the driver’s door is closed and locked. The lights will also go off after a period of time when the doors are open. Instruments and controls 2-Chapter 2.indd 45 2-45 2021/01/22 11:47:31 AM CONSOLE LIGHT (if equipped) Type B ON position When the switch is in the “ON” position map lights will illuminate. , the OFF position When the switch is in the “OFF” position , the map lights will not illuminate, regardless of any other condition. Center position JVI1038X The console light will turn on whenever the clearance lights or headlights are illuminated. SIC4572 Operate the map light switch to turn the map light on or off. : ON position : OFF position MAP LIGHTS Type A When the switch is in the center position, the map lights will illuminate under the following conditions: y the key is removed from the ignition switch — y MAP LIGHT CONTROL SWITCH (if equipped) — y remain on for a period of time. doors are unlocked by pushing the “UNLOCK” button (model with remote keyless entry system) with the ignition switch in the “LOCK” position remain on for a period of time. any door is opened — remain on while the door is opened. When the door is closed, the lights go off. JVI1039X Push the button to turn the map lights on. To turn them off, push the button again. 2-46 SIC4573 The map lights control switch has three positions: ON , OFF and center. Instruments and controls 2-Chapter 2.indd 46 2021/01/22 11:47:32 AM ROOM LIGHT (if equipped) entry system). y The last door is closed without the key in the ignition switch (models without Intelligent Key). BATTERY SAVER SYSTEM The lights will turn off after a period of time when the lights remain illuminated to prevent the battery from becoming discharged. The interior light timer will be cancelled when: y Any door is locked by pushing the “LOCK” button on the remote controller (if equipped) with the ignition switch in the “OFF” position. y Any door is locked by door handle request switch (if equipped) with the ignition switch in the “OFF” position. y The ignition switch is placed in the “ON” position. SIC2489 The room light has a three-position switch. When the switch is in the “ON” position room light illuminates. , the When the switch is in the “O” (Door) position , the room light illuminates when a door is opened. The interior light timer will keep the room light on for a period of time when: y The key is removed from the ignition switch with all doors closed (models without Intelligent Key). y The ignition switch is placed in the “OFF” position with all doors closed (models with Intelligent Key). y The driver’s door is unlocked without the key in the ignition switch (models without Intelligent Key). y The driver’s door is unlocked when the ignition switch is in the “LOCK” position (models with Intelligent Key). y The doors are unlocked with the “UNLOCK” button (model with remote keyless When the switch is in the “OFF” position , the room light does not illuminate, regardless of any condition. VANITY MIRROR LIGHTS (if equipped) SIC3869 To access the vanity mirror, pull the sun visor down and flip open the mirror cover. The vanity mirror light illuminates when the vanity mirror cover is opened. When the cover is closed, the light will turn off. Instruments and controls 2-Chapter 2.indd 47 2-47 2021/01/22 11:47:32 AM MEMO 2-48 Instruments and controls 2-Chapter 2.indd 48 2021/01/22 11:47:32 AM 3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments Keys ......................................................................................................................... 3-2 NISSAN Anti-Theft System (NATS*) key (if equipped) ............................................................................................. 3-2 Intelligent Key (if equipped) ......................................................... 3-2 Doors ...................................................................................................................... 3-4 Locking with key .................................................................................. 3-4 Locking with inside lock knob ................................................... 3-4 Locking with power door lock switch (if equipped) .. 3-4 Vehicle speed sensing door lock mechanism (if equipped)................................................................................................... 3-5 Impact sensing door lock releasing mechanism (if equipped)................................................................................................... 3-5 Child safety rear door locks (Double cab models) ...... 3-5 Remote keyless entry system (if equipped) .............................. 3-5 Using remote keyless entry system ...................................... 3-6 Intelligent key system (if equipped) ................................................ 3-6 Intelligent Key operating range ................................................ 3-8 Using Intelligent Key system ....................................................... 3-8 Battery saver system........................................................................ 3-9 Warning and audible reminders ............................................ 3-10 Troubleshooting guide ................................................................. 3-11 Using remote keyless entry system ................................... 3-13 Hazard indicator and horn operation ............................... 3-13 Security system (if equipped) ........................................................... 3-15 Theft warning system (if equipped) ................................... 3-15 NISSAN Anti-Theft System (NATS) ........................................ 3-15 Hood .................................................................................................................... 3-16 Opening hood ..................................................................................... 3-17 Closing hood ........................................................................................ 3-17 3-Chapter 3.indd 1 Fuel-filler lid and cap................................................................................ 3-17 Opening fuel-filler lid (if equipped) ...................................... 3-17 Fuel-filler cap........................................................................................ 3-18 Truck box .......................................................................................................... 3-19 Tailgate ..................................................................................................... 3-19 Tie down hooks (if equipped) .................................................. 3-20 C-Channel system (if equipped) ............................................ 3-20 Sport bar (if equipped).................................................................. 3-23 Steering wheel ............................................................................................. 3-23 Steering wheel adjustment ...................................................... 3-23 Mirrors ................................................................................................................ 3-23 Inside rearview mirror ................................................................... 3-23 Outside rearview mirrors ............................................................ 3-24 Vanity mirror (if equipped) ......................................................... 3-25 Parking brake ................................................................................................ 3-25 Front bumper ................................................................................................ 3-26 2021/01/13 11:55:55 AM KEYS Mechanical key A key number plate is supplied with your key. Record the key number on the key number plate/metal tag and keep it in a safe place (such as your wallet), NOT IN THE VEHICLE. NISSAN does not record key numbers so it is very important to keep track of your key number plate. A key number is only necessary when you have lost all keys and do not have one to duplicate from. If you still have a key, this key can be duplicated by a NISSAN dealer. NISSAN ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM (NATS*) KEY (if equipped) Type A 1. NATS key (Molded) (2) 2. Key number plate (1) JVP0085X Type B 1. NATS key (2) 2. Key number plate (1) Your vehicle can only be driven with the NATS keys, which are registered to your vehicle’s NATS components. As many as 5 NATS keys can be registered and used with one vehicle. The new keys must be registered by a NISSAN dealer prior to use with the NATS of your vehicle. Since the registration process requires erasing all memory in the NATS components when registering new keys, be sure to take all NATS keys that you have to the NISSAN dealer. JVP0298X To unfold the key from the fob, press the release button. When storing the key, press the release button and push key to fold the key back into fob slot. INTELLIGENT KEY (if equipped) CAUTION: Do not allow the NATS key, which contains an electrical transponder, to come into contact with water or salt water. This could affect the system function. *: Immobilizer 3-2 JVP0277X SPA2502 1. Intelligent Key (2) 2. Mechanical key (inside Intelligent Key) (2) 3. Key number plate (1) Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-Chapter 3.indd 2 2021/01/13 11:55:56 AM completely dry. WARNING: y The Intelligent Key transmits radio waves that can adversely affect medical electric equipment. y If you have a pacemaker, you should contact the medical equipment manufacturer to ask if it will be affected by the Intelligent Key signal. — Do not bend, drop or strike it against another object. — If the outside temperature is below -10°C (14°F), the battery of the Intelligent Key may not function properly. — Do not place the Intelligent Key for an extended period in a place where temperatures exceed 60°C (140°F). Your vehicle can only be driven with the Intelligent Keys, which are registered to your vehicle’s Intelligent Key system components and NISSAN Anti-Theft System (NATS*) components. As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be registered and used with one vehicle. The new keys must be registered by a NISSAN dealer prior to use with the Intelligent Key system and NATS of your vehicle. Since the registration process requires erasing all memory in the Intelligent Key system components when registering new keys, be sure to take all Intelligent Keys that you have to a NISSAN dealer. *: Immobilizer CAUTION: y Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with you. Do not leave the vehicle with the Intelligent Key inside. y Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with you when driving. The Intelligent Key is a precision device with a built-in transmitter. To avoid damaging it, please note the following. Mechanical key — Do not change or modify the Intelligent Key. — Do not use a magnet key holder. — Do not place the Intelligent Key near equipment that produces a magnetic field such as a TV, audio equipment and personal computers. — Do not allow the Intelligent Key to come into contact with water or salt water, and do not wash it in a washing machine. This could affect the system function. y SPA2033 To remove the mechanical key, release the lock knob at the back of the Intelligent Key. To install the mechanical key, firmly insert it into the Intelligent Key until the lock knob returns to the lock position. Use the mechanical key to lock or unlock the doors and tailgate (if equipped). (See "Doors" (P.3-4) and "Tailgate" (P.3-19).) If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, NISSAN recommends erasing the ID code of that Intelligent Key. This will prevent the Intelligent Key from unauthorized use to unlock the vehicle. For information regarding the erasing procedure, please contact a NISSAN dealer. — The Intelligent Key is water resistant; however, wetting may damage the Intelligent Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, immediately wipe until it is Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-Chapter 3.indd 3 3-3 2021/01/13 11:55:56 AM DOORS LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK KNOB WARNING: y Always look before opening any doors, to avoid an accident with oncoming traffic. y To help avoid risk of injury or death through unintended operation of the vehicle and or its systems, including entrapment in windows or inadvertent door lock activation, do not leave children, people who require the assistance of others or pets unattended in your vehicle. Additionally, the temperature in- side a closed vehicle on a warm day can quickly become high enough to cause a significant risk of injury or death to people and pets. LOCKING WITH KEY SPA2817 CAUTION: When locking the doors using the inside lock knob, be sure not to leave the key in the vehicle. To lock the door, insert the mechanical key to the door key cylinder and turn the key to the front side of the vehicle . To unlock the door, turn the key to the rear of the vehicle . 3-4 SPA2803 Operating the power door lock switch (located on the driver’s door) will lock or unlock all the doors. To lock the front doors, push the inside lock knob to the lock position , and then close the door while pulling the outside door handle. To lock the doors, push the power door lock switch to the lock position with the driver’s door open, then close the door while pulling the outside door handle. All doors will lock. To lock the rear doors (if equipped), push the inside lock knob to the lock position and then close the door. y When locking the doors using the power door lock switch, be sure not to leave the key in the vehicle. y When the Intelligent Key (if equipped) is left in the vehicle, and you try to lock the door using the power door lock switch after getting out of the vehicle, all the doors will unlock automatically after the door is closed. To unlock, pull the inside lock knob to the unlock position . SPA2588 LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR LOCK SWITCH (if equipped) For driver’s door (with power door lock switch): When the doors are locked, you do not need to operate the inside lock knob. Just pull the inside door handle to open the driver’s door. CAUTION: To unlock, push the power door lock switch to the unlock position . Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-Chapter 3.indd 4 2021/01/13 11:55:56 AM REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM (if equipped) VEHICLE SPEED SENSING DOOR LOCK MECHANISM (if equipped) CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCKS (Double cab models) All doors will be locked automatically when the vehicle speed reaches 10 km/h (6 MPH). Once the lock has been unlocked, while driving, the vehicle speed sensing door lock mechanism will not lock the door again unless one of the following is performed. y Opening any doors. y Placing the ignition switch in the “LOCK” position. To activate or deactivate vehicle speed sensing door lock mechanism To activate or deactivate the door lock mechanism, perform the following procedures. To activate or deactivate the vehicle speed sensing door lock mechanism, perform the following procedures. The remote keyless entry system can operate all door locks using the remote controller. The remote controller can operate at a distance of approximately 1 m (3.3 ft) away from the vehicle. The operating distance depends upon the conditions around the vehicle. As many as 5 remote controllers can be used with one vehicle. For information about the purchase and use of additional remote controllers, contact a NISSAN dealer. The remote controller will not function under the following conditions: JVP0279X The child safety rear door locks help prevent rear doors from being opened accidentally, especially when small children are in the vehicle. When the levers are in the lock position , the child safety rear door locks engage and the rear doors can only be opened by the outside door handles. y When the distance between the remote controller and vehicle is more than approximately 1 m (3.3 ft). y When the remote controller battery is discharged. y When the key is in the ignition switch. y When locking the doors using the remote controller, be sure not to leave the key in the vehicle. y Do not allow the remote controller, which contains electrical components, to come into contact with water or salt water. This could affect the system function. CAUTION: 1. Place the ignition switch in the “ON” position. 2. Within 20 seconds, push and hold the power door lock switch to the “LOCK” position for 5 seconds. 3. The hazard indicator light will flash as follows if the switching operation is successful: y Twice - activated y Once - deactivated Do not drop the remote controller. y y Do not strike the remote controller sharply against another object. y Do not place the remote controller for an extended period in an area where temperatures exceed 60°C (140°F). IMPACT SENSING DOOR LOCK RELEASING MECHANISM (if equipped) All doors will be unlocked automatically when the impact sensors sense an impact while the ignition switch is in the “ON” position. To disengage, move the levers to the unlock position . If a remote controller is lost or stolen, NISSAN recommends erasing the ID code of that remote Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-Chapter 3.indd 5 3-5 2021/01/13 11:55:56 AM INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM (if equipped) controller from the vehicle. This may prevent the unauthorized use of the remote controller to unlock the vehicle. For information regarding the erasing procedure, contact a NISSAN dealer. For information regarding the replacement of a battery, see "Battery" (P.8-18). USING REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM CAUTION: WARNING: After locking the doors using the remote controller, be sure that the doors have been securely locked by operating the door handles. y Radio waves could adversely affect electric medical equipment. Those who use a pacemaker should contact the electric medical equipment manufacturer for the possible influences before use. y The Intelligent Key transmits radio waves when the buttons are pushed. The radio waves may affect aircraft navigation and communication systems. Do not operate the Intelligent Key while on an airplane. Make sure the buttons are not operated unintentionally when the unit is stored during a flight. Unlocking doors 1. Push the “UNLOCK” remote controller. 2. All doors will be unlocked. button on the All doors will be locked automatically unless one of the following operations is performed within 30 seconds after pushing the “UNLOCK” button. y Opening any doors. y Inserting the key into the ignition switch. Battery indicator light UNLOCK button The battery indicator light illuminates when you push any button. If the light does not illuminate, the battery is weak or needs replacement. For information regarding replacement of a battery, see "Battery" (P.8-18). Battery indicator light Hazard indicator operation JVP0278X Jackknife type key release button LOCK button Locking doors 1. Remove the ignition key. 2. Close all doors. 3. Push the “LOCK” controller. 4. All doors will be locked. 5. Operate door handles to confirm that the doors have been securely locked. 3-6 button on the remote When you lock or unlock the doors, the hazard indicator will flash as a confirmation. y “LOCK”: The hazard indicator flashes once. y “UNLOCK”: The hazard indicator flashes twice. The Intelligent Key system can operate all doors using the remote controller function or pushing the request switch on the vehicle without taking the key out from a pocket or purse. The operating environment and/or conditions may affect the Intelligent Key system operation. Be sure to read the following before using the Intelligent Key system. CAUTION: y Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with you when operating the vehicle. y Never leave the Intelligent Key in the vehicle when you leave the vehicle. The Intelligent Key is always communicating with the vehicle as it receives radio waves. The Intelligent Key system transmits weak radio waves. Environmental conditions may interfere with the operation of the Intelligent Key system under the following operating conditions. Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-Chapter 3.indd 6 2021/01/13 11:55:57 AM y When operating near a location where strong radio waves are transmitted, such as a TV tower, power station and broadcasting station. y When in possession of wireless equipment, such as a cellular telephone, transceiver, and CB radio. y When the Intelligent Key is in contact with or covered by metallic materials. y When any type of radio wave remote control is used nearby. y When the Intelligent Key is placed near an electric appliance such as a personal computer. In such cases, correct the operating conditions before using the Intelligent Key function or use the mechanical key. Although the life of the battery varies depending on the operating conditions, the battery’s life is approximately 2 years. If the battery is discharged, replace it with a new one. When the Intelligent Key battery is almost discharged, see "Intelligent Key battery discharge" (P.5-11) to start the engine. Since the Intelligent Key is continuously receiving radio waves, if the key is left near equipment which transmits strong radio waves, such as signals from a TV and personal computer, the battery life may become shorter. For information regarding replacement of a battery, see "Battery" (P.8-18). Because the steering wheel is locked electrically, unlocking the steering wheel with the ignition switch in the “LOCK” position is impossible when the vehicle battery is completely discharged. Pay special attention that the vehicle battery is not completely discharged. As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be registered and used with one vehicle. For information about the purchase and use of additional Intelligent Keys, contact a NISSAN dealer. CAUTION: y Do not allow the Intelligent Key, which contains electrical components, to come into contact with water or salt water. This could affect the system function. y Do not drop the Intelligent Key. y Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharply against another object. y Do not change or modify the Intelligent Key. y Wetting may damage the Intelligent Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, immediately wipe until it is completely dry. y If the outside temperature is below −10°C (14°F), the battery of the Intelligent Key may not function properly. y Do not place the Intelligent Key for an extended period in an area where temperatures exceed 60°C (140°F). y Do not attach the Intelligent Key with a key holder that contains a magnet. y Do not place the Intelligent Key near equipment that produces a magnetic field, such as a TV, audio equipment and personal computers. prevent the unauthorized use of the Intelligent Key to operate the vehicle. For information regarding the erasing procedure, contact a NISSAN dealer. The Intelligent Key function can be disabled. For information about disabling the Intelligent Key function, contact a NISSAN dealer. If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, NISSAN recommends erasing the ID code of that Intelligent Key from the vehicle. This may Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-Chapter 3.indd 7 3-7 2021/01/13 11:55:57 AM INTELLIGENT KEY OPERATING RANGE y When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged y When the ignition switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position The Intelligent Key system (opening/closing doors with the door handle request switch) can be set to remain inactive. (See "Settings" (P.2-19).) JVP0312X The Intelligent Key functions can only be used when the Intelligent Key is within the specified operating range from the request switch . USING INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged or strong radio waves are present near the operating location, the Intelligent Key system’s operating range becomes narrower, and the Intelligent Key may not function properly. SPA2407 y Do not push the door handle request switch with the Intelligent Key held in your hand as illustrated. The close distance to the door handle will cause the Intelligent Key system to have difficulty recognizing that the Intelligent Key is outside the vehicle. y After locking the doors using the door handle request switch, make sure that the doors have been securely locked by operating the door handles. y When locking the doors using the door handle request switch, make sure to have the Intelligent Key in your possession before operating the door handle request switch to prevent the Intelligent Key from being left in the vehicle. The operating range is within 80 cm (31.50 in) from each request switch . If the Intelligent Key is too close to the door glass or door handle, the request switches may not function. When the Intelligent Key is within the operating range, it is possible for anyone, even someone who does not carry the Intelligent Key, to push the request switch to lock/unlock the doors. 3-8 SPA2075 The request switch will not function under the following conditions: y When another Intelligent Key is left inside the vehicle y When the Intelligent Key is not within the operational range y When any door is open or not closed securely Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-Chapter 3.indd 8 2021/01/13 11:55:57 AM y y The door handle request switch is operational only when the Intelligent Key has been detected by the Intelligent Key system. Do not pull the door handle before pushing the door handle request switch. The door will be unlocked but will not open. Release the door handle once and pull it again to open the door. contact a NISSAN dealer. Locking doors 1. Push the ignition switch to the “OFF” position. 2. Carry the Intelligent Key with you. 3. Close all doors. 1. Carry the Intelligent Key with you. 4. Push the door handle request switch (driver’s or front passenger's door). 2. Push the door handle request switch 3. All doors will be unlocked. 5. All doors will be locked. 6. Operate door handles to confirm that the doors have been securely locked. If a door handle is pulled while unlocking the doors, that door may not be unlocked. Returning the door handle to its original position will unlock the door. If the door does not unlock, after returning the door handle, push the door handle request switch to unlock the door. Lockout protection: SPA2333 To prevent the Intelligent Key from being accidentally locked in the vehicle, lockout protection is equipped with the Intelligent Key system. y When you carry the Intelligent Key with you, you can lock or unlock all doors by pushing the door handle request switch (driver's or front passenger's door) within the range of operation. When you lock or unlock the doors, the hazard indicator will flash as a confirmation. For details, see"Hazard indicator and horn operation" (P.3-13). Welcome light and farewell light function (if equipped) When you lock or unlock the doors, the clearance lights, tail lights and the license plate light will illuminate for a period of time. The welcome light and farewell light function can be disabled. For information about disabling the welcome light and farewell light function, or near metallic materials. The lockout protection may function when the Intelligent Key is outside the vehicle but is too close to the vehicle. When the Intelligent Key is left in the vehicle and you try to lock the door using the power door lock switch after getting out of the vehicle, all the doors will unlock automatically and a chime will sound after the door is closed. CAUTION: The lockout protection may not function under the following conditions: y When the Intelligent Key is placed on top of the instrument panel. y When the Intelligent Key is placed inside of the glove box. y When the Intelligent Key is placed inside of the door pockets. y When the Intelligent Key is placed inside Unlocking doors Automatic relock: All doors will be locked automatically unless one of the following operations is performed within 30 seconds after pushing the request switch while the doors are locked. y Opening any doors. y Pushing the ignition switch. If during the preset time period the “UNLOCK” button on the Intelligent Key is pushed, all doors will be locked automatically after the next preset time. BATTERY SAVER SYSTEM When all the following conditions are met for a period of time, the battery saver system will cut off the power supply to prevent battery discharge. y The ignition switch is in the “ACC” position, and y All doors are closed, and Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-Chapter 3.indd 9 . 3-9 2021/01/13 11:55:57 AM y The shift lever is in the “P” (Park) position (automatic transmission model). WARNING AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS The Intelligent Key system is equipped with a function that is designed to minimize improper operations of the Intelligent Key and to help prevent the vehicle from being stolen. A chime or beep sounds inside and outside the vehicle and a warning message appears in the vehicle information display. See the troubleshooting guide on the next page and "Vehicle information display (models with color display)" (P.2-18). CAUTION: When the chime or beep sounds or the warning message appears, be sure to check both the vehicle and the Intelligent Key. 3-10 Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-Chapter 3.indd 10 2021/01/13 11:55:57 AM TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE Symptom The Shift to Park warning appears in the vehicle information display and When pushing the ignition switch to the inside warning chime sounds stop the engine continuously or for a few seconds. (Automatic Transmission models) The inside warning chime sounds When shifting the shift lever to the P continuously. (Automatic Transmis(Park) position sion models) When opening the driver’s door to The inside warning chime sounds get out of the vehicle continuously. The No Key Detected warning appears on the display, the outside chime sounds 3 times and the inside warning chime sounds for a When closing the door after getting few seconds. out of the vehicle The Shift to Park warning appears in the vehicle information display and the outside chime sounds continuously. (Automatic Transmission models) When pushing the request switch or The outside chime sounds for a few the “LOCK” button on the Intelliseconds and all the doors unlock. gent Key to lock the door When closing the door with the The outside chime sounds for a few inside lock knob turned to “LOCK” seconds and all the doors unlock. Possible cause Action to take The shift lever is not in the “P” (Park) Shift the shift lever to the “P” (Park) position. position. The ignition switch is in the “ACC” or Push the ignition switch to the “OFF” “ON” position. position. The ignition switch is in the “ACC” Push the ignition switch to the “OFF” position. position. The ignition switch is in the “ACC” or Push the ignition switch to the “OFF” “ON” position. position. The ignition switch is in the “ACC” or Move the shift lever to the “P” (Park) “OFF” position and the shift lever is position and push the ignition not in the “P” (Park) position. switch to the “OFF” position. The Intelligent Key is inside the Carry the Intelligent Key with you. vehicle. The Intelligent Key is inside the Carry the Intelligent Key with you. vehicle. The Intelligent Key is inside the Carry the Intelligent Key with you. vehicle. When pushing the door handle The outside chime sounds for a few A door is not closed securely. Close the door securely. request switch to lock the door seconds. The door handle request switch is Push the door handle request pushed before the door is closed. switch after the door is closed. Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-Chapter 3.indd 11 3-11 2021/01/13 11:55:57 AM Symptom Possible cause The Key Battery Low warning appears in the vehicle information The battery charge is low. display. When pushing the ignition switch to The No Key Detected warning apstart the engine pears in the display and the inside The Intelligent Key is not in the warning chime sounds for a few vehicle. seconds. It warns of a malfunction with the The Key System Error warning electrical steering lock system (if When pushing the ignition switch appears in the vehicle information equipped) or the Intelligent Key display. system. 3-12 Action to take Replace the battery with a new one. (See “Intelligent Key battery” (P.8-20).) Carry the Intelligent Key with you. Contact a NISSAN dealer. Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-Chapter 3.indd 12 2021/01/13 11:55:57 AM USING REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM Locking doors SPA2349 LOCK button 1. Place the ignition switch in the “OFF” position. 2. Carry the Intelligent Key with you. 3. Close all doors. 4. Push the “LOCK” Intelligent Key. 5. All doors will be locked. 6. Operate the door handles to confirm that the doors have been securely locked. y After locking the doors using the Intelligent Key, be sure that the doors have been securely locked by operating the door handles. The remote keyless entry system allows you to lock/unlock all doors. The operating distance depends upon the conditions around the vehicle. To securely operate the lock and unlock buttons, approach the vehicle to about 1 m (3.3 ft) from the door. y When locking the doors using the Intelligent Key, be sure not to leave the key in the vehicle. The remote keyless entry system will not function under the following conditions: y When the Intelligent Key is not within the operational range. y When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged. For information regarding the replacement of a battery, see Battery" (P.8-18). on the HAZARD INDICATOR AND HORN OPERATION When you lock or unlock the doors, the hazard indicator will flash and the outside chime will sound as a confirmation. The following descriptions show how the hazard indicator and chime will activate when locking or unlocking the doors. CAUTION: UNLOCK button Operating range button all doors will be locked automatically after the next preset time. Unlocking doors 1. Push the “UNLOCK” Intelligent Key. button 2. All doors will be unlocked. on the Automatic relock: All doors will be locked automatically unless one of the following operations is performed within 30 seconds after pushing the “UNLOCK” button on the Intelligent Key while the doors are locked. y Opening any doors. y Pushing the ignition switch. If during the preset time period the “UNLOCK” button on the Intelligent Key is pushed, Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-Chapter 3.indd 13 3-13 2021/01/13 11:55:58 AM Operation DOOR LOCK DOOR UNLOCK Intelligent Key system (using request switch) HAZARD - once OUTSIDE CHIME - once HAZARD - twice OUTSIDE CHIME - twice Remote keyless entry system (using or request switch) HAZARD - once OUTSIDE CHIME - once HAZARD - twice OUTSIDE CHIME - twice 3-14 Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-Chapter 3.indd 14 2021/01/13 11:55:58 AM SECURITY SYSTEM (if equipped) Your vehicle has either or both of the following security systems: y Theft warning system y NISSAN Anti-Theft System (NATS*) How to activate system (if equipped) The alarm is activated by: 1. y Close all windows. The system can be armed even if the windows are open. Unlocking the door without using the remote controller, the Intelligent Key, the door handle request switch (if equipped) or the mechanical key. (Even if the door is opened by releasing the door inside lock knob, the alarm will activate.) *: Immobilizer 2. The security condition will be shown by the security indicator light. Place the ignition switch in the “OFF” position. 3. Carry the remote controller or the Intelligent Key with you and get out of the vehicle. How to stop alarm 4. Close and lock all doors. The doors can be locked with the remote controller, the Intelligent Key or door handle request switch (if equipped). y The alarm will stop only by unlocking a door by pushing the “UNLOCK” button on the Intelligent Key. y 5. Confirm that the security indicator light comes on. The security indicator light glows for about 30 seconds and then blinks. The system is now activated. If, during this 30 second time period, the door is unlocked or the ignition switch is placed in the “ACC” or “ON” position, the system will not activate. The alarm will not stop if the ignition switch is placed in the “ACC” or “ON” position. THEFT WARNING SYSTEM (if equipped) The theft warning system provides visual and audio alarm signals if parts of the vehicle are disturbed. Security indicator light SIC2045 The security indicator light, located on the meter panel, operates whenever the ignition switch is in the “LOCK”, “OFF” or “ACC” position. This is normal. Even when the driver and/or passengers are in the vehicle, the system will activate with all doors locked with the ignition switch in the “LOCK” position. When pushing the ignition switch to the “ACC” or “ON” position, the system will be released. Theft warning system operation The vehicle security system will give the following alarm: y The hazard indicator blinks and the horn sounds intermittently. y The alarm automatically turns off after approximately 30 seconds. However, the alarm reactivates if the vehicle is tampered with again. NISSAN ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM (NATS) The NISSAN Anti-Theft System (NATS) will not allow the engine to start without the use of the registered NATS key. If the engine does not start using the registered NATS key, it may be due to interference caused by: y Another NATS key. y Automated toll road device. y Automated payment device. y Other devices that transmit similar signals. Start the engine using the following procedure: 1. Remove any items that may be causing the interference away from the NATS key. 2. Leave the ignition switch in the “ON” position for approximately 5 seconds. 3. Place the ignition switch in the “OFF” or “LOCK” position, and wait approximately 10 seconds. Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-Chapter 3.indd 15 3-15 2021/01/13 11:55:58 AM HOOD 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 again. 5. Start the engine. The security indicator light is located in the meter panel. It indicates the status of NATS. 6. Repeat the steps above until all possible interferences are eliminated. If this procedure allows the engine to start, NISSAN recommends placing the registered NATS key separate from other devices to avoid interference. FCC Notice: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. The light operates whenever the ignition switch is in the “LOCK”, “ACC” or “OFF” position. The security indicator light indicates that the security systems on the vehicle are operational. If NATS is malfunctioning, this light will remain on while the ignition switch is in the “ON” position. WARNING: y The hood must be closed and latched securely before driving. Failure to do so could cause the hood to fly open and result in an accident. y Never open the hood if steam or smoke is coming from the engine compartment to avoid injury. If the light remains on and/or the engine does not start, contact a NISSAN dealer for NATS service as soon as possible. Be sure to bring all Intelligent Keys that you have when visiting a NISSAN dealer for service. Note: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. Security indicator light SIC2045 3-16 Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-Chapter 3.indd 16 2021/01/13 11:55:58 AM FUEL-FILLER LID AND CAP OPENING HOOD WARNING: y Fuel is extremely flammable and highly explosive under certain conditions. You could be burned or seriously injured if it is misused or mishandled. Always stop the engine and do not smoke or allow open flames or sparks near the vehicle when refueling. y Fuel may be under pressure. Turn the cap a half of a turn, and wait for any “hissing” sound to stop to prevent fuel from spraying out and possibly causing personal injury. Then remove the cap. y Use only an original equipment type fuel-filler cap as a replacement. It has a built-in safety valve needed for proper operation of the fuel system and emission control system. An incorrect cap can result in a serious malfunction and possible injury. WAD0243X Pull the hood lock release handle located below the instrument panel until the hood springs up. CLOSING HOOD 1. 2. Locate the lever in between the hood and grille and push the lever with your fingertips. While supporting the hood, return the support rod to its original position. 2. 3. Raise the hood. Slowly lower the hood to about 20 to 30 cm (8 to 12 in) above the hood lock, then let it drop. 4. Remove the support rod and insert it into the slot . 3. Make sure it is securely latched. 1. Hold the coated parts when removing or resetting the support rod. Avoid direct contact with the metal parts, as they may be hot immediately after the engine has been stopped. OPENING FUEL-FILLER LID (if equipped) Type A JVP0365X Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-Chapter 3.indd 17 3-17 2021/01/13 11:55:58 AM To open the fuel-filler lid, turn the key clockwise . To lock, close it and turn the key counterclockwise . FUEL-FILLER CAP Type B Type A Type B WAD0235X WAD0232X WAD0234X To open the fuel-filler lid, unlock it using one of the following operations, then push the right side of the lid. y Push the door handle request switch while carrying the Intelligent Key (if equipped). y Push the “UNLOCK” button on the Intelligent Key or remote controller. y Push the power door lock switch to the “UNLOCK” position. y Use the driver's door key cylinder to unlock the fuel-filler lid. The fuel-filler cap is a ratcheting type. Turn the cap counterclockwise to remove. Tighten the cap clockwise until ratchet clicks, more than twice, after refueling. Route the fuel-filler cap strap around the hook while refueling. CAUTION: If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body, flush it away with water to avoid paint damage. The fuel-filler cap is a ratcheting type. Turn the cap counterclockwise to remove. Tighten the cap clockwise until ratchet clicks, more than twice, after refueling. Put the fuel-filler cap on the cap holder refueling. while CAUTION: If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body, flush it away with water to avoid paint damage. To lock the fuel-filler lid, close the lid until it securely locks. 3-18 Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-Chapter 3.indd 18 2021/01/13 11:55:59 AM TRUCK BOX Type C Opening the tailgate WARNING: y While driving, never allow anyone to ride in the cargo area. Abrupt braking or stopping could lead to personal injury. y Do not drive the vehicle with the tailgate down. y Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury. Type A: TAILGATE Locking or unlocking tailgate (if equipped) JVP0370X WAD0242X To open the fuel-filler cap, turn the key counterclockwise . To lock the tailgate, insert the key to the tailgate key cylinder and turn the key clockwise . Turn the fuel-filler cap counterclockwise the cap is unlocked. To unlock the tailgate, turn the key counterclockwise . after The fuel-filler cap is a screw-on ratcheting type. After refueling, tighten the cap clockwise until more than 2 ratcheting clicks are heard. The fuel-filler cap locks automatically when it is tightened. SPA1871 To open the tailgate, pull the tailgate handle and lower the tailgate. The support wires will hold the gate open. For Intelligent Key equipped models, see"Mechanical key" (P.3-3) for removing the mechanical key. Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-Chapter 3.indd 19 3-19 2021/01/13 11:55:59 AM Type B: ropes or straps to prevent it from shifting or sliding within the vehicle. WARNING: y Do not drive the vehicle with the tailgate down. C-CHANNEL SYSTEM (if equipped) y While driving, never allow anyone to ride in the cargo area. Abrupt braking or stopping could lead to personal injury. y Properly install and tighten the tie-down cleats into the C-Channel system. Also, do not attach any rope or straps directly to the channel. Failure to properly install the tie-down cleats or attaching ropes or straps directly to the channel can cause the cargo to become unsecured. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury. y Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury. y Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury. y Overloading not only can shorten the life of your vehicle and the tire, but can also cause unsafe vehicle handling and longer braking distances. This may cause a premature tire failure which could result in a serious accident and personal injury. Failures caused by overloading are not covered by the vehicle’s warranty. y Do not install accessories over the gap between the front and rear side channels. Doing so could affect the rear structure in certain rear impacts, which could result in serious injury. y WARNING: Do not pull down the tailgate without attaching the support wires. Doing so may cause damage to the torsion bar assist tailgate (Double Cab model) and the tailgate will hit the rear bumper. Closing the tailgate When closing the tailgate, make sure that the latches or levers are securely locked. TIE DOWN HOOKS (if equipped) SPA1872 To open the tailgate, pull the tailgate levers and lower the tailgate. The support wires will hold the gate open. y The weight of the cargo load must be evenly distributed over both the front and the rear axles. y All cargo should be securely fastened with ropes or straps to prevent it from shifting or sliding within the vehicle. 3-20 JVP0619X For your convenience, four tie down hooks are placed on the inside of the truck box. These may be used to help secure cargo loaded into the truck box. y The weight of the cargo load must be evenly distributed over both the front and rear axles. y All cargo should be securely fastened with The C-Channel system allows you to move tie- Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-Chapter 3.indd 20 2021/01/13 11:55:59 AM down clamps in the bed to the best location to secure a load. The tie-down cleats must be installed so the clamp is properly seated in the notches in the rail. If the tie-down cleat is not seated in the notches, it will not be properly tightened. The bolt in the center of the cleat must be securely tightened. Check the tightness of the tie-down cleat periodically during a trip to make sure the center bolt has not become loose. JVP0357X Side channels Install the tie-down cleat as follows: 1. Loosen the center bolt completely. JVP0359X JVP0358X 2. Insert the cleat into the channel perpendicular to the channel as shown. Then rotate the cleat clockwise 90° and slide it to desired location. 3. Position the cleat so the nubs on the bottom fully seat into the channel detents. Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-Chapter 3.indd 21 3-21 2021/01/13 11:55:59 AM JVP0360X JVP0362X 4. 3-22 There should be no gap between the bottom of the cleat and the top of the channel. Securely tighten the center bolt. JVP0361X CAUTION: y Install only one cleat per section of channel. y Applying loads at angles to the cleats that are greater than 45° or loads greater than 90 kg (200 lbs.) may cause damage to the channel or the bed. Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-Chapter 3.indd 22 2021/01/13 11:55:59 AM MIRRORS STEERING WHEEL SPORT BAR (if equipped) STEERING WHEEL ADJUSTMENT WARNING: WARNING: Never adjust the steering wheel while driving so that full attention may be given to vehicle operation. Adjust the position of all mirrors before driving. Do not adjust the mirror positions while driving so that full attention may be given to vehicle operation. INSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR While holding the inside rearview mirror, adjust the mirror angles until the desired position is achieved. JVP0406X CAUTION: Do not put a load on the sport bar as the examples shown in the illustration. The sport bar is an accessory for ornamental purposes which is not designed to support and hold the weight of the objects including tension and pressure on itself. SPA2225 Pull the lock lever down and adjust the steering wheel up or down until the desired position is achieved. Push the lock lever back firmly to lock the steering wheel in place. SPA2447 Manual anti-glare type SPA2143 Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-Chapter 3.indd 23 3-23 2021/01/13 11:55:59 AM Pull the adjusting lever when the glare from the headlights of the vehicle behind you obstructs your vision at night. Push the adjusting lever during the day for the best rearward visibility. Automatic anti-glare type The anti-glare system will be automatically turned on when you push the ignition switch to the “ON” position. Adjusting Manual type: When the system is turned on, the indicator light will illuminate and excessive glare from the headlights of the vehicle behind you will be reduced. Push the switch for 3 seconds to make the inside rearview mirror operate normally and the indicator light will turn off. Push the switch again for 3 seconds to turn the system on. Do not hang any objects on the mirror or apply glass cleaner. Doing so will reduce the sensitivity of the sensor , resulting in improper operation. OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRRORS Type A Type B JVP0132X The inside rearview mirror is designed so that it automatically changes reflection according to the intensity of the headlights of the vehicle following you. 3-24 WARNING: SPA2162 y Never touch the outside rearview mirrors while they are in motion. Doing so may pinch your fingers or damage the mirror. y Never drive the vehicle with the outside rearview mirrors folded. This reduces rear view visibility and may lead to an accident. y Objects viewed in the outside mirror are closer than they appear (if equipped). y The picture dimensions and distance in the outside mirrors are not real. JVP0407X The outside rearview mirror can be moved in any direction for a better rear view. Remote control type: JVP0326X The outside rearview mirror remote control operates when the ignition switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position. 1. Turn the switch to select the left (L) or right (R) mirror . 2. Adjust each mirror by pushing the switch until the desired position is achieved . Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-Chapter 3.indd 24 2021/01/13 11:56:00 AM PARKING BRAKE Defogging (if equipped) “ACC” or “ON” position. The outside rearview mirrors will be heated when the rear window defogger switch or the mirror heater switch is operated. Folding The outside rearview mirrors automatically fold when the outside rearview mirror folding switch is pushed in. To unfold, push to the switch again. CAUTION: Continuously performing the fold/unfold operation of the outside rearview mirror may cause the switch to stop the operation. Manual type: Automatic fold (if equipped): The outside rearview mirrors automatically fold when the doors are locked, and unfold when the ignition switch is placed in the “ACC” or “ON” position. For information about disabling the automatic fold function, see "Settings" (P.2-19). VANITY MIRROR (if equipped) SPA1829 Fold the outside rearview mirror by pushing it toward the rear of the vehicle. WARNING: y Never drive the vehicle with the parking brake applied. The brake will overheat and fail to operate and will lead to an accident. y Never release the parking brake from outside the vehicle. If the vehicle moves, it will be impossible to push the brake pedal and will lead to an accident. y Never use the shift lever in place of the parking brake. When parking, be sure the parking brake is fully applied. y To help avoid risk of injury or death through unintended operation of the vehicle and/or its systems, do not leave children, people who require the assistance of others or pets unattended in your vehicle. Additionally, the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a warm day can quickly become high enough to cause a significant risk of injury or death to people and pets. Remote control type: SIC3869 To use the front vanity mirror, pull down the sun visor and pull up the cover. SPA2110 JVP0327X The outside rearview mirror remote control operates when the ignition switch is in the To apply the parking brake, pull the parking brake lever up . Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-Chapter 3.indd 25 3-25 2021/01/13 11:56:00 AM FRONT BUMPER To release the parking brake, depress and hold the foot brake pedal. Pull up the parking brake lever slightly, push the button and lower the lever completely . Before driving, be sure that the brake warning light has turned off. WAD0253X CAUTION: Do not place your foot on or step on the front bumper. Doing so may result in damage to the front bumper. 3-26 Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-Chapter 3.indd 26 2021/01/13 11:56:00 AM 4 Monitor, air conditioner, audio and phone system NissanConnect owner’s manual (if equipped) ........................ 4-3 Safety precautions ....................................................................................... 4-3 Rear view monitor (if equipped)......................................................... 4-3 How to read the displayed lines ............................................... 4-4 Difference between predictive and actual distances...................................................................................................................... 4-4 How to park with predictive course lines (if equipped)................................................................................................... 4-6 How to adjust the screen (if equipped) ............................... 4-7 How to turn on and off predictive course lines (if equipped)................................................................................................... 4-7 How to turn on and off guide lines (if equipped) ......... 4-7 Operating tips ........................................................................................ 4-7 Intelligent around view monitor (if equipped) ........................ 4-8 Available views....................................................................................... 4-9 Off-road monitor (if equipped) ............................................... 4-11 Difference between predictive and actual distances................................................................................................................... 4-12 How to switch the display.......................................................... 4-13 Camera aiding parking sensor (sonar) function (if equipped)................................................................................................ 4-13 Moving Object Detection (MOD) ............................................ 4-14 How to adjust the screen (if equipped) ............................ 4-16 Operating tips ..................................................................................... 4-16 Ventilators ....................................................................................................... 4-17 Center ventilators ............................................................................ 4-17 Side ventilators................................................................................... 4-17 Rear ventilators (if equipped) .................................................. 4-17 Heater and air conditioner.................................................................. 4-18 Operating tips (models with automatic 4-Chapter 4.indd 1 air conditioner) ................................................................................... 4-18 Manual air conditioner and heater ..................................... 4-19 Automatic air conditioner .......................................................... 4-21 Servicing air conditioner ............................................................. 4-23 Audio system (if equipped) ................................................................. 4-23 Audio operation precautions................................................... 4-23 FM-AM radio with compact disc (CD) player (Type A) ..................................................................................................... 4-31 FM-AM radio with compact disc (CD) player (Type B) ..................................................................................................... 4-36 FM-AM radio with compact disc (CD) player (Type C)..................................................................................................... 4-43 FM-AM radio with compact disc (CD) player (Type D)..................................................................................................... 4-49 USB (Universal Serial Bus) connection port .................. 4-55 AUX (auxiliary) input jack............................................................. 4-55 CD/USB memory care and cleaning .................................. 4-56 Audio control steering switch (if equipped) ................. 4-56 Antenna............................................................................................................. 4-58 Roof antenna ....................................................................................... 4-58 Pillar antenna ...................................................................................... 4-58 Car phone and CB radio ....................................................................... 4-58 Bluetooth® hands-free phone system (Type A) .................. 4-59 Regulatory information ............................................................... 4-59 Control buttons and microphone........................................ 4-59 Bluetooth® settings ........................................................................ 4-60 Using the system .............................................................................. 4-61 General settings ................................................................................ 4-64 Bluetooth® hands-free phone system (Type B) .................. 4-65 2021/01/13 01:16:47 PM Regulatory information ............................................................... 4-66 Using the system ............................................................................. 4-66 Bluetooth® settings ........................................................................ 4-68 4-Chapter 4.indd 2 2021/01/13 01:16:47 PM NISSANCONNECT OWNER’S MANUAL (if equipped) For models with NissanConnect System, refer to the NissanConnect Owner’s Manual that includes the following information. SAFETY PRECAUTIONS WARNING: y Do not adjust the heater and air conditioner controls or audio controls while driving so that full attention may be given to vehicle operation. y If you noticed any foreign objects entering the system hardware, spilled liquid on the system, or noticed smoke or fumes coming out from the system, or any other unusual operation is observed, stop using the system immediately and contact the nearest NISSAN dealer. Ignoring such conditions may lead to an accident, fire or electric shock. Available functions may vary depending on the models, specifications and software version. y Audio y Hands-free phone y Apple CarPlay y Android Auto y Navigation y Voice recognition y Information and settings viewable on NissanConnect REAR VIEW MONITOR (if equipped) y Do not disassemble or modify this system. If you do, it may lead to an accident, fire, or electric shock. CAUTION: Do not use the system when the engine is not running for extended periods of time to prevent battery discharge. WAE0084X When the shift lever is shifted into the “R” (Reverse) position, the monitor display shows the view to the rear of the vehicle. The system is designed as an aid to the driver in detecting large stationary objects to help avoid damaging the vehicle. The system will not detect small objects below the bumper and may not detect objects close to the bumper or on the ground. WARNING: Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the rear view monitor could result in serious injury or death. y The rear view monitor is a convenience but it is not a substitute for proper backing. Always turn and look out the windows, and check mirrors to be sure that it is safe to move before operating the vehicle. Always back up slowly. y The system is designed as an aid to the driver in showing large stationary objects directly behind the vehicle, to help avoid damaging the vehicle. Monitor, air conditioner, audio and phone system 4-Chapter 4.indd 3 4-3 2021/01/13 01:16:47 PM y The system cannot completely eliminate blind spots and may not show every object. y Underneath the bumper and the corner areas of the bumper cannot be viewed on the rear view monitor because of its monitoring range limitation. The system will not show small objects below the bumper, and may not show objects close to the bumper or on the ground. HOW TO READ THE DISPLAYED LINES DIFFERENCE BETWEEN PREDICTIVE AND ACTUAL DISTANCES The distance guide line and the vehicle width guide line should be used as a reference only when the vehicle is on a level, paved surface. The distance viewed on the monitor is for reference only and may be different than the actual distance between the vehicle and displayed objects. y Objects viewed in the rear view monitor differ from actual distance because a wide-angle lens is used. y Objects in the rear view monitor will appear visually opposite compared to when viewed in the rear view and outside mirrors. Guiding lines which indicate the vehicle width and distances to objects with reference to the bumper line are displayed on the monitor. y Make sure that the tailgate is securely closed when backing up. Indicate distances from the vehicle body. y Do not put anything on the rear view camera. The rear view camera is installed on top of the tailgate. y y When washing the vehicle with high pressure water, be sure not to spray it around the camera. Otherwise, water may enter the camera unit causing water condensation on the lens, a malfunction, fire or an electric shock. Do not strike the camera. It is a precision instrument. Otherwise, it may malfunction or cause damage resulting in a fire or an electric shock. CAUTION: Do not scratch the camera lens when cleaning dirt or snow from the lens. 4-4 the predictive course lines are wider than the actual width and course. SAA1896 Distance guide lines: y Red line y Yellow line : approx. 0.5 m (1.5 ft) : approx. 1 m (3 ft) y Green line : approx. 2 m (7 ft) y Green line : approx. 3 m (10 ft) Vehicle width guide lines : Indicate the vehicle width when backing up. Predictive course lines (if equipped): Indicate the predictive course when backing up. The predictive course lines will be displayed on the monitor when the shift lever is in the “R” (Reverse) position and the steering wheel is turned. The predictive course lines will move depending on how much the steering wheel is turned and will not be displayed while the steering wheel is in the neutral position. The vehicle width guide lines and the width of Monitor, air conditioner, audio and phone system 4-Chapter 4.indd 4 2021/01/13 01:16:47 PM Backing up on a steep uphill Backing up on a steep downhill JVH0893X When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide lines are shown closer than the actual distance. For example, the display shows 1 m (3 ft) to the place , but the actual 1 m (3 ft) distance on the hill is the place . Note that any object on the hill is viewed in the monitor further than it appears. Backing up near a projecting object JVH0894X When backing up the vehicle down a hill, the distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide lines are shown further than the actual distance. For example, the display shows 1 m (3 ft) to the place , but the actual 1 m (3 ft) distance on the hill is the place . Note that any object on the hill is viewed in the monitor closer than it appears. WAE0134X The predictive course lines (if equipped) do not touch the object in the display. However, the vehicle may hit the object if it projects over the actual backing up course. Monitor, air conditioner, audio and phone system 4-Chapter 4.indd 5 4-5 2021/01/13 01:16:47 PM Backing up behind a projecting object HOW TO PARK WITH PREDICTIVE COURSE LINES (if equipped) WARNING: y If the tyres are replaced with different sized tyres, the predictive course lines may not be displayed correctly. y On a snow-covered or slippery road, there may be a difference between the predictive course lines and the actual course line. y If the battery is disconnected or becomes discharged, the predictive course lines may not be displayed correctly. If this occurs, perform the following procedures. — Turn the steering wheel from lock to lock while the engine is running. — Drive the vehicle on a straight road for more than 5 minutes. SSA1897 JVH0895X The position is shown further than the position in the display. However, the position is actually at the same distance as the position . The vehicle may hit the object when backing up to the position if the object projects over the actual backing up course. 4-6 1. Visually check that the parking space is safe before parking your vehicle. 2. The rear view of the vehicle is displayed on the screen as illustrated when the shift lever is moved to the “R” (Reverse) position. Monitor, air conditioner, audio and phone system 4-Chapter 4.indd 6 2021/01/13 01:16:48 PM position (MT model) and apply the parking brake. pushing the MENU button , touching the “Settings” key and then touching the “Camera” key. HOW TO ADJUST THE SCREEN (if equipped) HOW TO TURN ON AND OFF PREDICTIVE COURSE LINES (if equipped) NOTE: 1. Push the CAMERA button. Do not adjust the screen while the vehicle is moving. 2. Touch the “Predictive Course Lines” key to turn on and off the predictive course lines. Adjusting screen The “Predictive Course Lines” key can also be shown by pushing the MENU button, touching the “Settings” key and then touching the “Camera” key. HOW TO TURN ON AND OFF GUIDE LINES (if equipped) When the rear view monitor is displayed, you can switch the vehicle width guide lines and distance guide lines on/off by pushing the CAMERA button. WAE0138X WAE0465X 3. 4. 5. Slowly back up the vehicle adjusting the steering wheel so that the predictive course lines enter the parking space . Maneuver the steering wheel to make the vehicle width guide lines parallel to the parking space while referring to the predictive course lines . When the vehicle is parked in the space completely, move the shift lever to the “P” (Park) position (AT model) or the “N” (Neutral) 1. Push the CAMERA button . 2. Touch the “Display Settings” key. 3. Select the setting items you wish to adjust by touching or by turning and pushing the TUNE SCROLL dial . OPERATING TIPS y When the shift lever is shifted to the “R” (Reverse) position, the monitor screen automatically changes to the rear view monitor mode. However, the radio can be heard. y It may take some time until the rear view monitor or the normal screen is displayed after the shift lever has been shifted to “R” (Reverse) from another position or to another position from “R” (Reverse). Objects may be distorted momentarily until the rear view monitor screen is displayed completely. y When the temperature is extremely high or low, the screen may not clearly display objects. This is not a malfunction. Available setting items: y Brightness y Contrast y Tint y Colour/Color y Black Level The “Display Settings” key can also be shown by Monitor, air conditioner, audio and phone system 4-Chapter 4.indd 7 4-7 2021/01/13 01:16:48 PM INTELLIGENT AROUND VIEW MONITOR (if equipped) y When strong light directly enters the camera, objects may not be displayed clearly. This is not a malfunction. y Vertical lines may be seen in objects on the screen. This is due to strong reflected light from the bumper. This is not a malfunction. y The screen may flicker under fluorescent light. This is not a malfunction. y The colors of objects on the rear view monitor may differ somewhat from those of the actual object. y Objects on the monitor may not be clear in a dark place or at night. This is not a malfunction. y If dirt, rain or snow attaches to the camera, the rear view monitor may not clearly display objects. Clean the camera. y Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner to clean the camera. This will cause discoloration. To clean the camera, wipe with a cloth dampened with diluted mild cleaning agent and then wipe with a dry cloth. y Do not damage the camera as the monitor screen may be adversely affected. y Do not use wax on the camera window. Wipe off any wax with a clean cloth dampened with mild detergent diluted with water. passenger’s side wheel. y Front View The view to the front of the vehicle. y Rear View The view to the rear of the vehicle. The system is designed as an aid to the driver in situations such as slot parking or parallel parking. WARNING: Type A Type B JVH0648X y The front camera view may be obscured when fitting equipment to the front of the vehicle such as bullbar, nudge bar or additional lamps. y The driver is always responsible for safety during parking and other manoeuvres. WAE0085X With the ignition switch in the “ON” position, push the DISP button (if equipped) / CAMERA button (if equipped) or move the shift lever to the “R” (Reverse) position to operate the Intelligent Around View Monitor. The monitor displays various views of the position of the vehicle. Available views: 4-8 y Bird’s-eye View The surrounding view of the vehicle. y Front-side View The view around and ahead of the front Monitor, air conditioner, audio and phone system 4-Chapter 4.indd 8 2021/01/13 01:16:48 PM WARNING: y WAE0556X There are some areas where the system will not display objects. When in the front or the rear view display, an object below the bumper or on the ground may not be displayed . When in the bird’s-eye view, a tall object near the seam of the camera detecting areas will not appear in the monitor . CAUTION: The Intelligent Around View Monitor is a convenient feature but it is not a substitute for proper vehicle operation because it has areas where objects cannot be viewed. Always look out the windows and check mirrors to be sure that it is safe to move. y The driver is always responsible for safety during parking and other maneuvers. y Do not use the Intelligent Around View Monitor with the outside mirror in the stored position, and make sure that the tailgate is securely closed when operating the vehicle using the Intelligent Around View Monitor. Clean the camera lens with soft cloth to keep it free from dirt, snow, etc. Do not scratch the lens when cleaning. AVAILABLE VIEWS WARNING: y The distance guide line and the vehicle width line should be used as a reference only when the vehicle is on a paved, level surface. The distance viewed on the monitor is for reference only and may be different than the actual distance between the vehicle and displayed objects. y Use the displayed lines and the bird's-eye view as a reference. The lines and the bird's-eye view are greatly affected by the number of occupants, fuel level, vehicle position, road condition and road grade. y The distance between objects viewed on the Intelligent Around View Monitor differs from the actual distance. y The cameras are installed above the front grille, the outside mirrors and on top of the tailgate. Do not put anything on the cameras. y If the tyres are replaced with different sized tyres, the predictive course line and the bird's-eye view may be displayed incorrectly. y When washing the vehicle with high-pressure water, be sure not to spray it around the cameras. Otherwise, water may enter the camera unit causing water condensation on the lens, a malfunction, fire or an electric shock. y When driving the vehicle up a hill, objects viewed in the monitor are further than they appear. When driving the vehicle down a hill, objects viewed in the monitor are closer than they appear. Do not strike the cameras. They are precision instruments. Doing so could cause a malfunction or cause damage resulting in a fire or an electric shock. y y Use the mirrors or actually look to properly judge distances to other objects. y The vehicle width and predictive course lines are wider than the actual width and course. Monitor, air conditioner, audio and phone system 4-Chapter 4.indd 9 4-9 2021/01/13 01:16:49 PM Front and rear view Indicate the approximate vehicle width. played. When the steering wheel turns about 90 degrees or more, a predictive course line is displayed only on the opposite side of the turn. Predictive course lines Bird’s-eye view y Green line : approx. 3 m (10 ft) Vehicle width guide lines Front view SAA1840 : : Indicate the predictive course when operating the vehicle. The predictive course lines will be displayed on the monitor when the steering wheel is turned. The predictive course lines will move depending on how much the steering wheel is turned. When the rear view is displayed, predictive course lines will not be displayed while the steering wheel is in the neutral position. The front view will not be displayed when the vehicle speed is above 10 km/h (6 MPH). WARNING: y Rear view SAA1896 Guiding lines, which indicate the vehicle width and distances to objects with reference to the vehicle body line , are displayed on the monitor. Distance guide lines: Indicate distances from the vehicle body. y Red line y Yellow line : approx. 1 m (3 ft) y Green line : approx. 2 m (7 ft) 4-10 : approx. 0.5 m (1.5 ft) y y The distance between objects viewed in the rear view may differ from the actual distance. Objects in the rear view will appear visually opposite in the same way for those viewed in the inside and outside mirrors. On a snow-covered or slippery road, there may be a difference between the predictive course line and the actual course line. The displayed lines on the rear view will appear slightly off to the right because the rear view camera is not installed in the rear center of the vehicle. NOTE: When the monitor displays the front view and the steering wheel turns about 90 degrees or less from the neutral position, both the right and left predictive course lines are dis- JVH1795X The bird’s-eye view shows the overhead view of the vehicle which helps confirm the vehicle position and the predicted course to a parking space. The vehicle icon shows the position of the vehicle. Note that the distance between objects viewed in the bird’s-eye view differs from the actual distance. The areas that the cameras cannot cover indicated in black. are After the ignition switch is placed in the “ON” position, the non-viewable area is highlighted in yellow for 3 seconds after the bird’s-eye view is displayed. When the vehicle moves closer to an object, the parking sensor (sonar) indicators (if equipped) appear. See "Camera aiding parking sensor (sonar) function" (P.4-13) for more information. Monitor, air conditioner, audio and phone system 4-Chapter 4.indd 10 2021/01/13 01:16:49 PM y A line on the ground may be misaligned and is not seen as being straight at the seam of the views. The misalignment will increase as the line proceeds away from the vehicle. Front-side view WAE0572X In addition, the non-viewable corners are displayed in red to remind the driver to be cautious when parking sensor (sonar) is turned off. (See "Settings" (P.2-19).) After the ignition switch is placed in the “ON” position, the non-viewable corners will blink for 3 seconds after the bird’s-eye view is displayed. WARNING: y y y y Objects in the bird’s-eye view will appear further than the actual distance because the bird’s-eye view is a pseudo view that is processed by combining the views from the cameras on the outside mirrors, the front and the rear of the vehicle. Tall objects, such as a curb or vehicle, may be misaligned or not displayed at the seam of the views. Objects that are above the camera cannot be displayed. The view for the bird’s-eye view may be misaligned when the camera position alters. Example JVH1778X Guiding lines: Guiding lines that indicate the width and the front end of the vehicle are displayed on the monitor. The front-of-vehicle line of the vehicle. shows the front part The side-of-vehicle line shows the vehicle width including the outside mirrors. The extensions of both the front and side lines are shown with a green dotted line. CAUTION: y Do not scratch the camera lens when cleaning dirt or snow. y The turn signal light may overlap with the side-of-vehicle line. This is not a malfunction. OFF-ROAD MONITOR (if equipped) When the shift lever is out of the "R"(Reverse) position and the vehicle speed is 10 km/h (6 MPH) or below, selecting the 4LO position using the 4WD mode switch affects the Intelligent Around View Monitor display as follows: y Selecting the 4LO position will activate the Intelligent Around View Monitor. The front view/front-side view split screen will be displayed. y When the ignition switch is placed in the “ON” position with the 4LO position selected, the front view/front-side view split screen will be displayed. y When the vehicle is shifted to the 4LO position with the bird’s-eye view displayed, the passenger side of the display will change to the front-side view. For details about the 4WD mode switch, see "Four-Wheel Drive (4WD)" (P.5-16) When the off-road monitor is active, the screen displayed on the Intelligent Around View Monitor will return to the previous screen only when 3 minutes have passed after the vehicle was shifted out of the 4LO position or vehicle speed is above 10 km/h (6 MPH). After automatically returning to the previous screen due to the vehicle speed exceeding 10 km/h (6 MPH) with the 4WD mode switch in the 4LO position, decreasing the vehicle speed to 8 km/h (5 MPH) or below will again display the Intelligent Around View Monitor (front view/ front-side view screen). Monitor, air conditioner, audio and phone system 4-Chapter 4.indd 11 4-11 2021/01/13 01:16:49 PM DIFFERENCE BETWEEN PREDICTIVE AND ACTUAL DISTANCES Backing up on a steep uphill JVH0893X When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide lines are shown closer than the actual distance. For example, the display shows 1 m (3 ft) to the place , but the actual 1 m (3 ft) distance on the hill is the place . Note that any object on the hill is viewed in the monitor further than it appears. 4-12 Backing up on a steep downhill Backing up near a projecting object JVH0894X JVH1779X When backing up the vehicle down a hill, the distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide lines are shown further than the actual distance. For example, the display shows 1 m (3 ft) to the place , but the actual 1 m (3 ft) distance on the hill is the place . Note that any object on the hill is viewed in the monitor closer than it appears. The predictive course lines do not touch the object on the display. However, the vehicle may hit the object if it projects over the actual moving course. Monitor, air conditioner, audio and phone system 4-Chapter 4.indd 12 2021/01/13 01:16:50 PM Backing up behind a projecting object HOW TO SWITCH THE DISPLAY y A different screen is selected (when the shift lever is not in the “R” (Reverse) position). CAMERA AIDING PARKING SENSOR (sonar) FUNCTION (if equipped) When the vehicle moves closer to the object while the Intelligent Around View Monitor is displayed, an indicator is displayed and a tone is sounded by the parking sensor (sonar) function to warn the driver. JVH1781X With the ignition switch in the “ON” position, push the CAMERA/DISP button or move the shift lever to the “R” (Reverse) position to operate the Intelligent Around View Monitor. The Intelligent Around View Monitor can display two split views. If the shift lever is not in the “R” (Reverse) position, the available views are: y y Front view/bird’s-eye view split screen Front view/front-side view split screen If the shift lever is in the “R” (Reverse) position, the available views are: JVH0895X The position is shown further than the position in the display. However, the position is actually at the same distance as the position . The vehicle may hit the object when backing up to the position if the object projects over the actual moving course. y y y Rear view/bird’s-eye view split screen Rear view/front-side view split screen Rear view The display will switch back to the previously displayed screen from the Intelligent Around View Monitor screen when: y The shift lever is in the “D” (Drive) position (AT model) or the shift lever is out of the “R” (Reverse) position (MT model), and the vehicle speed increases above approximately 10 km/h (6 MPH). The color of the parking sensor (sonar) indicator and the pattern of the tone vary according to the distance to the object. Keep the parking sensor (sonar) (located on the rear bumper fascia) free from snow, ice and large accumulations of dirt. Do not clean the sensors (sonar) with sharp objects. If the sensors (sonar) are covered, the accuracy of the parking sensor (sonar) function will be diminished. The tone sound and the sensor (sonar) indicator display can be turned on/off, and the volume of the tone sound and the sensor (sonar) detection range can be adjusted. (See "Settings" (P.2-19).) WARNING: y The parking sensor (sonar) function is not designed to prevent the object. y The colors of the parking sensor (sonar) indicator and the distance guide lines in the front/rear view indicate different distances to the object. y Inclement weather may affect the function of the parking sensor (sonar) system; this may include reduced performance or a false activation. Monitor, air conditioner, audio and phone system 4-Chapter 4.indd 13 4-13 2021/01/13 01:16:50 PM y y This function is designed as an aid to the driver in detecting large stationary objects to help avoid damaging the vehicle. The system will not detect small objects below the bumper, and may not detect objects that are too close to the bumper or on the ground. If your vehicle sustains damage to the bumper fascia, leaving it misaligned or bent, the sensing zone may be altered causing inaccurate measurement of obstacles or false alarms. CAUTION: Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as possible to hear the tone clearly. MOVING OBJECT DETECTION (MOD) The Moving Object Detection (MOD) system can inform the driver of the moving objects surrounding the vehicle when driving out of garages, maneuvering into parking lots and in other such instances. The MOD system detects moving objects by using image processing technology on the image shown on the display. MOD system operation The MOD system will turn on automatically under the following conditions: y When the shift lever is in the “R” (Reverse) position. y When vehicle speed decreases below approximately 8 km/h (5 MPH) and the camera screen is displayed. Rear and bird's-eye views WAE0534X WARNING: Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the Moving Object Detection (MOD) system could result in serious injury or death. y The MOD system is not a substitute for proper vehicle operation and is not designed to prevent contact with the objects surrounding the vehicle. When maneuvering, always use the outside mirror and rearview mirror and turn and check the surrounding to ensure it is safe to maneuver. y The system is deactivated at speeds above 8 km/h (5 MPH). It is reactivated at lower speeds. y The MOD system is not designed to detect the surrounding stationary objects. 4-14 Rear and front-side views JVH1257X The MOD system operates in the following conditions when the camera view is displayed: Front and bird's-eye views WAE0533X y When the shift lever is in the “P” (Park) or “N” (Neutral) position (AT model) or the shift lever is out of the “R” (Reverse) position (MT model) and the vehicle is stopped, the MOD system detects moving objects in the bird’seye view. The MOD system will not operate if the outside mirrors are moving in or out, in the stowed position, or if either front door is opened. Monitor, air conditioner, audio and phone system 4-Chapter 4.indd 14 2021/01/13 01:16:50 PM y y When the shift lever is in the “D” (Drive) position (AT model) or the shift lever is out of the "R"(Reverse) position (MT model) and the vehicle speed is below approximately 8 km/h (5 MPH), the MOD system detects moving objects in the front view. When the shift lever is in the “R” (Reverse) position and the vehicle speed is below approximately 8 km/h (5 MPH), the MOD system detects moving objects in the rear view. The MOD system will not operate if the tailgate is open. MOD system limitations y y y When the temperature is extremely high or low, the screen may not display objects clearly. This is not a malfunction. Excessive noise (for example, audio system volume or open vehicle window) will interfere with the chime sound, and it may not be heard. NOTE: The MOD system performance will be limited according to environmental conditions and surrounding objects such as: y When the system is malfunctioning. y When the component temperature reaches a high level (icon will blink). y When the rear view camera has detected a blockage (icon will blink). — When there is low contrast between background and the moving objects. When the MOD system detects moving objects near the vehicle, a chime will be heard and a yellow frame will be displayed on the view where the objects are detected. While the MOD system continues to detect moving objects, the yellow frame continues to be displayed. — When there is blinking source of light. — When strong light such as another vehicle’s headlight or sunlight is present. — When camera orientation is not in its usual position, such as when mirror is folded. In the bird’s-eye view, the yellow frame is displayed on each camera image (front, rear, right, left) depending on where moving objects are detected. — When there is dirt, water drops or snow on the camera lens. The blue MOD icon will change to orange if one of the following has occurred. If the icon light continues to illuminate in orange, have the MOD system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. System maintenance — When the position of the moving objects in the display is not changed. The yellow frame is displayed on each view in the front view and rear view modes. y A blue MOD icon is displayed in the view where the MOD system is operative. A white MOD icon is displayed in the view where the MOD system is not operative. The MOD system might detect flowing water droplets on the camera lens, white smoke from the muffler, moving shadows, etc. y The MOD system may not function properly depending on the speed, direction, distance or shape of the moving objects. The MOD system can be turned on and off. If your vehicle sustains damage to the parts where the camera is installed, leaving it misaligned or bent, the sensing zone may be altered and the MOD system may not detect objects properly. WARNING: Listed below are the system limitations for MOD. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death. The MOD system does not detect moving objects in the front-side view. The MOD icon is not displayed on the screen when in this view. Turning MOD system on and off y WAE0508X See "Driver Assistance" (P.2-19) for details. Monitor, air conditioner, audio and phone system 4-Chapter 4.indd 15 4-15 2021/01/13 01:16:50 PM 4. CAUTION: y y Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner to clean the camera. This will cause discoloration. Adjust the level using the TUNE FOLDER dial and then push the ENTER/SETTING button to apply the adjustment. Adjusting screen (Type B) OPERATING TIPS CAUTION: y Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner to clean the camera. This will cause discoloration. To clean the camera, wipe with a cloth dampened with a diluted mild cleaning agent and then wipe with a dry cloth. y Do not damage the camera as the monitor screen may be adversely affected. y The screen displayed on the Intelligent Around View Monitor will automatically return to the previous screen when no operation takes place for 3 minutes after the CAMERA button or DISP button has been pushed while the shift lever is in a position other than the “R” (Reverse) position. y The display of images on the screen may be delayed after screens are switched. Objects in the Intelligent Around View Monitor may be distorted momentarily until the Intelligent Around View Monitor screen is displayed completely. y When the temperature is extremely high or low, the screen may not display objects clearly. This is not a malfunction. y When strong light directly shines on the camera, objects may not be displayed clearly. This is not a malfunction. y The screen may flicker under fluorescent light. This is not a malfunction. y The colors of objects on the Intelligent Around View Monitor may differ somewhat from those of the actual object. Do not damage the camera as the monitor screen may be adversely affected. If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on any of the cameras , the MOD system may not operate properly. Clean the camera by wiping with a cloth dampened with a diluted mild cleaning agent and then wiping with a dry cloth. HOW TO ADJUST THE SCREEN (if equipped) NOTE: WAE0086X Do not adjust the screen while the vehicle is moving. y Push the MENU button Adjusting screen (Type A) y Touch the “Settings” key. y Touch the “Camera” key. y Touch the “Display Settings” key. y Select the setting items you wish to adjust by touching or by turning and pushing the TUNE SCROLL dial . Available setting items: JVH0653X 1. Push the ENTER/SETTING button 2. Turn the TUNE FOLDER dial to highlight the “Brightness” or the “Contrast” key. 3. Push the ENTER/SETTING button 4-16 . y Brightness y Contrast y Tint y Colour/Color y Black Level . . Monitor, air conditioner, audio and phone system 4-Chapter 4.indd 16 2021/01/13 01:16:51 PM VENTILATORS y Objects on the monitor may not be clear and the color of the object may differ in a dark location or at night. This is not a malfunction. y There may be differences in clearness between each camera view of the bird's-eye view. y If dirt, rain or snow attaches to the camera, the Intelligent Around View Monitor may not display objects clearly. Clean the camera. y Do not use wax on the camera window. Wipe off any wax with a clean cloth that has been dampened with a mild detergent diluted with water. CENTER VENTILATORS REAR VENTILATORS (if equipped) JVH0887X Type A Adjust the air flow direction of the ventilators by moving the center knob (up/down, left/right) until the desired position is achieved. JVH0940X SIDE VENTILATORS Type B SAA3126 Adjust the air flow direction of the ventilators by opening, closing or rotating. The side ventilators can be used for the side defogger. JVH1597X Adjust the air flow direction of the ventilators by moving the center knob (up/down, left/right) until the desired position is achieved. For Type A: Open/close the vents by moving the control to either direction. : This symbol indicates that the vents are closed. Moving the control to this direction will close the vents. Monitor, air conditioner, audio and phone system 4-Chapter 4.indd 17 4-17 2021/01/13 01:16:51 PM HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER : This symbol indicates that the vents are open. Moving the control to this direction will open the vents. WARNING: y The heater and air conditioner operate only when the engine is running. y Never leave children or adults who would normally require the support of others alone in the vehicle. Pets should not be left alone either. They could unknowingly activate switches or controls and inadvertently become involved in a serious accident and injure themselves. On hot, sunny days, temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or animals. y Do not use the recirculation mode for long periods as it may cause the interior air to become stale and the windows to fog up. y Do not adjust the heating and air conditioning controls while driving so that full attention may be given to vehicle operation. The heater and air conditioner operate when the engine is running. The air blower will operate even if the engine is turned off and the ignition switch is placed in the “ON” position. NOTE: 4-18 y Odors from inside and outside the vehicle can build up in the air conditioner unit. Odor can enter the passenger compartment through the vents. y When parking, set the heater and air conditioner controls to turn off air recirculation to allow fresh air into the passenger compartment. This should help reduce odors inside the vehicle. OPERATING TIPS (models with automatic air conditioner) SAA2324 WAE0536X Right-Hand Drive (RHD) model (example) When the engine coolant temperature and outside air temperature are low, the air flow from the foot outlets may not operate. However, this is not a malfunction. After the coolant temperature warms up, the air flow from the foot outlets will operate normally. The sensors and , located on the instrument panel, help maintain a constant temperature. Do not put anything on or around the sensors. Monitor, air conditioner, audio and phone system 4-Chapter 4.indd 18 2021/01/13 01:16:51 PM MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER AND HEATER Outside air circulation: Push the air recirculation “ ” button. (The indicator light will turn off.) The air flow is drawn from outside the vehicle. Select the outside air circulation mode for normal heating or air conditioning operation. Air recirculation: Push the air recirculation “ indicator light will illuminate.) ” button. (The The air flow is recirculated inside the vehicle. JVH1521X 1. Air recirculation “ ” button clockwise to decrease the fan speed. 2. Mirror heater button (if equipped) When you push the button, the indicator light illuminates and the outside rearview mirror heater is turned on. 3. Temperature control dial 4. “A/C” (air conditioner) button 5. Fan speed control “ 6. Air flow control dial ” dial Temperature control: Turn the temperature control dial to set the desired temperature. Turn the dial between the middle and the right position to select the hot temperature. Turn the dial between the middle and the left position to select the cool temperature. Air flow control: This dial allows you to select the air flow outlets. Controls A/C (Air Conditioner) operation: Push the “A/C” button to turn on or off the air conditioner. When the air conditioner is on, the “A/C” indicator light on the button illuminates. Heater operation Heating: This mode is used to direct heated air from the foot outlets. 1. Push the air recirculation “ ” button for normal heating. (The indicator light will turn off.) 2. Turn the air flow control dial to the “ position. 3. Turn the fan speed control “ desired position. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position between the middle and the hot (right) position. ” — Air flows from center and side ventilators. To turn on the system, turn the fan speed control “ ” dial out of the “0” position. Turn the dial counter clockwise to the “0” position to turn off the system. — Air flows from center and side ventilators and foot outlets. — Air flows mainly from the foot outlets. 4. Fan speed control: — Air flows from the defogger and foot outlets. Ventilation: — Air flows mainly from the defogger outlets. This mode directs outside air from the side and center ventilators. Turning system on/off: Turn the fan speed control “ to increase the fan speed. ” dial clockwise Turn the fan speed control “ ” dial counter- ” dial to the Monitor, air conditioner, audio and phone system 4-Chapter 4.indd 19 4-19 2021/01/13 01:16:52 PM 1. Push the air recirculation “ indicator light will turn off.) ” button. (The 2. Turn the air flow control dial to the “ position. 3. Turn the fan speed control “ desired position. 4. 3. Turn the fan speed control dial to the desired position. ” 4. Push the “A/C” button. (The “A/C” indicator light will illuminate.) ” dial to the 5. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position between the middle and the cool (left) position. 1. Push the air recirculation “ indicator light will turn off.) ” button. (The ” 2. Turn the air flow control dial to the “ position. ” dial to the 3. Turn the fan speed control “ desired position. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position. 4. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position. Defrosting or defogging: Heating and defogging: This mode directs the air to the defogger outlets to defrost/defog the windows. This mode heats the interior and defogs the windows. 1. Turn the air flow control dial to the “ position. ” 1. Push the air recirculation “ indicator light will turn off.) 2. Push the air recirculation “ indicator light will turn off.) ” button. (The 2. Turn the air flow control dial to the “ position. 3. Turn the fan speed control “ desired position. ” dial to the 3. Turn the fan speed control dial to the desired position. 4. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position between the middle and the hot (right) position. 4. Turn the temperature control dial to the maximum hot (right) position. y To remove frost from the windshield quickly, turn the temperature control dial to the maximum position and the fan speed control “ ” dial to the maximum position. y If it is difficult to defog the windshield, turn the “A/C” button on. Bi-level heating: This mode directs cool air from the side and center vents and warm air from the foot outlets. When the temperature control dial is turned to the maximum hot or cool position, the air between the ventilators and the foot outlets is the same temperature. 4-20 A visible mist may be seen coming from the ventilators in hot, humid conditions as the air is cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a malfunction. y ” button. (The ” Air conditioner operation The air conditioner system should be operated for approximately 10 minutes at least once a month. This helps prevent damage to the air conditioner system due to the lack of lubrication. Cooling: This mode is used to cool and dehumidify the air. 1. Push the air recirculation “ indicator light will turn off.) ” button. (The 2. Turn the air flow control dial to the “ position. ” For quick cooling when the outside temperature is high, push the air recirculation “ ” button. (The indicator light will turn on.) Be sure to return the air recirculation “ ” button to turn off for normal cooling. Dehumidified heating: This mode is used to heat and dehumidify the air. 1. Push the air recirculation “ indicator light will turn off.) ” button. (The 2. Turn the air flow control dial to the “ position. 3. Turn the fan speed control “ desired position. 4. Push the “A/C” button. (The “A/C” indicator light will illuminate.) 5. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position between the middle and the hot (right) position. ” ” dial to the Dehumidified defogging: This mode is used to defog the windows and dehumidify the air. Monitor, air conditioner, audio and phone system 4-Chapter 4.indd 20 2021/01/13 01:16:52 PM 1. Push the air recirculation “ indicator light will turn off.) ” button. (The 2. Turn the air flow control dial to the “ position. 3. Turn the fan speed control “ desired position. 4. Push the “A/C” button. (The “A/C” indicator light will illuminate.) 5. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position. AUTOMATIC AIR CONDITIONER ” ” dial to the JVH0892X 1. Temperature control buttons (left side seat) 2. Outside air circulation “ 3. Air recirculation “ 4. Display screen 5. Front defogger “ 6. Rear defogger “ ” button* (See "Defogger switch" (P.2-38).) (if equipped) / Mirror heater button (if equipped) ” button* ” button* Automatic operation (AUTO) ” button* When you push the button, the indicator light illuminates and the outside rearview mirror heater is turned on. 7. Temperature control buttons (right side seat) 8. “DUAL” (zone control ON/OFF) button* 9. “A/C” (Air Conditioner) button* 10. Fan speed control “ Right-Hand Drive (RHD) model. For the LeftHand Drive (LHD) model, the switch layout will be opposite. The “AUTO” mode may be used year-round as the system automatically controls the air conditioner to a constant temperature, air flow distribution and fan speed after the desired temperature is set manually. To turn the heater and air conditioner on or off, push the “ON·OFF” button. Cooling and dehumidified heating: 1. Push the “AUTO” button (the “AUTO” indicator light will illuminate). 2. For the Right-Hand Drive (RHD) model: If the “A/C” indicator light is not illuminated, push the “A/C” button (the “A/C” indicator light will illuminate). ” button 11. “MODE” button 12. “AUTO” button* 3. 13. “ON·OFF” button* *:The switch layout in the illustration is for the Push the temperature control buttons (“ ” and “ ”) to set the desired temperature. y When the “DUAL” indicator light is not Monitor, air conditioner, audio and phone system 4-Chapter 4.indd 21 4-21 2021/01/13 01:16:52 PM illuminated, pushing the “DUAL” button (the “DUAL” indicator light will illuminate) allows the user to independently change the driver and passenger side temperatures with the corresponding temperature control buttons (“ ” and “ ”). y 4. A visible mist may be seen coming from the ventilators in hot, humid conditions as the air is cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a malfunction. Heating (A/C off): 1. Push the “AUTO” button (the “AUTO” indicator light will illuminate). 2. If the “A/C” indicator light is illuminated, push the “A/C” button (the “A/C” indicator light will turn off). 3. Push the temperature control buttons (“ ” and “ ”) to set the desired temperature. 4-22 y To cancel the separate temperature setting, push the “DUAL” button (the “DUAL” indicator light will turn off) and the driver's side temperature setting will be applied to both the driver and passenger sides. Push either the outside air circulation “ ” button or the air recirculation “ ” button (the button with an indicator light illuminated) for approximately 2 seconds to switch to the automatic air intake control mode (the indicator lights will blink twice). y temperatures with the corresponding temperature control buttons (“ ” and “ ”). When the “DUAL” indicator light is not illuminated, pushing the “DUAL” button (the “DUAL” indicator light will illuminate) allows the user to independently change the driver and passenger side y y To cancel the separate temperature setting, push the “DUAL” button (the “DUAL” indicator light will turn off) and the driver's side temperature setting will be applied to both the driver and passenger sides. Do not set the temperature lower than the outside air temperature. Doing so may cause the temperature to not be controlled properly. If the windows fog up, use dehumidified heating instead of the “A/C” off heating. so may fog up the windshield. Manual operation The manual mode can be used to control the heater and air conditioner to your desired settings. Fan speed control: Push the fan speed control “ ” button ( + side or − side) to manually control the fan speed. Air flow control: Push the “MODE” button to select the desired mode: Dehumidified defrosting/defogging: 1. Push the front defogger “ ” button (the “ ” indicator light will illuminate). 2. Push the temperature control buttons (“ ” and “ ”) to set the desired temperature. y To quickly remove frost from the outside surface of the windshield, set the temperature control and the fan speed to the maximum levels. y After the windshield is cleared, push the “AUTO” button to return to the “AUTO” mode. y When the front defogger “ ” button is pushed, the air conditioner will automatically turn on, sensing the outside air temperature to defog the windshield. For the best defogging performance, do not select the air recirculation mode. y Do not set the temperature too low when the front defogger mode is on (the “ ” indicator light is illuminated), because doing — Air flows from center and side ventilators. — Air flows from center and side ventilators and foot outlets. — Air flows mainly from the foot outlets. — Air flows from the front defogger outlets and foot outlets. Temperature control: Push the temperature control buttons (“ and “ ”) to set the desired temperature. ” y When the “DUAL” indicator light is not illuminated, pushing the “DUAL” button (the “DUAL” indicator light will illuminate) allows the user to independently change the driver and passenger side temperatures with the corresponding temperature control buttons (“ ” and “ ”). y To cancel the separate temperature setting, push the “DUAL” button (the “DUAL” indicator light will turn off) and the driver's side temperature setting will be applied to both Monitor, air conditioner, audio and phone system 4-Chapter 4.indd 22 2021/01/13 01:16:53 PM AUDIO SYSTEM (if equipped) the driver and passenger sides. Air intake control: y Push the air recirculation button to recirculate interior air inside the vehicle. The indicator light on the button will come on. y Push the outside air circulation button to draw outside air into the passenger compartment. The indicator light on the button will come on. y To control the air intake automatically, push and hold either the air recirculation button or the outside air circulation button (whichever indicator light is illuminated). The indicator lights (both air recirculation and outside air circulation buttons) will flash twice, and then the air intake will switch to automatic control. When the automatic control is set, the system automatically alternates between the outside air circulation and the air recirculation modes (the indicator light of the active mode will illuminate). To turn system on/off To turn off the heater and air conditioner, push the “ON·OFF” button. SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER WARNING: The air conditioner system contains refrigerant under high pressure. To avoid personal injury, any air conditioner service should be done only by an experienced technician with the proper equipment. The air conditioner system in your vehicle is charged with a refrigerant designed with the environment in mind. This refrigerant will not harm the earth’s ozone layer. However, it may contribute in a small part to global warming. Special charging equipment and lubricant are required when servicing your vehicle’s air conditioner. Using improper refrigerants or lubricants will cause severe damage to the air conditioner system. (See "Air conditioner system refrigerant and lubricant" (P.9-5).) A NISSAN dealer will be able to service your environmentally friendly air conditioner system. For models with NissanConnect System: Refer to NissanConnect Owner’s Manual for the audio system operations. AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS WARNING: Do not adjust the audio system while driving so that full attention may be given to vehicle operation. Radio y Radio reception is affected by station signal strength, distance from radio transmitter, buildings, bridges, mountains and other external influences. Intermittent changes in reception quality normally are caused by these external influences. y Using a cellular phone in or near the vehicle may influence radio reception quality. Air conditioner filter The air conditioner system is equipped with an air conditioner filter which collects and neutralizes dirt, pollen, dust, etc. To make sure that the air conditioner heats, defogs and ventilates efficiently, replace the filter in accordance with the specified maintenance intervals listed in the separate maintenance booklet. To replace the filter, contact a NISSAN dealer. The filter should be replaced if the air flow decreases significantly or if windows fog up easily when operating the heater or air conditioner. Anti-theft system Use of a 4-digit radio PIN (Personal Identification Number) code, known only to the vehicle owner, effectively reduces the possibility of the audio unit being stolen. Without the PIN code the audio unit can not be activated. If force is used to try and remove the audio unit, the Anti-theft system activates and the audio unit is locked. The only way to unlock the audio unit is to enter the radio code number shown on an identification card supplied with the vehicle documentation. NOTE: y The 4 digit radio code is shown on a card that you received with your vehicle documentation. Monitor, air conditioner, audio and phone system 4-Chapter 4.indd 23 4-23 2021/01/13 01:16:53 PM y Contact a NISSAN dealer, if you do lose the 4 digit radio code of the audio unit. 4. Unlocking the unit The second, third, and fourth digits of the radio code must be entered, in the same way, only now using preset buttons , , and . For example, press nine times. JVH1078A If the battery supply to the vehicle is interrupted, the audio unit will lock. When the power is restored and the unit is switched on, the display will show the [Radio Code:] and it will be unlocked when the code has been entered correctly. Unlocking procedure: Read this section very carefully. It is important that the instructions are followed precisely. To unlock the audio unit, proceed as follows: 1. Turn the power switch to the ACC or ON position. 2. [Radio Code:] is displayed along with four numerical zero digits. 3. Press preset button the number of times corresponding with the first digit of the radio code. six times, and 5. Press and hold the preset button < > to confirm the code. If you entered the code correctly the unit will switch on. 6. If the code is entered incorrectly a notification message [INCORRECT PIN] and the number of at- tempts left [REMAINING TRIES: XX] will be shown. After reading the message, press the button to return to the entry screen and enter the correct radio code. – If the wrong code is entered after the third attempt, the audio unit will lock for 60 minutes. The display will show a count down timer from 60 to 0 (minutes). After 60 minutes enter the correct radio code. – If the wrong code is entered after eight sets of three entries, the audio unit will lock permanently. Contact a NISSAN dealer for further details. For example, if the radio code is 5169: for the first digit, 5, press the preset button five times. 4-24 once, Compact Disc (CD) player SAA0480 y During cold weather or rainy days, the player may malfunction due to the humidity. If this occurs, remove the CD from CD player and dehumidify or ventilate the player completely. y The player may skip while driving on rough roads. Monitor, air conditioner, audio and phone system 4-Chapter 4.indd 24 2021/01/13 01:16:54 PM y The CD player sometimes may not function when the passenger compartment temperature is extremely high. Lower the temperature before use. y Do not expose the CD to direct sunlight. y CDs that are of poor quality, or are dirty, scratched, covered with fingerprints, or that have pin holes may not work properly. y The following CDs may not work properly. — Copy control compact discs (CCCD) — Recordable compact discs (CD-R) — Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW) y Do not use the following CDs as they may cause the CD player to malfunction. — 8 cm (3.1 in) discs — CDs that are not round — CDs with a paper label — CDs that are warped, scratched or have unusual edges. y This audio system can only play prerecorded CDs. It has no capabilities to record or burn CDs. USB (Universal Serial Bus) Connection Port WARNING: Do not connect, disconnect or operate the USB device while driving. Doing so can be a distraction. If distracted you could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident or serious injury. of the device. CAUTION: y y Do not force the USB device into the USB connection port. Inserting the USB device tilted or up-side-down into the port may damage the port. Make sure that the USB device is connected correctly into the USB connection port. Do not leave the USB cable in a place where it can be pulled unintentionally. Pulling the cable may damage the port. The vehicle is not equipped with a USB device. USB devices should be purchased separately as necessary. This system cannot be used to format USB devices. To format a USB device, use a personal computer. In some states/area, the USB device for the front seats plays only sound without images for regulatory reasons, even when the vehicle is parked. This system supports various USB memory devices, USB hard drives and iPod players. Some USB devices may not be supported by this system. y Partitioned USB devices may not be played correctly. y Some characters used in other languages (Chinese, Japanese, etc.) may not appear properly in the display. Using English language characters with a USB device is recommended. Notes for iPod use: “Made for iPod”, “Made for iPhone”, and “Made for iPad” mean that an electronic accessory has been designed to connect specifically to iPod, iPhone, or iPad, respectively, and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance standards. Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and regulatory standards. Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod, iPhone, or iPad may affect wireless performance. iPad, iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano, iPod shuffle, and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. Lightning is a trademark of Apple Inc. y Improperly plugging in the iPod may cause a checkmark to be displayed on and off (flickering). Always make sure that the iPod is connected properly. y An iPod nano (1st Generation) may remain in fast forward or rewind mode if it is connected during a seek operation. In this case, please manually reset the iPod. y An iPod nano (2nd Generation) will continue to fast-forward or rewind if it is disconnected during a seek operation. y An incorrect song title may appear when the Play Mode is changed while using an iPod nano (2nd Generation). y Audio books may not play in the same order as they appear on an iPod. General notes for USB use: Refer to your device manufacturer's owner information regarding the proper use and care Monitor, air conditioner, audio and phone system 4-Chapter 4.indd 25 4-25 2021/01/13 01:16:54 PM y Large video files cause slow responses in an iPod. The vehicle center display may momentarily black out, but will soon recover. y If an iPod automatically selects large video files while in the shuffle mode, the vehicle center display may momentarily black out, but will soon recover. y While a Bluetooth® audio device is connected through the Bluetooth® wireless connection, the battery power of the device may discharge quicker than usual. Compact Disc (CD)/USB device with MP3/WMA/AAC (if equipped) y This system is compatible with the Bluetooth® AV profile (A2DP and AVRCP). y MP3 — MP3 is short for Moving Pictures Experts Group Audio Layer 3. MP3 is the most well known compressed digital audio file format. This format allows for near “CD quality” sound, but at a fraction of the size of normal audio files. MP3 conversion of an audio track from CD can reduce the file size by approximately 10:1 ratio (Sampling: 44.1 kHz, Bit rate: 128 kbps) with virtually no perceptible loss in quality. MP3 compression removes the redundant and irrelevant parts of a sound signal that the human ear doesn’t hear. y WMA — Windows Media Audio (WMA) is a compressed audio format created by Microsoft as an alternative to MP3. The WMA codec offers greater file compression than the MP3 codec, enabling storage of more digital audio tracks in the same amount of space when compared to MP3s at the same level of quality. Bluetooth® audio player (if equipped) y Some Bluetooth® audio devices may not be used with this system. For detailed information about Bluetooth® audio devices that are available for use with this system, contact a NISSAN dealer. y Before using a Bluetooth® audio system, the initial registration process for the audio device is necessary. y Operation of the Bluetooth® audio system may vary depending on the audio device that is connected. Confirm the operation procedure before use. y The playback of Bluetooth® audio will be paused under the following conditions. The playback will be resumed after the following conditions are completed. Terms: Bluetooth® is a trademark owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and licensed to Visteon Corporation and Panasonic Corporation. This product is protected by certain intellectual property rights of Microsoft Corporation and third parties. Use or distribution of such technology outside of this product is prohibited without a license from Microsoft or an authorized Microsoft subsidiary and third parties. — while using a hands-free phone — while checking a connection with a cell phone y The in-vehicle antenna for Bluetooth® communication is built in the system. Do not place the Bluetooth® audio device in an area surrounded by metal, far away from the system or in a narrow space where the device closely contacts the body or the seat. Otherwise, sound degradation or connection interference may occur. 4-26 y AAC (if equipped) — Advanced Audio Coding (AAC) is a compressed audio format. AAC offers greater file compression than MP3 and enables music file creation and storage at the same quality as MP3. Monitor, air conditioner, audio and phone system 4-Chapter 4.indd 26 2021/01/13 01:16:54 PM y Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number of bits per second used by a digital music files. The size and quality of a compressed digital audio file is determined by the bit rate used when encoding the file. y Sampling frequency — Sampling frequency is the rate at which the samples of a signal are converted from analog to digital (A/D conversion) per second. y Multisession — Multisession is one of the methods for writing data to media. Writing data once to the media is called a single session, and writing more than once is called a multisession. y ID3/WMA Tag — The ID3/WMA tag is the part of the encoded MP3 or WMA file that contains information about the digital music file such as song title, artist, album title, encoding bit rate, track time duration, etc. ID3 tag information is displayed on the Album/Artist/Track title line on the display. Playback order: * Windows® and Windows Media® are registered trademarks and/or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States of America and/or other countries. SAA2494 Music playback order of the CD with MP3/WMA/ AAC (if equipped) is as illustrated above. y The folder names of folders not containing MP3/WMA files are not shown in the display. y If there is a file in the top level of the disc, “Root Folder” is displayed. y The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software, so the files might not play in the desired order. Monitor, air conditioner, audio and phone system 4-Chapter 4.indd 27 4-27 2021/01/13 01:16:54 PM Specification chart : For FM-AM radio with compact disc (CD) player type A, B or C Supported media Supported file systems MP3 Supported versions*1 WMA*2 AAC Version Sampling frequency Bit rate Version Sampling frequency Bit rate Version Sampling frequency Bit rate Tag information (Song title and Artist name) Folder levels CD, CD-R, CD-RW USB Displayable character codes*3 CD, CD-R, CD-RW, USB2.0 ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Romeo, Joliet ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not supported Files saved using the Live File System component (on a Windows Vista-based computer) are not supported. USB memory: FAT16, FAT32 MPEG1 32 kHz - 48 kHz 32 kbps - 320 kbps VBR*4 WMA9 (compatible WMA7 and WMA8) 16 kHz - 48 kHz 48 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR*4 MPEG-4 AAC 8 kHz - 48 kHz 32 kbps - 192 kbps, VBR*4 ID3 tag VER1.0, VER1.1, VER2.2, VER2.3 AAC tag supported Folder levels: 8, Folders: 255 (including root folder), Files: 512 (Max. 255 files for one folder) Folder levels: 8, Folders 255, Files: 2500 (Max. 255 files for one folder) Memory size: 4GB 01: ASCII, 02: ISO-8859-1, 03: UNICODE (UTF-16 BOM Big Endian), 04: UNICODE (UTF16 Non-BOM Big Endian), 05: UNICODE (UTF-8), 06: UNICODE (Non-UTF-16 BOM Little Endian), 07:SHIFT-JIS *1 Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate cannot be played. *2 Protected WMA files (DRM) cannot be played. *3 Available codes depend on what kind of media, versions and information are going to be displayed. *4 When VBR files are played, the playback time may not be displayed correctly. WMA7 and WMA8 are not applied to VBR. 4-28 Monitor, air conditioner, audio and phone system 4-Chapter 4.indd 28 2021/01/13 01:16:54 PM Specification chart : For FM-AM radio with compact disc (CD) player type D Supported media Supported file systems MP3 Supported versions*1 WMA*2 Version Sampling frequency Bit rate Version Sampling frequency Bit rate Tag information (Song title and Artist name) Folder levels CD, CD-R, CD-RW USB Displayable character codes*3 CD, CD-R, CD-RW, USB2.0 CD, CD-R, CD-RW: ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Romeo, Joliet * ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not supported * Files saved using the Live File System component (on a Windows Vista-based computer) are not supported. USB memory: FAT16, FAT32 MPEG1 Audio Layer 3 32 kHz - 48 kHz 32 kbps - 320 kbps VBR*4 WMA7, WMA8, WMA9 32 kHz - 48 kHz 32kbps - 192 kbps, VBR4, 32 kbps - 320 kbps (WMA9 only) ID3 tag VER1.0, VER1.1, VER2.2, VER2.3, VER2.4 (MP3 only) WMA tag (WMA only) Folder levels: 8, Folders: 255, Files: 999 (Max. 255 files for one folder) Folder levels: 8, Folders 255, Files: 2500 (Max. 255 files for one folder) Memory size: 4GB 01: ASCII, 02: ISO-8859-1, 03: UNICODE (UTF-16 BOM Big Endian), 04: UNICODE (UTF-16 Non-BOM Big Endian), 05: UNICODE (UTF-8) *1 Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate cannot be played. *2 Protected WMA files (DRM) cannot be played. *3 Available codes depend on what kind of media, versions and information are going to be displayed. *4 When VBR files are played, the playback time may not be displayed correctly. Monitor, air conditioner, audio and phone system 4-Chapter 4.indd 29 4-29 2021/01/13 01:16:54 PM Troubleshooting guide: Symptom Cause and Countermeasure Check if the disc was inserted correctly. Check if the disc is scratched or dirty. Check if there is condensation inside the player, and if there is, wait until the condensation is gone (about 1 hour) before using the player. If there is a temperature increase error, the CD player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature. If there is a mixture of music CD files (CD-DA data) and MP3/WMA/AAC (if equipped) files on a CD, only the music CD files Cannot play (CD-DA data) will be played. Files with extensions other than “.MP3”, “.WMA”, “.mp3” or “.wma” cannot be played. In addition, the character codes and number of characters for folder names and file names should be in compliance with the specifications. Check if the disc or the file is generated in an irregular format. This may occur depending on the variation or the setting of MP3/WMA/AAC (if equipped) writing applications or other text editing applications. Check if the finalization process, such as session close and disc close, is done for the disc. Check if the disc is protected by copyright. Poor sound quality Check if the disc is scratched or dirty. It takes a relatively long time before the music If there are many folder or file levels on the MP3/WMA/AAC (if equipped) disc, some time may be required before the music starts playing. starts playing. The writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing depth, writing width, etc., Music cuts off or skips might not match the specifications. Try using the slowest writing speed. Skipping with high bit rate files Skipping may occur with large quantities of data, such as for high bit rate data. When a non-MP3/WMA/AAC (if equipped) file has been given an extension of “.MP3”, “.WMA”, “.mp3” or “.wma”, or when play Move immediately to the next song when playing. is prohibited by copyright protection, the player will skip to the next song. The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software, so the files might not play in the The songs do not play back in the desired order. desired order 4-30 Monitor, air conditioner, audio and phone system 4-Chapter 4.indd 30 2021/01/13 01:16:55 PM FM-AM RADIO WITH COMPACT DISC (CD) PLAYER (Type A) Audio main operation The audio system operates when the ignition switch is placed in the “ACC” or “ON” position. Power button/VOL control knob: Power ON/OFF: To turn on the audio system, push the power button. The system will turn on in the mode that was used immediately before the system was turned off. To turn off the audio system, push the power button. Volume control: To control the volume, turn the VOL control knob. Turn the knob clockwise to make the sound louder. Turn the knob counterclockwise to make the sound quieter. JVH0677X 1. DISP (Display) button 9. CD eject button 2. RADIO button 10. MEDIA button 3. Day/Night button 11. MUTE button 4. MIX button 12. Power VOL (volume) dial 5. Seek/track (rewind) button 13. RPT (repeat) button 6. Seek/track (fast forward) button 14. Station memory buttons 7. SETUP button 15. A-Z button 8. Back button 16. ENTER button/MENU knob The audio unit is equipped with a speed volume. This means that the audio system automatically adjusts the volume level in relation to vehicle speed. SETUP button: This item is available only when the audio system is turned on. To configure Audio, Clock, Radio or Language, perform the following procedure. 1. Push the 2. Turn the MENU knob clockwise or counterclockwise, the display will appear in the following order. button. Monitor, air conditioner, audio and phone system 4-Chapter 4.indd 31 4-31 2021/01/13 01:16:55 PM Audio 3. Clock Radio Language Push the ENTER button to select the item. Audio setting: Push the button and then select “Audio”. Turn the MENU knob, and the mode will change as follows. Sound Default AUX In Speed Volume Audio Push the ENTER button to select the setting you want to change. Turn the MENU knob to adjust the selected item. Sound: Adjust Bass, Treble, Balance and Fade. Turn the MENU knob and then push the ENTER button to select the setting item. Turn the MENU knob to adjust the setting. y Bass: Enhances or attenuates the bass response sound. y Treble: Enhances or attenuates the treble. y Balance: Adjusts the balance of the volume between the left and right speakers. y Fade: Adjusts the balance of the volume between the front and rear (if equipped) speakers. AUX In: Adjusts the volume output from the auxiliary source. Speed Vol.: Set the audio system to automatically adjust 4-32 the volume level in relation to vehicle speed. follows. Turn the MENU knob counterclockwise or clockwise to adjust the volume, higher (more) bars mean the volume level relatively changes more when the vehicle speed increase or decrease. Push the ENTER button to confirm. The hour display will start flashing. Turn the MENU knob to adjust the hour and push the ENTER button. The minute display will start flashing. Turn the MENU knob to adjust the minute and push the ENTER button to finish the clock adjustment. This mode controls the volume output from the speakers automatically in relation to vehicle speed. When “Speed Volume” is displayed, turn the MENU knob clockwise or counterclockwise to adjust the volume level. Adjusting the setting to 0 (zero) turns off the speed volume feature. Increasing the speed volume setting results in the audio volume increasing more rapidly with vehicle speed. Once chosen, press Enter button to save the setting. Audio Default menu: The audio unit has a saved preset settings as a factory default. Select “Yes” to change all settings back to the factory preset settings. Select “No” to exit the menu keeping the current settings. After the desired settings have been set, push either the button or the button continuously, and wait for 10 seconds without pushing any other buttons to exit the menu screen. Clock setting: Push the button to enter the setup menu screen and then select “Clock”. Turn the MENU knob, and the mode will change as follows. Set Time ON/OFF Format Set Time: Select “Set Time” and then adjust the clock as ON/OFF: Set the clock display between on or off when the audio unit is turned off. If the clock display setting is turned on, the clock will be displayed when the audio unit is turned off either by pushing the power button or when the ignition switch is placed in the “OFF” position. Format: Switch the clock display between 24-hour mode and 12-hour clock mode. Radio setting: Push the button to enter the setup menu screen and then select “Radio”. This function is used to select the FM frequency band. Language setting: Push the button to enter the setup menu screen and then select “Language”. Select the appropriate language and push the ENTER button. Upon completion, the screen will automatically adapt the language setting. Day/Night button: Push the Day/Night button to switch the display brightness between the daytime and nighttime modes. Monitor, air conditioner, audio and phone system 4-Chapter 4.indd 32 2021/01/13 01:16:55 PM MUTE button: Push the MUTE button to mute the audio system. Push again to restored the sound. MEDIA button: Push the MEDIA button to play a compatible device when it is connected. Each time the MEDIA button is pushed, the audio source will change as follows. CD g USB/IPod g AUX g CD A source that is not available will be skipped. Radio operation The audio system operates when the ignition switch is placed in the “ACC” or “ON” position. RADIO button: When the button is pushed while another audio source is playing, the other audio source will turn off and the radio will turn on. To change the radio band (FM1, FM2, or AM), push the button. Seek/track buttons: When adjusting the broadcasting station frequency manually, push the or button until the desired frequency is achieved. When adjusting the broadcasting station frequency automatically, push and hold the or button. When the system detects a broadcasting station, it will stop at the station. (Radio memory) buttons: During radio reception, pushing the radio memory button will select the stored radio station. The audio system can store up to 12 FM station frequencies (6 in each of FM 1, FM 2) and 6 AM station frequencies. To store the station frequency manually: 1. Tune to the desired broadcasting station frequency by using the buttons. 2. Push and hold a radio memory button until a beep sounds. 3. The channel indicator will display, indicating that the memory is stored properly. 4. Perform steps 1 - 3 for all other memory buttons. - If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the audio fuse blows, the radio memory will be erased. In such a case, reset the desired stations. CD player operation The audio system operates when the ignition switch is placed in the “ACC” or “ON” position. Loading: Insert a CD into the slot with the label side facing up. The CD will be guided automatically into the slot and will start playing. After loading the CD, the number of tracks and the play time will appear on the display. CAUTION: Do not force the CD into the slot. This could damage the player. NOTE: y The CD player accepts normal audio CDs or CDs containing MP3/WMA/AAC files. y An error notification message will be displayed when inserting an incompatible disc type (e.g., DVD), or if the player cannot read the CD. Eject the disc and insert another disc. MEDIA button To change to the CD mode, push the button with a CD inserted until the CD mode is selected. List view: While the track is being played, push the ENTER button to display the available tracks in a listed view mode. To select a track from the list, turn the MENU knob and then push the ENTER button. Quick search: In the list view mode, a quick search can be performed to find a track from the list. Push the A-Z button, turn the MENU knob to the first alphabetic letter of the song title, and then push the ENTER button. When found, a list of the available songs will be displayed. Select, and push the ENTER button to play the preferred track. Seek/track buttons Push and hold the or button to fast forward or rewind through the track. When the button is released, the track will play at normal playing speed. Track up/down: By pushing the or button once, the track will skip forward to the next track or backward to the beginning of the current track. Push the or button more than once to skip through the tracks. Monitor, air conditioner, audio and phone system 4-Chapter 4.indd 33 4-33 2021/01/13 01:16:55 PM Folder browsing: If the recorded media contains folders with music files, pushing the or button will play the tracks of each folder in sequence. When the button is pushed repeatedly while a CD with MP3/WMA is playing, further information about the track can be displayed along with the track title as follows. To select a preferred folder: Track time g Artist g Album g Track time 1. Track details: Push the ENTER button or the button, and a list of tracks in the current folder is displayed. 2. Push the button. 3. Turn the MENU knob for the preferred folder. 4. Push the ENTER button to access the folder. Push the ENTER button again to start playing the first track or turn the MENU knob, and push the ENTER button to select another track. If the current selected folder contains sub folders, push the ENTER button, and a new screen with a list of sub folders will be displayed. Turn the MENU knob for the sub folder and then push the ENTER button to select. Select the root folder item when songs are recorded additionally in the root folder. To return to the previous folder screen, push the button. RPT button: Push the button and the current track will be played continuously. MIX button: Push the button and all the tracks will be played in a random order. DISP button: While a CD with title information is being played, the title of the played track is displayed. 4-34 Pushing and holding the button will turn the display into a detailed overview. Push the button to return to the display for the main display mode. CD eject button: When the button is pushed while a CD is loaded, the CD will be ejected. When the ignition switch is placed in the “OFF” or “LOCK” position it is possible to eject the CD currently being played. However the audio unit will not be activated. If a CD is ejected by pushing the button, and it is not taken out from the loading slot within 20 seconds, the CD will automatically be reloaded to the slot in order to protect the CD. USB (Universal Serial Bus) connection port The USB connection port is located on the lower part of the instrument panel. See "USB (Universal Serial Bus) connection port" (P.4-55). Connect a USB memory device into the connection port. The system will switch to the USB memory device mode automatically. If the system has been turned off while the USB memory device was playing, pushing the power button will start the USB memory device. The following operations are identical to the audio main operation of the Compact Disc (CD) operation. For details, see "CD player operation" (P.4-33). y List view y Quick search y (Seek/track) y MIX (Random play) y RPT (Repeat track) y Folder browsing MEDIA button: To change to the USB mode, push the button with a USB connected until the USB mode is selected. DISP button: While a track with recorded music information tags (ID3-tags) is being played, the title of the played track is displayed. If the tags are not provided then a notification message is displayed. When the button is pushed continuously, further information about the track can be displayed along with the track title as follows. Track time g Artist g Album g Track time Track details: Pushing and holding the button will turn the display into a detailed overview. Push the button to return to the display for the main display mode. iPod player operation Connecting iPod: Connect the iPod to the USB connection port using the USB cable that came with your iPod. The USB connection port is located on the lower part of the instrument panel. See "USB (Universal Serial Bus) connection port" (P.4-55). Monitor, air conditioner, audio and phone system 4-Chapter 4.indd 34 2021/01/13 01:16:56 PM When the iPod is connected to the vehicle, the iPod music library can only be operated by the vehicle audio controls. y y * iPod and iPhone are a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. y WARNING: Do not connect, disconnect or operate the USB device while driving. Doing so can be a distraction. If distracted you could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident or serious injury. CAUTION: y y Do not force the USB device into the USB connection port. Inserting the USB device tilted or up-side-down into the port may damage the port. Make sure that the USB device is connected correctly into the USB connection port. (Some USB devices come with a mark as a guide. Make sure that the mark is facing the correct direction before inserting the device.) Do not leave the USB cable in a place where it can be pulled unintentionally. Pulling the cable may damage the port. Refer to your device manufacturer's owner information regarding the proper use and care of the device. Compatibility: The system unit shall be compatible with all devices (past and future) supporting Apple Accessory Protocol on USB link. It includes (and not limited to): y iPod Generation 5 devices y iPod Classic I and II (Generation 6 and 7) iTouch Generation OS 1, 2, 3, 4 and next iPhone Generation OS 1, 2, 3, 4 and nextiPod Nano (1G, 2G, 3G) iPad 1, 2 and 3 NOTE: This audio system does not support iPad charging. MEDIA button: To operate the iPod, push the button repeatedly until the USB/iPod mode is selected and then push the ENTER button. iPod main operation: Interface: The interface for iPod operation shown on the audio system display is similar to the iPod interface. Use the ENTER button or MENU knob to play a track on the iPod. The following items can be chosen from the menu list screen. y Playlists y Artist y Albums y Tracks y More For further information about each item, see the iPod owner’s manual. The following operations are identical to the audio main operation of the Compact Disc (CD) operation. For details, see "CD player operation" (P.4-33). y List view y Quick search y (Seek/track) y MIX (Random play) y y RPT (Repeat track) Folder browsing DISP button: While a track with recorded music information tags (ID3-tags) is being played, the title of the played track is displayed. When the button is pushed repeatedly, further information about the track can be displayed along with the track title as follows: Track time g Artist g Album g Track time Track details: Pushing and holding the button will turn the display into a detailed overview. To return to the main display, push the button. Auxiliary input jack The AUX input jack is located on the lower part of the instrument panel. See "AUX (auxiliary) input jack" (P.4-55). The AUX input jack accepts any standard analog audio input such as from a portable cassette tape/CD player, MP3 player or laptop computer. Push the button to play a compatible device when it is plugged into the AUX input jack. NISSAN strongly recommends using a stereo mini plug cable when connecting your music device to the audio system. Music may not play properly when a monaural cable is used. WARNING: Do not allow the cable or an external device connected to the AUX terminal to affect your driving. Monitor, air conditioner, audio and phone system 4-Chapter 4.indd 35 4-35 2021/01/13 01:16:56 PM NOTE: y Depending on the external device, please note that the volume may be louder or quieter than that of the external device. y When the AUX contacts the plug of the connector cable, noise may be heard. y The connected external device cannot be operated with the main audio system. The volume and sound quality can be adjusted. y The song title in the external device cannot be displayed on the audio display. y For the power source of the external device, use the special battery. The external device cannot be charged with the AUX terminal. Noise may be heard if the CD, radio etc. is operated while charging the battery with the power socket of the vehicle. FM-AM RADIO WITH COMPACT DISC (CD) PLAYER (TYPE B) JVH1078X 4-36 1. DISP (Display) button 9. CD eject button 2. RADIO button 10. MEDIA button 3. Day/Night button 11. Phone button 4. MIX button 12. Power/VOL (Volume) dial 5. Seek/track (rewind) button 13. RPT (repeat) button 6. Seek/track (fast forward) button 14. Station memory buttons 7. SETUP button 15. A-Z button 8. Back button 16. MENU/ENTER dial Monitor, air conditioner, audio and phone system 4-Chapter 4.indd 36 2021/01/13 01:16:56 PM Anti-theft system (if equipped) enter the correct radio code. Use of a 4-digit radio PIN (Personal Identification Number) code, known only to the vehicle owner, effectively reduces the possibility of the audio unit being stolen. Without the PIN code the audio unit cannot be activated. y If the wrong code is entered after the third attempt, the audio unit will lock for 60 minutes. The display will show a count down timer from 60 to 0 (minutes). After 60 minutes enter the correct radio code. If force is used to try and remove the audio unit, the Anti-theft system activates and the audio unit is locked. The only way to unlock the audio unit is to enter the radio code number shown on an identification card supplied with the vehicle documentation. y If the wrong code is entered after eight sets of three entries, the audio unit will lock permanently. Contact a NISSAN dealer for further details. NOTE: y The 4 digit radio code is shown on a card that you received with your vehicle documentation. y Contact a NISSAN dealer if you do lose the 4 digit radio code of the audio unit. JVI0832X When the power is restored and the unit switched on, the display will show “Radio Code” and it will be unlocked when the codes have been entered correctly. Unlocking procedure: Read this section very carefully. It is important that the instructions are followed precisely. To unlock the audio unit, proceed as follows: The audio system operates when the ignition switch is placed in the “ON” or “ACC” position. Place the ignition switch in the “ACC” or “ON” position. 2. “Radio Code” is displayed along with four numerical zero digits. 3. Push preset the number of times corresponding with the first digit of the radio code. Power ON/OFF: For example, if the radio code is 5169: for the first digit, “5”, push the preset five times. The system will turn on in the mode, which was used immediately before the system was turned off. Unlocking the unit: If the battery supply to the vehicle is interrupted, the audio unit will lock. Audio main operation 1. 4. The second, third, and fourth digits of the radio code must be entered in the same way, only now using preset , , and . For example, push nine times. once, six times, and 5. Push the MENU/ENTER dial to confirm the code. If you entered the code correctly the unit will switch on. 6. If the code is entered incorrectly a notification message “Incorrect Pin”, “Please re-enter Pin” and the number of attempts left [Remaining Tries: xx] will be shown. After reading the message, push the MENU/ ENTER dial to return to the entry screen and Power/VOL dial: To turn on the audio system, push the Power/ VOL dial. To turn off the audio system, push the Power/ VOL dial. Volume control: To control the volume, turn the Power/VOL dial. Turn the Power/VOL dial clockwise to make the sound louder. Turn the Power/VOL dial counterclockwise to make the sound quieter. SETUP button: To configure Audio, Clock, Radio, or Language settings, perform the following procedure: 1. Push the SETUP button. Monitor, air conditioner, audio and phone system 4-Chapter 4.indd 37 4-37 2021/01/13 01:16:56 PM 2. Turn the MENU/ENTER dial, the display will appear in the following order: Audio g Clock g Radio g Language 3. from the auxiliary source. y Push the MENU/ENTER dial. Adjusting the setting to 0 (zero) turns off the speed volume feature. y Turn on or off the Bass Boost feature which emphasizes the lower audio frequencies. Turn the MENU/ENTER dial until the Audio is displayed, and push the MENU/ENTER dial. Each time the MENU/ENTER dial is pushed, the mode will change as follows: y y Sound: Bass: Use this control to enhance or attenuate bass response sound. Treble: Use this control to enhance or attenuate the treble. Bal. (Balance): Use this control to adjust the balance of the volume between the left and right speakers. Fade: Use this control to adjust the balance of the volume between the front and the rear speakers. y AUX In: Audio Default: The audio unit has a saved preset settings as a factory default. Select “Yes” to change all settings back to the factory preset settings. Select “No” to exit the menu keeping the current settings. Sound g AUX In g Speed Vol. g Bass Boost g Audio Default Turn the MENU/ENTER dial clockwise or counterclockwise to adjust the following items and push MENU/ENTER dial to confirm. Bass Boost: Clock setting: Turn the MENU/ENTER dial until the Clock is displayed, and push the MENU/ENTER dial. Turn the MENU/ENTER dial, the mode will change as follows: Set Time g ON/OFF g Format y Set Time Select “Set Time” then adjust the clock as follows: The hour display will start flashing. Turn the MENU/ENTER dial to adjust the hour and push the MENU/ENTER dial. The minute display will start flashing. Turn the MENU/ ENTER dial to adjust the minute and push the MENU/ENTER dial to finish the clock adjustment. ON/OFF The clock display can be turned on and off. When “ON” is selected, the clock will be displayed. (The clock will keep being displayed even after the power of the audio unit is turned off). When “OFF” is selected, the clock will not be displayed. This mode controls the volume output from the speakers automatically in relation to vehicle speed. After the desired levels have been set, push the Back button repeatedly or push the SETUP button. Audio adjustments: y Speed Vol. (Volume) : y Format Switch the clock display between 24-hour mode and 12-hour clock mode. Radio setting: Turn the MENU/ENTER dial until the Radio is displayed, and push the MENU/ENTER dial. The FM station which can be received will be updated. Language setting: Turn the MENU/ENTER dial until the Language is displayed, and push the MENU/ENTER dial. Select the appropriate language and push the MENU/ENTER dial. Upon completion, the screen will automatically adapt the language setting. Day/Night button: Push the Day/Night button to switch the display brightness between the daytime and nighttime modes. The switches on the audio unit will also illuminate in the nighttime mode. Phone button: For operation on how to use phone button, see "Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System (Type A)" (P.4-59). Use this control to adjust the volume output 4-38 Monitor, air conditioner, audio and phone system 4-Chapter 4.indd 38 2021/01/13 01:16:56 PM MEDIA button: Push the MEDIA button to play a compatible device when it is connected. Each time the MEDIA button is pushed, the audio source will change. Radio operation Frequency range and step change: To change the frequency range and step specification of the radio, perform the following operations. 1. Turn on the audio system. 2. Push the RADIO button and select AM or FM mode. 3. Push and hold the SETUP button for more than 3 seconds. 4. After the 3 seconds, keep holding the SETUP button and turn the MENU/ENTER dial counterclockwise until you hear 3 clicks, clockwise until you hear 3 clicks, and then counterclockwise until you hear 3 clicks. 5. Turn the MENU/ENTER dial until “Region” is highlighted, and push the MENU/ENTER dial. 6. Select an appropriate region from the following options: y EUR y GOM Pacific y GOM S. America 7. To apply the setting, turn off the audio system, place the ignition switch in the “OFF” position, and then place the ignition switch back in the “ON” position. frequency by using the Seek/track buttons. RADIO button: When the RADIO button is pushed while the audio system is off, the audio system will turn on and the radio will turn on. When the RADIO button is pushed while another audio source is playing, the other audio source will turn off and the radio will turn on. To change the radio bands, push the RADIO button until the desired band appears. FM 1 g FM 2 g AM g FM 1 When the RADIO button is pushed for more than 1.5 seconds, the six stations with the strongest signals are stored in the preset (1 to 6) buttons of the band. During the search, a notification message appears on the display and the sound is muted until the operation is complete. Once completed, the radio selects preset button. Seek/track buttons: Push or button briefly to manually change the frequency. To adjust the broadcasting station frequency automatically, push and hold the or button. When the system detects a broadcasting station, it will stop at the station. Station memory buttons: During radio reception, pushing the station memory button for less than 2 seconds will select the stored radio station. The audio system can store up to 12 FM station frequencies (6 in each of FM 1 and FM 2 ) and 6 AM station frequencies. 2. Push and hold a station memory button until a beep sounds. 3. The channel indicator will display, indicating that the memory is stored properly. 4. Perform steps 1 - 3 for all other memory buttons. If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the audio fuse blows, the station memory will be erased. In such a case, reset the desired stations. Radio Data System (RDS) operation (if equipped): The RDS is a system through which encoded digital information is transmitted by FM radio stations in addition to the normal FM radio broadcasting. The RDS provides information services such as station name, traffic information, or news. NOTE: In some countries or regions, some of these services may not be available. Alternative Frequency (AF) mode The AF mode operates in the FM (radio) mode. The AF function compares signal strengths and selects the station with the optimum reception conditions for the currently tuned-in station. RDS functions When an RDS station is tuned in with seek or manual tuning, the RDS data is received and the Programme Service (PS) name is displayed. To store the station frequency manually: 1. Tune to the desired broadcasting station Monitor, air conditioner, audio and phone system 4-Chapter 4.indd 39 4-39 2021/01/13 01:16:57 PM CD player operation Loading: Insert a CD into the slot with the label side facing up. The CD will be guided automatically into the slot and will start playing. After loading the CD, the number of tracks and the playtime will appear on the display. CAUTION: Do not force the CD into the slot. This could damage the player. NOTE: y The CD player accepts normal audio CDs or CDs containing MP3/WMA/AAC files. y An error notification message will be displayed when inserting an incompatible disc type (e.g. DVD), or if the player cannot read the CD. Eject the disc and insert another disc. MEDIA button: To change to the CD mode, push the MEDIA button with a CD inserted until the CD mode is selected. List view: While the track is being played, push the MENU/ ENTER dial to display the available tracks in a listed view mode. To select a track from the list, turn the MENU/ENTER dial then push MENU/ ENTER dial. Quick search: In the list view mode, a quick search can be performed to find a track from the list. Push the A-Z button, turn the MENU/ENTER dial to the 4-40 first alphabetic letter of the song title and then push the MENU/ENTER dial. When found, a list of the available songs will be displayed. Select, and push the MENU/ENTER dial to play the preferred track. Seek/track buttons: Push and hold the or button to fast forward or rewind through the track. When the button is released, the track will play at normal playing speed. Track up/down: Pushing the or button once, the track will skip forward to the next track or backward to the beginning of the current track. Push the or button more than once to skip through the tracks. Folder browsing: If the recorded media contains folders with music files, pushing the Seek/track button will play in sequence the tracks of each folder. To select a preferred folder: 1. Push the MENU/ENTER dial or the Back button and a list of tracks in the current folder is displayed. 2. Push the Back button. 3. Turn the MENU/ENTER dial for the preferred folder. 4. Push the MENU/ENTER dial to access the folder. Push the MENU/ENTER dial again to start playing the first track or turn the MENU/ENTER dial, and push the MENU/ ENTER dial to select another track. If the current selected folder contains sub folders, push the MENU/ENTER dial, a new screen with a list of sub folders will be displayed. Turn the MENU/ENTER dial for the sub folder then push the MENU/ENTER dial to select. Select the root folder item when songs are recorded additionally in the root folder. To return to the previous folder screen, push the Back button. RPT button: Push the RPT button and the current track will be played continuously. MIX button: Push the MIX button and all the tracks will be played in a random order. DISP button: While a CD with recorded music information tags (CD-text/ID3-text tags) is being played, the title of the played track is displayed when available. When the DISP button is pushed repeatedly, further information about the track can be displayed along with the track title as follows: Track time g Artist name g Album title g Track time Track details: Pushing and holding the DISP button will turn the display into a detailed overview. Push the Back button to return to the previous screen. CD eject button: When the CD eject button is pushed while the ignition switch is placed in the “ON” or “ACC” position, the CD will be ejected. If a CD is ejected by pushing the CD eject button, and it is not taken out from the loading slot Monitor, air conditioner, audio and phone system 4-Chapter 4.indd 40 2021/01/13 01:16:57 PM within 20 seconds, the CD will automatically be reloaded to the slot to protect the CD. USB (Universal Serial Bus) connection port USB device main operation: The USB connection port is located on the lower part of the instrument panel. See "USB (Universal Serial Bus) connection port" (P.4-55). Connect a USB memory device into the connection port. The USB memory device will be activated automatically. Refer to your device manufacturer's owner information regarding the proper use and care of the device. If the system has been turned off while the USB memory device was playing, pushing the Power/VOL dial will start the USB memory device. The following operations are identical to the audio main operation of the Compact Disc (CD) operation. For details, see "CD player operation" (P.4-40). y List view y Quick search y (Seek/track) y MIX (Random play) y RPT (Repeat track) y Folder browsing MEDIA button: To operate the USB memory device, push the MEDIA button repeatedly until the USB mode is selected. DISP button: While a track with recorded music information tags (ID3-tags) is being played, the title of the played track is displayed. NOTE: When the DISP button is pushed repeatedly, further information about the track can be displayed along with the track title as follows: This audio system do not support iPad charging. Track time g Artist g Album g Track time Track details: Pushing and holding the DISP button will turn the display into a detailed overview. Push the Back button to return to the display for the main display mode. iPod player operation Connecting iPod: Connect the iPod to the USB connection port using the USB cable that came with your iPod. The USB connection port is located on the lower part of the instrument panel. See "USB (Universal Serial Bus) connection port" (P.4-55). When the iPod is connected to the vehicle, the iPod music library can only be operated by the vehicle audio controls. * iPod and iPhone are a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. Compatibility: The system unit shall be compatible with all devices (past and future) supporting Apple Accessory Protocol on USB link. It includes (and not limited to): y iPod Generation 5 devices y iPod Classic I and II (Generation 6 and 7) y iTouch Generation OS 1, 2, 3, 4 and next y iPhone Generation OS 1, 2, 3, 4 and next y iPod Nano (1G, 2G, 3G) y iPad 1, 2 and 3 MEDIA button: To operate the iPod, push the MEDIA button repeatedly until the USB (iPod) mode is selected and then push the MENU/ENTER dial. iPod main operation: Interface: The interface for iPod operation shown on the audio system display is similar to the iPod interface. Use the MENU/ENTER dial to play a track on the iPod. The following items can be chosen from the menu list screen. y Playlists y Artists y Albums y Tracks y More For further information about each item, see the iPod owner’s manual. The following operations are identical to the audio main operation of the Compact Disc (CD) operation. For details, see"CD player operation" (P.4-40). y y y y y y List view Quick search (Seek/track) MIX (Random play) RPT (Repeat track) Folder browsing Monitor, air conditioner, audio and phone system 4-Chapter 4.indd 41 4-41 2021/01/13 01:16:57 PM Bluetooth® audio player main operation: DISP button: While a track with recorded music information tags (ID3-tags) is being played, the title of the played track is displayed. DISP button: If the song contains music information tags (ID3– tags), the title of the played song will be displayed. If tags are not provided then the display will not show any messages. When the DISP button is pushed repeatedly, further information about the track can be displayed along with the track title as follows: When the DISP button is pushed repeatedly further information about the song can be displayed along with the song title. Track time g Artist g Album g Track time Track details: Pushing and holding the DISP button will turn the display into a detailed overview. To return to the main display, push the Back button. Bluetooth® audio player operation Regulatory information: Bluetooth® is a trademark owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and licensed to Visteon Corporation and Panasonic Corporation. CE statement: Hereby Visteon Corp. declares that this system is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC. NOTE: The audio system only supports Bluetooth® devices with AVRCP (Audio Video Remote Control Profile) version 1.3, or 1.0 or earlier. 4-42 through the tracks. JVH0848X To play Bluetooth® audio, the Bluetooth® audio device needs to be paired to the in-vehicle system. For the pairing operation, see "Pairing device" (P.4-60). MEDIA button: To operate the Bluetooth® audio streaming use the following method: Push MEDIA button repeatedly until “BT Audio” is shown. The type of display, or , shown on the audio system can vary depending on the Bluetooth® version of the device. Seek/track buttons: Push and hold the or button to fast forward or rewind through the track. When the button is released, the track will play at normal playing speed. A long push on DISP button will turn the display into a detailed overview which after a few seconds returns to the main display; or push DISP button briefly. AUX device player operation The AUX jack is located on lower part of the instrument panel. See "AUX (auxiliary) input jack" (P.4-55). The AUX input jack accepts any standard analog audio input such as from a portable cassette tape/CD player, MP3 player or laptop computer. NISSAN strongly recommends using a stereo mini plug cable when connecting your music device to the audio system. Music may not play properly when a monaural cable is used. MEDIA button: To switch to the AUX mode, push the MEDIA button repeatedly until the AUX mode is selected. Track up/down: Pushing the or button once, the track will skip forward to the next track or backward to the beginning of the current track. Push the or button more than once to skip Monitor, air conditioner, audio and phone system 4-Chapter 4.indd 42 2021/01/13 01:16:57 PM FM-AM RADIO WITH COMPACT DISC (CD) PLAYER (TYPE C) Anti-theft system (if equipped) Use of a 4-digit radio PIN (Personal Identification Number) code, known only to the vehicle owner, effectively reduces the possibility of the audio unit being stolen. Without the PIN code the audio unit cannot be activated. If force is used to try and remove the audio unit, the Anti-theft system activates and the audio unit is locked. The only way to unlock the audio unit is to enter the radio code number shown on an identification card supplied with the vehicle documentation. NOTE: y The 4 digit radio code is shown on a card that you received with your vehicle documentation. y Contact a NISSAN dealer if you do lose the 4 digit radio code of the audio unit. Unlocking the unit: If the battery supply to the vehicle is interrupted, the audio unit will lock. JVH1079X 1. AM button 9. CD eject button 2. FM button 10. MEDIA button 3. Day/Night button 11. DISP (Display) button 4. Seek/track (rewind) button 12. Power/VOL (Volume) dial 5. Seek/track (fast forward) button 13. Station memory buttons 6. RPT (repeat) ·MIX button 14. A-Z button 7. SETUP button 15. MENU/ENTER dial 8. Back button When the power is restored and the unit switched on, the display will show “Radio Code” and it will be unlocked when the codes have been entered correctly. Unlocking procedure: Read this section very carefully. It is important that the instructions are followed precisely. To unlock the audio unit, proceed as follows: Monitor, air conditioner, audio and phone system 4-Chapter 4.indd 43 4-43 2021/01/13 01:16:58 PM After reading the message, push the MENU/ ENTER dial to return to the entry screen and enter the correct radio code. y y JVH0832X If the wrong code is entered after the third attempt, the audio unit will lock for 60 minutes. The display will show a count down timer from 60 to 0 (minutes). After 60 minutes enter the correct radio code. If the wrong code is entered after eight sets of three entries, the audio unit will lock permanently. Contact a NISSAN dealer for further details. 1. Place the ignition switch in the “ACC” or “ON” position. Audio main operation 2. “Radio Code” is displayed along with four numerical zero digits. The audio system operates when the ignition switch is placed in the “ON” or “ACC” position. 3. Push preset the number of times corresponding with the first digit of the radio code. Power ON/OFF: 4. For example, if the radio code is 5169: for the first digit, “5”, push the preset five times. To turn on the audio system, push the Power/ VOL dial. The second, third, and fourth digits of the radio code must be entered in the same way, only now using preset , , and . The system will turn on in the mode, which was used immediately before the system was turned off. For example, push nine times. To turn off the audio system, push the Power/ VOL dial. 5. 6. once, six times, and Push the MENU/ENTER dial to confirm the code. If you entered the code correctly the unit will switch on. If the code is entered incorrectly a notification message “Incorrect Pin”, “Please re-enter Pin” and the number of attempts left [Remaining Tries: xx] will be shown. 4-44 Power/VOL dial: Volume control: To control the volume, turn the Power/VOL dial. Turn the Power/VOL dial clockwise to make the sound louder. Turn the Power/VOL dial counterclockwise to make the sound quieter. SETUP button: To configure Audio, Clock, Radio, or Language settings, perform the following procedure: 1. Push the SETUP button. 2. Turn the MENU/ENTER dial, the display will appear in the following order: Audio g Clock g Radio g Language 3. Push the MENU/ENTER dial. After the desired levels have been set, push the Back button repeatedly or push the SETUP button. Audio adjustments: Turn the MENU/ENTER dial until the Audio is displayed, and push the MENU/ENTER dial. Each time the MENU/ENTER dial is pushed, the mode will change as follows: Sound g AUX In g Speed Vol. g Bass Boost g Audio Default Turn the MENU/ENTER dial clockwise or counterclockwise to adjust the following items and push MENU/ENTER dial to confirm. y Sound menu Bass: Use this control to enhance or attenuate bass response sound. Treble: Use this control to enhance or attenuate the treble. Bal. (Balance): Use this control to adjust the balance of the volume between the left and right speakers. Monitor, air conditioner, audio and phone system 4-Chapter 4.indd 44 2021/01/13 01:16:58 PM Fade: Use this control to adjust the balance of the volume between the front and the rear speakers. y AUX In menu display will start flashing. Turn the MENU/ ENTER dial to adjust the minute and push the MENU/ENTER dial to finish the clock adjustment. y Use this control to adjust the volume output from the auxiliary source. y Speed Vol. (Volume) menu This mode controls the volume output from the speakers automatically in relation to vehicle speed. Adjusting the setting to 0 (zero) turns off the speed volume feature. y Bass Boost menu Turn on or off the Bass Boost feature which emphasizes the lower audio frequencies. y Audio Default menu The audio unit has a saved preset settings as a factory default. Select “Yes” to change all settings back to the factory preset settings. Select “No” to exit the menu keeping the current settings. Clock setting: Turn the MENU/ENTER dial until the Clock is displayed, and push the MENU/ENTER dial. Turn the MENU/ENTER dial, the mode will change as follows: Set Time g ON/OFF g Format y Set Time Select “Set Time” then adjust the clock as follows: The hour display will start flashing. Turn the MENU/ENTER dial to adjust the hour and push the MENU/ENTER dial. The minute y ON/OFF The clock display can be turned on and off. When “ON” is selected, the clock will be displayed. (The clock will keep being displayed even after the power of the audio unit is turned off). When “OFF” is selected, the clock will not be displayed. Format Switch the clock display between 24-hour mode and 12-hour clock mode. Radio setting: Turn the MENU/ENTER dial until the Radio is displayed, and push the MENU/ENTER dial. The FM station which can be received will be updated. MEDIA button: Push the MEDIA button to play a compatible device when it is connected. Each time the MEDIA button is pushed, the audio source will change. Radio operation Frequency range and step change: To change the frequency range and step specification of the radio, perform the following operations. 1. Turn on the audio system. 2. Push the FM or the AM button and select AM or FM mode. 3. Push and hold the SETUP button for more than 3 seconds. 4. After the 3 seconds, keep holding the SETUP button and turn the MENU/ENTER dial counterclockwise until you hear 3 clicks, clockwise until you hear 3 clicks, and then counterclockwise until you hear 3 clicks. 5. Turn the MENU/ENTER dial until “Region” is highlighted, and push the MENU/ENTER dial. 6. Select an appropriate region from the following options: Language setting: Turn the MENU/ENTER dial until the Language is displayed, and push the MENU/ENTER dial. Select the appropriate language and push the MENU/ENTER dial. Upon completion, the screen will automatically adapt the language setting. Day/Night button: Push the Day/Night button to switch the display brightness between the daytime and nighttime modes. y EUR The switches on the audio unit will illuminate in the nighttime mode. y GOM Pacific y GOM S. America 7. To apply the setting, turn off the audio system, place the ignition switch in the “OFF” position, and then place the ignition switch back in the “ON” position. Monitor, air conditioner, audio and phone system 4-Chapter 4.indd 45 4-45 2021/01/13 01:16:58 PM AM/FM buttons: To store the station frequency manually: 1. Tune to the desired broadcasting station frequency by using the Seek/track buttons. 2. When the AM or the FM button is pushed while another audio source is playing, the other audio source will turn off and the radio will turn on. Push and hold a station memory button until a beep sounds. (The radio mutes when the memory button is pushed.) 3. To change the radio bands, push the FM button until the desired band appears. The channel indicator will display, indicating that the memory is stored properly. 4. Perform steps 1 - 3 for all other memory buttons. When the AM or the FM button is pushed while the audio system is off, the audio system will turn on and the radio will turn on. FM 1 g FM 2 g FM 1 When the AM or the FM button is pushed for more than 1.5 seconds, the six stations with the strongest signals are stored in the preset (1 to 6) buttons of the band. During the search, a notification message appears on the display and the sound is muted until the operation is complete. Once completed, the radio selects preset button. Seek/track buttons: Push or button briefly to manually change the frequency. To adjust the broadcasting station frequency automatically, push and hold the or button. When the system detects a broadcasting station, it will stop at the station. Station memory buttons: If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the audio fuse blows, the station memory will be erased. In such a case, reset the desired stations. Radio Data System (RDS) operation (if equipped): The RDS is a system through which encoded digital information is transmitted by FM radio stations in addition to the normal FM radio broadcasting. The RDS provides information services such as station name, traffic information, or news. NOTE: In some countries or regions, some of these services may not be available. Alternative Frequency (AF) mode The AF mode operates in the FM (radio) mode. During radio reception, pushing the station memory button for less than 2 seconds will select the stored radio station. The AF function compares signal strengths and selects the station with the optimum reception conditions for the currently tuned-in station. The audio system can store up to 12 FM station frequencies (6 in each of FM 1 and FM 2 ) and 6 AM station frequencies. RDS functions 4-46 When an RDS station is tuned in with seek or manual tuning, the RDS data is received and the Programme Service (PS) name is displayed. CD player operation Loading: Insert a CD into the slot with the label side facing up. The CD will be guided automatically into the slot and will start playing. After loading the CD, the number of tracks and the playtime will appear on the display. CAUTION: Do not force the CD into the slot. This could damage the player. NOTE: y The CD player accepts normal audio CDs or CDs containing MP3/WMA files. y The audio unit will automatically detect if a CD containing MP3/WMA files is inserted, and “MP3CD” will be indicated. y An error notification message will be displayed when inserting an incompatible disc type (e.g. DVD), or if the player cannot read the CD. Eject the disc and insert another disc. MEDIA button: To change to the CD mode, push the MEDIA button with a CD inserted until the CD mode is selected. List view: While the track is being played, push the MENU/ ENTER dial to display the available tracks in a listed view mode. To select a track from the list, turn the MENU/ENTER dial then push MENU/ ENTER dial. Monitor, air conditioner, audio and phone system 4-Chapter 4.indd 46 2021/01/13 01:16:58 PM MENU/ENTER dial, and push the MENU/ ENTER dial to select another track. Quick search: In the list view mode, a quick search can be performed to find a track from the list. Push the A-Z button, turn the MENU/ENTER dial to the first alphabetic letter of the song title and then push the MENU/ENTER dial. When found, a list of the available songs will be displayed. Select, and push the MENU/ENTER dial to play the preferred track. Seek/track buttons: Push and hold the or button to fast forward or rewind through the track. When the button is released, the track will play at normal playing speed. Track up/down: Pushing the or button once, the track will skip forward to the next track or backward to the beginning of the current track. Push the or button more than once to skip through the tracks. Folder browsing: If the recorded media contains folders with music files, pushing the or button will play in sequence the tracks of each folder. To select a preferred folder: If the current selected folder contains sub folders, push the MENU/ENTER dial, a new screen with a list of sub folders will be displayed. Turn the MENU/ENTER dial for the sub folder then push the MENU/ENTER dial to select. Select the root folder item when songs are recorded additionally in the root folder. To return to the previous folder screen, push the Back button. RPT·MIX button: When the RPT·MIX button is pushed while a CD is playing, the play mode will change as follows: CD: DISC REPEAT g TRACK REPEAT g DISC RANDOM g DISC REPEAT CD with MP3/WMA: DISC REPEAT g FOLDER REPEAT g TRACK REPEAT g DISC RANDOM g FOLDER RANDOM g DISC REPEAT DISC REPEAT: All the tracks on the selected CD will play repeatedly in sequential order. FOLDER REPEAT (CD with MP3 or WMA only): 1. Push the MENU/ENTER dial or the Back button and a list of tracks in the current folder is displayed. 2. Push the Back button. TRACK REPEAT: 3. Turn the MENU/ENTER dial for the preferred folder. The selected track will play repeatedly. DISC RANDOM: 4. Push the MENU/ENTER dial to access the folder. Push the MENU/ENTER dial again to start playing the first track or turn the All the tracks on the selected CD will play in random order. All the tracks in the selected folder will play repeatedly in sequential order. FOLDER RANDOM (CD with MP3 or WMA only): All the tracks in the selected folder will play repeatedly in random order. DISP button While a CD with recorded music information tags (CD-text/ID3-text tags) is being played, the title of the played track is displayed when available. When the DISP button is pushed repeatedly, further information about the track can be displayed along with the track title as follows: Track time g Artist name g Album title g Track time Track details: Pushing and holding the DISP button will turn the display into a detailed overview. Push the Back button to return to the previous screen. CD eject button: When the CD eject button is pushed while the ignition switch is placed in the “ON” or “ACC” position, the CD will be ejected. If a CD is ejected by pushing the CD eject button, and it is not taken out from the loading slot within 20 seconds, the CD will automatically be reloaded to the slot to protect the CD. USB (Universal Serial Bus) connection port USB device main operation: The USB connection port is located on the lower part of the instrument panel. See "USB (Universal Serial Bus) connection port" (P.4-55). Connect a USB memory device into the connection port. Monitor, air conditioner, audio and phone system 4-Chapter 4.indd 47 4-47 2021/01/13 01:16:59 PM The USB memory device will be activated automatically. Refer to your device manufacturer's owner information regarding the proper use and care of the device. If the system has been turned off while the USB memory device was playing, pushing the Power/VOL dial will start the USB memory device. The following operations are identical to the audio main operation of the Compact Disc (CD) operation. For details, see "CD player operation" (P.4-46). y y y y y y List view Quick search (Seek/track) MIX (Random play) RPT (Repeat track) Folder browsing MEDIA button: To operate the USB memory device, push the MEDIA button repeatedly until the USB mode is selected. DISP button: While a track with recorded music information tags (ID3-tags) is being played, the title of the played track is displayed. When the DISP button is pushed repeatedly, further information about the track can be displayed along with the track title as follows: Track time g Artist g Album g Track time Track details: Pushing and holding the DISP button will turn the display into a detailed overview. Push the Back button to return to the display for the 4-48 main display mode. iPod main operation: iPod player operation Interface: Connecting iPod: Connect the iPod to the USB connection port using the USB cable that came with your iPod. The USB connection port is located on the lower part of the instrument panel. See "USB (Universal Serial Bus) connection port" (P.4-55). When the iPod is connected to the vehicle, the iPod music library can only be operated by the vehicle audio controls. * iPod and iPhone are a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. Compatibility: The system unit shall be compatible with all devices (past and future) supporting Apple Accessory Protocol on USB link. It includes (and not limited to): y y y y y y iPod Generation 5 devices iPod Classic I and II (Generation 6 and 7) iTouch Generation OS 1, 2, 3, 4 and next iPhone Generation OS 1, 2, 3, 4 and next iPod Nano (1G, 2G, 3G) iPad 1, 2 and 3 NOTE: This audio system do not support iPad charging. MEDIA button: To operate the iPod, push the MEDIA button repeatedly until the USB (iPod) mode is selected and then push the MENU/ENTER dial. The interface for iPod operation shown on the audio system display is similar to the iPod interface. Use the MENU/ENTER dial to play a track on the iPod. The following items can be chosen from the menu list screen. y y y y y Playlists Artists Albums Tracks More For further information about each item, see the iPod owner’s manual. The following operations are identical to the audio main operation of the Compact Disc (CD) operation. For details, see "CD player operation" (P.4-46). y y y y y y List view Quick search (Seek/track) MIX (Random play) RPT (Repeat track) Folder browsing DISP button: While a track with recorded music information tags (ID3-tags) is being played, the title of the played track is displayed. When the DISP button is pushed repeatedly, further information about the track can be displayed along with the track title as follows: Track time g Artist g Albumg Track time Monitor, air conditioner, audio and phone system 4-Chapter 4.indd 48 2021/01/13 01:16:59 PM Track details: Pushing and holding the DISP button will turn the display into a detailed overview. To return to the main display, push the Back button. FM-AM RADIO WITH COMPACT DISC (CD) PLAYER (TYPE D) AUX device player operation The AUX jack is located on lower part of the instrument panel. See "AUX (auxiliary) input jack" (P.4-55). The AUX input jack accepts any standard analog audio input such as from a portable cassette tape/CD player, MP3 player or laptop computer. NISSAN strongly recommends using a stereo mini plug cable when connecting your music device to the audio system. Music may not play properly when a monaural cable is used. MEDIA button: To switch to the AUX mode, push the MEDIA button repeatedly until the AUX mode is selected. JVH0924X 1. MEDIA button 9. SCAN tuning button 2. FM·AM button 10. SEEK·TRACK (fast forward) button 3. CD eject button 11. BACK button 4. CD button 12. Power/VOL (volume) dial 5. DISP (display) button 13. RPT (repeat) button 6. Display screen 14. RDM (random) button 7. iPod MENU button 15. Station memory buttons 8. SEEK·TRACK (rewind) button 16. TUNE·FOLDER dial Monitor, air conditioner, audio and phone system 4-Chapter 4.indd 49 4-49 2021/01/13 01:16:59 PM 17. ENTER/SETTING button the TUNE·FOLDER dial to adjust the Bass, Treble, balance and Fade of the screen to the preferred level. Audio main operation Head unit: y The auto loudness circuit enhances the low and high frequency ranges automatically. The power of the audio system can be turned on when the ignition switch is placed in the “ON” or “ACC” position. Push the power/VOL dial while the system is off to turn on the last audio source, which was playing immediately before the system was turned off. While the system is on, pushing the power/VOL dial turns the system off. Brightness and Contrast Adjust the brightness and contrast of the screen. Select the “Brightness” or “Contrast” using the TUNE·FOLDER dial and then push the ENTER/SETTING button. Turn the TUNE·FOLDER dial to adjust the brightness and contrast of the screen to the preferred level. Power/VOL dial: y y Select the “On-Screen Clock” using the TUNE·FOLDER dial and then push the ENTER/SETTING button. You can toggle between ON and OFF using the TUNE·FOLDER dial. y RDS Display RDS (radio data system) information can be shown on the display. Select “RDS Display” using the TUNE·FOLDER dial and then push the ENTER/SETTING button. You can toggle between ON and OFF using the TUNE·FOLDER dial. y Speed Sensitive Vol. To change the Speed Sensitive Volume (Speed Sensitive Vol.) level from off (0) to 5, turn the TUNE·FOLDER dial. y AUX Vol. Controls the volume level of incoming sound when an auxiliary device is connected to the system. Choose a setting between 1 and 3 or choose 0 to disable the feature entirely. y Language Select The language settings can be changed. Clock Adjust Adjust the clock according to the following procedure. Turn the power/VOL dial to adjust the volume. Audio settings: The settings screen will appear when pushing the ENTER/SETTING button. The following items are available in the settings screen. y y Bluetooth It is possible to set the Bluetooth® settings. For details of the Bluetooth® settings, see "Bluetooth® audio player operation" (P.4-54). Bass, Treble, Balance and Fade Controls the sound of the audio system. Balance adjusts the sound between the left and right speakers. Fade adjusts the sound between the front and rear speakers. Select the “Bass”, “Treble”, “Balance” or “Fade” using the TUNE·FOLDER dial and then push the ENTER/SETTING button. Turn 4-50 JVH0729X 1. Select “Clock Adjust” using the TUNE·FOLDER dial and then push the ENTER/ SETTING button 2. .Adjust the hour with the TUNE·FOLDER dial and then push the ENTER/SETTING button . On-Screen Clock When this item is turned on, a clock is always displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. Select “Language Select” using the TUNE·FOLDER dial and then push the ENTER/ SETTING button. Use the TUNE·FOLDER dial to select the preferred language. 3. Adjust the minute with the TUNE·FOLDER dial and then push the ENTER/SETTING button . 24 hour clock is not available. Monitor, air conditioner, audio and phone system 4-Chapter 4.indd 50 2021/01/13 01:16:59 PM DISP button: y Models without Intelligent Around View Monitor Display of the screen can be turned off by pushing the DISP button. You can still listen to music that is being played back even while the screen display is turned off. If you want to display the screen again, push the DISP button once more. Pushing some of the audio source buttons will also turn the screen back on and display the screens of the corresponding sources. y Models with Intelligent Around View Monitor The Intelligent Around View Monitor can be displayed by pushing the DISP button. To display the audio screen again, push the DISP button repeatedly. Pushing some of the audio source buttons can also display the audio screen. For details about the Intelligent Around View Monitor, see MEDIA button: Pushing the MEDIA button will switch the audio source as follows: USB/iPod g Bluetooth g AUX g USB/iPod Radio operation AM/FM buttons: Pushing the FM·AM button will change the band as follows: AM g FM1 g FM2 g AM TUNE (Tuning): Turn the radio TUNE·FOLDER dial for manual tuning. 2. Tune to the desired station using the button or the TUNE·FOLDER dial. RDS stands for Radio Data System, and is a data information service transmitted by some radio stations on the FM band (not AM band) encoded within a regular radio broadcast. Currently, most RDS stations are in large cities, but many stations are now considering broadcasting RDS data. 3. Push and hold the desired station preset button to until the radio mutes. 4. The station indicator will then come on and the sound will resume. Memorizing is now complete. 5. RDS can display: Other buttons can be set in the same manner. If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse opens, the station memory will be erased. In that case, reset the desired stations. Radio Data System (RDS): y y Station name, such as “The Groove”. Music or programming type such as “Classical”, “Country” or “Rock”. Seek/track buttons: Push the or button to tune from low to high or high to low frequencies and to stop at the next broadcasting station. SCAN tuning buttons: Push the SCAN tuning button to tune from low to high frequencies and stop at each broadcasting station for 5 seconds. Pushing the button again during this 5 seconds period will stop SCAN tuning and the radio will remain tuned to that station. If the SCAN tuning button is not pushed within 5 seconds, SCAN tuning moves to the next station. to Station memory buttons: 12 stations can be set for the FM band (6 each for FM1 and FM2) and 6 stations can be set for the AM band. 1. Choose the radio band using the FM·AM button. CD player operation Place the ignition switch in the “ON” or “ACC” position. Insert the Compact Disc (CD) into the slot with the label side facing up. The CD will be guided automatically into the slot and start playing. After loading the CD, the number of tracks on the CD and the play time will appear on the display. If the radio is already operating, it will automatically turn off and the CD will play. If the system has been turned off while the CD was playing, pushing the power/VOL dial will start the CD. CD button: When the CD button is pushed with the system off and the CD loaded, the system will turn on and the CD will start to play. When the CD button is pushed with the CD loaded and the radio playing, the radio will automatically be turned off and the CD will start Monitor, air conditioner, audio and phone system 4-Chapter 4.indd 51 or 4-51 2021/01/13 01:16:59 PM to play. y SEEK/TRACK: When the or button is pushed for more than 1.5 seconds while the CD is being played, the CD will play while fast forwarding or rewinding. When the button is released, the CD will return to normal play speed. When the or button is pushed for less than 1.5 seconds while the CD is being played, the next track or the beginning of the current track on the CD will be played. RPT button: When the RPT button is pushed while the CD is played, the play pattern can be changed as follows: (CD) (Normal) 1 Track Repeat When this button is pushed while the CD is being played, the CD will be ejected. If the CD comes out and is not removed, it will be pulled back into the slot to protect it. USB (Universal Serial Bus) connection port USB main operation: The USB connection port is located on the lower part of the instrument panel. See "USB (Universal Serial Bus) connection port" (P.4-55). Connect a USB memory device into the connection port. The USB memory device will be activated automatically. If the system has been turned off while the USB memory device was playing, pushing the power/VOL dial will start the USB memory device. (CD with compressed audio files) (Normal) g 1 Folder Repeat g 1 Track Repeat g (Normal) RDM button: When the RDM button is pushed while a CD is being played, the play pattern can be changed as follows: (CD) WARNING: Do not connect, disconnect or operate the USB device while driving. Doing so can be a distraction. If distracted you could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident or serious injury. CAUTION: y (Normal) 1 Disc Random (CD with compressed audio files) (Normal) g 1 Disc Random g 1 Folder Random g (Normal) CD eject button: When the CD eject button is pushed with the CD loaded, the CD will be ejected. 4-52 Do not force the USB device into the USB connection port. Inserting the USB device tilted or up-side-down into the port may damage the port. Make sure that the USB device is connected correctly into the USB connection port. (Some USB devices come with a mark as a guide. Make sure that the mark is facing the correct direction before inserting the device.) Do not leave the USB cable in a place where it can be pulled unintentionally. Pulling the cable may damage the port. Refer to your device manufacturer's owner information regarding the proper use and care of the device. MEDIA button: When the MEDIA button is pushed with the system turned off and the USB device inserted, the system will turn on. If another audio source is playing and a USB device is inserted, push the MEDIA button repeatedly until the display screen changes to the USB device mode. SEEK/TRACK buttons: When the or button is pushed for more than 1.5 seconds while a USB device is being played, the USB device will play while forwarding or rewinding. When the button is released, the USB device will return to normal play speed. When the or button is pushed for less than 1.5 seconds while the USB device is being played, the next track or the beginning of the current track on the USB device will be played. Folder selection: To change to another folder in the USB device, turn the TUNE FOLDER dial. RPT button: When the RPT button is pushed while the USB device is played, the play pattern can be change as follows. To change the play mode, push the RPT button repeatedly and the mode will change as follows. Monitor, air conditioner, audio and phone system 4-Chapter 4.indd 52 2021/01/13 01:17:00 PM (Normal) g 1 Folder Repeat g 1 Track Repeat g (Normal) WARNING: When the RDM button is pushed while a USB device is being played, the play pattern can be changed as follows. Do not connect, disconnect or operate the USB device while driving. Doing so can be a distraction. If distracted you could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident or serious injury. To change the play mode, push the RDM button repeatedly, and the mode will change as follows. y RDM button: (Normal) g All Random g 1 Folder Random g (Normal) CAUTION: BACK: When the BACK button is pushed, it returns to the previous display. iPod player operation Connecting iPod: Connect the iPod to the USB connection port using the USB cable that came with your iPod. y Do not force the USB device into the USB connection port. Inserting the USB device tilted or up-side-down into the port may damage the port. Make sure that the USB device is connected correctly into the USB connection port. (Some USB devices come with a mark as a guide. Make sure that the mark is facing the correct direction before inserting the device.) Do not leave the USB cable in a place where it can be pulled unintentionally. Pulling the cable may damage the port. The USB connection port is located on the lower part of the instrument panel. See "USB (Universal Serial Bus) connection port" (P.4-55). Refer to your device manufacturer's owner information regarding the proper use and care of the device. Connect the iPod cable to the USB connection port. The battery of the iPod is charged while the cable is connected to the vehicle. Compatibility: Depending on the version of the iPod, the display on the iPod shows a NISSAN or Accessory Attached screen when the connection is completed. When the iPod is connected to the vehicle, the iPod music library can only be operated by the vehicle audio controls. * iPod and iPhone are a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. The following models are compatible: y iPod nano 1G (Firmware version 1.3.1 -) y iPod nano 2G (Firmware version 1.1.3 -) y iPod nano 3G (Firmware version 1.0.0 -) y iPod nano 4G (Firmware version 1.0.2 -) y iPod nano 5G (Firmware version 1.0.1 -) y iPod nano 6G (Firmware version 1.0 -) y iPod nano 7G (Firmware version 1.0.0 -) y iPod 5G (Firmware version 1.2.1 -) y iPod classic (Firmware version 1.0.0 -) y iPod Touch (iOS 1.1 -) y iPod Touch 2G (iOS 2.1.1 -) y y y y y y y y iPod Touch 3G (iOS 3.1 -) iPod Touch 4G (iOS 4.1 -) iPod Touch 5G (iOS 6.0.0 -) iPhone (iOS 1.0.0 - 2.2.1) iPhone 3G (iOS 2.1 -) iPhone 3GS (iOS 3.0 -) iPhone 4/4S (iOS 4.0 -) iPhone 5 (iOS 6.0.0 -) Operations attributable to firmware update by Apple are not guaranteed. iPod main operation: The system operates when the ignition switch is placed in the “ON” or “ACC” position. Push the MEDIA button repeatedly or push the iPod MENU button to switch to the iPod mode. If the system has been turned off while the iPod was playing, pushing the power/VOL dial will start the iPod. If another audio source is playing and the iPod is connected, pushing the iPod MENU button or the MEDIA button repeatedly will change to the iPod mode. When the iPod MENU button is pushed while the iPod is connected, the interface for iPod operation is shown on the audio display. The items on the menu list can be scrolled by turning the TUNE·FOLDER dial while the iPod is operating. To select an item, push ENTER/SETTING button. Items in the iPod menu appear on the display in the following order. y y y y y y Now playing Playlists Artists Albums Songs Podcasts Monitor, air conditioner, audio and phone system 4-Chapter 4.indd 53 4-53 2021/01/13 01:17:00 PM y y y y Genres Composers Audiobooks Shuffle Songs For more information about each item, see the iPod Owner’s Manual. device can be connected to the vehicle's audio system so that the audio files on the device play through the vehicle's speakers. Regulatory information: When the or button is pushed for less than 1.5 seconds while the iPod is playing, the next track or the beginning of the current track on the iPod will be played. Bluetooth® audio main operation: Bluetooth® trademark: Bluetooth® is a trademark owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and licensed to Visteon Corporation and Panasonic Corporation. SEEK/TRACK buttons: When the or button is pushed for more than 1.5 seconds while the iPod is playing, the iPod will play while fast forwarding or rewinding. When the button is released, the iPod will return to the normal play speed. Connecting Bluetooth® device: To connect your Bluetooth® device to the vehicle, follow the procedure below: 1. Push the ENTER/SETTING button. JVH1012X To switch to the Bluetooth® audio mode, push the MEDIA button repeatedly until the Bluetooth® audio mode is displayed on the screen. RPT button: When the RPT button is pushed while a track is being played, the play pattern can be changed as follows: The controls for the Bluetooth® audio are displayed on the screen. Use the Preset 3 button to play and use the Preset 4 button to pause. (Repeat off) g 1 Track Repeat g All Repeat g (Repeat off) Auxiliary input jack RDM button: When the RDM button is pushed while a track is being played, the play pattern can be changed as follows: (Shuffle off) g Track Shuffle g (Shuffle off) JVH0620X 2. Select the “Bluetooth” key. 3. Select the “Add Phone” key. This same screen can be accessed to remove, replace or select a different Bluetooth® device. BACK: The display will return to the previous screen. Bluetooth® audio player operation If you have a compatible Bluetooth® audio device that is capable of playing audio files, the 4-54 according to each cellular phone model. See the Owner's manual of the Bluetooth® device for details. 4. The system acknowledges the command and asks you to initiate connecting from the Bluetooth® device. The connecting procedure of the Bluetooth® device varies The AUX input jack is located on the lower part of the instrument panel. See " AUX (auxiliary) input jack" (P.4-55). The AUX input jack accepts any standard analog audio input such as from a portable cassette tape/CD player, MP3 player or laptop computer. Push the MEDIA button to play a compatible device when it is plugged into the AUX input jack. NISSAN strongly recommends using a stereo mini plug cable when connecting your music device to the audio system. Music may not play properly when a monaural cable is used. Monitor, air conditioner, audio and phone system 4-Chapter 4.indd 54 2021/01/13 01:17:00 PM USB (UNIVERSAL SERIAL BUS) CONNECTION PORT AUX (auxiliary) INPUT JACK WARNING: Do not connect, disconnect or operate the USB device while driving. Doing so can be a distraction. If distracted you could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident or serious injury. CAUTION: y Do not force the USB device into the USB connection port. Inserting the USB device tilted or up-side-down into the port may damage the port. Make sure that the USB device is connected correctly into the USB connection port. y Do not grab the USB connection port cover (if equipped) when pulling the USB device out of the port. This could damage the port and the cover. y Do not leave the USB cable in a place where it can be pulled unintentionally. Pulling the cable may damage the port. Refer to your device manufacturer's owner information regarding the proper use and care of the device. Except for front bench seat models JVH1258X Except for front bench seat models For front bench seat models JVH1259X JVH111X The USB connection port is located on the lower part of the instrument panel. Insert USB devices or iPod connectors into this port. For front bench seat models JVH1112X The AUX input jack is located on the lower part of the instrument panel. Compatible audio devices, such as some MP3 players, can be connected to the system through the AUX input jack. Before connecting a device to a jack, turn off the power of the portable device. With a compatible device connected to the jack, push the corresponding button (depends on the audio system) repeatedly until the display Monitor, air conditioner, audio and phone system 4-Chapter 4.indd 55 4-55 2021/01/13 01:17:00 PM switches to the AUX mode. NISSAN strongly recommends using a stereo mini plug cable when connecting your music device to the audio system. Music may not play properly when a monaural cable is used. CD/USB MEMORY CARE AND CLEANING CD USB memory Volume control button: y Do not place heavy objects on the USB memory. y Do not store the USB memory in highly humid locations. y Do not expose the USB memory to direct sunlight. y Do not spill any liquids on the USB memory. Refer to the USB memory Owner’s Manual for details. AUDIO CONTROL STEERING SWITCH (if equipped) Steering wheel mounted controls for audio (Type A) Push the + or − side of the button to increase or decrease the volume. Tuning buttons: y RADIO — Pushing / shorter. Next or previous preset station — y CD, iPod, Bluetooth® audio or USB device — Pushing / shorter. Next track or the beginning of the current track (the previous track if the button is pushed immediately after the current track starts playing) — SAA0451 y Handle a disc by its edges. Never touch the surface of the disc. Do not bend the disc. y Always place the discs in the storage case when they are not being used. y To clean a disc, wipe the surface from the center to the outer edge using a clean, soft cloth. Do not wipe the disc using a circular motion. y Pushing / longer Fast-forward or rewind Source select button: Push the SOURCE button to change the mode to available audio source. When the display is off, push the SOURCE button to turn on the display. WAE0509X Do not use a conventional record cleaner or alcohol intended for industrial use. 1. Tuning buttons A new disc may be rough on the inner and outer edges. Remove the rough edges by rubbing the inner and outer edges with the side of a pen or pencil as illustrated. 2. Volume control buttons 3. Source select button 4-56 Pushing / longer Next or previous station Monitor, air conditioner, audio and phone system 4-Chapter 4.indd 56 2021/01/13 01:17:01 PM Steering wheel mounted controls for audio (Type B) RADIO y Pushing / shorter. Next or previous preset station y Pushing / longer Next or previous station CD, iPod, USB device or Bluetooth® audio JVH1545X 1. Menu control buttons/OK button 2. Volume control buttons 3. Tuning buttons 4. Back button y Pushing / shorter Next track or the beginning of the current track (the previous track if the button is pushed immediately after the current track starts playing) y Pushing / longer Fast-forward or rewind Back button: Push the Back button to return to the previous screen or cancel the current selection. Menu control buttons/OK button: Push the / buttons and switch the vehicle information display to audio mode. Push the OK button until the preferred available audio source is selected Volume control buttons: Push the + or − button to increase or decrease the volume. Tuning buttons: Push the or track. / buttons to select a station Depending on the status of the vehicle information display, the tuning buttons cannot be used for audio control. Monitor, air conditioner, audio and phone system 4-Chapter 4.indd 57 4-57 2021/01/13 01:17:01 PM ANTENNA CAR PHONE AND CB RADIO ROOF ANTENNA following conditions. y The vehicle enters an automatic car wash. y The vehicle enters a garage with a low ceiling. y The vehicle is covered with a car cover. PILLAR ANTENNA Adjust the antenna length for the best reception. A fully extended antenna is usually best for distant reception. When installing a CB, ham radio or a car phone in your vehicle, be sure to observe the following cautions, otherwise the new equipment may adversely affect the Engine Control System and other electronic parts. CAUTION: y Keep the antenna as far away as possible from the Electronic Control Module. y Keep the antenna wire at least 20 cm (8 in) away from the Engine Control harnesses. Do not route the antenna wire next to any harnesses. y Adjust the antenna standing wave ratio as recommended by the manufacturer. y Connect the ground wire from the radio chassis to the body. y For details, consult a NISSAN dealer. CAUTION: To prevent damage, be sure that the antenna is retracted before the vehicle enters an automatic car wash. JVH0666X The antenna can be removed if necessary. Hold the bottom of the antenna and remove by turning counterclockwise. To install the antenna, turn the antenna clockwise and tighten. CAUTION: To avoid damaging or deforming the antenna, be sure to remove the antenna under the 4-58 Monitor, air conditioner, audio and phone system 4-Chapter 4.indd 58 2021/01/13 01:17:01 PM Bluetooth® HANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEM (Type A) *This Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System is for models with type B audio. WARNING: y y Use a phone after stopping your vehicle in a safe location. If you have to use a phone while driving, exercise extreme caution at all times so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. If you find yourself unable to devote full attention to vehicle operation while using the phone, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle before doing so. CAUTION: To avoid draining the vehicle battery, use a phone after starting the engine. Bluetooth® is a wireless radio communication standard. This system offers a hands-free facility for your cellular phone to enhance driving comfort. To use the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System, your cellular phone must first be setup. For details, see "Bluetooth® settings" (P.4-60). Once it has been setup, the hands-free mode is automatically activated on the registered cellular phone (via Bluetooth®) when it comes into range. If the audio system is in use at the time, the radio, CD, iPod, USB audio, Bluetooth® audio or AUX source mode will be muted and will stay muted until the active call has ended. REGULATORY INFORMATION Bluetooth® trademark Bluetooth® is a trademark owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and licensed to Visteon Corporation and Panasonic Corporation. The Bluetooth® system may not be able to connect with your cellular phone for the following reasons: y The cellular phone is too far away from the vehicle. y The Bluetooth® mode on your cellular phone has not been activated. y Your cellular phone has not been paired with the Bluetooth® system of the audio unit. y The cellular phone does not support Bluetooth® technology. NOTE: y For details, see your cellular phone's Owner's Manual. y For assistance with your cellular phone integration, please visit your local NISSAN dealer. CE statement Hereby Visteon Corp. declares that this system is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC. NOTE: The audio system only supports Bluetooth® devices with AVRCP (Audio Video Remote Control Profile) version 1.3, or 1.0 or earlier. CONTROL BUTTONS AND MICROPHONE Instrument panel (if equipped): A notification message appears on the audio display when the phone is connected, when an incoming call is being received, as well as when a call is initiated. When a call is active, the Instrument panel mounted control buttons (if equipped), microphone, and steering wheel mounted control buttons enable hands-free communication. JVH0856X 1. Phonebook quick search button Monitor, air conditioner, audio and phone system 4-Chapter 4.indd 59 4-59 2021/01/13 01:17:01 PM 2. Back 3. Phone 4. MENU/ENTER dial Bluetooth® SETTINGS button button Pairing device Enter the phone setup menu via the button on the instrument panel or the button on the steering wheel, select the “Bluetooth” key, and then check if the Bluetooth® is set to on. (If not push the MENU/ENTER dial to turn it on.) Steering wheel mounted control: Manual for further details. Setting items To set up the Bluetooth® system with a device, the following items are available: To setup the Bluetooth® system to pair (connect or register) your preferred cellular phone, follow the following procedure. 1. To pair a device, select the “Scan device” key or the “Pair device” key on the display. 2. A notification message will be displayed when the phone is successfully paired. 3. The display will return to the current audio source status after the connection is complete. y While the Bluetooth® connection is active, the following icons will appear on the display. WAE0537X 1. Volume control -/ + buttons Push the buttons to increase or decrease the volume of the speakers. 2. Phone send button y Accept an incoming call by pushing once. 3. Scan devices Shows all available visible Bluetooth® devices and initializes Bluetooth® connection from the audio unit. y Pair device Initializes Bluetooth® connection from the mobile device. y *: If low battery is indicated, the Bluetooth® device must be recharged soon. Sel. device Paired Bluetooth® devices are listed and can be selected for connection. y Up to 5 different Bluetooth® devices can be connected. However, only one device can be used at a time. If 5 different Bluetooth® devices are registered, a new device can only replace one of the 5 existing paired devices. Del. device A registered Bluetooth® device can be deleted. y Bluetooth If this setting is turned off, the connection between the Bluetooth® devices and the in-vehicle Bluetooth® module will be cancelled. y Redial the last outgoing call by pushing the button for more than 2 seconds. — : Signal strength indicator — : Battery status indicator* Phone end — : Bluetooth® connection ON indicator button y Reject an incoming call by pushing the button during an incoming call. y End an active call by pushing the button once. y Microphone: Microphone is located near the map lights. y 4-60 JVH0847X y The pairing procedure and operation may vary according to device type and compatibility. See the Bluetooth® device Owner’s Monitor, air conditioner, audio and phone system 4-Chapter 4.indd 60 2021/01/13 01:17:02 PM Scan device: Pair device: 1. y Turn on the Bluetooth® on the audio unit. See "Bluetooth®" (P.4-60). y Use the audio unit to pair: Push the button on the instrument panel or the button on the steering wheel. Select “Scan device” key. The audio unit searches for the Bluetooth® devices and shows all devices that were found. Push the button on the instrument panel or the button on the steering wheel. Select the “Pair Device” key. Make sure your Bluetooth® device is available at this time. 2. Select the device to be paired using the MENU/ENTER dial. 3. The pairing procedure depends on the device to be connected: The pairing procedure depends on the Bluetooth® device to be connected: 1) Device without PIN code: The Bluetooth® connection will be automatically connected without any further input. a. Device without PIN code: The Bluetooth® connection will be automatically connected without any further input. 2) Device with PIN code: Two different ways of pairing are possible depending on the device. For the correct procedure details, see "Scan device" (P.4-61). b. Device with PIN code: y The paired device list shows which Bluetooth® audio or cellular phone devices have been paired or registered to the system. Select the appropriate device to connect to the system. The following icons (if equipped) indicate the capability of the registered device: y y : Cellular phone integration : Audio streaming (A2DP – Advanced Audio Distribution Profile) Del. device: A registered device can be removed from Bluetooth® system registration. Select a registered device and push the MENU/ENTER dial to confirm to deletion. Bluetooth: The message “To pair” and “Enter Pin” 0000 will be displayed. 1) Switch on the search mode for Bluetooth® devices. Confirm the PIN code on the device. The Bluetooth® connection will be made. If the search mode finds the audio unit it will be shown on the device display. If Bluetooth® signal has been turned off, a notification message “ON/OFF” appears when you select “Bluetooth” from the phone menu. (Push the button to display the phone menu.) To turn the Bluetooth® signal on, push the MENU/ ENTER dial and a follow up screen will appear. Select “ON” and push the MENU/ENTER dial to display the Bluetooth® settings menu screen. Type B: 2) Select the unit device shown as “My Car”. USING THE SYSTEM The message “Pairing request” and “Confirm password” together with a 6 digit code will be displayed. The unique and identical code should be displayed on the device. If the code is identical confirm on the device. 3) Enter the number code shown on the relevant device with the device’s own keypad, and push the confirmation key on the Bluetooth® device. The hands-free mode can be operated using the button on the instrument panel or the button on the steering wheel. Two different ways of pairing are possible depending on the device: y Sel. device: Type A: The Bluetooth® connection will be made. y Use the Bluetooth® audio/cellular phone device to pair: Refer to the relevant Bluetooth® device Owner’s Manual for further details. Monitor, air conditioner, audio and phone system 4-Chapter 4.indd 61 4-61 2021/01/13 01:17:02 PM Receiving a call y y : Select this item to transfer the call back to the hands-free phone system from the cellular phone. #123: Select this item to enter numbers during a call. For example, use this function when directed by an automated phone system to dial an extension number. Putting a call on hold: JVH0857X When receiving an incoming call, the display on the audio unit will show the caller’s phone number (or a notification message that the caller’s phone number cannot be shown) and three operation icons as illustrated. To highlight different icons, turn the MENU/ENTER dial. Push the MENU/ENTER dial to select the highlighted icon. To put a call on hold, select . Select return to the call. To reject the call select . to Rejecting a call: To reject an incoming call, select ing on the steering wheel. or by push- y Making a call from the phonebook y Manually dialing a phone number y Redialing y Using call history (Call List menu) — Dialed — Received — Missed Making a call from the phonebook: Once the Bluetooth® connection has been made between the registered cellular phone and the hands-free phone system, phonebook data will be transferred automatically to the hands-free phone system. The transfer may take a while before completion. NOTE: Making a call Phone book data will be erased when: WARNING: Park the vehicle in a safe location, and apply the parking brake before making a call. y Switching to another registered cellular phone. y Cellular phone is disconnected. Answer the call by selecting on the display or by pushing on the steering wheel. y The registered cellular phone is deleted from the audio system. During the call, the following icons are available: 1. Push the button on instrument panel or the button on the steering wheel. 2. Turn the MENU/ENTER dial to highlight “Phone Book” and push the MENU/ENTER dial. 3. Scroll down through the list, select the appropriate contact name (highlighted), and push the MENU/ENTER dial. 4. The screen will show the number to be dialed. Push the MENU/ENTER dial to dial the number. Answering and during a call: y : Select this item to end the call. y : Select this item to put the call on hold. y : Select this item to transfer the call from the hands-free phone system to your cellular phone. JVH0863X A call can be initiated using one of the following methods: 4-62 Monitor, air conditioner, audio and phone system 4-Chapter 4.indd 62 2021/01/13 01:17:02 PM If more than one number is registered, select an appropriate icon. Manually dialing a phone number: Redial: To redial or call the last number dialed, push and hold the button on the instrument panel or the button on the steering wheel for more than 2 seconds. : Home : Cellular phone : Office Using call history (Call list menu): Quick searching the phonebook: JVH0859X To dial a phone number manually, perform the following operation: 1. JVH0858X The quick search mode can be used as follows: 1. Push the A-Z button. 2. Turn the MENU/ENTER dial for the first alphabetic or numerical letter of the contact name. Once highlighted, push the MENU/ ENTER dial to select the letter. 3. 4. 2. Push the MENU/ENTER dial to select “Dial Number”. 3. Turn the MENU/ENTER dial to scroll along and highlight each number of the phone number. Push the MENU/ENTER dial to select the highlighted number. To delete the last number entered, scroll to the “ ” (Backspace symbol) and once highlighted, push the MENU/ENTER dial. The last number will be deleted. Pushing the MENU/ENTER dial repeatedly will delete each subsequent number. The display will show the corresponding contact name(s). Where necessary, use the MENU/ENTER dial to scroll further for the appropriate contact name to call. The screen will show the number to be dialed. Push the MENU/ENTER dial to dial the number. Push the button on the instrument panel or the button on the steering wheel and turn the MENU/ENTER dial to highlight “Dial Number”. 4. After entering the last number, highlight the icon and push the MENU/ENTER dial to dial the number. JVH0860X A number from the dialed, received, or missed call lists can also be used to make a call. 1. Push the button on the instrument panel or the button on the steering wheel and select “Call List” on the display. 2. Turn the MENU/ENTER dial and scroll to an item, and push the MENU/ENTER dial to select an item. Available items: y Dialed Use the dialed call mode to make a call which is based on the list of outgoing (dialed) calls. y Received Use the received call mode to make a call which is based on the list of received calls. Monitor, air conditioner, audio and phone system 4-Chapter 4.indd 63 4-63 2021/01/13 01:17:02 PM y Missed Use the missed call mode to make a call which is based on the list of missed calls. 3. GENERAL SETTINGS y Ringtone — Car Switch the ringtone to ring from the vehicle or the cellular phone. Scroll to the preferred phone number and push the MENU/ENTER dial, the button on the instrument panel or the button on the steering wheel. — Phone Switch the phone ringing volume on or off. Second incoming call y PB download Download the phonebook of the mobile device to the audio unit manually. JVH0862X Using the MENU/ENTER dial, highlight “Settings” from the phone menu and push the MENU/ ENTER dial. Volume settings and manually downloading the phonebook can be done using this menu. JVH0861X Whenever there is a second incoming call is shown in the display. By selecting the icon the call is accepted and the current call is put on hold. Selecting the icon using the MENU/ENTER dial rejects the second incoming call. When this is done during the conversation it ends the call. Selecting the icon using the MENU/ENTER dial switches the call on line between the first and the second call. Ending a call Menu operation: Turn the MENU/ENTER dial to change the highlighted item and to change the volume settings. Push the MENU/ENTER dial to select the highlighted item and to apply the setting. Menu items: y Volume — Ring Set the phone ringing volume. — Call Set the volume of the conversation during a call. To end an active call, highlight the icon and push the ENTER/MENU dial or push the button on the steering wheel. 4-64 Monitor, air conditioner, audio and phone system 4-Chapter 4.indd 64 2021/01/13 01:17:03 PM Bluetooth® HANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEM (Type B) *This Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System is for models with type D audio. WARNING: y y Use a phone after stopping your vehicle in a safe location. If you have to use a phone while driving, exercise extreme caution at all times so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. If you find yourself unable to devote full attention to vehicle operation while talking on the phone, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle before doing so. CAUTION: To avoid draining the vehicle battery, use a phone after starting the engine. NOTE: Wireless LAN (Wi-Fi) and the Bluetooth® functions share the same frequency band (2.4 GHz). Using the Bluetooth® and the wireless LAN functions at the same time may slow down or disconnect communication and cause undesired noise. It is recommended that you turn off the wireless LAN (Wi-Fi) when using the Bluetooth® functions. vehicle phone module, no phone connecting procedure is required. Your phone is automatically connected with the in-vehicle phone module when the ignition switch is placed in the “ON” position with the registered cellular phone turned on and carried in the vehicle. You can register up to 5 different Bluetooth® cellular phones in the in-vehicle phone module. However, you can talk on only one cellular phone at a time. When a call is active, the audio system and microphone (located near the map lights) are used for the handsfree communications. If the audio system is being used at the time, the audio mode will mute and will stay muted until the active call is ended. not to be dialed. y When the radio wave condition is not ideal or ambient sound is too loud, it may be difficult to hear the other person’s voice during a call. y Immediately after the ignition switch is placed in the “ON” position, it may be impossible to receive a call for a short period of time. y Do not place the cellular phone in an area surrounded by metal or far away from the in-vehicle phone module to prevent tone quality degradation and wireless connection disruption. y While a cellular phone is connected through the Bluetooth® wireless connection, the battery power of the cellular phone may discharge quicker than usual. y If the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System seems to be malfunctioning, please contact a NISSAN dealer. y Some cellular phones or other devices may cause interference or a buzzing noise to come from the audio system speakers. Storing the device in a different location may reduce or eliminate the noise. y Refer to the cellular phone Owner’s Manual regarding the telephone pairing procedure specific to your phone, battery charging, cellular phone antenna, etc. y The antenna display on the monitor will not coincide with the antenna display of some cellular phones. y Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as possible to hear the caller’s voice clearly as Before using the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System, refer to the following notes. y Set up the wireless connection between a cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone module before using the Bluetooth® HandsFree Phone System. y Some Bluetooth® enabled cellular phones may not be recognized by the in-vehicle phone module. y You will not be able to use a hands-free phone under the following conditions: Your vehicle is equipped with Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System. If you are an owner of a Bluetooth® enabled cellular phone, you can set up the wireless connection between your cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone module. With Bluetooth® wireless technology, you can make or receive a telephone call with your cellular phone in your pocket. — Your vehicle is outside of the telephone service area. — Once your cellular phone is paired to the in- Your vehicle is in an area where it is difficult to receive radio waves; such as in a tunnel, in an underground parking garage, behind a tall building or in a mountainous area. — Your cellular phone is locked in order Monitor, air conditioner, audio and phone system 4-Chapter 4.indd 65 4-65 2021/01/13 01:17:03 PM well as to minimize its echoes. y If reception between callers is unclear, adjusting the incoming or outgoing call volume may improve the clarity. y This wireless hands free car kit is based on Bluetooth® technology. USING THE SYSTEM to vehicle operation. Control buttons: Setup Choosing a language: You can interact with the Bluetooth® HandsFree Phone System using several languages that are available. To change the language, perform the following. See "Audio main operation (P.4-50). — Frequency: 2402 MHz - 2480 MHz — Modulation: FHSS GFSK 8DPSK, π/4DQPSK Connecting procedure: — Number of Channel: 79 — This wireless equipment cannot be used for any services related to safety due to the possibility of radio interference. JVH1576X REGULATORY INFORMATION 1. Volume control buttons CE statement 2. Select buttons: Hereby “Yangfeng Visteon Automotive Electronics Co., Ltd.” declares that this Bluetooth car kit is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC. Push the / buttons to manually control the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System. 3. Bluetooth® is a trademark owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and licensed to Visteon Corporation and Panasonic Corporation. button Push the button to initiate a phone session or answer an incoming call. 4. Bluetooth® trademark: Phone send Phone end button: Push the button to end a phone call or to stop the system from providing voice prompts. Microphone: Microphone is located near the map lights. The NISSAN Voice Recognition system (if equipped) allows hands-free operation of the Bluetooth® Hands- Free Phone System. If the vehicle is in motion, some commands may not be available so full attention may be given 4-66 You can register up to 5 different Bluetooth® cellular phones in the in-vehicle phone module. However, you can talk on only one cellular phone at a time. To connect a phone to the Bluetooth® handsfree phone system. See "Connecting Bluetooth® device" (P.4-54). Selecting a registered phone: 1. Push the ENTER/SETTING button. 2. Use the TUNE FOLDER dial to select “Bluetooth” and then push the ENTER/SETTING button. 3. Select “Select Phone”, and then push the ENTER/SETTING button. 4. Select the phone you wish to use. Deleting a registered phone: 1. Push the ENTER/SETTING button. 2. Use the TUNE FOLDER dial to select “Bluetooth” and then push the ENTER/SETTING button. 3. Select “Delete Phone”, and then push the ENTER/SETTING button. Monitor, air conditioner, audio and phone system 4-Chapter 4.indd 66 2021/01/13 01:17:03 PM 4. Use the TUNE FOLDER dial to select the phone you wish to delete. NOTE: When you delete a phone, the associated phonebook for the phone will also be deleted. Bluetooth® on/off: 1. Push the ENTER/SETTING button. 2. Use the TUNE FOLDER dial to select “Bluetooth” and then push the ENTER/SETTING button. 3. Select “Bluetooth” and select “On” or “Off” to turn the vehicle's Bluetooth® system on or off. When Bluetooth® is off, you will not be able to make or receive calls by the hands-free mode. Also, you will not have access to the phonebook. wheel to move through the list and select the person you wish to call. y Redial Select this item to call the last number dialed. y Call Back Select this item to call the number of the last incoming call to the vehicle. Phonebook: Call Phonebook y Record Name (if equipped) y Recent Calls y Select Phone Missed Calls Select this item to list the last five missed calls to the vehicle. If the call is from an entry in the phonebook, the name will be displayed. Otherwise, the phone number of the missed call will be displayed. Select “Dial” to call the number. Select “Next Entry” or “Previous Entry” to move through the list of missed calls. y Outgoing Calls Select this item to list the last five outgoing calls from the vehicle. If the call was to an entry in the phonebook, the name will be displayed. Otherwise, the phone number of the outgoing call will be displayed. Select “Dial” to call the number. Select “Next Entry” or “Previous Entry” to move through the list of outgoing calls. y Redial Select this item to call the last number dialed. Call Back Select this item to call the number of the last incoming call to the vehicle. Each phone has its own separate phonebook. You cannot access Phone A's phonebook if you are currently connected with Phone B. List Names Select this item to have the system list the names in the phonebook one by one in alphabetical order. Select “Dial” to dial the number of the currently selected name. Push the / buttons on the steering wheel to move through the list and select the person you wish to call. y Delete Entry Select this item to delete an entry in the phonebook. Choose an entry to delete. Push the button to bring up the phone menu. The available options are: y y NOTE: y Incoming Calls Select this item to list the last five incoming calls to the vehicle. If the call is from an entry in the phonebook, the name will be displayed. Otherwise, the phone number of the incoming call will be displayed. Select “Dial” to call the number. Select “Next Entry” or “Previous Entry” to move through the list of incoming calls. The following items are available under “Phonebook”. Phone menu y y Call: Record Name (if equipped): The following items are available under “Call”. The system allows you to record custom voice tags for contact names in the phonebook. Up to 40 voice tags can be recorded to the system. y Recent Calls: Select Phone: The following items are available under “Recent Calls”: Select this item to select a phone to use from a list of those phones connected to the vehicle. y List Names Select this item to have the system list the names in the phonebook one by one in alphabetical order. Select “Dial” to dial the number of the currently selected name. Push the / buttons on the steering Monitor, air conditioner, audio and phone system 4-Chapter 4.indd 67 4-67 2021/01/13 01:17:03 PM Making a call Phonebook: 1. Push the button on the steering wheel and push the / buttons on the steering wheel to select the “Phonebook” menu. 2. Push the / buttons on the steering wheel to select the “List Names” menu. 3. Push the / buttons on the steering wheel to select the person you wish to call. 4. Push the button to accept the selection. The system acknowledges the selection and starts dialing. Redial: 1. Push the phone send 2. Push the / buttons on the steering wheel or using the TUNE FOLDER dial to select “Recent Calls”, and then push the phone send button. button. 3. Push the / buttons on the steering wheel to select “Redial”, and then push the phone send button. 4. Push the phone send button, and then the system begins the call. Bluetooth® cellular phone keypad: You can also make a call by operating the cellular phone that is registered to the in-vehicle phone module to use the hands-free phone system. Receiving a call System, the call information is displayed on either the vehicle information display or both the vehicle information display and the control panel display. Push the button to accept the call. Push the button to reject the call. During a call During a call, push the phone send button to access additional options. Select one of the following items: y y “Mute On” / “Mute Off” Select the item to mute or unmute the system. “Transfer Call” Select this item to switch the call from the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System to the cellular phone when privacy is desired. Once the ignition switch is placed in the “OFF” position and the “ON” position again, the system will automatically change to the hands-free mode as a default setting. If supported by the phone, the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System allows for call waiting functionality. If a call is received while another call is already active, a message will be displayed on the screen. Push the phone send button to hold the active call and switch to the second call. Push the button to reject the second call. While the second call is active, pushing the phone send button will allow the same items that are available during any call as well as two additional items: When a call is received by the phone connected to the vehicle's Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone 4-68 y “Switch Call” Select this item to hold the second call and switch back to the original call. y “End Other Call” Select this item to stay with the second call and end the original call. Push the phone send button to accept the call. Push the button to reject the call. Ending a call Push the phone end button on the steering wheel or the off button on the cellular phone. Bluetooth® SETTINGS To access and adjust the settings for the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System; 1. Push the ENTER/SETTING button. 2. Use the TUNE·FOLDER dial to select “Bluetooth” and then push the ENTER/SETTING button. Available setting items: y Bluetooth Select “On” or “Off” to turn the vehicle's Bluetooth® system on or off. y Add Phone For operation to connect a phone to the system, see "Connecting Bluetooth® device" (P.4-54). y Delete Phone Select to delete a phone from the displayed list. The system will ask to confirm before deleting the phone. NOTE: When you delete a phone, the associated Monitor, air conditioner, audio and phone system 4-Chapter 4.indd 68 2021/01/13 01:17:03 PM phonebook for the phone will also be deleted. y Replace Phone Select to replace a phone from the displayed list. When a selection is made, the system will ask to confirm before proceeding. The recorded phonebook for the phone being deleted will be saved as long as the new phone’s phonebook is the same as the old phone’s phonebook. y Select Phone Select to connect to a previously connected phone from the displayed list. y Phonebook Download (if equipped) Select to turn on or off the automatic download of a connected phone’s phonebook. y Show Incoming Calls Select “Driver Only” to have incoming call information displayed only in the vehicle information display. Select “Both” to have incoming call information displayed in both the vehicle information display and the center display screen. Monitor, air conditioner, audio and phone system 4-Chapter 4.indd 69 4-69 2021/01/13 01:17:04 PM MEMO 4-70 Illustrated table of contents 4-Chapter 4.indd 70 2021/01/13 01:17:04 PM 5 Starting and driving Break-in schedule ......................................................................................... 5-4 Before starting engine .............................................................................. 5-4 Precautions when starting and driving ....................................... 5-4 Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) .............................................. 5-5 Turbocharger system (if equipped) ................................................. 5-5 On-pavement and off-road driving precautions .................. 5-6 Driving safety precautions............................................................ 5-6 Care when driving ........................................................................................ 5-7 Engine cold start period ................................................................. 5-7 Loading luggage .................................................................................. 5-7 Driving in wet conditions ............................................................... 5-7 Driving in winter conditions ....................................................... 5-8 Ignition switch (models without Intelligent Key system) ....................................................................................................... 5-8 Manual Transmission (MT) ............................................................ 5-8 Automatic Transmission (AT) ...................................................... 5-8 Key positions........................................................................................... 5-9 Push-button ignition switch (models with Intelligent Key system) ....................................................................................................... 5-9 Precautions on push-button ignition switch operation ................................................................................................... 5-9 Intelligent Key system ...................................................................... 5-9 Automatic Transmission (AT) ................................................... 5-10 Steering lock ........................................................................................ 5-10 Ignition switch positions............................................................. 5-10 Intelligent Key battery discharge ......................................... 5-11 Starting engine (models without Intelligent Key system) .............................................................................................................. 5-12 Starting engine (models with Intelligent Key system) .............................................................................................................. 5-12 5-Chapter 5.indd 1 Driving vehicle .............................................................................................. 5-13 Driving with Automatic Transmission (AT)..................... 5-13 Driving with Manual Transmission (MT) ........................... 5-16 Four-wheel drive (4WD) (if equipped).......................................... 5-16 Part time 4WD system .................................................................. 5-17 4WD mode switch operation ................................................... 5-19 4WD mode indicator ...................................................................... 5-20 4WD warning ....................................................................................... 5-20 Tyre recommendation for 4WD ............................................. 5-21 Rear differential locking system (if equipped) ...................... 5-22 Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system (if equipped) ................................................................................................... 5-23 Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch.................. 5-24 Hill descent control system (if equipped)................................. 5-24 Hill descent control switch ........................................................ 5-24 Hill start assist system (if equipped) ............................................ 5-25 Lane Departure Warning (LDW) (if equipped)........................ 5-26 LDW system operation.................................................................. 5-26 How to enable/disable the LDW system ......................... 5-27 LDW system limitations................................................................ 5-28 System temporarily unavailable............................................ 5-29 System malfunction ....................................................................... 5-29 System maintenance .................................................................... 5-29 Blind Spot Warning (BSW) (if equipped) ..................................... 5-30 BSW system operation.................................................................. 5-31 How to enable/disable the BSW system ......................... 5-32 BSW system limitations................................................................ 5-32 BSW driving situations .................................................................. 5-33 System temporarily unavailable............................................ 5-35 2021/01/13 02:16:34 PM System malfunction ....................................................................... 5-35 System maintenance .................................................................... 5-35 Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) (if equipped) .......................... 5-36 RCTA system operation ............................................................... 5-37 How to enable/disable the RCTA system....................... 5-38 RCTA system limitations ............................................................. 5-39 System temporarily unavailable............................................ 5-40 System malfunction ....................................................................... 5-41 System maintenance .................................................................... 5-41 Cruise control (if equipped) ................................................................ 5-41 Precautions on cruise control ................................................. 5-42 Cruise control operations .......................................................... 5-42 Intelligent Emergency Braking (if equipped) ......................... 5-43 Intelligent Emergency Braking system operation ............................................................................. 5-43 Turning the Intelligent Emergency Braking system ON/OFF ................................................................................. 5-45 Intelligent Emergency Braking system limitations .............................................................................................. 5-45 System temporarily unavailable............................................ 5-48 System malfunction ....................................................................... 5-49 System maintenance .................................................................... 5-49 Intelligent Forward Collision Warning system (if equipped) ......................................................................................................... 5-49 Intelligent Forward Collision Warning system operation ................................................................................................ 5-50 Turning the Intelligent Forward Collision Warning 5-Chapter 5.indd 2 system ON/OFF ................................................................................. 5-52 Intelligent Forward Collision Warning system limitations .............................................................................................. 5-52 System temporarily unavailable............................................ 5-55 System malfunction ....................................................................... 5-55 System maintenance .................................................................. 5-56 Intelligent Driver Alertness (if equipped) .................................. 5-56 Intelligent Driver Alertness system operation ............ 5-57 How to enable/disable the Intelligent Driver Alertness system .............................................................................. 5-57 Intelligent Driver Alertness system limitations .......... 5-58 System malfunction ....................................................................... 5-58 ECO drive report (if equipped) .......................................................... 5-58 Fuel Efficiency and Carbon Dioxide Reduction driving tips....................................................................................................... 5-59 Increasing fuel economy and reducing Carbon Dioxide emissions ...................................................................................... 5-59 Parking ............................................................................................................... 5-60 Parking sensor (SONAR) system (if equipped)...................... 5-61 Parking sensor (sonar) system OFF switch .................. 5-62 Parking sensor (sonar) system setting ............................ 5-63 Trailer towing ................................................................................................ 5-63 Operating precautions ................................................................. 5-63 Maximum load limits ...................................................................... 5-64 Tyre pressure ....................................................................................... 5-64 Safety chains........................................................................................ 5-64 Trailer brakes........................................................................................ 5-64 2021/01/13 02:16:35 PM Trailer detection (if equipped) ................................................. 5-65 Power steering ............................................................................................. 5-65 Brake system ................................................................................................. 5-65 Brake precautions ............................................................................ 5-65 Brake assist (if equipped)............................................................ 5-66 Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) (if equipped) .............. 5-66 Vehicle security............................................................................................ 5-67 Cold weather driving ............................................................................... 5-67 Battery...................................................................................................... 5-68 Engine coolant.................................................................................... 5-68 Tyre equipment.................................................................................. 5-68 Special winter equipment .......................................................... 5-68 Parking brake....................................................................................... 5-68 Corrosion protection ..................................................................... 5-68 5-Chapter 5.indd 3 2021/01/13 02:16:35 PM BREAK-IN SCHEDULE During the first 1,600 km (1,000 miles), follow these recommendations to obtain maximum engine performance and ensure the future reliability and economy of your new vehicle. Failure to follow these recommendations may result in shortened engine life and reduced engine performance. y Do not drive at a constant speed, either fast or slow, for long periods of time. y Do not run the engine over 4,000 rpm. y Do not accelerate at full throttle in any gear. y Do not start quickly. y Do not brake hard as much as possible. y Do not tow a trailer for at least the first 800 km (500 miles). 5-4 BEFORE STARTING ENGINE PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING: The driving characteristics of your vehicle will change remarkably by any additional load and its distribution, as well as by adding optional equipment (trailer coupling, roof rack, etc.). Your driving style and speed must be adjusted according to the circumstances. Especially when carrying heavy loads, your speed must be reduced adequately. y Make sure the area around the vehicle is clear. y Check fluid levels such as engine oil, coolant, brake (and clutch) fluid, window washer fluid as frequently as possible, at least whenever you refuel. y Visually inspect tyres for their appearance and condition. Measure and check the tyre pressure for proper inflation. y Check that all windows and lights are clean. y Adjust the seat and head restraint positions. y Adjust the inside and outside rearview mirror positions. y Fasten your seat belt and ask all passengers to do the same. y Check that all doors are closed. y Check the operation of the warning lights when the ignition switch is placed in the “ON” position. y Maintenance items in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section should be checked periodically. WARNING: y Never leave children or adults who would normally require the support of others alone in your vehicle. Pets should not be left alone either. They could unknowingly activate switches or controls and inadvertently become involved in a serious accident and injure themselves. On hot, sunny days, temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal illness to people or animals. y Properly secure all cargo to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury. NOTE: During the first few months after purchasing a new vehicle, if you smell strong odors of Volatile Organic Compounds (VOCs) inside the vehicle, ventilate the passenger compartment thoroughly. Open all the windows before entering or while in the vehicle. In addition, when the temperature in the passenger compartment rises, or when the vehicle is parked in direct sunlight for a period of time, turn off the air recirculation mode of the air conditioner and/or open the windows to allow sufficient fresh air into the passenger compartment. Starting and driving 5-Chapter 5.indd 4 2021/01/13 02:16:35 PM TURBOCHARGER SYSTEM (if equipped) EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide) WARNING: y Do not breathe exhaust gas; it contains colorless and odorless carbon monoxide. Carbon monoxide is dangerous. It can cause unconsciousness or death. y If you suspect that exhaust fumes are entering the vehicle, drive with all windows fully open, and have the vehicle inspected immediately. ment. — You notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system. — You have had an accident involving damage to the exhaust system, underbody, or rear of the vehicle. The turbocharger system uses engine oil for lubrication and cooling of its rotating components. The turbocharger turbine turns at extremely high speeds and it can reach an extremely high temperature. It is essential to maintain a flow of clean oil through the turbocharger system. A sudden interruption to the oil supply may cause a malfunction in the turbocharger. To ensure prolonged life and performance of the turbocharger, it is essential to comply with the following maintenance procedure: y Do not run the engine in closed spaces such as a garage. y Do not park the vehicle with the engine running for an extended period of time. y y If electrical wiring or other cable connections must pass to a trailer through the seal of the body, follow the manufacturer’s recommendations to prevent carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle. Change the engine oil of the turbocharged diesel engine as prescribed. See the separately provided maintenance booklet for additional information. y Use only the recommended engine oil. For details, see "Recommended fluids/ lubricants and capacities" (P.9-2). y If the engine has been operating at high rpm for an extended period of time, let it idle for a few minutes prior to shutdown. y Do not accelerate the engine to high rpm immediately after starting it. y When starting the engine at ambient temperatures below −5°C (23°F), an engine protection mode may be activated. During this time, the engine output is reduced. The engine protection mode is switched off automatically after a maximum of 3 minutes (provided the accelerator pedal is released completely). y y If a special body or other equipment is added for recreational or other usage, follow the manufacturer’s recommendation to prevent carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle. (Some recreational vehicle appliances such as stoves, refrigerators, heaters, etc. may also generate carbon monoxide.) The exhaust system and body should be inspected by a qualified mechanic whenever: — Your vehicle is raised while being serviced. — You suspect that exhaust fumes are entering into the passenger compart- CAUTION: Starting and driving 5-Chapter 5.indd 5 5-5 2021/01/13 02:16:35 PM ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROAD DRIVING PRECAUTIONS Pick-up vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. They have higher ground clearance than passenger cars to make them capable of performing in a wide variety of on-pavement and off-road applications. This gives them a higher center of gravity than ordinary cars. An advantage of higher ground clearance is a better view of the road, allowing you to anticipate problems. However, they are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as conventional passenger cars any more than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under off-road conditions. If at all possible, avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers, particularly at high speeds. As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover. For information about driving using Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) (if equipped), see "Four-wheel Drive (4WD)" (P.5-16). forward or backward. y WARNING: y Do not drive across steep slopes. Instead drive either straight up or straight down the slopes. Off-road vehicles can tip over sideways much more easily than they can 5-6 y Do not grip the inside or spokes of the steering wheel when driving off-road. The steering wheel could move suddenly and injure your hands. Instead drive with your fingers and thumbs on the outside of the rim. Do not shift ranges while driving on downhill grades as this could cause loss of control of the vehicle. y Stay alert when driving to the top of a hill. At the top there could be a drop-off or other hazard that could cause an accident. y Before operating the vehicle, ensure that the driver and all passengers have their seat belts fastened. y If your engine stalls or you cannot make it to the top of a steep hill, never attempt to turn around. Your vehicle could tip or roll over. Always back straight down in R (Reverse) range. Never back down in N (Neutral) or with the clutch pedal depressed (MT model) using only the brake, as this could cause loss of control. y Always drive with the floor mats in place as the floor may became hot. y Lower your speed when encountering strong crosswinds. With a higher center of gravity, your NISSAN is more affected by strong side winds. Slower speeds ensure better vehicle control. y Do not drive beyond the performance capability of the tyres, even with 4WD engaged. y Do not attempt to raise two wheels off the ground and shift the transmission to any drive or reverse position with the engine running. Doing so may result in drivetrain damage or unexpected vehicle movement which could result in serious vehicle damage or personal injury. y Do not attempt to test a 4WD equipped vehicle on a 2-wheel dynamometer or similar equipment even if the other two wheels are raised off the ground. Make sure you inform test facility personnel that your vehicle is equipped with 4WD before it is placed on a dynamometer. y Please observe the following precautions: Drive carefully when off the road and avoid dangerous areas. Every person who drives or rides in this vehicle should be seated with their seat belt fastened. This will keep you and your passengers in position when driving over rough terrain. vehicle with tyres larger than specified in this manual. This could cause your vehicle to roll over. y DRIVING SAFETY PRECAUTIONS y Many hills are too steep for any vehicle. If you drive up them, you may stall. If you drive down them, you may not be able to control your speed. If you drive across them, you may roll over. Heavy braking going down a hill could cause your brakes to overheat and fade, resulting in loss of control and an accident. Apply brakes lightly and use a low range to control your speed. y Unsecured cargo can be thrown around when driving over rough terrain. Properly secure all cargo so it will not be thrown forward and cause injury to you or your passengers. y To avoid raising the center of gravity excessively, do not exceed the rated capacity of the roof rack (if equipped) and evenly distribute the load. Secure heavy loads in the cargo area as far forward and as low as possible. Do not equip the Starting and driving 5-Chapter 5.indd 6 2021/01/13 02:16:35 PM CARE WHEN DRIVING Using the wrong test equipment may result in drivetrain damage or unexpected vehicle movement which could result in serious vehicle damage or personal injury. information in a separate maintenance booklet. y Rinse the underside of the vehicle with fresh water after driving through mud or sand. Remove any brush or sticks that are trapped. Driving your vehicle to fit the circumstances is essential for your safety and comfort. As a driver, you should be the one who knows best how to drive in the given circumstances. y When a wheel is off the ground due to an unlevel surface, do not spin the wheel excessively. y Accelerating quickly, sharp steering maneuvers or sudden braking may cause loss of control. y If at all possible, avoid sharp turning maneuvers, particularly at high speeds. Your vehicle has a higher center of gravity than a conventional passenger car. The vehicle is not designed for cornering at the same speeds as conventional passenger cars. Failure to operate this vehicle correctly could result in loss of control and/or a rollover accident. LOADING LUGGAGE y Always use tyres of the same type, size, brand, construction (bias, bias-belted or radial), and tread pattern on all four wheels. Install tyre chains on the rear wheels when driving on slippery roads and drive carefully. Avoid accelerating or stopping suddenly. y Avoid sharp turning or lane changing suddenly. y Avoid following too close to the vehicle in front. y y Be sure to check the brakes immediately after driving in mud or water. See "Brake system" (P.5-65) for wet brakes. y Avoid parking your vehicle on steep hills. If you get out of the vehicle and it rolls forward, backward or sideways, you could be injured. y Whenever you drive off-road through sand, mud or water as deep as the wheel hub, more frequent maintenance may be required. See the maintenance ENGINE COLD START PERIOD Due to the higher engine speeds, when the engine is cold, extra caution must be exercised when selecting a gear during the engine warmup period after starting the engine. Loads and their distribution and the attachment of equipment (roof baggage carriers, etc.) will considerably change the driving characteristics of the vehicle. Your driving style and speed must be adjusted according to the circumstances. DRIVING IN WET CONDITIONS When water covers the road surface with water puddles, small water streams, etc., reduce speed to prevent hydroplaning which can cause skidding and loss of control. Worn tyres will increase this risk. Starting and driving 5-Chapter 5.indd 7 5-7 2021/01/13 02:16:35 PM IGNITION SWITCH (models without Intelligent Key system) DRIVING IN WINTER CONDITIONS y Drive cautiously. y Avoid accelerating or stopping suddenly. y Avoid sharp turning or lane changing suddenly. y Avoid sudden steering. y Avoid following too close to the vehicle in front. AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION (AT) WARNING: Never remove the key or turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK” position while driving. The steering wheel will lock. This will cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle and could result in serious vehicle damage or personal injury. MANUAL TRANSMISSION (MT) SSD0392 SSD0392 The switch includes an anti-theft steering lock device. The ignition key can only be removed when the switch is in the “LOCK” normal parking position (0). There is an “OFF” position in between “LOCK” and “ACC”, although it does not show on the lock cylinder. To lock the steering wheel, remove the key. To unlock the steering wheel, insert the key and turn it gently while rotating the steering wheel slightly right and left. The ignition lock is designed so that the ignition switch cannot be turned to the “LOCK” position until the shift lever is moved to the “P” (Park) position. When moving the ignition switch to the “LOCK” position, to remove the key from the ignition switch, make sure the shift lever is in the “P” (Park) position. When the ignition switch cannot be turned to the “LOCK” position: 1. Move the shift lever to the “P” (Park) position. 2. Turn the ignition switch slightly in the “ON” direction. 3. Place the ignition switch in the “LOCK” position. 4. Remove the key. If the ignition switch is turned to the “LOCK” position, the shift lever cannot be moved from the “P” (Park) position. The shift lever can be moved if the ignition switch is in the “ON” position with the foot brake pedal depressed. The “OFF” position is between the “LOCK” and “ON” positions, although it is not marked on the ignition switch. 5-8 Starting and driving 5-Chapter 5.indd 8 2021/01/13 02:16:36 PM KEY POSITIONS LOCK (Normal parking position) (0): The ignition key can only be removed at this position. OFF (1): The engine can be turned off without locking the steering wheel. ACC (Accessories) (2): This position activates electrical accessories such as the radio when the engine is not running. ON (Normal operating position) (3): This position turns on the ignition system and electrical accessories. START (4): This position starts the engine. As soon as the engine has started, release the key immediately. It will automatically return to the “ON” position. PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH (models with Intelligent Key system) PRECAUTIONS ON PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH OPERATION Operating range WARNING: Do not operate the push-button ignition switch while driving the vehicle except in an emergency. (The engine will stop when the ignition switch is pushed 3 consecutive times or the ignition switch is pushed and held for more than 2 seconds.) The steering wheel may lock and could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. This could result in serious vehicle damage or personal injury. INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM The Intelligent Key system can operate the ignition switch without taking the key out from your pocket or bag. The operating environment and/or conditions may affect the Intelligent Key system operation. Some indicators and warnings for operation are displayed in the vehicle information display. (See "Vehicle information display (models with color display)" (P.2-18).) CAUTION: JVS0442X The Intelligent Key can only be used for starting the engine when the Intelligent Key is within the specified operating range as illustrated. When the Intelligent Key battery is almost discharged or strong radio waves are present near the operating location, the Intelligent Key system’s operating range becomes narrower and may not function properly. If the Intelligent Key is within the operating range, it is possible for anyone, even someone who does not carry the Intelligent Key, to push the ignition switch to start the engine. y Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with you when operating the vehicle. y The truck box area is not included in the operating range of the engine start function. y Never leave the Intelligent Key inside the vehicle when you leave the vehicle. y y If the vehicle battery is discharged, the ignition switch cannot be switched from the “LOCK” position, and if the steering lock is engaged, the steering wheel cannot be moved. Charge the battery as soon as possible. (See "Jump starting" (P.6-7).) If the Intelligent Key is placed on the instrument panel, inside the glove box, door pocket or the corner of the interior compartment, the Intelligent Key may not function. y If the Intelligent Key is placed near the door or window outside the vehicle, the Intelligent Key may function. Starting and driving 5-Chapter 5.indd 9 5-9 2021/01/13 02:16:36 PM AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION (AT) STEERING LOCK The ignition lock is designed so that the ignition switch cannot be switched to the “LOCK” position until the shift lever is moved to the “P” (Park) position. When pushing the ignition switch to the “OFF” position, make sure the shift lever is in the “P” (Park) position. The ignition switch is equipped with an antitheft steering lock device. When the ignition switch cannot be switched to the “LOCK” position: 1. “Shift to Park” warning appears on the vehicle information display and a chime sounds. 2. Move the shift lever to the “P” (Park) position. 3. If the ignition switch is in the “ACC” position, PUSH warning appears on the vehicle information display. 4. Push the ignition switch. The ignition switch is switched to the “OFF” position. 5. If the ignition switch is switched to the “LOCK” position, the shift lever cannot be moved from the “P” (Park) position. The shift lever can be moved if the ignition switch is in the “ON” position with the foot brake pedal depressed. 1. Place the ignition switch in the “OFF” position where the ignition switch position indicator will not illuminate. 2. Open or close the door. The ignition switch turns to the “LOCK” position. 3. Turn the steering wheel 1/6 of a turn to the right or left from the straight up position. y Use electrical accessories with the engine running to avoid discharging the vehicle battery. If you must use accessories while the engine is not running, do not use them for extended periods of time and do not use multiple electrical accessories at the same time. To unlock steering wheel Push the ignition switch, and the steering wheel will be automatically unlocked. CAUTION: y If the battery of the vehicle is discharged, the push-button ignition switch cannot be switched from the “LOCK” position. y If the steering lock release malfunction indicator (if equipped) appears in the vehicle information display, push the ignition switch again while rotating the steering wheel slightly to the right and left. (See "Vehicle information display (models with color display)" (P.2-18).) IGNITION SWITCH POSITIONS WARNING: Never place the ignition switch in the “OFF” position while driving. The steering wheel may lock and cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle, resulting in serious vehicle damage or personal injury. 5-10 Do not leave the vehicle for extended periods of time when the ignition switch is in the “ON” position and the engine is not running. This can discharge the battery. To lock steering wheel Open the door. The ignition switch turns to the “LOCK” position. For warnings and indicators on the vehicle information display, see "Vehicle information display (models with color display)" (P.2-18). CAUTION: y JVS0241X When the ignition switch is pushed without depressing the brake pedal (automatic transmission model) or the clutch pedal (manual transmission model), the ignition switch position will change as follows: y Push once to change to “ACC”. y Push two times to change to “ON”. y Push three times to change to “OFF”. y Push four times to return to “ACC”. y Open or close any door to return to “LOCK” from the “OFF” position. Starting and driving 5-Chapter 5.indd 10 2021/01/13 02:16:36 PM LOCK position INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY DISCHARGE The ignition switch and steering lock can only be locked at this position. NOTE: y When the ignition switch is pushed to the “ACC” or “ON” position or the engine is started by the above procedures, the Key Battery Low warning appears on the vehicle information display even if the Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. This is not a malfunction. To turn off the warning, touch the ignition switch with the Intelligent Key again. y If the Key Battery Low warning appears on the vehicle information display, replace the battery as soon as possible. (See "Battery" (P.8-18).) The ignition switch will be unlocked when it is pushed to the “ACC” position while carrying the Intelligent Key. ACC position The electrical accessory power activates at this position without the engine turned on. ON position The ignition system and the electrical accessory power activate at this position without the engine turned on. The “ON” position has a battery saver feature that will place the ignition switch in the “OFF” position, if the vehicle is not running, after some time under the following conditions: y all doors are closed. y shift lever is in “P” (Park) position (AT model) or “N” (Neutral) position (MT model). The battery saver feature will be cancelled if any of the following occur: y any door is opened. y shift lever is moved out of the “P” (Park) position (AT model). y ignition switch changes position. OFF position The engine is turned off with the steering wheel unlocked. SSD0944 If the battery of the Intelligent Key is discharged, or environmental conditions interfere with the Intelligent Key operation, start the engine according to the following procedure: 1. Automatic Transmission (AT) model: Move the shift lever to the “P” (Park) position. Manual Transmission (MT) model: Move the shift lever to the “N” (Neutral) position. 2. Firmly depress the brake pedal. 3. Touch the ignition switch with the Intelligent Key as illustrated. (A chime will sound.) 4. Push the ignition switch while depressing the brake pedal (AT model) or the clutch pedal (MT model) within 10 seconds after the chime sounds. The engine will start. After step 3 is performed, when the ignition switch is pushed without depressing the brake pedal (AT model) or the clutch pedal (MT model), the ignition switch position will change to “ACC”. Starting and driving 5-Chapter 5.indd 11 5-11 2021/01/13 02:16:36 PM STARTING ENGINE (models without Intelligent Key system) 1. Apply the parking brake. 2. Depress the foot brake pedal. 3. Automatic Transmission (AT) model: Move the shift lever to the “P” (Park) or the “N” (Neutral) position. The starter is designed to operate only when the shift lever is in the proper position. Manual Transmission (MT) model: Move the shift lever to the “N” (Neutral) position and depress the clutch pedal to the floor while starting the engine. 4. Crank the engine with your foot off the accelerator pedal by turning the ignition switch to the “START” position. STARTING ENGINE (models with Intelligent Key system) y 6. If it becomes necessary to start the engine with a booster battery and jumper cables, the instructions and cautions contained in the “6. In case of emergency” section should be carefully followed. 1. Apply the parking brake. 2. Automatic Transmission (AT) model: Move the shift lever to the “P” (Park) or the “N” (Neutral) position. The starter is designed to operate only when the shift lever is in the proper position. Allow the engine to idle for at least 30 seconds after starting the engine to warmup. Drive at moderate speeds for a short distance first, especially in cold weather. Manual Transmission (MT) model: Move the shift lever to the “N” (Neutral) position. CAUTION: Do not leave the vehicle unattended while the engine is warming up. The Intelligent Key must be carried when operating the ignition switch. 3. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” position and wait until the glow plug indicator light turns off. 5. CAUTION: y Wait until the glow plug indicator light goes out. Immediately release the ignition switch when the engine starts. If the engine starts, but fails to run, repeat the above procedures. If the engine is very hard to start in extremely cold or hot weather, depress the accelerator pedal and hold it to help start the engine. Do not operate the starter for more than 15 seconds at a time. If the engine does not start, turn the ignition switch off and wait 20 seconds before cranking the engine again. Otherwise, the starter could be damaged. 5-12 Place the ignition switch in the “ON” position. Firmly depress the brake pedal (AT model) or the clutch pedal (MT model) and push the ignition switch to start the engine. If the engine is already warmed up, the glow plug indicator light may not illuminate when the engine is started. To start the engine immediately, push and release the ignition switch while depressing the brake pedal or clutch pedal with the ignition switch in any position. 4. Immediately release the ignition switch when the engine starts. If the engine starts, but fails to run, repeat the above procedures. If the engine is very hard to start in extremely cold or hot weather, depress the accelerator pedal and hold it. Push the ignition switch for up to 15 seconds while holding. Release the accelerator pedal when the engine starts. Starting and driving 5-Chapter 5.indd 12 2021/01/13 02:16:36 PM DRIVING VEHICLE CAUTION: y As soon as the engine has started, release the ignition switch immediately. y Do not operate the starter for more than 15 seconds at a time. If the engine does not start, push the ignition switch to the “OFF” position and wait 20 seconds before cranking the engine again. Otherwise, the starter could be damaged. y 5. If it becomes necessary to start the engine with a booster battery and jumper cables, the instructions and cautions contained in the “6. In case of emergency” section should be carefully followed. Allow the engine to idle for at least 30 seconds after starting the engine to warmup. Drive at moderate speeds for a short distance first, especially in cold weather. CAUTION: Do not leave the vehicle unattended while the engine is warming up. 6. To stop the engine, move the shift lever to the “P” (Park) (AT model) or “N” (Neutral) (MT model) position, apply the parking brake, and push the ignition switch to the “OFF” position. DRIVING WITH AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION (AT) The Automatic Transmission (AT) in your vehicle is electronically controlled to produce maximum power and smooth operation. The recommended operating procedures for this transmission are shown on the following pages. Follow these procedures for maximum vehicle performance and driving enjoyment. y Shift into the “P” (Park) position and apply the parking brake when at a standstill for longer than a short waiting period. y Keep the engine at idling speed while shifting from the “N” (Neutral) position to any driving position. y When stopping the vehicle on an uphill grade, do not hold the vehicle by depressing the accelerator pedal. The foot brake pedal should be depressed in this situation. CAUTION: y The cold engine idle speed is high, so use caution when shifting into a forward or reverse gear before the engine has warmed up. y Avoid revving up the engine while the vehicle is stopped. This could cause unexpected vehicle movement. y Do not downshift abruptly on slippery roads. This may cause a loss of control. y Never shift to either the “P” (Park) or “R” (Reverse) position while the vehicle is moving forward and “P” (Park) or “D” (Drive) position while the vehicle is moving rearward. This could cause an accident or damage the transmission. y Except in an emergency, do not shift to the “N” (Neutral) position while driving. Coasting with the transmission in the “N” (Neutral) position may cause serious damage to the transmission. y Start the engine in either the “P” (Park) or “N” (Neutral) position. The engine will not start in any other gear position. If it does, have your vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer. Starting vehicle 1. After starting the engine, fully depress the foot brake pedal before attempting to move the shift lever out of the “P” (Park) position. 2. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed and move the shift lever into a driving position. 3. Release the parking brake, the foot brake pedal, and then gradually start the vehicle in motion. The AT is designed so the foot brake pedal MUST be depressed before shifting from the “P” (Park) position to any driving position while the ignition switch is in the “ON” position. The shift lever cannot be moved out of the “P” (Park) position and into any of the other gear positions if the ignition switch is placed in the “LOCK”, “OFF” or “ACC” position. CAUTION: y DEPRESS THE FOOT BRAKE PEDAL Shifting the shift lever to “D”, “R” or manual shift mode without depressing the foot brake pedal causes the vehicle to move Starting and driving 5-Chapter 5.indd 13 5-13 2021/01/13 02:16:36 PM slowly when the engine is running. Make sure the foot brake pedal is depressed fully and the vehicle is stopped before shifting the shift lever. y y y MAKE SURE OF THE SHIFT LEVER POSITION - Make sure the shift lever is in the desired position. “D” and manual shift mode are used to move forward and “R” to back up. Depress the accelerator pedal to start the vehicle and merge with traffic (avoid abrupt starting and spinning the wheels). y WARM UP THE ENGINE - Due to the higher idle speeds when the engine is cold, extra caution must be exercised when shifting the shift lever into the driving position immediately after starting the engine. y PARKING THE VEHICLE - Depress the foot brake pedal and, once the vehicle stops, move the shift lever into the “P” (Park) position, pull the parking brake lever and release the foot brake pedal. Shifting : Push the button brake pedal while depressing the : Push the button : Just move the shift lever WARNING: Apply the parking brake if the shift lever is in any position while the engine is not running. Failure to do so could cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll away and result in serious personal injury or property damage. If the shift lever cannot be moved from the “P” (Park) position while the engine is running and the foot brake pedal is depressed, the stop lights may not work. Malfunctioning stop lights could cause an accident injuring yourself and others. After starting the engine, fully depress the foot brake pedal, push the shift lever button and move the shift lever out of the “P” (Park) position. If the ignition switch is placed in the “OFF” or “ACC” position for any reason while the shift lever is in any positions other than the “P” (Park) position, the ignition switch cannot be placed in the “LOCK” position. If the ignition switch cannot be placed in the “LOCK” position, perform the following steps: JVS00443X 5-14 1. Apply the parking brake. 2. Place the ignition switch in the “ON” position while depressing the foot brake pedal. 3. Move the shift lever to the “P” (Park) position. 4. Place the ignition switch in the “LOCK” position. P (Park): Use this position when the vehicle is parked or when starting the engine. Make sure that the vehicle is completely stopped and move the shift lever into the “P” (Park) position. Apply the parking brake. When parking on a hill, first depress the foot brake pedal, apply the parking brake, and then move the shift lever into the “P” (Park) position. R (Reverse): Use this position to back up. Make sure that the vehicle is completely stopped before selecting the “R” (Reverse) position. N (Neutral): Neither the forward nor reverse gear is engaged. The engine can be started in this position. You may shift to the “N” (Neutral) position and restart a stalled engine while the vehicle is moving. D (Drive): Use this position for all normal forward driving. Manual shift mode When the shift lever is shifted to the manual shift gate and moved up or down while driving, the transmission enters the manual shift mode. Shift range can be selected manually. When shifting up, move the shift lever to the + (up) side. The transmission shifts to the higher range. When shifting down, move the shift lever to the − (down) side. The transmission shifts to the lower range. Starting and driving 5-Chapter 5.indd 14 2021/01/13 02:16:37 PM When canceling the manual shift mode, return the shift lever to the “D” (Drive) position. The transmission returns to the normal driving mode. In the manual shift mode, the shift range is displayed in the vehicle information display between the speedometer and tachometer. helps maintain driving performance and reduces the chance of vehicle damage or loss of control. y Shift ranges up or down one by one as follows: 1 2 M M 3 M M 4 5 M 6 M M 7 7 (7th): M Use this position for all normal forward driving at highway speeds. 6 (6th) and M5 (5th): M Use these positions when driving up long slopes, or for engine braking when driving down long slopes. 4 (4th), M3 (3rd) and M2 (2nd): M Use these positions for hill climbing or engine braking on downhill grades. 1 (1st): M y When the transmission does not shift to the selected gear, the Automatic Transmission (AT) position indicator light (in the vehicle information display) will blink and the buzzer will sound. In the manual shift mode, the transmission automatically shifts down to 1st gear before the vehicle comes to a stop. When accelerating again, it is necessary to shift up to the desired range. Accelerator downshift - in D (Drive) position For passing or climbing hills, depress the accelerator pedal to the floor. This shifts the transmission down into a lower gear, depending on the vehicle speed. Remember not to drive at high speeds for extended periods of time in lower than 7th gear. This reduces fuel economy. y Moving the shift lever to the same side twice will shift the ranges in succession. However, if this motion is rapidly done, the second shifting may not be completed properly. y In the manual shift mode, the transmission may not shift to the selected gear or may automatically shift to the other gear. This 1. Place the ignition switch in the “OFF” or “LOCK” position. 2. Apply the parking brake. 3. Push down the shift lock release button 4. Push and hold the shift lever button and move the shift lever to the “N” (Neutral) position while holding down the shift lock release button . Place the ignition switch in the “ON” position to release the steering wheel lock. The vehicle may be moved, by pushing, to the desired location. If the shift lever cannot be moved out of the “P” (Park) position, have a NISSAN dealer check the AT system as soon as possible. Fail-safe JVS0444X If the battery is discharged, the shift lever may not be moved from the “P” (Park) position even with the brake pedal depressed. If the vehicle is driven under extreme conditions, such as excessive wheel spinning and subsequent hard braking, the fail-safe system may be activated. This will occur even if all electrical circuits are functioning properly. In this case, place the ignition switch in the “OFF” position and wait for 3 seconds. Then place the ignition switch back in the “ON” position. The vehicle should return to its normal operating condition. If it does not return to its normal operating condition, have a NISSAN dealer check the transmission and repair it if necessary. Starting and driving 5-Chapter 5.indd 15 . When the fail-safe operation occurs, the AT will be locked in any of the forward gears depending on conditions. Shift lock release Use this position when climbing steep hills slowly or driving slowly through deep snow, or for maximum engine braking on steep downhill grades. y To release the shift lock, perform the following procedure: 5-15 2021/01/13 02:16:37 PM FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE (4WD) (if equipped) DRIVING WITH MANUAL TRANSMISSION (MT) WARNING: y Do not downshift abruptly on slippery roads. This may cause a loss of control. y Do not over-rev the engine when shifting to a lower gear. This may cause a loss of vehicle control or engine damage. CAUTION: y Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal while driving. This may damage the clutch system. y Fully depress the clutch pedal before shifting to help prevent transmission damage. y Stop the vehicle completely before shifting into the “R” (Reverse) position. y When the vehicle is stopped for a period of time, for example, waiting at stoplights, shift to the “N” (Neutral) position and release the clutch pedal with the foot brake pedal depressed. Starting vehicle 1. 2. After starting the engine, depress the clutch pedal to the floor and move the shift lever to the “1” (1st), “2” (2nd) or “R” (Reverse) position. NISSAN recommends to start the vehicle in the 2nd gear on level, flat ground and in the unladen condition. Slowly depress the accelerator pedal, releasing the clutch pedal and parking brake at the same time. 5-16 Shifting gear To change gears, or when upshifting or downshifting, fully depress the clutch pedal, shift into the appropriate gear, then slowly and smoothly release the clutch pedal. Start the vehicle in the “1” (1st) or “2” (2nd) position and shift to the “3” (3rd), “4” (4th), “5” (5th) and “6” (6th) gear in sequence according to the vehicle speed. WARNING: y Do not attempt to raise two wheels off the ground and shift the transmission to any drive or reverse position with the engine running. Doing so may result in drivetrain damage or unexpected vehicle movement which could result in serious vehicle damage or personal injury. y Do not attempt to test a 4WD equipped vehicle on a 2-wheel dynamometer or similar equipment even if the other two wheels are raised off the ground. Make sure you inform test facility personnel that your vehicle is equipped with 4WD before it is placed on a dynamometer. Using the wrong test equipment may result in drivetrain damage or unexpected vehicle movement which could result in serious vehicle damage or personal injury. y Do not drive the vehicle in the 4H or 4LO position on dry hard surface roads. Driving on dry, hard surfaces in 4H or 4LO may cause unnecessary noise, tyre wear and increased fuel consumption. If it is difficult to move the shift lever into the “R” (Reverse) or “1” (1st) position, shift to the “N” (Neutral) position, and then release the clutch pedal once. Fully depress the clutch pedal again and shift into “R” or “1”. CAUTION: JVS0450X To back up, depress the shift lever and then move it to the “R” (Reverse) position after the vehicle has completely stopped. If the Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) warning light turns on when driving on dry hard surface roads: — in the 4H position, shift the 4WD mode switch to 2WD. — in the 4LO position, stop the vehicle and shift the transmission lever to the “N” (Neutral) position with the brake pedal depressed and shift the 4WD mode switch to 2WD. Starting and driving 5-Chapter 5.indd 16 2021/01/13 02:16:37 PM If the 4WD warning light is still on after the above operation, have your vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible. y The transfer case may be damaged if you continue driving with the 4WD warning light blinking. See "On-pavement and off-road driving precautions" (P.5-6) for other precautions. PART TIME 4WD SYSTEM The part time 4WD system provides three drive modes: 2WD, 4H and 4LO. The desired drive mode can be selected using the 4WD mode switch according to the driving conditions. 4WD mode switch 4WD mode indicator JVS0447X JVS0445X Starting and driving 5-Chapter 5.indd 17 5-17 2021/01/13 02:16:37 PM Indicator 4WD mode switch Wheels driven 2WD Rear wheels - Four wheels - Neutral Blinking Four wheels Stay on* 4WD mode 4LO 4H 4LO Use conditions Operation of 4WD mode switch (See "4WD mode switch operation" (P.5-19).) For driving on dry, paved roads. Shifting between the 2WD and 4H drive modes can be done while driving. For driving on rough, The indicator will change when the drive mode is changed. Shifting between the 2WD and 4H modes must be performed sandy or snowat speed below 100 km/h (60 MPH). covered roads. Shifting between the 4H and 4LO drive modes: The 4LO indicator y Stop the vehicle, depress the clutch pedal (MT models) and blinks when shifting the brake pedal and shift the shift lever to the N (Neutral) between 4H and 4LO. position. For use when y Depress and turn the 4WD mode switch. The 4WD mode maximum power and switch will not shift between 4H and 4LO if the transmission traction are required is not in the N (Neutral) position or the vehicle is moving. at low speeds (for y Wait for the 4LO indicator to stop blinking and stay on or off example, on steep before shifting your transmission into gear or releasing the grades or rocky, clutch pedal (MT models). sandy, muddy roads). *: When the 4LO position is selected, the VDC system is disabled and the VDC off indicator light illuminates. See "Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off indicator light" (P.2-19). WARNING: AT model: If the 4WD mode indicator is “OFF” or the ATP warning light is “ON”, this indicates that the automatic transmission P (Park) position will not function and could result in the vehicle moving unexpectedly, causing serious personal injury or property damage. Always set the parking brake. Do not move the shift lever (AT model) or release the clutch pedal (MT model) when the 4LO indicator is blinking. Failure to do this may cause the gears to grind and damaging the powertrain. 3. y MT model: Do not accelerate rapidly from a stopped position when the 4LO indicator is blinking. Drive straight ahead at a low speed until the 4LO indicator is lit. The 4LO indicator blinks when shifting between 4LO and 4H. The transfer case 4WD mode switch is used to select either Two-Wheel Drive (2WD) or FourWheel Drive (4WD) depending on the driving conditions. Turn the 4WD mode switch to select a drive mode (2WD, 4H or 4LO). y If the 4WD warning light comes on, perform the following procedure: 1. Turn off the engine. 2. Start the engine. y CAUTION: To avoid vehicle damage: y Do not operate the 4WD mode switch when cornering, reversing or if the rear wheels are spinning freely. The vehicle must be moving straight ahead. 5-18 Check if the 4WD warning light comes on. If the 4WD warning light is still on after following the above procedure, have the system checked and serviced immediately by a NISSAN dealer. Starting and driving 5-Chapter 5.indd 18 2021/01/13 02:16:37 PM To change into or out of 4LO mode: 1. The vehicle MUST BE standing still. 2. Depress the clutch pedal (MT model) and the brake pedal and move the shift lever to N (Neutral). 3. Depress and turn the 4WD mode switch to change into or out of 4LO. y When parking, apply the parking brake before stopping the engine and make sure that the 4WD mode indicator is on and that the ATP warning light or ATP warning message is off, otherwise, the vehicle could unexpectedly move even if the automatic transmission is in the P (Park) position. WARNING: y The 4LO indicator must stop blinking and remain on or turn off before shifting the transmission into gear. The vehicle may move unexpectedly if the shift lever is shifted from the N (Neutral) position to any other gear while the 4LO indicator is blinking. y y The 4WD mode switch can be turned between 2WD and 4H while driving straight ahead. Do not turn the 4WD mode switch while making a turn or reversing. y Do not turn the 4WD mode switch between 2WD and 4H while driving on steep downhill grades. Use the engine brake and low transmission gears for engine braking. y Do not turn the 4WD mode switch between 2WD and 4H with the rear wheels spinning. y y CAUTION: y Never turn the 4WD mode switch between 4LO and 4H while driving. y The 4H drive mode provides greater power and traction. Avoid excessive speed as it will cause increased fuel consumption and higher oil temperatures, and could damage power train components. Speeds over 100 km/h (60 MPH) in 4H are not recommended. The 4LO drive mode provides maximum power and traction. Avoid raising vehicle speed excessively. The maximum speed is approximately 50 km/h (30 MPH). Do not drive the vehicle in 4H or 4LO mode on dry, hard surfaced roads. This may cause unnecessary noise and tyre wear. NISSAN recommends driving in 2WD under these conditions. It is not possible to shift the 4WD transfer case between 4H and 4LO at low ambient temperatures when the engine is cold. Doing so may cause the 4LO indicator to blink. Wait until the 4WD transfer case has reached operational temperature (after driving for a while) before using the 4WD mode switch to change between 4H and 4LO. If the vehicle gets stuck y Place stones or wooden blocks under the tyres to free the vehicle. y Set the 4WD mode switch to 4H or 4LO. y Use the rear differential locking system (if equipped). Turn the switch on while the vehicle is stationary and apply the throttle to try to free the vehicle. y If it is difficult to free the vehicle, drive the vehicle forwards and backwards to increase the momentum. If the vehicle is stuck deep in mud, tyre chains may be effective. y Do not spin the wheels excessively. The wheels will sink deep into the mud and it will be difficult to free the vehicle from the mud. y Avoid shifting gears with the engine running at high speeds as this may cause a malfunction. CAUTION: 4WD MODE SWITCH OPERATION When driving on rough roads y Set the 4WD mode switch to 4H or 4LO. y Drive carefully and according to the road surface conditions. JVS0445X Starting and driving 5-Chapter 5.indd 19 5-19 2021/01/13 02:16:38 PM y Set the 4WD mode switch to 2WD, 4H or 4LO, depending on driving conditions. y You may feel a slight vehicle movement if the 4WD mode switch is operated while making a turn, accelerating or decelerating, or if the ignition switch is placed in the “OFF” position while the 4WD mode switch is set to 4H or 4LO. This is normal. y When the vehicle is stopped after making a turn, you may feel a slight jolt after the shift lever is moved to “N” (Neutral) or “P” (Park). This occurs because the transfer clutch is released and not because of a malfunction. CAUTION: y y The 4WD mode switch can be turned between 2WD and 4H while driving straight ahead. Do not turn the 4WD mode switch while making a turn or reversing. Do not operate the 4WD mode switch while driving on steep downhill grades. Use the engine brake and low automatic transmission gears for engine braking. y Do not operate the 4WD mode switch with the rear wheels spinning. y Before turning the 4WD mode switch to 4H from 2WD, make sure that the vehicle speed is less than 100 km/h (60 MPH). Failure to do so can damage the 4WD system. y Never turn the 4WD mode switch between 4LO and 4H while driving. 5-20 4WD MODE INDICATOR y If the 4WD warning light comes on or 4WD Error warning (if equipped) appears, the 4WD mode indicator turns off. 4WD WARNING Warning light Warning light Illuminates JVS0447X Blinks The 4WD mode indicator is displayed in the vehicle information display. While the engine is running, the 4WD mode indicator will illuminate the position selected by the 4WD mode switch. y y The 4WD mode indicator may blink while shifting from one drive mode to the other. When the shifting is completed, the 4WD mode indicator will come on. If the indicator does not come on immediately, make sure the area around the vehicle is safe, and drive the vehicle straight, accelerate or decelerate or move the vehicle in reverse, then shift the 4WD mode switch. When the 4WD mode indicator blinks even if you switch the 4WD mode switch from 2WD or 4H to 4LO, move the vehicle and depress the brake pedal, then shift the transmission lever to the “N” (Neutral) position. If the 4WD mode indicator is still blinking after the operation, perform the procedure again. Comes on or blinks when: There is a malfunction in the 4WD system The difference in wheel rotation is large The Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) warning light is located in the meter. The 4WD warning light comes on when the ignition switch is placed in the “ON” position. It turns off soon after the engine is started. If any malfunction occurs in the 4WD system when the ignition switch is in the “ON” position, the 4WD warning light will either remain illuminated or blink. If the 4WD warning light comes on, the 4WD mode indicator turns off. A large difference between the diameters of front and rear wheels will make the 4WD warning light blink. Change the 4WD mode switch to 2WD and do not drive fast. CAUTION: y If the 4WD warning light comes on or blinks during operation for a while, have your vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible. Starting and driving 5-Chapter 5.indd 20 2021/01/13 02:16:38 PM y Shifting between 4H and 4LO is not recommended when the 4WD warning light turns on. y When the 4WD warning light comes on, the 2WD mode may be engaged even if the 4WD mode switch is in 4H. Be especially careful when driving. If corresponding parts are malfunctioning, the 4WD mode will not be engaged even if the 4WD mode switch is shifted. y Do not drive the vehicle in the 4H or 4LO position on dry hard surface roads. Driving on dry, hard surfaces in 4H or 4LO may cause unnecessary noise, tyre wear and increased fuel consumption. If the Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) warning light turns on when driving on dry hard surface roads: — in the 4H position, shift the 4WD mode switch to 2WD. — in the 4LO position, stop the vehicle and shift the transmission lever to the “N” (Neutral) position with the brake pedal depressed and shift the 4WD mode switch to 2WD. If the 4WD warning light is still on after the above operation, have your vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible. y The transfer case may be damaged if you continue driving with the warning light blinking. Warning indicator (models with color display) WAF0763X If any malfunction occurs in the Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) system while the engine is running, a warning message appears in the vehicle information display. If the “4WD Error” warning appears, there may be a malfunction in the 4WD system. Reduce vehicle speed and have your vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible. CAUTION: y Do not operate the engine on a free roller when any of the wheels raised. y If the “4WD Error” warning appears while driving, there may be a malfunction in the 4WD system. Reduce the vehicle speed and have your vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible. Be especially careful when driving. y The power train may be damaged if you continue driving with the “4WD Error” warning on. TYRE RECOMMENDATION FOR 4WD CAUTION: y Always use tyres of the same size, brand, construction (bias, bias-belted or radial), and tread pattern on all four wheels. Failure to do so may result in a circumference difference between tyres on the front and rear axles, which will cause excessive tyre wear and may damage the transmission, transfer case and differential gears. y ONLY use spare tyres specified for the Four- Wheel Drive (4WD) models. If excessive tyre wear is found, it is recommended that all four tyres be replaced with tyres of the same size, brand, construction and tread pattern. The tyre pressure and wheel alignment should also be checked and corrected as necessary. Contact a NISSAN dealer. Snow tyres If you install snow tyres, they must also be of the same size, brand, construction and tread pattern on all four wheels. Tyre inflation pressure Periodically check the pressures of all tyres, including the spare, with a gauge while at a service station. If necessary, adjust to the specified pressure. Tyre pressures are shown on the tyre placard affixed to the driver’s side center pillar or rear access door. Starting and driving 5-Chapter 5.indd 21 5-21 2021/01/13 02:16:38 PM REAR DIFFERENTIAL LOCKING SYSTEM (if equipped) Tyre rotation y NISSAN recommends that tyres should be rotated every 5,000 km (3,000 miles). The rear differential lock-up device operates only when the engine is running. y In 4H mode, the rear differential lockup device does not operate when the differential lock mode switch is turned to the “ON” position. (The differential lock indicator light will flash.) (4WD model) y Use the rear differential lock only in an emergency when it is not possible to free a stuck vehicle even using the 4LO position. (4WD model) y When the differential lock is in operation, turning the vehicle becomes hard and, especially at high speeds, is dangerous. y While differential lock is on, the Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning light and the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off indicator light illuminate. This indicates that anti-lock function may not fully operate. y Do not operate the differential lock when the vehicle is turning or when one side wheel is rotating. Otherwise the power train system parts could be damaged. y Avoid quick starts while the differential lock is in operation. Otherwise the power train system parts could be damaged. Snow chains Snow chains must be installed only on the rear wheels and not on the front wheels. Do not drive with snow chains on paved roads that are clear of snow. Driving with chains in such conditions can cause damage to the various mechanisms of the vehicle due to overstress. When driving on clear paved roads, be sure to change to Two-Wheel Drive (2WD) mode. WARNING: JVS0533X The rear differential lock is designed to transmit engine power to the left and right wheels equally. If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc. or one wheel is off the ground and the differential lock is not on, engine power is transmitted to one wheel causing it to spin, so leaving insufficient traction on the other wheel. The rear differential lock allows the left and right wheels to rotate as a unit, enabling your vehicle to free itself. To lock the rear differential gear, reduce the vehicle speed below 7 km/h (4 MPH) and turn the 4WD mode switch to the 4LO position (4WD model). Then push the differential lock mode switch to the “ON” position. The differential lock indicator light “ ” will blink in the meter and then stay on when the differential gear is completely locked. After using the rear differential lock, or during normal driving, push the differential lock mode switch to the “OFF” position. The differential lock indicator light will turn off after the differential lock is released. 5-22 Observe the above precautions. Otherwise, loss of normal steering control may result. Starting and driving 5-Chapter 5.indd 22 2021/01/13 02:16:38 PM VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC) SYSTEM (if equipped) WARNING: y y y y y The Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system is designed to help the driver maintain stability but does not prevent accidents due to abrupt steering operation at high speeds or by careless or dangerous driving techniques. Reduce vehicle speed and be especially careful when driving and cornering on slippery surfaces and always drive carefully. Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension. If suspension parts such as shock absorbers, struts, springs, stabilizer bars, bushings and wheels are not NISSAN recommended for your vehicle or are extremely deteriorated, the VDC system may not operate properly. This could adversely affect vehicle handling performance, and the VDC warning light may illuminate. If brake related parts such as brake pads, rotors and calipers are not NISSAN recommended or are extremely deteriorated, the VDC system may not operate properly and the VDC warning light may illuminate. If engine control related parts are not NISSAN recommended or are extremely deteriorated, the VDC warning light may illuminate. When driving on extremely inclined surfaces such as higher banked corners, the VDC system may not operate properly and the VDC warning light may illuminate. Do not drive on these types of roads. y y y When driving on an unstable surface such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or ramp, the VDC warning light may illuminate. This is not a malfunction. Restart the engine after driving onto a stable surface. If wheels or tyres other than the NISSAN recommended ones are used, the VDC system may not operate properly and the VDC warning light may illuminate. The VDC system is not a substitute for winter tyres or tyre chains on a snow covered road. The Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system uses various sensors to monitor driver inputs and vehicle motion. Under certain driving conditions, the VDC system helps to perform the following functions. y Controls brake pressure to reduce wheel slip on one slipping drive wheel so power is transferred to a non slipping drive wheel on the same axle. y Controls brake pressure and engine output to reduce drive wheel slip based on vehicle speed (traction control function). y Controls brake pressure at individual wheels and engine output to help the driver maintain control of the vehicle in the following conditions: — understeer (vehicle tends to not follow the steered path despite increased steering input) — oversteer (vehicle tends to spin due to certain road or driving conditions). The VDC system can help the driver to maintain control of the vehicle, but it cannot prevent loss of vehicle control in all driving situations. When the VDC system operates, the VDC warning light in the instrument panel flashes so note the following: y The road may be slippery or the system may determine some action is required to help the vehicle on the steered path. y You may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise or vibration from under the hood. This is normal and indicates that the VDC system is working properly. y Adjust your speed and driving to the road conditions. If a malfunction occurs in the system, the VDC warning light illuminates in the instrument panel. The VDC system automatically turns off. The VDC OFF switch is used to turn off the VDC system. The VDC off indicator light illuminates to indicate the VDC system is off. When the VDC OFF switch is used to turn off the system, the VDC system still operates to prevent one drive wheel from slipping by transferring power to a non slipping drive wheel. The VDC warning light flashes if this occurs. All other VDC functions are off and the VDC warning light will not flash. The VDC system is automatically reset to on when the ignition switch is placed in the “OFF” position then back to the “ON” position. When the 4LO position is selected with the Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) mode switch, the VDC system is disabled and the VDC off indicator light illuminates. See "Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) warning light" (P.2-16) and "Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off indicator light" (P.2-17). Starting and driving 5-Chapter 5.indd 23 5-23 2021/01/13 02:16:38 PM HILL DESCENT CONTROL SYSTEM (if equipped) The computer has a built-in diagnostic feature that tests the system each time you start the engine and move the vehicle forward or in reverse at a slow speed. When the self-test occurs, you may hear a “clunk” noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal. This is normal and is not an indication of a malfunction. WARNING: y VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC) OFF SWITCH y SSD1149 The vehicle should be driven with the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system ON for most driving conditions. When the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the VDC system reduces the engine output to reduce wheel spin. The engine speed will be reduced even if the accelerator is depressed to the floor. If maximum engine power is needed to free a stuck vehicle, turn the VDC system off. To turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system, push the VDC OFF switch. The VDC off indicator light will illuminate. Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart the engine to turn ON the system. 5-24 Never rely solely on the hill descent control system to control vehicle speed when driving on steep downhill grades. Always drive carefully when using the hill descent control system and decelerate the vehicle speed by depressing the brake pedal if necessary. Be especially careful when driving on frozen, muddy or extremely steep downhill roads. Failure to control vehicle speed may result in a loss of control of the vehicle and possible serious injury or death. The hill descent control system may not control the vehicle speed on a hill under all load or road conditions. Always be prepared to depress the brake pedal to control vehicle speed. Failure to do so may result in a collision or serious personal injury. When the hill descent control system is activated, it automatically applies smooth brakes to control speed on a steep and slippery descent or off the road without brake or accelerator operation. The hill descent control system helps maintain vehicle speed when driving under 25 km/h (16 MPH) on a steep descent that engine braking alone in the 4H or 4LO mode cannot control the speed. NOTE: When the hill descent control system operates continuously for a long time, the temperature of the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system actuator may increase and the hill descent control system may be temporarily disabled. The hill descent control system on indicator light will turn off. The hill descent control sys- tem will resume operating automatically and the indicator light will illuminate again when the temperature of the VDC system actuator is reduced. If the indicator light does not illuminate, turn off the system. HILL DESCENT CONTROL SWITCH JVS0402X When additional braking is required on steep downhill roads, activate the hill descent control system by pushing the hill descent control switch on. When the hill descent control system is activated, the hill descent control system on indicator light will illuminate. (See "Hill descent control system ON indicator light" (P.2-16).) Also, the stop/tail lights illuminate while the hill descent control system is applying the brakes to control the vehicle speed. To activate the hill descent control system, satisfy all of the following conditions: y Shift the transmission to the forward (only 1st gear for MT model) or reverse gear. y Shift the 4WD mode switch to the 4H or 4LO position and drive the vehicle at a speed under 25 km/h (16 MPH). Starting and driving 5-Chapter 5.indd 24 2021/01/13 02:16:39 PM HILL START ASSIST SYSTEM (if equipped) y Push the hill descent control switch to the “ON” position. If the accelerator or brake pedal is depressed while the hill descent control system is on, the system will stop operating temporarily. As soon as the accelerator or brake pedal is released, the hill descent control system begins to function again if the hill descent control operating conditions are fulfilled. The hill descent control system on indicator light blinks if the hill descent control switch is on and all conditions for system activation are not met, or if the system becomes disengaged for any reason. WARNING: y Never rely solely on the hill start assist system to prevent the vehicle from moving backward on a hill. Always drive carefully and attentively. Depress the brake pedal when the vehicle is stopped on a steep hill. Be especially careful when stopped on a hill on frozen or muddy roads. Failure to prevent the vehicle from rolling backwards may result in a loss of control of the vehicle and possible serious injury or death. y The hill start assist system is not designed to hold the vehicle at a standstill on a hill. Depress the brake pedal when the vehicle is stopped on a steep hill. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to roll backwards and may result in a collision or serious personal injury. y The hill start assist system may not prevent the vehicle from rolling backwards on a hill under all load or road conditions. Always be prepared to depress the brake pedal to prevent the vehicle from rolling backwards. Failure to do so may result in a collision or serious personal injury. To turn off the hill descent control system, push the hill descent control switch to the “OFF” position. y The vehicle is stopped completely on a hill by applying the brake. The maximum holding time is 2 seconds. After 2 seconds the vehicle will begin to roll back and the hill start assist system will stop operating completely. The hill start assist system will not operate when the transmission is shifted to the “N” (Neutral) or “P” (Park) position or on a flat and level road. When the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) warning light illuminates in the meter, the hill start assist system will not operate. (See "Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) warning light" (P.2-16).) The hill start assist system automatically keeps the brakes applied to help prevent the vehicle from rolling backwards in the time it takes the driver to release the brake pedal and apply the accelerator when the vehicle is stopped on a hill. The hill start assist system will operate automatically under the following conditions: y The transmission is shifted to a forward or reverse gear. Starting and driving 5-Chapter 5.indd 25 5-25 2021/01/13 02:16:39 PM LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (LDW) (if equipped) WAF0635X WARNING: Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the LDW system could result in serious injury or death. y This system is only a warning device to inform the driver of a potential unintended lane departure. It will not steer the vehicle or prevent loss of control. It is the driver's responsibility to stay alert, drive safely, keep the vehicle in the traveling lane, and be in control of the vehicle at all times. The LDW system will operate when the vehicle is driven at speeds of approximately 70 km/h (43 MPH) and above, and only when the lane markings are clearly visible on the road. The LDW system monitors the lane markers on the traveling lane using the camera unit located above the inside rearview mirror. The LDW system warns the driver with an indicator on the vehicle information display and chime that the vehicle is beginning to leave the driving lane. For additional information, refer to "LDW system operation" (P.5-26). 5-26 WAF0525X LDW indicator (on the vehicle information display) Vehicle information display LDW SYSTEM OPERATION The LDW system operates above approximately 70 km/h (43 MPH) and when the lane markings are clear. If the vehicle approaches either the left or right side of the traveling lane, the LDW indicator (orange) on the vehicle information display will flash and a warning chime will sound. Starting and driving 5-Chapter 5.indd 26 2021/01/13 02:16:39 PM NOTE: The LDW system is not designed to warn when you operate the lane change signal and change traveling lanes in the direction of the signal. (The LDW system will become operable again approximately 2 seconds after the lane change signal is turned off.) HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE LDW SYSTEM WAF0526X Steering-wheel-mounted side) controls (left Vehicle information display Perform the following steps to enable or disable the LDW system. 1. Press the button until “Settings” displays in the vehicle information display. Use the button to select “Driver Assistance”. Then press the “OK” button. 2. Use the button to select “Lane” and press the “OK” button. 3. Use the button to select “Warning (LDW)” and press the “OK” button to turn on or off the LDW system. NOTE: When enabling/disabling the system, the system will retain current settings even if the engine is restarted. Starting and driving 5-Chapter 5.indd 27 5-27 2021/01/13 02:16:39 PM LDW SYSTEM LIMITATIONS sion parts. — When you are towing a trailer or other vehicle). WARNING: Listed below are the system limitations for the LDW system. Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the LDW system could result in serious injury or death. y The system will not operate at speeds below approximately 70 km/h (43 MPH) or if it cannot detect lane markers. y Excessive noise will interfere with the warning chime sound, and the chime may not be heard. y Do not use the LDW system under the following conditions as it may not function properly: — During bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.). — When driving on slippery roads, such as on ice or snow. — When driving on winding or uneven roads. — When there is a lane closure due to road repairs. — When driving in a makeshift or temporary lane. — When driving on roads where the lane width is too narrow. — When driving without normal tyre conditions (for example, tyre wear, low tyre pressure, installation of spare tyre, tyre chains, non-standard wheels). — When the vehicle is equipped with non-original brake parts or suspen- 5-28 y The system may not function properly under the following conditions: — On roads where there are multiple parallel lane markers; lane markers that are faded or not painted clearly; yellow painted lane markers; non-standard lane markers; or lane markers covered with water, dirt, snow, etc. — When strong light enters the lane camera unit. (For example, the light directly shines on the front of the vehicle at sunrise or sunset.) — When a sudden change in brightness occurs. (For example, when the vehicle enters or exits a tunnel or under a bridge.) — Excessive noise will interfere with the warning chime sound, and the chime may not be heard. — On roads where discontinued lane markers are still detectable. — On roads where there are sharp curves. — On roads where there are sharply contrasting objects, such as shadows, snow, water, wheel ruts, seams or lines remaining after road repairs. (The LDW system could detect these items as lane markers.) — On roads where the traveling lane merges or separates. — When the vehicle’s traveling direction does not align with the lane marker. — When traveling close to the vehicle in front of you, which obstructs the lane camera unit detection range. — When rain, snow, dirt or object adheres to the windshield in front of the lane camera unit. — When the headlights are not bright due to dirt on the lens or if the aiming is not adjusted properly. Starting and driving 5-Chapter 5.indd 28 2021/01/13 02:16:39 PM SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE The LDW system is not designed to warn under the following conditions: y When you operate the lane change signal and change traveling lanes in the direction of the signal. (The LDW system will become operable again approximately 2 seconds after the lane change signal is turned off.) y When the vehicle speed lowers to less than approximately 70 km/h (43 MPH). SYSTEM MAINTENANCE After the above conditions have finished and the necessary operating conditions are satisfied, the LDW system will resume. SYSTEM MALFUNCTION If the LDW system malfunctions, it will cancel automatically. The LDW indicator (orange) will illuminate and “Not Available System Malfunction” warning message appears in the vehicle information display. WAF0666X If the vehicle is parked in direct sunlight under high temperature conditions (over approximately 40°C (104°F)) and then started, the LDW system may be deactivated automatically, and the following message will appear in the vehicle information display: “Unavailable High Cabin Temperature”. When the interior temperature is reduced, the LDW system will resume operating automatically. If the warning message appears in the vehicle information display, pull off the road to a safe location and stop the vehicle. Place the ignition switch in the “OFF” position and restart the engine. If the warning message continues to appear in the vehicle information display, have the system checked at a NISSAN dealer. WAF0635X The camera unit for the LDW system is located above the inside rearview mirror. To keep the proper operation of the LDW system and prevent a system malfunction, be sure to observe the following: y Always keep the windshield clean. y Do not attach a sticker (including transparent material) or install an accessory near the camera unit. y Do not place reflective materials, such as white paper or a mirror, on the instrument panel. The reflection of sunlight may adversely affect the camera unit’s capability of detecting the lane markers. y Do not strike or damage the areas around the camera unit. Do not touch the camera lens or remove the screw located on the camera unit. If the camera unit is damaged due to an accident, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer. Starting and driving 5-Chapter 5.indd 29 5-29 2021/01/13 02:16:40 PM BLIND SPOT WARNING (BSW) (if equipped) WARNING: Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the BSW system could result in serious injury or death. y The BSW system is not a replacement for proper driving procedures and is not designed to prevent contact with vehicles or objects. When changing lanes, always use the side and rear mirrors and turn and look in the direction your vehicle will move to ensure it is safe to change lanes. Never rely solely on the BSW system. The BSW system helps alert the driver of other vehicles in adjacent lanes when changing lanes. Detection zone SSD1030 The radar sensors can detect vehicles on either side of your vehicle within the detection zone shown as illustrated. This detection zone starts from the outside mirror of your vehicle and extends approximately 3.0 m (10 ft) behind the rear bumper, and approximately 3.0 m (10 ft) sideways. WAF0636X The BSW system uses radar sensors installed near the rear bumper to detect other vehicles in an adjacent lane. 5-30 Starting and driving 5-Chapter 5.indd 30 2021/01/13 02:16:40 PM detection zone. The side indicator light illuminates for a few seconds when the ignition switch is placed in the “ON” position. The brightness of the side indicator light is adjusted automatically depending on the brightness of the ambient light. If a vehicle comes into the detection zone after the driver activates the turn signal, then only the side indicator light flashes and no chime sounds. For additional information, refer to "BSW driving situations" (P.5-33). WAF0668X Side indicator light BSW SYSTEM OPERATION BSW indicator The BSW system operates above approximately 32 km/h (20 MPH). If the radar sensors detect a vehicle in the detection zone, the side indicator light illuminates. If the turn signal is then activated, the system chimes (twice) and the side indicator light flashes. The side indicator light continues to flash until the detected vehicle leaves the Starting and driving 5-Chapter 5.indd 31 5-31 2021/01/13 02:16:40 PM BSW SYSTEM LIMITATIONS HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE BSW SYSTEM WARNING: Listed below are the system limitations for the BSW system. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death. WAF0526X Steering-wheel-mounted side) controls (left Vehicle information display Perform the following steps to enable or disable the BSW system. 1. Press the button until “Settings” displays in the vehicle information display. Use the button to select “Driver Assistance”. Then press the “OK” button. 5-32 2. Use the button to select “Blind Spot” and press the “OK” button. 3. Press the button to select "Warning (BSW)" and press the "OK" button to turn on or off the BSW system. NOTE: When enabling/disabling the system, the system will retain the current settings even if the engine is restarted. y The BSW system cannot detect all vehicles under all conditions. y The radar sensors may not be able to detect and activate BSW when certain objects are present such as: — Pedestrians, bicycles, animals. — Vehicles such as motorcycles, low height vehicles, or high ground clearance vehicles. — Oncoming vehicles. — Vehicles remaining in the detection zone when you accelerate from a stop. — A vehicle merging into an adjacent lane at a speed approximately the same as your vehicle. — A vehicle approaching rapidly from behind. — A vehicle which your vehicle overtakes rapidly. — A vehicle that passes through the detection zone quickly. — When overtaking several vehicles in a row, the vehicles after the first vehicle may not be detected if they are traveling close together. Starting and driving 5-Chapter 5.indd 32 2021/01/13 02:16:40 PM y y y The radar sensor's detection zone is designed based on a standard lane width. When driving in a wider lane, the radar sensors may not detect vehicles in an adjacent lane. When driving in a narrow lane, the radar sensors may detect vehicles driving two lanes away. BSW DRIVING SITUATIONS The radar sensors are designed to ignore most stationary objects, however objects such as guardrails, walls, foliage and parked vehicles may occasionally be detected. This is a normal operation condition. Another vehicle approaching from behind Indicator on Indicator off Indicator flashing JVS0738X Illustration 2 - Approaching from behind Illustration 2: If the driver activates the turn signal, then the system chimes (twice) and the side indicator light flashes. The following conditions may reduce the ability of the radar to detect other vehicles: NOTE: — Severe weather — Road spray y The radar sensors may not detect vehicles which are approaching rapidly from behind. y If the driver activates the turn signal before a vehicle enters the detection zone, the side indicator light will flash but no chime will sound when the other vehicle is detected. — Ice/frost/dirt build-up on the vehicle y y Do not attach stickers (including transparent material), install accessories or apply additional paint near the radar sensors. These conditions may reduce the ability of the radar to detect other vehicles. JVS0737X Illustration 1 - Approaching from behind Illustration 1: The side indicator light illuminates if a vehicle enters the detection zone from behind in an adjacent lane. Excessive noise (for example, audio system volume, open vehicle window) will interfere with the chime sound, and it may not be heard. Starting and driving 5-Chapter 5.indd 33 5-33 2021/01/13 02:16:40 PM Overtaking another vehicle JVS0739X Illustration 3 - Overtaking another vehicle Illustration 3: The side indicator light illuminates if you overtake a vehicle and that vehicle stays in the detection zone for approximately 2 seconds. NOTE: y When overtaking several vehicles in a row, the vehicles after the first vehicle may not be detected if they are traveling close together. y The radar sensors may not detect slower moving vehicles if they are passed quickly. y If the driver activates the turn signal before a vehicle enters the detection zone, the side indicator light will flash but no chime will sound when the other vehicle is detected. Illustration 6: If the driver activates the turn signal, then the system chimes (twice) and the side indicator light flashes. Entering from the side NOTE: Illustration 5 - Entering from the side JVS0740X Illustration 4 - Overtaking another vehicle WAF0555X Illustration 6 - Entering from the side JVS0741X y The radar sensors may not detect a vehicle which is traveling at about the same speed as your vehicle when it enters the detection zone. y If the driver activates the turn signal before a vehicle enters the detection zone, the side indicator light will flash but no chime will sound when the other vehicle is detected. Illustration 5: The side indicator light illuminates if a vehicle enters the detection zone from either side. Illustration 4: If the driver activates the turn signal while another vehicle is in the detection zone, then the system chimes (twice) and the side indicator light flashes. 5-34 Starting and driving 5-Chapter 5.indd 34 2021/01/13 02:16:41 PM SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE Action to take: When the above conditions no longer exist, the system will resume automatically. If the “Unavailable Side Radar Obstruction” warning message continues to appear, have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer. SYSTEM MALFUNCTION When the BSW system malfunctions, it will be turned off automatically. The BSW indicator (orange) will illuminate and the “Not Available System Malfunction” warning message will appear in the vehicle information display. NOTE: If the BSW system stops working, the RCTA and Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention system (if equipped) will also stop working. Action to take: Stop the vehicle in a safe location, turn the engine off and restart the engine. If the message continues to appear, have the BSW system checked by a NISSAN dealer. SYSTEM MAINTENANCE WAF0667X When radar blockage is detected, the BSW system will be turned off automatically, a chime will sound and the “Unavailable Side Radar Obstruction” warning message will appear in the vehicle information display. The system is not available until the conditions no longer exist. The radar sensors may be blocked by temporary ambient conditions such as splashing water, mist or fog. The blocked condition may also be caused by objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the radar sensors. NOTE: If the BSW system stops working, the RCTA and Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention system (if equipped) will also stop working. WAF0636X Starting and driving 5-Chapter 5.indd 35 5-35 2021/01/13 02:16:41 PM REAR CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT (RCTA) (if equipped) The two radar sensors for the BSW system are located near the rear bumper. Always keep the area near the radar sensors clean. The radar sensors may be blocked by temporary ambient conditions such as splashing water, mist or fog. The blocked condition may also be caused by objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the radar sensors. Check for and remove objects obstructing the area around the radar sensors. Do not attach stickers (including transparent material), install accessories or apply additional paint near the radar sensors. Do not strike or damage the area around the radar sensors. See a NISSAN dealer if the area around the radar sensors is damaged due to a collision. WARNING: Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the RCTA system could result in serious injury or death. y The RCTA system is not a replacement for proper driving procedures and is not designed to prevent contact with vehicles or objects. When backing out of a parking space, always use the side and rear mirrors and turn and look in the direction your vehicle will move. Never rely solely on the RCTA system. The RCTA system will assist you when backing out from a parking space. When the vehicle is in reverse, the system is designed to detect other vehicles approaching from the right or left of the vehicle. If the system detects cross traffic, it will alert you. For the radio approval numbers and information, see "Radio approval number and information" (P.9-11). 5-36 Starting and driving 5-Chapter 5.indd 36 2021/01/13 02:16:41 PM JVS0173X WAF0636X WAF0533X Side indicator light RCTA SYSTEM OPERATION The RCTA system uses radar sensors installed on both sides near the rear bumper to detect an approaching vehicle. Vehicle information display The RCTA system can help alert the driver of an approaching vehicle when the driver is backing out of a parking space. The radar sensors can detect an approaching vehicle from up to approximately 20 m (66 ft) away. When the shift position is in “R” (Reverse) and the vehicle speed is less than approximately 8 km/h (5 MPH), the RCTA system is operational. If the radar detects an approaching vehicle from either side, the system chimes (once) and the side indicator light flashes on the side the vehicle is approaching from. Starting and driving 5-Chapter 5.indd 37 5-37 2021/01/13 02:16:42 PM HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE RCTA SYSTEM WAF0526X Steering-wheel-mounted controls (left side) Vehicle information display Perform the following steps to enable or disable the RCTA system. 1. Press the button until “Settings” displays in the vehicle information display. Use the button to select “Driver Assistance”. Then press the “OK” button. 5-38 2. Use the button to select “Cross Traffic Alert” and press the “OK” button to turn on or off the RCTA system. NOTE: When enabling/disabling the system, the system setting will be retained even if the engine is restarted. Starting and driving 5-Chapter 5.indd 38 2021/01/13 02:16:42 PM y The radar sensors may not detect approaching vehicles in certain situations: — Illustration : When a vehicle parked next to you obstructs the beam of the radar sensor. — Illustration : When the vehicle is parked in an angled parking space. — Illustration : When the vehicle is parked on inclined ground. — Illustration : When an approaching vehicle turns into your vehicle’s parking lot aisle. — Illustration : When the angle formed by your vehicle and approaching vehicle is small y The following conditions may reduce the ability of the radar to detect other vehicles: — Severe weather — Road spray — Ice/frost/dirt build-up on the vehicle y Do not attach stickers (including transparent material), install accessories or apply additional paint near the radar sensors. These conditions may reduce the ability of the radar to detect other vehicles y Excessive noise (e.g. audio system volume, open vehicle window) will interfere with the chime sound, and it may not be heard. JVS0479X RCTA SYSTEM LIMITATIONS WARNING: Listed below are the system limitations for the RCTA system. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death. y Always check surroundings and turn to check what is behind you before backing up. The radar sensors detect approaching (moving) vehicles. The radar sensors cannot detect every object such as: — Pedestrians, bicycles, motorcycles, animals or child-operated toy vehicles — A vehicle that is passing at speeds greater than approximately 30 km/h (19 MPH) — A vehicle that is passing at speeds lower than approximately 8 km/h (5 MPH) Starting and driving 5-Chapter 5.indd 39 5-39 2021/01/13 02:16:42 PM SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE Illustration 1 Illustration 2 JVS0172X JVS0173X NOTE: In the case of several vehicles approaching in a row (Illustration 1) or in the opposite direction (Illustration 2), a chime may not be sounded by the RCTA system after the first vehicle passes the sensors. WAF0667X When radar blockage is detected, the system will be deactivated automatically. The “Unavailable Side Radar Obstruction” warning message will appear in the vehicle information display. The blocked condition may also be caused by objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the radar sensors. The system is not available until the conditions no longer exist. If the BSW system stops working, the RCTA system will also stop working. The radar sensors may be blocked by temporary ambient conditions such as splashing water, mist or fog. 5-40 NOTE: Action to take: When the above conditions no longer exist, the system will resume automatically. Starting and driving 5-Chapter 5.indd 40 2021/01/13 02:16:43 PM CRUISE CONTROL (if equipped) SYSTEM MALFUNCTION When the RCTA system malfunctions, it will turn off automatically. The “Not Available System Malfunction” warning message will appear in the vehicle information display. NOTE: If the BSW system stops working, the RCTA system will also stop working. Action to take: Stop the vehicle in a safe location, turn the engine off and restart the engine. If the message continues to appear, have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer. SYSTEM MAINTENANCE Check for and remove objects obstructing the area around the radar sensors. Do not attach stickers (including transparent material), install accessories or apply additional paint near the radar sensors. Do not strike or damage the area around the radar sensors. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer if the area around the radar sensors is damaged due to a collision. For the radio approval numbers and information, see "Radio approval number and information (P.9-11). JVS1005X 1. RES+ switch 2. CANCEL switch 3. SET— switch 4. Cruise control MAIN switch y Always observe the posted speed limits and do not set the speed over them. y Do not use the cruise control when driving under the following conditions. Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle control and result in an accident. WARNING: WAF0636X The two radar sensors for the RCTA system are located near the rear bumper. Always keep the area near the radar sensors clean. The radar sensors may be blocked by temporary ambient conditions such as splashing water, mist or fog. The blocked condition may also be caused by objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the radar sensors. — When it is not possible to keep the vehicle at a constant speed — When driving in heavy traffic — When driving in traffic that varies speed — When driving in windy areas — When driving on winding or hilly roads — When driving on slippery (rain, snow, ice, etc.) roads Starting and driving 5-Chapter 5.indd 41 5-41 2021/01/13 02:16:43 PM CAUTION: Turning on cruise control On manual Transmission (MT) model, do not shift to the “N” (Neutral) position without depressing the clutch pedal when the cruise control is operated. Should this occur, depress the clutch pedal and turn the cruise control MAIN switch off immediately. Failure to do so may cause engine damage. Push the cruise control MAIN switch CRUISE indicator appears. PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE CONTROL The vehicle will maintain the set speed. y y y If the cruise control system malfunctions, it will cancel automatically. The CRUISE indicator in the vehicle information display will then blink to warn the driver. If the CRUISE indicator blinks, turn the cruise control MAIN switch off and have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer. The CRUISE indicator may blink when the cruise control MAIN switch is turned ON while pushing the RES+, SET— or CANCEL switch. To properly set the cruise control system, perform the following procedures. CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS The cruise control allows driving at speeds above 40 km/h (25 MPH) without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal. The cruise control will automatically be canceled if the vehicle slows down more than approximately 13 km/h (8 MPH) below the set speed. Moving the shift lever to the “N” (Neutral) position (Automatic Transmission models) or depressing the clutch pedal (Manual Transmission models) will cancel the cruise control. 5-42 release the SET— switch . The Setting cruising speed 1. Accelerate to the desired speed. 2. Push the SET— switch 3. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal. Push and hold the RES+ switch . When the vehicle reaches the desired speed, release the RES+ switch . y Quickly push and release the RES+ switch . This will increase the vehicle speed by about 1 km/h (0.6 MPH). and release it. Passing another vehicle: Depress the accelerator pedal to accelerate. After releasing the accelerator pedal, the vehicle will return to the previously set speed. The vehicle may not maintain the set speed when going up or down steep hills. In such cases, drive without the cruise control. Resetting to slower speed: Use any one of the following methods to reset to a slower speed. y Lightly tap the foot brake pedal. When the vehicle reaches the desired speed, push and release the SET— switch . y Push and hold the SET— switch When the vehicle reaches the desired speed, release the SET— switch . y Quickly push and release the SET— switch . This will reduce the vehicle speed by about 1 km/h (0.6 MPH). . y Resuming at preset speed: Push and release the RES+ switch . The vehicle will resume the last set cruising speed when the vehicle speed is over 40 km/h (25 MPH). Canceling cruising speed Use any one of the following methods to cancel the set speed. y Push the CANCEL switch y Tap the foot brake pedal. . y Push the cruise control MAIN switch CRUISE indicator will turn off. . The Resetting to faster speed: Use any one of the following methods to reset to a faster speed. y Depress the accelerator pedal. When the vehicle reaches the desired speed, push and Starting and driving 5-Chapter 5.indd 42 2021/01/13 02:16:43 PM INTELLIGENT EMERGENCY BRAKING (if equipped) WARNING: Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the Intelligent Emergency Braking system could result in serious personal injury or death. y The Intelligent Emergency Braking system is a supplemental aid to the driver. It is not a replacement for the driver’s attention to traffic conditions or responsibility to drive safely. It cannot prevent accidents due to carelessness or dangerous driving techniques. y The Intelligent Emergency Braking system does not function in all driving, traffic, weather and road conditions. The Intelligent Emergency Braking system can assist the driver when there is a risk of a forward collision with the vehicle ahead in the traveling lane. WAF0669 Vehicle ahead detection indicator Intelligent Emergency Braking emergency warning indicator WAF0638X The Intelligent Emergency Braking system uses a radar sensor located on the front of the vehicle to measure the distance to the vehicle ahead in the same lane. Intelligent Emergency Braking system warning light (on the meter panel) INTELLIGENT EMERGENCY BRAKING SYSTEM OPERATION The Intelligent Emergency Braking system will function when your vehicle is driven at speeds above approximately 5 km/h (3 MPH). If a risk of a forward collision is detected, detection system will firstly provide the warning to the driver by illuminating the warning (yellow) in the vehicle information display and providing an audible alert. If the driver applies the brakes quickly and Starting and driving 5-Chapter 5.indd 43 5-43 2021/01/13 02:16:43 PM forcefully after the warning, and the Intelligent Emergency Braking system detects that there is still the possibility of a forward collision, the system will automatically increase the braking force. If the driver does not take action, the Intelligent Emergency Braking system issues the second visual (flashing) (red) and audible warning. If the driver releases the accelerator pedal, then the system applies partial braking. necessary to avoid a collision. y When the accelerator pedal is depressed. y When there is no longer a vehicle detected ahead. If the Intelligent Emergency Braking system has stopped the vehicle, the vehicle will remain at a standstill for approximately 2 seconds before the brakes are released. If the risk of a collision becomes imminent, the Intelligent Emergency Braking system applies harder braking automatically. While the Intelligent Emergency Braking system is operating, you may hear the sound of brake operation. This is normal and indicates that the Intelligent Emergency Braking system is operating properly. NOTE: The vehicle’s stop lights come on when braking is performed by the Intelligent Emergency Braking system. Depending on vehicle speed and distance to the vehicle ahead, as well as driving and roadway conditions, the system may help the driver avoid a forward collision or may help mitigate the consequences of a collision should one be unavoidable. If the driver is handling the steering wheel, accelerating or braking, the Intelligent Emergency Braking system will function later or will not function. The automatic braking will cease under the following conditions: y When the steering wheel is turned as far as 5-44 Starting and driving 5-Chapter 5.indd 44 2021/01/13 02:16:43 PM TURNING THE INTELLIGENT EMERGENCY BRAKING SYSTEM ON/OFF NOTE: The Intelligent Emergency Braking system will be automatically turned ON when the engine is restarted. INTELLIGENT EMERGENCY BRAKING SYSTEM LIMITATIONS WARNING: Listed below are the system limitations for the Intelligent Emergency Braking system. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death. y The Intelligent Emergency Braking system cannot detect all vehicles under all conditions. y The radar sensor does not detect the following objects: WAF0670X Intelligent Emergency warning light Braking system Vehicle information display Steering-wheel-mounted side) 2. controls (left Perform the following steps to enable or disable the Intelligent Emergency Braking system. 1. Use the button to select “Driver Assistance”. Then press the “OK” button. Press the button until “Settings” displays in the vehicle information display. Use the button to select “Emergency Brake” and press the “OK” button to turn on or off the Intelligent Emergency Braking system. When the Intelligent Emergency Braking system is turned off, the Intelligent Emergency Braking system warning light (orange) illuminates. y — Pedestrians, animals or obstacles in the roadway — Animals of any size — Obstacles (for example, cargo or debris) on the roadway or roadside — Oncoming or crossing vehicles — Vehicles where the tyres are difficult to see or the shape of the rear of the vehicle is unclear or obstructed. — Parked vehicles The radar sensor has some performance limitations. If a stationary vehicle is in the vehicle’s path, the Intelligent Emergency Braking system will not function when the vehicle is driven at speeds over approximately 80 km/h (50 MPH). Starting and driving 5-Chapter 5.indd 45 5-45 2021/01/13 02:16:44 PM y The radar sensor may not detect a vehicle ahead in the following conditions: — In poor visibility conditions (such as rain, snow, fog, dust storms, sand storms, smoke, and road spray from other vehicles). motorcycle). — While towing a trailer or other vehicle. y — If there is interference by other radar sources. y y y — If the speed difference between the two vehicles is small. y — If the vehicle ahead has a unique or unusual shape, extremely low or high clearance heights, or unusual cargo loading or is narrow (for example, a 5-46 Braking — objects on the roadside (traffic sign, guardrail, vehicle, etc.) — Excessively heavy baggage is loaded in the rear seat (if equipped) or the cargo area of your vehicle. — When the vehicle is offset from the vehicle’s forward path. — For approximately 15 seconds after starting the engine. The Intelligent Emergency system may react to: — The vehicle is driven on a slope. — When your vehicle’s position or movement is changed quickly or significantly (for example, lane change, turning vehicle, abrupt steering, sudden acceleration or deceleration). — When your vehicle or the vehicle ahead moves quickly or significantly such that the system cannot detect and react in time (for example, vehicle cutting in, changing lanes, making a turn, steering abruptly, sudden acceleration or deceleration). The system performance may be degraded in the following conditions: — The vehicle is driven on a slippery road. — If dirt, ice, snow, fog or other material is covering the radar sensor area. — When driving on a steep downhill slope, on roads with sharp curves, and/or bumpy or dirt roads. vehicle in front of your vehicle. y y The system is designed to automatically check the sensor’s functionality, within certain limitations. The system may not detect some forms of obstruction of the sensor area such as ice, snow, stickers, for example. In these cases, the system may not be able to warn the driver properly. Be sure that you check, clean and clear the sensor area regularly. WAF0269X — objects above road (low bridge, traffic sign, etc.) — objects on the road surface (railroad track, grate, steel plate, etc.) In some road or traffic conditions, the Intelligent Emergency Braking system may unexpectedly apply partial braking. When acceleration is necessary, continue to depress the accelerator pedal to override the system. The system may keep operating when the vehicle ahead is turning right or left. The system may operate when your vehicle is approaching and passing a vehicle ahead. Depending on the road shape (curved road, entrance and exit of the curve, winding road, lane regulation, under construction, etc.), the system may operate temporarily for the oncoming — objects in the parking garage (beam, pillar, etc.) — vehicles or objects in adjacent lane or close to the vehicle — objects on the road (such as trees) y Braking distances increase on slippery surfaces. y Excessive noise will interfere with the warning chime sound, and the chime may not be heard. Starting and driving 5-Chapter 5.indd 46 2021/01/13 02:16:44 PM SSD0253 When driving on some roads, such as winding, hilly, curved, narrow roads, or roads which are under construction, the sensor may detect vehicles in a different lane, or may temporarily not detect a vehicle traveling ahead. This may cause the system to work inappropriately. The detection of vehicles may also be affected by vehicle operation (steering maneuver or traveling position in the lane, etc.) or vehicle condition. If this occurs, the system may warn you by blinking the system indicator and sounding the chime unexpectedly. You will have to manually control the proper distance away from the vehicle traveling ahead. Starting and driving 5-Chapter 5.indd 47 5-47 2021/01/13 02:16:44 PM SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE y The sensor area on the front of the vehicle is covered with dirt or is obstructed. Action to take If the warning light (orange) comes on, stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn the engine off. Clean the radar cover on the front of the vehicle with a soft cloth, and restart the engine. If the warning light continues to illuminate, have the Intelligent Emergency Braking system checked by a NISSAN dealer. y When driving on roads with limited road structures or buildings (for example, long bridges, deserts, snow fields, driving next to long walls). Action to take When the above conditions no longer exist, the Intelligent Emergency Braking system will resume automatically. Condition C WAF0671X Condition A Action to take When the radar sensor picks up interference from another radar source, making it impossible to detect a vehicle ahead, the Intelligent Emergency Braking system is automatically turned off. When the above conditions no longer exist, the Intelligent Emergency Braking system will resume automatically. The Intelligent Emergency Braking system warning light (orange) will illuminate. 5-48 When Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system is OFF, the Intelligent Emergency Braking brake will not operate. In this case only visible and audible warning operates. The Intelligent Emergency Braking system warning light (orange) will illuminate. Action to take When the VDC system is ON, the Intelligent Emergency Braking system will resume automatically. Condition B In the following condition, the Intelligent Emergency Braking system warning light (orange) will illuminate and the “Not Available Front Radar Blocked” warning message will appear in the vehicle information display. Starting and driving 5-Chapter 5.indd 48 2021/01/13 02:16:44 PM INTELLIGENT FORWARD COLLISION WARNING SYSTEM (if equipped) SYSTEM MALFUNCTION y If the Intelligent Emergency Braking system malfunctions, it will be turned off automatically, a chime will sound, the Intelligent Emergency Braking system warning light (orange) will illuminate and the “Not Available System Malfunction” warning message will appear in the vehicle information display. y Do not cover or attach stickers or similar objects on the front of the vehicle near the sensor area. This could cause failure or malfunction. y Do not attach metallic objects near the sensor area (brush guard, etc.). This could cause failure or malfunction. y Do not alter, remove or paint the front of the vehicle near the sensor area. Contact a NISSAN dealer before customizing or restoring the sensor area. Action to take: If the Intelligent Emergency Braking system warning light (orange) comes on, stop the vehicle in a safe location. Turn the engine off and restart the engine. If the warning light continues to illuminate, have the Intelligent Emergency Braking system checked by a NISSAN dealer. Do not strike or damage the areas around the sensor. For the radio approval numbers and information, see "Radio approval number and information" (P.9-11). WARNING: Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the Intelligent Forward Collision Warning system could result in serious injury or death. y The Intelligent Forward Collision Warning system can help warn the driver before a collision occurs but will not avoid a collision. It is the driver’s responsibility to stay alert, drive safely and be in control of the vehicle at all times. The Intelligent Forward Collision Warning system can help alert the driver when there is a sudden braking of a second vehicle traveling in front of the vehicle ahead in the same lane. SYSTEM MAINTENANCE WAF0638X WAF0638X The radar sensor vehicle. is located on the front of the The Intelligent Forward Collision Warning system uses a radar sensor located on the front of the vehicle to measure the distance to the vehicle ahead in the same lane. To keep the system operating properly, be sure to observe the following: y Always keep the sensor area on the front of the vehicle clean. Starting and driving 5-Chapter 5.indd 49 5-49 2021/01/13 02:16:44 PM INTELLIGENT FORWARD COLLISION WARNING SYSTEM OPERATION WAF0672X Vehicle ahead detection indicator Intelligent Emergency Braking system warning light (on the meter panel) 5-50 Starting and driving 5-Chapter 5.indd 50 2021/01/13 02:16:45 PM JVS0294X The Intelligent Forward Collision Warning system operates at speeds above approximately 5 km/h (3 MPH). If there is a potential risk of a forward collision, the Intelligent Forward Collision Warning system will warn the driver by blinking the vehicle ahead detection indicator, and sounding an audible alert. Starting and driving 5-Chapter 5.indd 51 5-51 2021/01/13 02:16:45 PM TURNING THE INTELLIGENT FORWARD COLLISION WARNING SYSTEM ON/OFF Braking system warning light illuminates. NOTE: When the Intelligent Emergency Braking system is turned off, the Intelligent Forward Collision Warning system is also turned off. For details about the Intelligent Emergency Braking system, see "Intelligent Emergency Braking" (P.5-43). INTELLIGENT FORWARD COLLISION WARNING SYSTEM LIMITATIONS Illustration A JVS0295X WAF0670X Intelligent Emergency warning light Braking system 1. Press the button until “Settings” appears in the vehicle information display. Use the button to select “Driver Assistance”. Then press the “OK” button. 2. Use the button to select “Emergency Brake” and press the “OK” button to turn on or off the Intelligent Forward Collision Warning system. Vehicle information display Steering-wheel-mounted side) controls (left Perform the following steps to enable or disable the Intelligent Forward Collision Warning system. 5-52 When the Intelligent Forward Collision Warning system is turned off, the Intelligent Emergency Starting and driving 5-Chapter 5.indd 52 2021/01/13 02:16:45 PM able to warn the driver properly. Be sure that you check, clean and clear the sensor area regularly. y JVS0296X Illustration B WARNING: — Listed below are the system limitations for the Intelligent Forward Collision Warning system. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death. y The Intelligent Forward Collision Warning system cannot detect all vehicles under all conditions. y The radar sensor does not detect the following objects: y y — Pedestrians, animals or obstacles in the roadway — Oncoming vehicles — Crossing vehicles (Illustration A) The Intelligent Forward Collision Warning system does not function when a vehicle ahead is a narrow vehicle, such as a motorcycle. The radar sensor may not detect a vehicle ahead in the following conditions: — Snow or heavy rain y Excessive noise will interfere with the warning chime sound, and the chime may not be heard. Dirt, ice, snow or other material covering the radar sensor. — Interference by other radar sources. — Snow or road spray from traveling vehicles. — Driving in a tunnel — When your vehicle is towing a trailer, etc. — (Illustration B) When the vehicle ahead is being towed. — (Illustration C) When the distance to the vehicle ahead is too close, the beam of the radar sensor is obstructed. — (Illustration D) When driving on a steep downhill slope or roads with sharp curves. The system is designed to automatically check the sensor’s functionality, within certain limitations. The system may not detect some forms of obstruction of the sensor area such as ice, snow, stickers, etc. In these cases, the system may not be Starting and driving 5-Chapter 5.indd 53 5-53 2021/01/13 02:16:45 PM When driving on some roads, such as winding, hilly, curved, narrow roads, or roads which are under construction, the radar sensor may detect vehicles in a different lane, or may temporarily not detect a vehicle traveling ahead. This may cause the Intelligent Forward Collision Warning system to work inappropriately. Illustration C Illustration D JVS0297X The detection of vehicles may also be affected by vehicle operation (steering maneuver or traveling position in the lane, etc.) or vehicle condition. If this occurs, the system may warn you by blinking the system indicator and sounding the chime unexpectedly. You will have to manually control the proper distance away from the vehicle traveling ahead. JVS0298X SSD0253 5-54 Starting and driving 5-Chapter 5.indd 54 2021/01/13 02:16:45 PM SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE automatically turned off. y The Intelligent Emergency Braking system warning light (orange) will illuminate and the “Not Available Front Radar Blocked” warning message will appear in the vehicle information display. Action to take: If the warning light (orange) comes on, stop the vehicle in a safe place, press the Park button to place the vehicle in the “P” (Park) position and turn the engine off. Clean the radar cover area with a soft cloth, and restart the engine. If the warning light continues to illuminate, have the Intelligent Forward Collision Warning system checked by a NISSAN dealer. y When driving on roads with limited road structures or buildings (for example, long bridges, deserts, snow fields, driving next to long walls). Action to take: When the above conditions no longer exist the Intelligent Forward Collision Warning system will resume automatically. NOTE: WAF0671X Condition A: Action to take: When the radar sensor picks up interference from another radar source, making it impossible to detect a vehicle ahead, the Intelligent Forward Collision Warning system is automatically turned off. When the above conditions no longer exist, the Intelligent Forward Collision Warning system will resume automatically. The Intelligent Emergency Braking system warning light (orange) will illuminate. Condition B: When the sensor area of the front of the vehicle is covered with dirt or is obstructed, making it impossible to detect a vehicle ahead, the Intelligent Forward Collision Warning system is If the Intelligent Emergency Braking system stops working, the Intelligent Forward Collision Warning system will also stop working. SYSTEM MALFUNCTION If the Intelligent Forward Collision Warning system malfunctions, it will be turned off automatically, a chime will sound, the Intelligent Emergency Braking system warning light (orange) will illuminate and the warning message “Not Available System Malfunction” will appear in the vehicle information display. Starting and driving 5-Chapter 5.indd 55 5-55 2021/01/13 02:16:45 PM INTELLIGENT DRIVER ALERTNESS (if equipped) Action to take: y If the warning light (orange) comes on, stop the vehicle in a safe location, turn the engine off and restart the engine. If the warning light continues to illuminate, have the Intelligent Forward Collision Warning system checked by a NISSAN dealer. Do not alter, remove or paint the front bumper. Before customizing or restoring the front bumper, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer. WARNING: Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the Intelligent Driver Alertness system could result in serious injury or death. y The Intelligent Driver Alertness system is only a warning to inform the driver of a potential lack of driver attention or drowsiness. It will not steer the vehicle or prevent loss of control. y The Intelligent Driver Alertness system does not detect and provide an alert of the driver’s lack of attention or fatigue in every situation. SYSTEM MAINTENANCE y WAF0638X The radar sensor vehicle. is located on the front of the To keep the system operating properly, be sure to observe the following: y Always keep the sensor area of the front bumper clean. y Do not strike or damage the areas around the sensor. y Do not cover or attach stickers or similar objects on the front bumper near the sensor area. This could cause failure or malfunction. y Do not attach metallic objects near the sensor area (brush guard, etc.). This could cause failure or malfunction. 5-56 It is the driver’s responsibility to: — stay alert, — drive safely, — keep the vehicle in the traveling lane, — be in control of the vehicle at all times, — avoid driving when tired, — avoid distractions (texting, etc.). The Intelligent Driver Alertness system helps alert the driver if the system detects a lack of attention or driving fatigue. The system monitors driving style and steering behavior over a period of time, and it detects changes from the normal pattern. If the system detects that driver attention is decreasing over a period of time, the system uses audible and visual warnings to suggest that the driver take a break. Starting and driving 5-Chapter 5.indd 56 2021/01/13 02:16:46 PM INTELLIGENT DRIVER ALERTNESS SYSTEM OPERATION HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE INTELLIGENT DRIVER ALERTNESS SYSTEM JVI1623X If the system detects driver fatigue or that driver attention is decreasing, the message “Take a break?” appears in the vehicle information display and a chime sounds when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 60 km/h (37 MPH). The system continuously monitors driver attention and can provide multiple warnings per trip. The system resets and starts reassessing driving style and steering behavior when the ignition switch is cycled from the “ON” to the “OFF” position and back to the “ON” position. WAF0526X Steering-wheel-mounted side) controls (left Vehicle information display Perform the following steps to enable or disable the Intelligent Driver Alertness system. 1. Press the button until “Settings” appears in the vehicle information display. Use the button to select “Driver Assistance”. Then press the “OK” button. 2. Use the button to select “Driver Attention Alert” and press the “OK” button to turn on or off the Intelligent Driver Alertness system. NOTE: The setting will be retained even if the engine is restarted. Starting and driving 5-Chapter 5.indd 57 5-57 2021/01/13 02:16:46 PM ECO DRIVE REPORT (if equipped) INTELLIGENT DRIVER ALERTNESS SYSTEM LIMITATIONS WARNING: Listed below are the system limitations for the Intelligent Driver Alertness system. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death. y The Intelligent Driver Alertness system may not operate properly and may not provide an alert in the following conditions: — Poor road conditions such as an uneven road surface or pot holes. — Strong side wind. — If you have adopted a sporty driving style with higher cornering speeds or higher rates of acceleration. — y Frequent lane changes or changes to vehicle speed. The Intelligent Driver Alertness system may not provide an alert in the following conditions: SYSTEM MALFUNCTION If the Intelligent Driver Alertness system malfunctions, a warning message will appear in the vehicle information display and the function will be stopped automatically. Action to take: Stop the vehicle in a safe location, place the vehicle in “P” (Park) position, turn the engine off and restart the engine. If the system warning message continues to appear, have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer. WAF0554X When the ignition switch is in the “OFF” position, ECO management display appears. Previous 5 times (History) Current fuel economy Best fuel economy The result of ECO evaluation is displayed 30 seconds after the ignition switch is placed in the on position and the vehicle is driven at least 500 meters (1/3 miles). : The average fuel economy for the previous 5 times will be displayed. : The average fuel economy since the last reset will be displayed. — Vehicle speeds lower than 60 km/h (37 MPH). — Short lapses of attention. : The best fuel economy of the past history will be displayed. — Instantaneous distractions such as dropping an object. The ECO drive report can be set to be “ON” or “OFF”. See "Settings" (P.2-19). 5-58 Starting and driving 5-Chapter 5.indd 58 2021/01/13 02:16:46 PM FUEL EFFICIENCY AND CARBON DIOXIDE REDUCTION DRIVING TIPS Follow these easy-to-use Fuel Efficiency and Carbon Dioxide Reduction Driving Tips to help you achieve the most fuel economy from your vehicle and reduce carbon dioxide emissions. 1. 2. 3. 4. Use smooth accelerator and brake pedal application. y Avoid rapid starts and stops. y Use smooth, gentle accelerator and brake application whenever possible. y Maintain constant speed while commuting and coast whenever possible. Maintain constant speed. y Look ahead to try and anticipate and minimize stops. y Synchronizing your speed with traffic lights allows you to reduce your number of stops. y Maintaining a steady speed can minimize red light stops and improve fuel efficiency. Drive at economical speeds and distances. y Observing the speed limit and not exceeding 97 km/h (60 MPH) (where legally allowed) can improve fuel efficiency due to reduced aerodynamic drag. y Maintaining a safe following distance behind other vehicles reduces unnecessary braking. y Safely monitoring traffic to anticipate changes in speed permits reduced braking and smooth acceleration changes. y Select a gear range suitable to road conditions. Use cruise control (if equipped). y Using cruise control during highway driving helps maintain a steady speed. y Cruise control is particularly effective in providing fuel savings when driving on flat terrains. 5. Plan for the shortest route. y Utilize a map or navigation system (if equipped) to determine the best route to save time. 6. Avoid idling. y Shutting off your engine when safe for stops exceeding 30-60 seconds saves fuel and reduces emissions. 7. Buy an automated pass for toll roads. y Automated passes permit drivers to use special lanes to maintain cruising speed through the toll and avoid stopping and starting. 8. Winter warm up. y Limit idling time to minimize impact to fuel economy. y Vehicles typically need no more than 30 seconds of idling at start-up to effectively circulate the engine oil before driving. y Your vehicle will reach its ideal operating temperature more quickly while driving versus idling. 9. INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY AND REDUCING CARBON DIOXIDE EMISSIONS y Keep your engine tuned up. y Follow the recommended scheduled maintenance. y Keep the tyres inflated to the correct pressure. Low tyre pressure increases tyre wear and lowers fuel economy. y Keep the wheels in correct alignment. Improper alignment increases tyre wear and lowers fuel economy. y Use the recommended viscosity engine oil. (See "Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities" (P.9-2).) Keeping your vehicle cool. y y Park your vehicle in a covered parking area or in the shade whenever possible. When entering a hot vehicle, opening the windows will help to reduce the inside temperature faster, resulting in reduced demand on your A/C system. 10. Do not carry excessive weight. y Remove unnecessary objects from the vehicle to reduce vehicle weight. Starting and driving 5-Chapter 5.indd 59 5-59 2021/01/13 02:16:46 PM PARKING WARNING: y Do not stop or park the vehicle over flammable materials such as dry grass, waste paper or rags. They may ignite and cause a fire. y Safe parking procedures require that both the parking brake be applied and the shift lever placed into the “P” (Park) position for Automatic Transmission (AT) model or in an appropriate gear for Manual Transmission (MT) model. Failure to do so could cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll away and result in an accident. y When parking the vehicle, make sure the shift lever is moved to the “P” (Park) position. The shift lever cannot be moved out of the “P” (Park) position without depressing the foot brake pedal (AT model). y Never leave the engine running while the vehicle is unattended. y Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle. They could unknowingly activate switches or controls. Unattended children could become involved in serious accidents. y To help avoid risk of injury or death through unintended operation of the vehicle and/or its systems, do not leave children, people who require the assistance of others or pets unattended in your vehicle. Additionally, the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a warm day can quickly become high enough to cause a significant risk of injury or death to people and pets. 5-60 SSD0488 Left-Hand Drive (LHD) model SSD0489 Right-Hand Drive (RHD) model 1. Firmly apply the parking brake. HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB 2. Automatic Transmission (AT) model: Move the shift lever to the “P” (Park) position. Turn the wheels into the curb and move the vehicle forward until the curb side wheel gently touches the curb. Then apply the parking brake. Manual Transmission (MT) model: Move the shift lever to the “R” (Reverse) position. When parking on an uphill grade, move the shift lever to the “1” (1st) position. 3. To help prevent the vehicle from moving into traffic when parked on an incline, it is a good practice to turn the wheels as illustrated. HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB Turn the wheels away from the curb and allow the vehicle to move back until the curb side wheel gently touches the curb. Then apply the parking brake. Starting and driving 5-Chapter 5.indd 60 2021/01/13 02:16:46 PM PARKING SENSOR (sonar) SYSTEM (if equipped) HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, WITHOUT CURB Turn the wheels toward the side of the road so the vehicle will move away from the center of the road if the vehicle moves. Then apply the parking brake. 4. Model with Intelligent Key: Place the ignition switch in the “OFF” position. Model without Intelligent Key: Place the ignition switch in the “LOCK” position and remove the key. JVS0532X The parking sensor (sonar) system sounds a tone to inform the driver of obstacles near the bumper. When the “Sensor” key is ON, the sensor view will automatically appear in the vehicle information display. this may include reduced performance or a false activation. y This function is designed as an aid to the driver in detecting large stationary objects to help avoid damaging the vehicle. The system is not designed to prevent contact with small or moving objects. Always move slowly. y The system will not detect small objects below the bumper, and may not detect objects close to the bumper or on the ground. y The system may not detect the following objects. WARNING: y y The parking sensor (sonar) system is a convenience but it is not a substitute for proper parking. The driver is always responsible for safety during parking and other manoeuvres. Always look around and check that it is safe to do so before parking. Read and understand the limitations of the parking sensor (sonar) system as contained in this section. The colors of the corner sensor indicator and the distance guide lines in the rear view indicate different distances to the object. Inclement weather or ultrasonic sources such as an automatic car wash, a truck's compressed-air brakes or a pneumatic drill may affect the function of the system; — Fluffy objects such as snow, cloth, cotton, glass-wool, etc. — Thin objects such as rope, wire and chain, etc. — Wedge-shaped objects y If your vehicle sustains damage to the bumper fascia, leaving it misaligned or bent, the sensing zone may be altered causing inaccurate measurement of obstacles or false alarms. Starting and driving 5-Chapter 5.indd 61 5-61 2021/01/13 02:16:46 PM y The sensors may cause malfunction when a horn, etc. sounds or there is a ultrasonic source (such as parking sensors of other vehicles) around the vehicle because the sensors detect the distance between the vehicle and the obstacle by detecting the sound wave reflected from the surface of an obstacle. y Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as possible to hear the tone clearly. y Keep the sensors (located on the bumper fascia) free from snow, ice and large accumulations of dirt. Do not clean the sensors with sharp objects. If the sensors are covered, the accuracy of the sensor function will be diminished. PARKING SENSOR (sonar) SYSTEM OFF SWITCH CAUTION: The system inform with visual and audible signal of rear obstacles when the shift lever is in the “R” (Reverse) position. The system is deactivated at speeds above 10 km/h (6 MPH). It is reactivated at lower speeds. The intermittent tone will stop after 3 seconds when an obstacle is detected by only the corner sensor and the distance does not change. The tone will stop when the obstacle get away from the vehicle. 5-62 WAF0575X When the corner of the vehicle moves closer to an object, the corner sensor indicators appears. When the center of the vehicle moves close to an object, the center sensor indicator appears. When the object is detected, the indicator (green) appears and the tone sounds intermittently. When the vehicle moves closer to the object, the color of the indicator turns yellow. When the vehicle is very close to the object, the indicator turns red, and the tone sounds continuously. JVS0534X The parking sensor (sonar) system OFF switch on the instrument panel allows the driver to turn the parking sensor (sonar) system on and off. To turn the parking sensor (sonar) system on and off, the ignition switch must be in the “ON” position. The indicator light on the switch will illuminate when the system is turned on. If the indicator light flashes when the parking sensor (sonar) system is not turned off, it may indicate a malfunction in the parking sensor (sonar) system. The parking sensor (sonar) system will be turned on automatically under the following conditions: y When the ignition switch is switched from the “OFF” position to the “ON” position. y When the shift lever is shifted into the “R” (Reverse) position. y When the vehicle speed increases to 10 km/h (6 MPH) and decreases. Starting and driving 5-Chapter 5.indd 62 2021/01/13 02:16:47 PM TRAILER TOWING The automatic turning on function can be turned on and off by “Sensor” key in the setting menu. See "Settings" (P.2-19). PARKING SENSOR (sonar) SYSTEM SETTING The following status of the parking sensor (sonar) system can be changed by switches on the steering-wheel-mounted controls. For details, see "Settings" (P.2-19). Sensor Activate or deactivate the use of sensor. Your new vehicle was designed to be used primarily to carry passengers and luggage. Towing a trailer will place additional loads on your vehicle's engine, drive train, steering, braking and other systems. The towing of a trailer will exaggerate other conditions such as sway caused by crosswinds, rough road surfaces or passing trucks. Your driving style and speed must be adjusted according to the circumstances. Before towing a trailer, see a NISSAN dealer for an explanation about the proper use of towing equipment. ON (default) - OFF OPERATING PRECAUTIONS Volume y Avoid towing a trailer during the break-in period. y Before driving, make sure that the lighting system of the trailer works properly. y Observe the legal maximum speeds for trailer operation. y Avoid abrupt starts, accelerations and stops. y Avoid sharp turns and lane changes. y Always drive your vehicle at a moderate speed. y Do not use the following systems (if equipped) while towing a trailer: Adjust the volume of the tone. High - Medium (default) - Low Distance Adjust the detection range of the sensor. Long- Medium (default) - Short hitch, safety chain, roof carrier, etc.) for your vehicle and trailer. These devices are available from a NISSAN dealer where you can also obtain more detailed information about trailer towing. y Never allow the total trailer load (trailer weight plus its cargo weight) to exceed the maximum set for the vehicle and the coupling device. See a NISSAN dealer for more information. y The trailer must be loaded so that heavy goods are placed over the axle. The maximum allowable vertical load on the trailer hitch must not be exceeded. y Have your vehicle serviced more often than at the intervals specified in a separate maintenance booklet. y Trailer towing requires more fuel than under normal circumstances because of a considerable increase in traction power and resistance. While towing a trailer, check the engine coolant temperature indicator to prevent the vehicle from overheating. — Lane Departure Warning (LDW) system — Intelligent Emergency Braking system — Intelligent Forward Collision Warning system y Follow the trailer manufacturer's instructions. y Choose proper coupling devices (trailer Starting and driving 5-Chapter 5.indd 63 5-63 2021/01/13 02:16:47 PM MAXIMUM LOAD LIMITS CA0011-A Maximum trailer loads (including tyres and other loaded equipment): 1. 2. Never allow the total trailer load to exceed: y The maximum 750 kg (1,654 lb) for a trailer without brakes. y The maximum 3,500 kg (7,718 lb) for a trailer with brakes. (YD25DDTi engine) y The maximum 1,560 kg (3,440 lb) for a trailer with brakes. (QR25DE engine) equipment fitted but also to use it correctly. Towing loads greater than the value specified for your vehicle or using towing equipment which is not provided by NISSAN could seriously affect the handling and/or performance of your vehicle. GAWR: Vehicle damage resulting from improper towing procedures is not covered by NISSAN warranties. Information on trailer towing and the required equipment should be obtained from a NISSAN dealer. QR25DE engine “Never exceed the Gross Vehicle Mass (GVM), Gross Combination Mass (GCM) or Front/Rear Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)” TYRE PRESSURE Maximum tongue load Never allow the tongue load to exceed 10% of the total trailer load. If the tongue load exceeds 10%, rearrange the cargo in the trailer. Maximum rear gross axle weight Towing capacity displayed on a tow-bar. y Trailer's gross vehicle mass marked on a coupling body. y Gross vehicle mass marked on a trailer data plate. The maximum trailer load which can be towed by your vehicle depends on the towing equipment fitted to the vehicle. Therefore, it is important to not only have the correct 5-64 YD25DDTi engine MT model: 1,785 kg (3,936 lb) AT model: 1,850 kg (4,079 lb) 1,685 kg (3,715 lb) The trailer must be loaded so that heavy goods are placed over the axle. When towing a trailer, inflate the vehicle tyres to the maximum recommended COLD tyre pressure (for full loading) indicated on the tyre placard. Do not tow a trailer when the vehicle is installed with a temporary spare tyre or a compact spare tyre. SAFETY CHAINS Always use a suitable chain between the vehicle and trailer. The chain should be crossed and should be attached to the hitch, not to the vehicle bumper or axle. Be sure to leave enough slack in the chain to permit turning corners. The total trailer load must be lower than the following three values even if it does not exceed the maximum permissible trailer loads. y Rear TRAILER BRAKES CA0050 The rear gross axle weight must not exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). Ensure that trailer brakes are installed as required by local regulations. Also check that all other trailer equipment conforms to local regulations. Always block the wheels on both the vehicle and trailer when parking. Apply the hand brake on the trailer if equipped. Parking on a steep slope is not recommended. If parking on a steep slope is unavoidable, Starting and driving 5-Chapter 5.indd 64 2021/01/13 02:16:47 PM POWER STEERING place the shift lever in the “P” (Park) position (Automatic transmission model), or in an appropriate position (Manual transmission model), and turn the front wheels towards the curb. TRAILER DETECTION (if equipped) When towing a trailer with a genuine NISSAN tow bar electrical kit and the turn signal switch is used, the electrical system of the vehicle will detect the additional electrical load of the trailer lighting. As a result, the direction indicator tone will be different. WARNING: If the engine is not running or is turned off while driving, the power assist for the steering will not work. The steering will be much harder to operate. The power assisted steering is designed to use a hydraulic pump driven by the engine, to assist steering. If the engine stops or the drive belt breaks, you will still have control of the vehicle. However, greater steering effort is needed, especially in sharp turns and at low speeds. BRAKE SYSTEM The brake system has two separate hydraulic circuits. If one circuit malfunctions, you will still have braking ability at two wheels. BRAKE PRECAUTIONS Vacuum assisted brakes The brake booster aids braking by using engine vacuum. If the engine stops, you can stop the vehicle by depressing the foot brake pedal. However, greater foot pressure on the foot brake pedal will be required to stop the vehicle. The stopping distance will be longer. If the engine is not running or is turned off while driving, the power assisted brakes will not function. Braking will be harder. WARNING: Do not coast with the engine stopped. Using brakes Avoid resting your foot on the foot brake pedal while driving. This will overheat the brakes, wear out the brake linings/pads faster, and increase fuel consumption. To help reduce brake wear and to prevent the brakes from overheating, reduce speed and downshift to a lower gear before going down a slope or long grade. Overheated brakes may reduce braking performance and could result in loss of vehicle control. While driving on a slippery surface, be careful when braking, accelerating or downshifting. Abrupt braking or acceleration could cause the wheels to skid and result in an accident. Starting and driving 5-Chapter 5.indd 65 5-65 2021/01/13 02:16:47 PM Wet brakes When the vehicle is washed or driven through water, the brakes may get wet. As a result, your braking distance will be longer and the vehicle may pull to one side during braking. To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe speed while lightly depressing the foot brake pedal to heat up the brakes. Do this until the brakes return to normal. Avoid driving the vehicle at high speeds until the brakes function correctly. Parking brake break-in Break in the parking brake shoes whenever the stopping effect of the parking brake is weakened or whenever the parking brake shoes and/or drums/rotors are replaced, in order to assure the best braking performance. This procedure is described in the vehicle service manual and can be performed by a NISSAN dealer. BRAKE ASSIST (if equipped) When the force applied to the brake pedal exceeds a certain level, the Brake Assist is activated generating greater braking force than a conventional brake booster even with light pedal force. WARNING: The Brake Assist is only an aid to assist braking operation and is not a collision warning or avoidance device. It is the driver’s responsibility to stay alert, drive safely and be in control of the vehicle at all times. 5-66 ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM (ABS) (if equipped) WARNING: The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) is a sophisticated device, but it cannot prevent accidents resulting from careless or dangerous driving techniques. It can help maintain vehicle control during braking on slippery surfaces. Remember that stopping distances on slippery surfaces will be longer than on normal surfaces even with ABS. Stopping distances may also be longer on rough, gravel or snow covered roads, or if you are using tyre chains. Always maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you. Ultimately, the driver is responsible for safety. Tyre type and condition may also affect braking effectiveness. y When replacing tyres, install the specified size of tyres on all four wheels. y When installing a spare tyre, make sure that it is the proper size and type as specified on the tyre placard. (See Tyre placard" (P9-10).) y For detailed information, see" Tyres and wheels (P.8-30). The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) controls the brakes so the wheels do not lock during hard braking or when braking on slippery surfaces. The system detects the rotation speed at each wheel and varies the brake fluid pressure to prevent each wheel from locking and sliding. By preventing each wheel from locking, the system helps the driver maintain steering control and helps to minimize swerving and spinning on slippery surfaces. Using system Depress the brake pedal and hold it down. Depress the brake pedal with firm steady pressure, but do not pump the brakes. The ABS will operate to prevent the wheels from locking up. Steer the vehicle to avoid obstacles. WARNING: Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so may result in increased stopping distances. Self-test feature The ABS includes electronic sensors, electric pumps, hydraulic solenoids and a computer. The computer has a built-in diagnostic feature that tests the system each time you start the engine and move the vehicle at a low speed in forward or reverse. When the self-test occurs, you may hear a “clunk” noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal. This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction. If the computer senses a malfunction, it switches the ABS off and illuminates the ABS warning light on the instrument panel. The brake system then operates normally, but without anti-lock assistance. If the ABS warning light illuminates during the self-test or while driving, have the vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer. Normal operation The ABS operates at speeds above 5 to 10 km/h (3 to 6 MPH). The speed varies according to road conditions. When the ABS senses that one or more wheels are close to locking up, the actuator rapidly applies and releases hydraulic pressure. This Starting and driving 5-Chapter 5.indd 66 2021/01/13 02:16:47 PM VEHICLE SECURITY action is similar to pumping the brakes very quickly. You may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise from under the hood or feel a vibration from the actuator when it is operating. This is normal and indicates that the ABS is operating properly. However, the pulsation may indicate that road conditions are hazardous and extra care is required while driving. When the differential lock (if equipped) is engaged, the ABS warning light illuminates. This indicates that the anti-lock function is not fully operating. (See "Rear differential locking system" (P.5-22) for the rear differential lock function.) COLD WEATHER DRIVING When leaving your vehicle unoccupied: y Always take the key with you - even when leaving the vehicle in your own garage. y Close all windows completely and lock all doors. y Always park your vehicle where it can be seen. Park in a well lit area during the night. y If the security system is equipped, use it even for a short period. y Never leave children or pets in the vehicle unattended. y Never leave valuables inside the vehicle. Always take valuables with you. y Never leave the vehicle documents in the vehicle. y Never leave articles on a roof rack. Remove them from the rack and keep and lock them inside the vehicle. y WARNING: y Whatever the condition, drive with caution. Accelerate and decelerate with great care. If accelerating or decelerating too fast, the drive wheels will lose even more traction. y Allow more stopping distance in cold weather driving. Braking should be started sooner than on dry pavement. y Keep at a greater distance from the vehicle in front of you on slippery roads. y Wet ice (0°C, 32°F and freezing rain), very cold snow and ice can be slick and very difficult to drive on. The vehicle will have a lot less traction or grip under these conditions. Try to avoid driving on wet ice until the road is salted or sanded. y Watch for slippery spots (glaring ice). These may appear on an otherwise clear road in shaded areas. If a patch of ice is seen ahead, brake before reaching it. Try not to brake while actually on the ice, and avoid any sudden steering maneuvers. y Do not use cruise control on slippery roads. y Snow can trap dangerous exhaust gas under your vehicle. Keep snow clear of the exhaust pipe and from around your vehicle. Never leave the spare key in the vehicle. Starting and driving 5-Chapter 5.indd 67 5-67 2021/01/13 02:16:48 PM BATTERY to the chain manufacturer’s instructions. Use chain tensioners when recommended by the tyre chain manufacturer to ensure a tight fit. Loose end links of the tyre chains must be secured or removed to prevent the possibility of whipping action damage to the fenders or underbody. In addition, drive at a reduced speed, otherwise, your vehicle may be damaged and/or vehicle handling and performance may be adversely affected. If the battery is not fully charged during extremely cold weather conditions, the battery fluid may freeze and damage the battery. To maintain maximum efficiency, the battery should be checked regularly. For details, see "Battery: (P.8-18) of this manual. ENGINE COOLANT If the vehicle is to be left outside without antifreeze, drain the cooling system, including the engine block. Refill before operating the vehicle. For details, see "Changing engine coolant" (P.8-7) of this manual. SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT It is recommended that the following items be carried in the vehicle during the winter: y A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to remove ice and snow from the windows. If you have snow tyres installed on the front/rear wheels of your vehicle, they should be of the same size, loading range, construction and type (bias, bias-belted or radial) as the rear/front tyres. y A sturdy, flat board to be placed under the jack to give it firm support. y A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snowdrifts. 2. If the vehicle is to be operated in severe winter conditions, snow tyres should be installed on all four wheels. 3. For additional traction on icy roads, studded tyres may be used. However, some countries, provinces and states prohibit their use. Check local, state and provincial laws before installing studded tyres. When parking in the area where the outside temperature is below 0°C (32°F), do not apply the parking brake to prevent it from freezing. For safe parking: TYRE EQUIPMENT 1. Skid and traction capabilities of studded snow tyres, on wet or dry surfaces, may be poorer than that of non-studded snow tyres. 4. CORROSION PROTECTION Chemicals used for road surface deicing are extremely corrosive and will accelerate corrosion and the deterioration of underbody components such as the exhaust system, fuel and brake lines, brake cables, floor pan and fenders. In the winter, the underbody must be cleaned periodically. For additional information, see of this manual. For additional protection against rust and corrosion, which may be required in some areas, consult a NISSAN dealer. PARKING BRAKE y Place the shift lever in the “P” (Park) position (Automatic transmission model). y Place the shift lever in the “1” (1st) or “R” (Reverse) gear (Manual transmission model). y Securely block the wheels. Snow chains may be used if desired. Make sure they are the proper size for the tyres on your vehicle and are installed according 5-68 Starting and driving 5-Chapter 5.indd 68 2021/01/13 02:16:48 PM 6 In case of emergency Hazard indicator flasher switch ......................................................... 6-2 Flat tyre................................................................................................................. 6-2 Stopping vehicle ................................................................................... 6-2 Preparing tools ...................................................................................... 6-2 Removing the spare tyre................................................................ 6-3 Blocking wheels .................................................................................... 6-4 Removing tyre ........................................................................................ 6-4 Installing spare tyre ........................................................................... 6-6 Stowing damaged tyre and tools ........................................... 6-7 Jump starting .................................................................................................. 6-7 Push starting ................................................................................................. 6-10 If your vehicle overheats ...................................................................... 6-10 Towing your vehicle ................................................................................. 6-11 Towing precautions ........................................................................ 6-11 Towing recommended by NISSAN ....................................... 6-11 6-Chapter 6.indd 1 2020/12/07 09:46:00 AM HAZARD INDICATOR FLASHER SWITCH FLAT TYRE If you have a flat tyre, follow the instructions in this section. STOPPING VEHICLE WARNING: y Be sure to apply the parking brake firmly. y Be sure to move the shift lever to the “P” (Park) position (automatic transmission model). y The hazard indicator flasher switch operates regardless of the ignition switch position except when the battery is discharged. Be sure to move the shift lever to the “R” (Reverse) position (manual transmission model). y The hazard indicator flasher is used to warn other drivers when you have to stop or park under emergency conditions. Never change tyres when the vehicle is on a slope, ice or slippery area. This is hazardous. y When the hazard indicator flasher switch is pushed, all turn signal lights will flash. To turn off the hazard indicator flasher, push the hazard indicator flasher switch again. Never change tyres when the oncoming traffic is close to your vehicle. Call for professional road assistance. 1. Safely move the vehicle off the road away from traffic. 2. Turn on the hazard indicator flasher lights. 3. Park on a level surface. 4. Apply the parking brake. 5. Automatic transmission model: SIC2574 When an impact that could activate the supplemental air bags is detected, the hazard warning flasher lights blink automatically. If the hazard warning flasher switch is pushed, the hazard warning flashers will turn off. (if equipped) 6-2 Have all passengers get out from the vehicle and stand in a safe place, away from other traffic and clear of the vehicle. PREPARING TOOLS For Double Cab model The tool storage compartment is located under the rear seats. JVE0201X Move the shift lever to the “P” (Park) position. WARNING: Do not turn the hazard warning flasher switch to off until you can make sure that it is safe to do so. Also, the hazard flasher warning may not blink automatically depending on the force of impact. 8. Manual transmission model: Move the shift lever to the “R” (Reverse) position. 6. 7. Turn off the engine. Open the hood: y To warn other traffic. y To signal professional road assistance personnel that you need assistance. JVE0202X 1. Fold the rear seat up and remove tool storage compartment lids . 2. Remove the jack and necessary tools. In case of emergency 6-Chapter 6.indd 2 2020/12/07 09:46:00 AM For Single Cab model REMOVING THE SPARE TYRE of the tailgate (if equipped) or under the license plate. Pass the T-shaped end of the jack rod through the opening and direct it towards the spare tyre winch, located directly above the spare tyre. Seat the T-shaped end of the jack rod into the T-shaped opening of the spare tyre winch, and turn the jack rod counterclockwise to lower the spare tyre. Once the spare tyre is completely lowered , reach under the vehicle, remove the retainer chain, and carefully slide the tyre from under the rear of the vehicle. JVR0417X The tool storage compartment is located behind the front seat. 1. Pull the lever up passenger's seat. and recline the front 2. Remove the jack and necessary tools. SCE0514 Find the oval shaped opening under the middle SCE0982 In case of emergency 6-Chapter 6.indd 3 6-3 2020/12/07 09:46:00 AM REMOVING TYRE CAUTION: When storing the wheel, be sure to mount the wheel horizontally. Securing a wheel that is in a tilted position as illustrated may cause looseness and dropping of the wheel while driving. Lower the wheel on the ground again, and make sure that the hanging plate is properly set. Hang the wheel again and make sure that the wheel is held horizontally, then store the wheel. WARNING: y Be sure to read and follow the instructions in this section. y DO NOT GET UNDER A VEHICLE THAT IS SUPPORTED BY A JACK. y Never use a jack which was not provided with your vehicle. y The jack, which is provided with your vehicle, is designed only to lift your vehicle during a tyre change. y Never jack up the vehicle at a location other than the jack-up point that is specified. y Never lift the vehicle more than necessary. y Never use blocks on or under the jack. y Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on the jack. The vehicle may move suddenly, and this may cause an accident. y Never allow passengers to remain in the vehicle while the tyre is off the ground. y Be sure to read the caution label attached to the jack body before using. BLOCKING WHEELS MCE0001D WARNING: Be sure to block the appropriate wheel to prevent the vehicle from moving, which may cause personal injury. Removing the wheel cap (if equipped) SCE0139H Remove the center wheel cap as illustrated. Place suitable blocks at both the front and back of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tyre to prevent the vehicle from moving when it is jacked up. 6-4 In case of emergency 6-Chapter 6.indd 4 2020/12/07 09:46:00 AM Jacking up vehicle For leaf suspension models JVE0212X In case of emergency 6-Chapter 6.indd 5 6-5 2020/12/07 09:46:00 AM 3. Install the assembled jack rod into the jack as shown. 4. Carefully raise the vehicle until the clearance between the tyre and ground is achieved. 5. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the jack lever and rod with both hands and turn the jack lever. Removing tyre 1. Remove the wheel nuts. 2. Remove the damaged tyre. CAUTION: The tyre is heavy. Be sure that your feet are clear from the tyre and use gloves as necessary to avoid injury. INSTALLING SPARE TYRE For coil suspension models WAG0092X For front wheel For rear wheel 1. JVE0208X Place the jack directly under the jack-up points or as illustrated. WARNING: The jack should be placed on firm level ground. 2. y Loosen each wheel nut, counterclockwise, one or two turns with the wheel nut wrench. Do not remove the wheel nuts until the tyre is off the ground. 6-6 NCE130 Never use wheel nuts which are not provided with your vehicle. Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened wheel nuts may cause the wheel to become loose or come off. This could cause an accident. In case of emergency 6-Chapter 6.indd 6 2020/12/07 09:46:01 AM JUMP STARTING Never use oil or grease on the wheel studs or nuts. This may cause the wheel nuts to become loose. STOWING DAMAGED TYRE AND TOOLS y The temporary-use spare tyre (if equipped) is designed for emergency use only. y 1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface between the wheel and hub. Be sure that the tyre, jack and tools are properly stored after use. Such items can become dangerous projectiles in an accident or sudden stop. y 2. Carefully put the spare tyre on and tighten the wheel nuts with your fingers. Check that all the wheel nuts contact the wheel surface horizontally. The temporary-use spare tyre (if equipped) is designed for emergency use only. y 3. Tighten the wheel nuts alternately and evenly in the sequence illustrated ( - ), more than 2 times with the wheel nut wrench, until they are tight. 4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tyre touches the ground. 5. Tighten the wheel nuts securely, with the wheel nut wrench, in the sequence illustrated. 6. Lower the vehicle completely. Tighten the wheel nuts to the specified torque with a torque wrench as soon as possible. Wheel nut tightening torque: 133 N·m (13.6 kg-m, 98 ft-lb) The wheel nuts must be kept tightened to specification at all times. It is recommended that the wheel nuts be tightened to specification at each lubrication interval. WARNING: Securely store the damaged tyre, jack and tools in the storage area in the reverse order of removal. (See "Preparing tools" (P.6-2) and "Removing the spare tyre" (P.6-3).) WARNING: y Incorrect jump starting can lead to a battery explosion. The battery explosion may result in severe injury or death. It may also result in damage to the vehicle. Be sure to follow the instructions in this section. y Explosive hydrogen gas is always present in the vicinity of the battery. Keep all sparks and flames away from the battery. y Always wear suitable eye protection and remove rings, bracelets, and any other jewelry whenever working on or near a battery. y Never lean over the battery while jump starting. y Never allow battery fluid to come into contact with eyes, skin, clothes or the vehicle’s painted surfaces. Battery fluid is a corrosive sulfuric acid which can cause severe burns. If the fluid comes into contact with anything, immediately flush the contacted area with plenty of water. y Keep the battery out of the reach of children. y The booster battery must be rated at 12 volts. Use of an incorrectly rated battery will damage your vehicle. y Never attempt to jump start a frozen battery. It could explode and cause serious injury. WARNING: Retighten the wheel nuts when the vehicle has been driven for 1,000 km (600 miles) (also in case of a flat tyre, etc.). In case of emergency 6-Chapter 6.indd 7 6-7 2020/12/07 09:46:01 AM QR25DE engine models 6-8 JVE0232X In case of emergency 6-Chapter 6.indd 8 2020/12/07 09:46:01 AM Move the shift lever to the “N” (Neutral) position. 4. Switch off all unnecessary electrical systems (headlights, heater, air conditioner, etc.). 5. Place the ignition switch in the “OFF” position. 6. Remove the vent caps, if equipped, on the battery. 7. Cover the battery with a firmly wrung out moist cloth to reduce the hazard of an explosion. 8. Connect the jumper cables in the sequence as illustrated ( , , , ). y Always connect positive to positive and negative to body ground, NOT to the battery’s negative . y Be sure that the jumper cables do not touch moving parts in the engine compartment. y Be sure that the jumper cable’s clamps do not contact any other metal. 9. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and let it run for a few minutes. CAUTION: YD25DDTi engine models 1. If the booster battery is in another vehicle position the two vehicles and to bring the batteries into close proximity to each other. CAUTION: y Do not allow the two vehicles to touch. y If the battery of vehicle equipped with the Intelligent Key system is discharged, the steering wheel will lock and cannot be turned with the ignition switch in JVE0235X the “OFF” position. Supply power using jumper cables before pushing the ignition switch to any position other than the “OFF” position and disengaging the steering lock. 2. Apply the parking brake. 3. Automatic transmission (AT) model: 10. Depress the accelerator pedal of the booster vehicle at about 2,000 rpm. 11. Start the engine of the jumped vehicle the normal manner. Move the shift lever to the “P” (Park) position. Manual transmission (MT) model: In case of emergency 6-Chapter 6.indd 9 in 6-9 2020/12/07 09:46:02 AM PUSH STARTING CAUTION: Never keep the starter motor engaged for more than 10 seconds. If the engine does not start right away, place the ignition switch in the “LOCK” position and wait at least 10 seconds before trying again. Do not attempt to start the engine by pushing the vehicle. CAUTION: y Automatic Transmission (AT) model cannot be started by pushing. Attempting to do so may cause damage to the transmission. 12. After the engine is started, carefully disconnect the jumper cables in the opposite sequence from that illustrated ( , , ). y 13. Remove and dispose of the cloth properly as it may be contaminated with corrosive acid. Diesel Oxidation Catalyst equipped model should not be started by pushing. Attempting to do so may cause damage to the catalyst. y Never try to start the engine by towing. When the engine starts, the forward surge could cause the vehicle to collide with the towing vehicle. 14. Replace the vent caps, if removed. IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS WARNING: y Never continue driving if your vehicle overheats. Doing so could cause engine damage and/or a vehicle fire. y Never open the hood if steam is coming out. y Never remove the radiator or coolant reservoir cap while the engine is hot. If the radiator or coolant reservoir cap is removed when the engine is hot, pressurized hot water will spurt out and possibly cause burning, scalding or serious injury. y If steam or coolant is coming from the engine, stand clear of the vehicle to prevent getting scalded. y The engine cooling fan can start at any time when the coolant temperature exceeds preset degrees. y Be careful not to allow your hands, hair, jewelry or clothing to come into contact with, or to get caught in the cooling fan or drive belts. If your vehicle is overheating, or if you feel a lack of engine power, detect unusual noise, etc., take the following steps: 1. Safely move the vehicle off the road away from traffic. 2. Turn on the hazard indicator flashers. 3. Apply the parking brake. 4. Automatic transmission model: Move the shift lever to the “P” (Park) position. 6-10 In case of emergency 6-Chapter 6.indd 10 2020/12/07 09:46:02 AM TOWING YOUR VEHICLE 5. Open all the windows. 6. Turn off the air conditioner. Move the temperature control to maximum hot and the fan control to high speed. When towing your vehicle, local regulations for towing must be followed. Incorrect towing equipment could damage your vehicle. To assure proper towing and to prevent accidental damage to your vehicle, NISSAN recommends that you have professional road assistance personnel tow your vehicle. It is advisable to have the professional road assistant carefully read the following precautions. 7. Get out from the vehicle. 8. Visually inspect and listen for steam or coolant escaping from the radiator before opening the hood. Wait until no steam or coolant can be seen before proceeding. TOWING PRECAUTIONS 9. Open the engine hood. Manual transmission model: Move the shift lever to the “N” (Neutral) position. DO NOT STOP THE ENGINE. y Be sure that the transmission, steering system and powertrain are in working condition before towing. If any units are damaged, the vehicle must be towed using a dolly or flatbed tow truck. (Two- Wheel Drive (2WD) model) 11. Visually inspect the radiator and radiator hoses for leakage. If the cooling fan is not running or the coolant is leaking, stop the engine. y NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be towed with the driving wheels off the ground. (Two- Wheel Drive (2WD) model) y Always attach safety chains before towing. 12. After the engine cools down, check the coolant level in the reservoir with the engine running. Do not open the radiator or coolant reservoir cap. y Never tow Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) model with any of the wheels on the ground as this may cause serious and expensive damage to the drivetrain. 10. Visually inspect if the cooling fan is running. TOWING RECOMMENDED BY NISSAN Towing Two-Wheel Drive (2WD) models 13. Add coolant to the reservoir if necessary. Have your vehicle inspected/repaired at a NISSAN dealer. SCE0185 Front wheels on the ground: 1. Place the ignition switch in the “ON” position and turn all accessories off. 2. Secure the steering wheel in a straight ahead position with rope or similar device. 3. Move the shift lever to the “N” (Neutral) position. In case of emergency 6-Chapter 6.indd 11 6-11 2020/12/07 09:46:02 AM 4. Release the parking brake. 5. Attach safety chains before towing. Rear wheels on the ground: NISSAN recommends that towing dollies be used under the rear wheels when towing your vehicle or the vehicle be placed on a flatbed tow truck as illustrated. CAUTION: Never tow Automatic Transmission (AT) model with the rear wheels on the ground. Doing so will cause serious and expensive damage to the transmission. CAUTION: Never tow Automatic Transmission (AT) model with all four wheels on the ground. Doing so will cause serious and expensive damage to the drivetrain. Manual Transmission (MT) model: If you have to tow a MT vehicle with all four wheels on the ground, perform the following procedures. CAUTION: y Never tow a Manual Transmission (MT) model backward with all four wheels on the ground. y Observe the following restricted towing speeds and distances. Manual Transmission (MT) model: If you have to tow a MT vehicle with rear wheel on the ground, perform the following procedures. — Speed: Below 50 km/h (30 MPH) CAUTION: Observe the following restricted towing speeds and distances. y Speed: Below 50 km/h (30 MPH) y Distance: Less than 65 km (40 miles) 1. Place the ignition switch in the “ON” position and turn all accessories off. 2. Move the shift lever to the “N” (Neutral) position. 3. Release the parking brake. 4. Attach safety chains whenever towing. Towing Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) models — Distance: Less than 65 km (40 miles) 1. Place the ignition switch in the “ON” position and turn all accessories off. 2. Move the shift lever to the “N” (Neutral) position. 3. Release the parking brake. ACE0705 All four wheels on the ground: NISSAN recommends that the vehicle be placed on a flatbed tow truck as illustrated. 6-12 In case of emergency 6-Chapter 6.indd 12 2020/12/07 09:46:02 AM Freeing trapped vehicle y The towing hook is under tremendous stress when used to free a trapped vehicle. Always pull the pulling device straight out from the vehicle. Never pull on the towing hook at an angle. CAUTION: In order to not break the towing line, tension it slowly. Right-Hand Drive (RHD) model WAG0090X The layout illustrated is for the Right-Hand Drive (RHD) model. On the Left-Hand Drive (LHD) model, the towing hook is located on the opposite side. WARNING: y Never allow anyone to stand near the towing line during the pulling operation. y Never spin the tyres at high speed. This could cause them to explode and result in serious injury. Parts of the vehicle could also overheat and be damaged. JVE0209X NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be towed with all wheels off the ground as illustrated or place the vehicle on a flatbed truck. CAUTION: Never tow 4WD models with any of the wheels on the ground. Doing so will cause serious and expensive damage to the drivetrain. In the event that your vehicle’s tyres become trapped in sand, snow, or mud, and the vehicle is unable to free itself without being pulled, use the towing hook. y Use the towing hook only. Do not attach the pulling device to any other part of the vehicle body. Otherwise, the vehicle body may be damaged. y Use the towing hook to free a vehicle only. Never tow a vehicle using only the towing hook. In case of emergency 6-Chapter 6.indd 13 6-13 2020/12/07 09:46:02 AM MEMO 6-14 Illustrated table of contents 6-Chapter 6.indd 14 2020/12/07 09:46:02 AM 7 Appearance and care Cleaning exterior ........................................................................................... Washing ...................................................................................................... Removing spots .................................................................................... Waxing.......................................................................................................... Glass .............................................................................................................. Underbody ................................................................................................ Wheels .......................................................................................................... Aluminum alloy wheels ................................................................... Side step boards (if equipped) ................................................... Chrome parts ......................................................................................... Cleaning interior ............................................................................................ Air fresheners ......................................................................................... Floor mats ................................................................................................. Glass .............................................................................................................. Seat belts ................................................................................................... Corrosion protection .................................................................................. Most common factors contributing to vehicle corrosion .................................................................................................... Environmental factors influence the rate of corrosion .................................................................................................... To protect your vehicle from corrosion .............................. 7-Chapter 7.indd 1 7-2 7-2 7-2 7-2 7-3 7-3 7-3 7-3 7-3 7-3 7-4 7-4 7-4 7-4 7-5 7-5 7-5 7-5 7-5 2020/12/07 09:47:38 AM CLEANING EXTERIOR In order to maintain the appearance of your vehicle, it is important to take proper care of it. Whenever possible, park your vehicle inside a garage or in a covered area to minimize the chances of damaging the paint surface of your vehicle. When it is necessary to park outside, park in a shady area or protect the vehicle with a body cover. Be careful not to scratch the paint surface when putting on or removing the body cover. WASHING In the following instances, wash your vehicle as soon as possible to protect the paint surface: y After a rainfall, which may cause the paint surface damage from acid rain. y After driving on coastal roads, which may cause rusting from the sea breeze. y When contaminants such as soot, bird droppings, tree sap, metal particles or bugs get on the paint surface. y Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight or while the vehicle body is hot, as the paint surface may become water-spotted. y Avoid using tight-napped or rough cloths, such as washing mitts. Care must be taken when removing caked-on dirt or other foreign substances so the paint surface is not scratched or damaged. y Lock all doors before going through automatic car wash. Locking doors helps prevent fuel-filler lid from opening and becoming damaged. y For models with decorative observe the following: sticker, — Wash dirt off the vehicle with a wet sponge and plenty of water. Then wipe the vehicle gently using a soft cloth. — Do not apply direct water pressure, such as high-pressure sprayer, on the vehicle body around the sticker. This may cause the sticker edges to peel away or come off from the vehicle. wheel wells to loosen the dirt and/or wash away road salt. REMOVING SPOTS Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust, insects, and tree sap as quickly as possible from the paint surface to avoid lasting damage or staining. Special cleaning products are available at a NISSAN dealer or any automotive accessory store. WAXING Regular waxing protects the paint surface and helps maintain a new vehicle appearance. After waxing, polishing is recommended to remove built-up residue and to avoid a weathered appearance. A NISSAN dealer can assist you in choosing the appropriate waxing products. CAUTION: y Wash your vehicle thoroughly and completely before applying wax to the paint surface. y When dust or mud builds up on the paint surface. 3. Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of clean water. y 1. Wash the vehicle surface with a wet sponge and plenty of water. 4. Use a dampened chamois to dry the paint surface and avoid leaving water spots. Always follow the manufacturer’s instructions supplied with the wax. y 2. Clean the vehicle surface gently and thoroughly using a mild soap, a special vehicle soap or a general purpose dishwashing liquid mixed with clean, lukewarm (never hot) water. When washing the vehicle, take care of the following: Do not use a wax containing any abrasives, cutting compounds or cleaners that may damage the vehicle finish. CAUTION: y Do not wash the vehicle with strong household soap, strong chemical detergents, gasoline or solvents. 7-2 y Inside flanges, joints and folds on the doors, hatches and hood are particularly vulnerable to the effects of road salt. Therefore, these areas must be cleaned regularly. y Be sure that the drain holes in the lower edge of the doors are not clogged. y Spray water to the underbody and in the Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on a base coat/clear coat paint finish may dull the finish or leave swirl marks. Appearance and care 7-Chapter 7.indd 2 2020/12/07 09:47:38 AM GLASS ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS CHROME PARTS Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust film from the glass surfaces. It is normal for glass to become coated with a film after the vehicle is parked in the hot sun. Glass cleaner and a soft cloth will easily remove this film. Wash the wheels regularly with a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution, especially during winter in areas where road salt is used. The salt residue from road salt could discolor the wheels if it is not washed off regularly. Clean all chrome parts regularly with a nonabrasive chrome polish to maintain the finish. UNDERBODY In areas where road salt is used in the winter, it is necessary to clean the vehicle’s underbody regularly in order to prevent dirt and salt from building up and causing the acceleration of corrosion on the underbody and suspension. Before the winter and again in the spring, the underseal must be checked and, if necessary, re-treated. WHEELS y Wash the wheels when washing the vehicle to maintain their appearance. y Clean the inner side of the wheels when the wheel is changed or the underside of the vehicle is washed. y Do not use abrasive cleaners when washing the wheels. y Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents or corrosion. This may cause loss of pressure or damage the tyre bead. y NISSAN recommends that the road wheels be waxed to protect against road salt in areas where it is used during winter. CAUTION: Follow the directions below to avoid staining or discoloring the wheels: y Do not use a cleaner that uses strong acid or alkali contents to clean the wheels. y Do not apply wheel cleaners to the wheels when they are hot. The wheel temperature should be the same as ambient temperature. y Rinse the wheel to completely remove the cleaner within 15 minutes after the cleaner is applied. SIDE STEP BOARDS (if equipped) CAUTION: When cleaning the side step boards, follow the instruction below: y Do not use a cleaner that uses strong acid or alkali contents to clean the side step boards. Using strong acid or alkali contents may damage the side step board surface. y Rinse the side step boards to completely remove the cleaner within 15 minutes after the cleaner is applied. Appearance and care 7-Chapter 7.indd 3 7-3 2020/12/07 09:47:38 AM CLEANING INTERIOR Occasionally remove loose dust from the interior trim, plastic parts and seats using a vacuum cleaner or soft bristled brush. Wipe the vinyl and leather surfaces with a clean, soft cloth dampened in mild soap solution, then wipe clean with a dry, soft cloth. AIR FRESHENERS y Hanging-type air fresheners can cause permanent discoloration when they contact vehicle interior surfaces. Place the air freshener in a location that allows it to hang free and not contact an interior surface. y Liquid-type air fresheners typically clip on the vents. These products can cause immediate damage and discoloration when spilled on interior surfaces. Regular care and cleaning is required in order to maintain the appearance of the leather. Before using any fabric protector, read the manufacturer’s recommendations. Some fabric protectors contain chemicals that may stain or bleach the seat material. Use a soft cloth dampened only with water to clean the meter and gauge lens covers. CAUTION: y Never use benzine, thinner or any similar material. y Small dirt particles can be abrasive and damaging to leather surfaces and should be removed promptly. Do not use saddle soap, car waxes, polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents or ammoniabased cleaners as they damage the leather natural finish. y Never use fabric protectors unless recommended by the manufacturer. y Do not use glass or plastic cleaner on meter or gauge lens covers. It may damage the lens covers. 7-4 Appearance and care 7-Chapter 7.indd 4 Floor mat positioning aid Most air fresheners use a solvent that could affect the vehicle interior. If you use an air freshener, take the following precautions: Carefully read and follow the manufacturer’s instructions before using air fresheners. FLOOR MATS The use of genuine NISSAN floor mats (if equipped) can extend the life of your vehicle carpet and make it easier to clean the interior. Regardless of what mats are used, be sure they are fitted for your vehicle and are properly positioned in the foot well to prevent interference with pedal operation. Mats should be maintained with regular cleaning and replaced if they become excessively worn. Example JVA0022X This vehicle includes floor mat brackets to act as a floor mat positioning aid. NISSAN floor mats have been specially designed for your vehicle model. Position the mat by placing the floor mat bracket hook through the floor mat grommet hole while centering the mat in the foot area. Periodically check that the mats are properly positioned. GLASS Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust film from the glass surfaces. It is normal for glass to become coated with a film after the vehicle is parked in the hot sun. Glass cleaner and a soft cloth will easily remove this film. CAUTION: When cleaning the inside of the windows, do not use sharp-edged tools, abrasive cleaners or chlorine-based disinfectant cleaners. They could damage the electrical conductors, such as radio antenna elements or rear window defogger elements. 2020/12/07 09:47:38 AM CORROSION PROTECTION SEAT BELTS WARNING: y Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in the retractor. y Never use bleach, dye or chemical solvents to clean the seat belts, since these materials may severely weaken the seat belt webbing. The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping them with a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution. Allow the belts to dry completely in the shade before using them. (See "Seat belts" (P.1-8).) MOST COMMON FACTORS CONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLE CORROSION y The accumulation of moisture-retaining dirt and debris in body panel sections, cavities, and other areas. y Damage to the paint surface and other protective coatings caused by gravel and stone chips or minor traffic accidents. ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS INFLUENCE THE RATE OF CORROSION TO PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE FROM CORROSION y Wash and wax your vehicle often to keep the vehicle clean. y Always check for minor damage to the paint surface and if any exists, repair it as soon as possible. y Keep the drain holes in the lower edge of the doors open to avoid water accumulation. y Check the vehicle underbody for accumulation of sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with water as soon as possible. y Never remove dirt, sand or other debris from the passenger compartment by washing it out with a hose. Remove dirt with a vacuum cleaner. y Never allow water or other liquids to come in contact with electronic components inside the vehicle as this may damage them. Moisture The accumulation of sand, dirt and water on the inside floor of the vehicle can accelerate corrosion. Wet floor carpet/floor mats will not dry completely inside the vehicle. They should be removed and completely dried to avoid floor panel corrosion. Relative humidity Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of high relative humidity. Temperature High temperatures accelerate the rate of corrosion to those parts which are not well ventilated. Corrosion will also be accelerated in areas where the temperatures stay above freezing. Air pollution Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in the air in coastal areas, or heavy road salt use accelerates the corrosion process. Road salt also accelerates the disintegration of paint surfaces. CAUTION: Chemicals used for road surface deicing are extremely corrosive. They accelerate corrosion and deterioration of underbody components such as the exhaust system, fuel and brake lines, brake cables, floor pan and fenders. In the winter, the underbody must be cleaned periodically. For additional protection against rust and corrosion, which may be required in some areas, consult a NISSAN dealer. Appearance and care 7-Chapter 7.indd 5 7-5 2020/12/07 09:47:38 AM MEMO 7-6 Illustrated table of contents 7-Chapter 7.indd 6 2020/12/07 09:47:38 AM 8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself Maintenance requirements ................................................................... 8-2 Scheduled maintenance ................................................................ 8-2 General maintenance ....................................................................... 8-2 Where to go for service ................................................................... 8-2 General maintenance ................................................................................ 8-2 Explanation of general maintenance items .................... 8-2 Maintenance precautions ............................................................. 8-4 Engine compartment check locations ......................................... 8-5 YD25DDTi engine ................................................................................ 8-5 QR25DE engine .................................................................................... 8-6 Engine cooling system .............................................................................. 8-6 Checking engine coolant level .................................................. 8-7 Changing engine coolant.............................................................. 8-7 Engine oil ............................................................................................................. 8-8 Checking engine oil level ............................................................... 8-8 Changing engine oil and oil filter............................................. 8-8 Protect environment...................................................................... 8-10 Fuel filter (YD25DDTi engine model) ........................................... 8-11 Draining water .................................................................................... 8-11 Bleeding the fuel system ............................................................ 8-11 Drive belt........................................................................................................... 8-11 Spark plugs (QR25DE engine model) ......................................... 8-12 Iridium-tipped spark plugs ........................................................ 8-12 Brakes ................................................................................................................. 8-12 Checking parking brake .............................................................. 8-12 Checking foot brake ....................................................................... 8-13 Brake booster ...................................................................................... 8-13 Brake fluid ........................................................................................................ 8-14 Clutch fluid (if equipped)....................................................................... 8-14 Automatic transmission fluid (ATF) (if equipped) ............... 8-15 8-Chapter 8.indd 1 7-speed Automatic Transmission (AT) model............. 8-15 Power steering fluid ................................................................................. 8-15 Air cleaner filter............................................................................................ 8-16 Wiper blades .................................................................................................. 8-16 Windshield wiper blades ............................................................ 8-16 Window washer fluid ............................................................................... 8-17 Battery ............................................................................................................... 8-18 Vehicle battery ................................................................................... 8-18 Remote controller battery (if equipped).......................... 8-19 Intelligent Key battery (if equipped) ................................... 8-20 Variable voltage control system (if equipped) ..................... 8-21 Fuses.................................................................................................................... 8-21 Engine compartment .................................................................... 8-21 Passenger compartment ........................................................... 8-22 Lights................................................................................................................... 8-23 Headlights .............................................................................................. 8-23 Exterior lights ...................................................................................... 8-25 Interior lights........................................................................................ 8-25 Light locations .................................................................................... 8-26 Tyres and wheels........................................................................................ 8-30 Tyre inflation pressure .................................................................. 8-30 Types of tyres ...................................................................................... 8-30 Tyre chains ............................................................................................ 8-30 Tyre rotation ......................................................................................... 8-31 Tyre wear and damage ................................................................ 8-31 Tyre age ................................................................................................... 8-32 Changing tyres and wheels ...................................................... 8-32 Wheel balance ..................................................................................... 8-32 Spare tyre ............................................................................................... 8-32 2021/03/02 03:34:36 PM MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS Some day-to-day and regular maintenance is essential to maintain your vehicle's good mechanical condition, as well as its emission and engine performance. It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure that the specified maintenance, as well as general maintenance, is performed. As the vehicle owner, you are the only one who can ensure that your vehicle receives the proper maintenance care. SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE For your convenience, the required scheduled maintenance items are described and listed in a separate Warranty Information and Maintenance booklet. You must refer to that booklet to ensure that necessary maintenance is performed on your vehicle at regular intervals. GENERAL MAINTENANCE General maintenance includes those items which should be checked during normal day-today operation of the vehicle. They are essential if your vehicle is to continue to operate properly. It is your responsibility to perform these procedures regularly as prescribed. Performing general maintenance checks requires minimal mechanical skill and only a few general automotive tools. These checks or inspections can be done by yourself, a qualified technician, or if you prefer, your NISSAN dealer. 8-2 GENERAL MAINTENANCE WHERE TO GO FOR SERVICE If maintenance service is required or your vehicle appears to malfunction, have the systems checked and tuned by an authorized NISSAN dealer. During normal day-to-day operation of the vehicle, general maintenance should be performed regularly as prescribed in this section. If you detect any unusual sounds, vibrations or smells, be sure to check for the cause or have a NISSAN dealer do it promptly. In addition, you should notify a NISSAN dealer if you think that repairs are required. When performing any checks or maintenance work, closely observe "Maintenance precautions" (P.8-4). EXPLANATION OF GENERAL MAINTENANCE ITEMS Additional information on the following items with “*” is found later in this section. Outside vehicle The maintenance items listed here should be performed from time to time, unless otherwise specified. Doors and hood: Check that all doors and the hood operate smoothly as well as the back door, trunk lid and hatch. Also make sure that all latches lock securely. Lubricate if necessary. Make sure that the secondary latch keeps the hood from opening when the primary latch is released. When driving in areas using road salt or other corrosive materials, check lubrication frequently. Lights*: Clean the headlights on a regular basis. Make sure that the headlights, stop lights, tail lights, turn signal lights, and other lights are all operating properly and installed securely. Also check the aim of the headlights. Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-Chapter 8.indd 2 2021/03/02 03:34:36 PM Tyres*: Windshield: Seat belts: Check the pressure with a gauge often and always prior to long distance trips. Adjust the pressure in all tyres, including the spare, to the pressure specified. Check carefully for damage, cuts or excessive wear. Clean the windshield on a regular basis. Check the windshield at least every six months for cracks or other damage. Repair as necessary. Check that all parts of the seat belt system (for example, buckles, anchors, adjusters and retractors) operate properly and smoothly, and are installed securely. Check the belt webbing for cuts, fraying, wear or damage. Tyre rotation*: In the case that Two-Wheel Drive (2WD) and front and rear tyres are same size; tyres should be rotated every 10,000 km (6,000 miles). Tyres marked with directional indicators can only be rotated between front and rear. Make sure that the directional indicators point in the direction of wheel rotation after the tyre rotation is completed. In the case that Four-Wheel Drive and All Wheel Drive (4WD/AWD) and front and rear tyres are same size; tyres should be rotated every 5,000 km (3,000 miles). Tyres marked with directional indicators can only be rotated between front and rear. Make sure that the directional indicators point in the direction of wheel rotation after the tyre rotation is completed. In the case that front tyres are different size from rear tyres; tyres cannot be rotated. The timing for tyre rotation may vary according to your driving habits and the road surface conditions. Wheel alignment and balance: If the vehicle should pull to either side while driving on a straight and level road, or if you detect uneven or abnormal tyre wear, there may be a need for wheel alignment. If the steering wheel or seat vibrates at normal highway speeds, wheel balancing may be needed. Wiper blades*: Check for cracks or wear if not functioning correctly. Replace as necessary. Inside vehicle The maintenance items listed here should be checked on a regular basis, such as when performing periodic maintenance, cleaning the vehicle, etc. Accelerator pedal: Check the pedal for smooth operation and make sure that the pedal does not catch or require uneven effort. Keep the floor mats away from the pedal. Steering wheel: Check for changes in the steering condition, such as excessive play, hard steering or strange noises. Warning lights and chimes: Make sure that all warning lights and chimes are operating properly. Windshield defogger: Check that the air comes out of the defogger outlets properly and in good quantity when operating the heater or air conditioner. Brake pedal*: Windshield wiper and washer*: Check the pedal for smooth operation and make sure that it is the proper distance from the floor mat when depressed fully. Check the brake booster function. Be sure to keep the floor mats away from the pedal. Check that the wipers and washer operate properly and that the wipers do not streak. Parking brake*: Check the parking brake operation regularly. Check that the lever (if so equipped) or the pedal (if so equipped) has the proper travel. Also make sure that the vehicle is held securely on a fairly steep hill when only the parking brake is applied. Under hood and vehicle The maintenance items listed here should be checked periodically (for example, each time you check the engine oil or refuel). Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-Chapter 8.indd 3 8-3 2021/03/02 03:34:37 PM Battery (except for maintenance free batteries)*: Check the fluid level in each cell. It should be between the UPPER and LOWER lines. Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under severe conditions require frequent checks of the battery fluid level. Brake (and clutch) fluid level(s)*: For Manual Transmission (MT) model; make sure that the brake and clutch fluid levels are between the MAX and MIN lines on the reservoirs. Except for Manual Transmission (MT) model; make sure that the brake fluid level is between the MAX and MIN lines on the reservoir. Engine coolant level*: Check the coolant level when the engine is cold. Make sure that the coolant level is between the MAX and MIN lines on the reservoir. Power steering fluid level and lines*: Check the level when the fluid is cold with the engine off. Check the lines for proper attachment, leaks, cracks, etc. Windshield washer fluid*: Check that there is adequate fluid in the reservoir. MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS When performing any inspection or maintenance work on your vehicle, always take care to prevent serious accidental injury to yourself or damage to the vehicle. The following are general precautions which should be closely observed. Make sure that drive belt(s) is not frayed, worn, cracked or oily. Check the level after parking the vehicle (on a level ground) and turning off the engine. 8-4 Park the vehicle on a level surface, apply the parking brake securely and block the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving. Move the shift lever to the “P” (Park) position (AT model) or the shift lever to the “N” (Neutral) position (MT model). y Be sure the ignition switch is in the “LOCK” position when performing any parts replacement or repairs. y Do not work under the hood while the engine is hot. Always turn off the engine and wait until it cools down. y If you must work with the engine running, keep your hands, clothing, hair and tools away from moving fans, belts and any other moving parts. y It is advisable to secure or remove any loose clothing and any jewelry, such as rings, watches, etc. before working on Fluid leaks: Check under the vehicle for fuel, oil, water or other fluid leaks after the vehicle has been parked for a while. Water dripping from the air conditioner after use is normal. If you should notice any leaks or if fuel fumes are evident, check for cause and have it corrected immediately. If you must run the engine in an enclosed space such as a garage, be sure there is proper ventilation for exhaust gases to escape. y Never get under the vehicle while it is supported by a jack. y Keep smoking materials, flame and sparks away from fuel and the battery. y Never connect or disconnect either the battery or any transistorized component connector while the ignition switch is in the “ON” position. y Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic engine cooling fan. It may come on at any time without warning, even if the ignition switch is in the “OFF” position and the engine is not running. To avoid injury, always disconnect the negative battery cable before working near the fan. y Always wear eye protection whenever you work on your vehicle. y Never leave the engine or the transmission related component harness connector disconnected while the ignition switch is in the “ON” position. y Avoid direct contact with used engine oil and coolant. Improperly disposed engine oil, engine coolant, and/or other vehicle fluids can hurt the environment. Always conform to local regulations for disposal of vehicle fluids. WARNING: y Engine drive belt(s)*: Engine oil level*: your vehicle. y This “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section provides instructions regarding only those items which are relatively easy for an owner to Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-Chapter 8.indd 4 2021/03/02 03:34:37 PM ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK LOCATIONS perform. You should be aware that incomplete or improper servicing may result in operating difficulties or excessive emissions, and could affect your warranty coverage. If in doubt about any servicing, have it done by a NISSAN dealer. YD25DDTI ENGINE WAA0238X 1. Window washer fluid reservoir 9. 2. Brake and clutch*1 fluid reservoir*2 10. Engine drive belt location Power steering fluid reservoir 3. Engine oil dipstick 11. Radiator filler cap 4. Fuel filter 12. Engine coolant reservoir 5. Engine oil filler cap *1: 6. Fuse/fusible link holder 7. Battery 8. Air cleaner *2: The layout illustrated is for the Right-Hand Drive (RHD) model. On the Left-Hand Drive (LHD) model, brake (and clutch) fluid reservoir is located on the opposite side. For Manual Transmission (MT) model Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-Chapter 8.indd 5 8-5 2021/03/02 03:34:37 PM ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM QR25DE ENGINE WARNING: y Never remove the radiator or coolant reservoir cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could be caused by highpressure fluid escaping from the radiator. Wait until the engine and radiator cool down. y Engine coolant is poisonous and should be stored carefully in marked containers out of the reach of children. The engine cooling system is filled at the factory with a high-quality, year-round, anti-freeze coolant solution. The anti-freeze solution contains rust and corrosion inhibitors, therefore additional cooling system additives are not necessary. CAUTION: JVC0772X 1. Window washer fluid reservoir 9. 2. Brake and clutch* fluid reservoir 10. Radiator filler cap 3. Engine oil filler cap 11. Power steering fluid reservoir 4. Engine oil dipstick *: 5. Fuse/fusible link holder 6. Battery 7. Air cleaner 8. Engine coolant reservoir 8-6 Engine drive belt location y Never use any cooling system additives such as radiator sealer. Additives may clog the cooling system and cause damage to the engine, transmission and/or cooling system. y When adding or replacing coolant, be sure to use only Genuine NISSAN Engine Coolant or equivalent in its quality with the proper mixture ratio. Examples of the mixture ratio of coolant and water are shown in the following table: For Manual Transmission (MT) model Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-Chapter 8.indd 6 2021/03/02 03:34:37 PM Outside temperature Engine coolant Demineralized or distilled down to (concentrated) water °C °F −15 5 30% 70% −35 −30 50% 50% CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL If the cooling system frequently requires coolant, have it checked by a NISSAN dealer. CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT Contact a NISSAN dealer if replacement is required. Use Genuine NISSAN Engine Coolant or equivalent in its quality. Genuine NISSAN Engine Coolant is a premixed (mixture ratio 50%) type coolant. Major engine cooling system repair should be performed by a NISSAN dealer. The service procedures can be found in the appropriate NISSAN Service Manual. The use of other types of coolant solutions may damage the engine cooling system. Improper servicing can result in reduced heater performance and engine overheating. The radiator is equipped with a pressure cap. To prevent engine damage, use only a Genuine NISSAN radiator cap or its equivalent when replacement is required. YD25DDTi engine QR25DE engine JVM0446X JVM0529X Check the coolant level in the reservoir when the engine is cold. If the coolant level is below the MIN level , add coolant up to the MAX level . If the reservoir is empty, check the coolant level in the radiator when the engine is cold. If there is insufficient coolant in the radiator, fill the radiator with coolant up to the filler opening and also add it to the reservoir up to the MAX level . Tighten the cap securely after adding engine coolant. WARNING: y To avoid being scalded, never change the coolant when the engine is hot. y Never remove the radiator or coolant reservoir cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator. y Avoid direct skin contact with used coolant. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible. y Keep coolant out of reach of children and pets. Engine coolant must be disposed of properly. Check your local regulations. Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-Chapter 8.indd 7 8-7 2021/03/02 03:34:38 PM ENGINE OIL CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL 5. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean. 6. Reinsert the dipstick all the way. 7. Remove the dipstick and check the oil level. It should be within the range . 8. If the oil level is below , remove the oil filler cap and pour the recommended oil into the opening. Do not overfill . 9. YD25DDTi engine y Avoid direct skin contact with used oil. If contacted, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner and plenty of water as soon as possible. y Store used engine oil in marked containers out of the reach of children. Vehicle set-up When filling the engine oil, do not remove the dipstick. 1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply the parking brake. Recheck the oil level with the dipstick. 2. Start the engine and warm it up until the engine temperature reaches the normal operating temperature (approximately 5 minutes). 3. Stop the engine. 4. Wait at least 10 minutes for the engine oil to drain back to the oil pan. CAUTION: JVM0447X y y The oil level should be checked regularly. Operating your vehicle with an insufficient amount of oil can damage the engine, and such damage is not covered by the warranty. It is normal to add some oil between oil maintenance intervals or during the break-in period, depending on the severity of operating conditions. CHANGING ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER QR25DE engine 1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply the parking brake. 2. Start the engine and warm it up until the engine temperature reaches the normal operating temperature (approximately 5 minutes). 3. Stop the engine. 4. Wait at least 10 minutes for the engine oil to drain back to the oil pan. 8-8 WARNING: JVM0530X y Used oil must be disposed of properly. Never pour or dump oil into the ground, canals, rivers, etc. It should be disposed of at proper waste facilities. NISSAN recommends having your oil changed by a NISSAN dealer. y Be careful not to burn yourself, as the engine oil may be hot. y Prolonged and repeated contact with used engine oil may cause skin cancer. Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-Chapter 8.indd 8 2021/03/02 03:34:38 PM Engine oil and filter YD25DDTi engine YD25DDTi engine WAI0206X JVM0531X QR25DE engine - Two Wheel Drive (2WD) models WAI0206X Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-Chapter 8.indd 9 8-9 2021/03/02 03:34:38 PM Loosen the oil filter wrench. with an oil filter 5. Remove the oil filter by turning it by hand. 6. Wipe the engine oil filter mounting surface with a clean cloth. Dispose of waste oil and filter properly. Check your local regulations. 7. Apply new engine oil to the gasket of a new oil filter. PROTECT ENVIRONMENT 8. Screw in the oil filter clockwise until a slight resistance is felt, and then tighten an additional 2/3 of a turn to secure the oil filter. QR25DE engine 15 to 20 N·m (1.5 to 2.0 kg-m, 11 to 15 ft-lb) 9. 1. Place a large drain pan under the drain plug . 2. Remove the oil filler cap drain the oil. 3. Remove the drain plug and completely with a wrench. Waste oil must be disposed of properly. Check your local regulations. 4. (Perform steps 4 to 8 only when the engine oil filter change is needed.) 8-10 After operation Be sure to remove any old gasket remaining on the mounting surface. Oil filter tightening torque: YD25DDTi engine 16 to 20 N·m (1.6 to 2.0 kg-m, 12 to 15 ft-lb) JVM0542X QR25DE engine - Four Wheel Drive (4WD) models 15. Wait at least 10 minutes. Check the engine oil level according to the proper procedure. (See "Checking engine oil level" (P.8-8).) Add engine oil if necessary. It is illegal to pollute drains, watercourses and soil. Use authorized waste collection facilities, including civil amenity sites and garages providing facilities for disposal of used oil and used oil filters. If in doubt, contact your local authority for advice on disposal. The regulations concerning the pollution of the environment will vary from country to country. Clean and reinstall the drain plug and new washer. Securely tighten the drain plug with a wrench. Do not use excessive force. Drain plug tightening torque: 29 to 39 N·m (3.0 to 4.0 kg-m, 22 to 29 ft-lb) 10. Sufficiently refill with the recommended engine oil. (See "Recommended fluids/ lubricants and capacities" (P.9-2).) 11. Securely install the oil filler cap. 12. Start the engine. 13. Check the drain plug and the oil filter for any sign of leakage. Correct as required. 14. Stop the engine. Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-Chapter 8.indd 10 2021/03/02 03:34:38 PM FUEL FILTER (YD25DDTi engine model) DRAINING WATER DRIVE BELT BLEEDING THE FUEL SYSTEM If the water-in-fuel warning light “ ” comes on while the engine is running, drain water in the fuel filter as follows: JVM0472X JVM0477X 1. Connect a suitable drain hose drain plug . under the hose to the 2. Place a drain pan . 3. Loosen manually the drain plug with 4 to 5 turns and operate the priming valve to drain the water out of the fuel filter. Bleed the air out of the fuel system after refilling an empty fuel tank by the following procedure: 1. 2. Operate the priming valve several times until there is a sudden resistance felt in the pressure, then stop. Crank the engine until the engine starts. YD25DDTi engine 1. Water pump 2. Automatic tensioner 3. Crankshaft pulley 4. Alternator 5. Air conditioner compressor. CAUTION: Do not crank the engine for more than 30 seconds. 4. After draining, close the drain plug manually. y If the drain plug is tightened excessively, it can be damaged and as a result, fuel will leak. y Do not use tools to tighten the drain plug. 5. Bleed air from the fuel system. For details, see "Bleeding the fuel system" (P.8-11). 1. Crankshaft pulley Start the engine and make sure there is no fuel leakage. Correct as required. 2. Automatic tensioner 3. Alternator 4. Idler pulley CAUTION: 6. JVM0471X NOTE: y If the engine does not start, stop cranking and repeat step 1 of the procedure. y If the engine does not operate smoothly after it has started, race it two or three times. QR25DE engine JVM0533x Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-Chapter 8.indd 11 8-11 2021/03/02 03:34:39 PM SPARK PLUGS (QR25DE engine model) 5. Power steering fluid pump 6. Water pump 7. Air conditioner compressor Be sure the ignition switch is in the “LOCK” position. Visually inspect the belt for signs of unusual wear, cuts, fraying or looseness. Check the condition regularly. If the belt is in poor condition or loose, have it replaced or adjusted by a NISSAN dealer. WARNING: Be sure the engine and ignition switch are off and that the parking brake is applied. Replace the spark plugs according to the maintenance schedule log in a separate maintenance booklet. If the replacement is required, contact a NISSAN dealer. BRAKES CHECKING PARKING BRAKE IRIDIUM-TIPPED SPARK PLUGS SDI1447A From the released position, pull the parking brake lever slowly and firmly. If the number of clicks is out of the range listed, see a NISSAN dealer. 8 to 9 clicks under a pulling force of 196 N (20 kg, 44 lb) SDI2020 It is not necessary to replace the iridium-tipped spark plugs as frequently as the conventional type of spark plugs. These spark plugs are designed to last much longer than the conventional type of spark plug. CAUTION: 8-12 y Do not reuse the iridium-tipped spark plugs by cleaning or re-gapping. y Always replace with the recommended iridium-tipped spark plugs. Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-Chapter 8.indd 12 2021/03/02 03:34:39 PM CHECKING FOOT BRAKE Brake pad wear warning DI1020MM WARNING: See a NISSAN dealer for a brake system check if the brake pedal height does not return to normal. With the engine running, check the distance between the upper surface of the pedal and the metal floor. If it is out the range listed, see a NISSAN dealer. Depressing force 490 N (50 kg, 110 lb) LHD model 110 mm (4.3 in) or more RHD model 100 mm (3.9 in) or more little. The disc brake pads have audible wear warnings. When a brake pad requires replacement, it will make a high pitched scraping sound when the vehicle is in motion. This scraping sound will first occur only when the brake pedal is depressed. After more wear of the brake pad, the sound will always be heard even if the brake pedal is not depressed. Have the brakes checked as soon as possible if the wear warning sound is heard. 3. With the foot brake pedal depressed, stop the engine. Keep the pedal depressed for about 30 seconds. The pedal height should not change. 4. Run the engine for 1 minute without depressing the foot brake pedal, then turn it off. Depress the foot brake pedal several times. The pedal travel distance will decrease gradually with each depression as the vacuum is released from the booster. Under some driving or climate conditions, occasional brake squeaks, squeals or other noises may be heard. Occasional brake noise during light to moderate stops is normal and does not affect the function or performance of the brake system. If the brakes do not operate properly, have the brakes checked by a NISSAN dealer. The rear drum brakes do not have audible wear indicators. Should you ever hear an unusually loud noise from the rear drum brakes, have them checked as soon as possible by a NISSAN dealer. Proper brake inspection intervals should be followed. For additional information, see a separate maintenance booklet. BRAKE BOOSTER Check the brake booster function as follows: 1. With the engine off, depress and release the foot brake pedal several times. When the brake pedal movement (distance of travel) remains the same from one pedal application to the next, continue on to the next step. 2. While depressing the foot brake pedal, start the engine. The pedal height should drop a Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-Chapter 8.indd 13 8-13 2021/03/02 03:34:39 PM BRAKE FLUID CLUTCH FLUID (if equipped) WARNING: y Use only new fluid from a sealed container. Old, inferior, or contaminated fluid may damage the brake system. The use of improper fluids can damage the brake system and affect the vehicle's stopping ability. Check the fluid level in the reservoir. If the fluid is below the MIN line , the brake warning light will illuminate. Add fluid up to the MAX line . WARNING: y Use only new fluid from a sealed container. Old, inferior, or contaminated fluid may damage the clutch system. y Clean the filler cap before removing. y Clutch fluid is poisonous and should be stored carefully in marked containers out of the reach of children. y Refilling and checking the brake system should be left to a NISSAN dealer who will have the necessary brake fluid and technical knowledge. Refilling and checking the clutch system should be left to a NISSAN dealer who will have the necessary clutch fluid and technical knowledge. y Do not spill the fluid on painted surfaces. This will damage the paint. If fluid is spilled, wash with water. Do not spill the fluid on painted surfaces. This will damage the paint. If fluid is spilled, wash with water. See "Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities (P.9-2) for recommended types of fluid. y Clean the filler cap before removing. y Brake fluid is poisonous and should be stored carefully in marked containers out of the reach of children. If fluid must be added frequently, the system should be thoroughly checked by your NISSAN dealer. CAUTION: CAUTION: y y See "Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities (P.9-2) for recommended types of fluid. JVM0450X JVM0450X 8-14 Check the fluid level in the reservoir. If the fluid is below the MIN line , the brake warning light will illuminate. Add fluid up to the MAX line . Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-Chapter 8.indd 14 2021/03/02 03:34:39 PM AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID (ATF) (if equipped) If fluid must be added frequently, the system should be thoroughly checked by your NISSAN dealer. POWER STEERING FLUID 7-SPEED AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION (AT) MODEL Contact a NISSAN dealer if checking or replacement is required. CAUTION: y Use only Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF. Do not mix with other fluids. y Using Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) other than Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF will cause deterioration in driveability and automatic transmission durability, and may damage the automatic transmission, which is not covered by the warranty. SDI1718A WARNING: Power steering fluid is poisonous and should be stored carefully in marked containers out of the reach of children. Check the fluid level in the reservoir. The fluid level should be checked in the HOT range ( : HOT MAX., : HOT MIN.) at fluid temperatures of 50 to 80°C (122 to 176°F) or in the COLD range ( : COLD MAX., : COLD MIN.) at fluid temperatures of 0 to 30°C (32 to 86°F). If it is necessary to add fluid, use only specified fluid. Do not overfill. (See "Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities" (P.9-2) for recommended types of fluid.) Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-Chapter 8.indd 15 8-15 2021/03/02 03:34:39 PM AIR CLEANER FILTER WIPER BLADES WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES Cleaning If the windshield does not become clear after using the windshield washer or if the wiper blades chatter when operating the windshield wipers, wax or other materials may be on the windshield and/or wiper blades. JVM0451X WARNING: y Operating the engine with the air cleaner filter off can cause you or others to be burned. The air cleaner filter not only cleans the intake air, it also stops flame if the engine backfires. If the air cleaner filter is not installed and the engine backfires, you could be burned. Never drive with the air cleaner filter off. y Never pour fuel into the throttle body or attempt to start the engine with the air cleaner removed. Doing so could result in serious injury. To remove the filter, release the lock pins pull the unit upward . and The dry paper type filter element may be cleaned and reused. Replace the air filter according to the maintenance schedule shown in a separate maintenance booklet. Clean the outside of the windshield surface with a washer solution or mild detergent. Your windshield is clean if beads do not form when rinsing with water. Clean the blade by wiping it with a cloth soaked in a washer solution or a mild detergent. Rinse the blade with water. If your windshield is still not clear after cleaning the blades and using the wipers, replace the blades. SDI2693 When a washer nozzle is clogged: See a NISSAN dealer if a washer nozzle is clogged or any malfunction occurs. Do not attempt to clean the nozzle using a needle or a pin. Doing so may damage the nozzle. When replacing the filter, wipe the inside of the air cleaner housing and the cover with a damp cloth. 8-16 Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-Chapter 8.indd 16 2021/03/02 03:34:40 PM WINDOW WASHER FLUID Replacing JVM0452X SDI2048 Replace the wiper blades if they are worn. 1. Pull the wiper arm. 2. Push and hold the release tab move the wiper blade down arm to remove. 3. Remove the wiper blade. 4. Insert the new wiper blade onto the wiper arm until it clicks into place. y After wiper blade replacement, return the wiper arm to its original position. Otherwise the wiper arm or the engine hood may be scratched and may cause damage. y Worn windshield wiper blades can damage the windshield and impair driver vision. , and then the wiper CAUTION: WARNING: Anti-freeze is poisonous and should be stored carefully in marked containers out of the reach of children. Check the fluid level in the reservoir tank and add fluid if necessary. Add a washer solvent to the water for better cleaning. In the winter season, add windshield washer antifreeze. Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for the mixture ratio. Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-Chapter 8.indd 17 8-17 2021/03/02 03:34:40 PM BATTERY SDI1573 VEHICLE BATTERY WARNING: Do not operate the vehicle if the fluid in the battery is low. Low battery fluid can cause a higher load on the battery which can generate heat, reduce battery life, and in some cases lead to an explosion. 8-18 Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-Chapter 8.indd 18 2021/03/02 03:34:40 PM Checking battery fluid level If the side of the battery is not clear, check the distilled water level by looking directly above the cell; the condition indicates OK and the condition needs more to be added. 3. Replace and tighten the cell plugs. y Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under severe conditions require frequent checks of the battery fluid level. y Keep the battery surface clean and dry. Any corrosion should be cleared with a firmly wrung out moist cloth. y Make certain the terminal connections are clean and securely tightened. y If the vehicle is not to be used for more than 30 days, disconnect the negative (−) battery terminal cable to prevent battery discharge. DI0137MD y When changing batteries, do not let dust or oil get on the components. y There is danger of explosion if lithium battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type. y Do not expose the battery to excessive heat such as sunshine, fire, etc. Jump starting SDI1480D If jump starting is necessary, see "Jump starting" (P.6-7). If the engine does not start by jump starting or the battery does not charge, the battery may have to be replaced. Contact a NISSAN dealer for replacing the battery. Check the fluid level in each cell. The battery fluid level should be between the UPPER LEVEL and LOWER LEVEL lines. REMOTE CONTROLLER BATTERY (If equipped) If it is necessary to add fluid, add only demineralized/distilled water to bring the level to the indicator in each filler opening. Do not overfill. y Be careful not to allow children to swallow the battery and removed parts. y An improperly disposed battery can harm the environment. Always confirm local regulations for battery disposal. 1. Remove the cell plugs tool. using a suitable 2. Add demineralized/distilled water up to the UPPER LEVEL line. Battery replacement CAUTION: JVM0381X To replace the battery: 1. Insert a small screwdriver into the slit to open the lid. Use a cloth to protect the Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-Chapter 8.indd 19 8-19 2021/03/02 03:34:40 PM casing. 2. y Recommended battery: CR2032 or equivalent When changing batteries, do not let dust or oil get on the components. y Do not touch the internal circuit and electric terminals as doing so could cause a malfunction. There is danger of explosion if lithium battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type. y Do not expose the battery to excessive heat such as sunshine, fire, etc. y Make sure that the bottom of the case . y Intelligent Key and remove the mechanical key. regulations for battery disposal. Replace the battery with a new one. side faces the 3. Close the lid securely. 4. Operate the buttons to check its operation. 2. 3. See a NISSAN dealer if you need assistance for replacement. FCC Notice: Insert a small screwdriver into the slit of the corner and twist it to separate the upper part from the lower part. Use a cloth to protect the casing. Replace the battery with a new one. y Recommended equivalent battery: CR2025 or y Do not touch the internal circuit and electric terminals as doing so could cause a malfunction. y Make sure that the bottom of the case. side faces the This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Note: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. SDI2452 INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY (if equipped) Battery replacement CAUTION: y Be careful not to allow children to swallow the battery and removed parts. y An improperly disposed battery can harm the environment. Always confirm local 8-20 SDI2451 To replace the battery: 1. Release the lock knob at the back of the 4. Align the tips of the upper and lower parts , and then push them together until it is securely closed . 5. Operate the buttons to check its operation. See a NISSAN dealer if you need assistance for replacement. FCC Notice: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-Chapter 8.indd 20 2021/03/02 03:34:41 PM VARIABLE VOLTAGE CONTROL SYSTEM (if equipped) two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Note: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. The variable voltage control system measures the amount of electrical discharge from the battery and controls voltage generated by the alternator. FUSES ENGINE COMPARTMENT CAUTION: y Do not ground accessories directly to the battery terminal. Doing so will bypass the variable voltage control system and the vehicle battery may not charge completely. y Use electrical accessories with the engine running to avoid discharging the vehicle battery. JVM0453X CAUTION: Never use a fuse of a higher or lower amperage rating than that specified on the fuse box cover. This could damage the electrical system or cause a fire. The location and the amperage rating of fuses are shown on the backside of the fuse box lid. The number of fuses may vary depending on the features equipped to the vehicle. If any electrical equipment does not operate, check for an open fuse. 1. Be sure the ignition switch is in the “OFF” or “LOCK” position. 2. Be sure the headlights are off. 3. Open the engine hood. 4. Remove the fuse/fusible link cover by pushing the tab. 5. Locate the fuse which needs to be replaced. Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-Chapter 8.indd 21 8-21 2021/03/02 03:34:41 PM PASSENGER COMPARTMENT SDI1753 6. Remove the fuse using the fuse puller located in the passenger compartment fuse box. 7. If the fuse is open fuse . JVM0473X 1. Be sure the ignition switch is in the “OFF” position. 2. Be sure the headlights are off. 3. Open the glove box. 4. Hold the glove box lid and pull it up to release the hinges located on the underside of the glove box. 5. Carefully release the left and right stoppers and remove the glove box. 6. Locate the fuse that needs to be replaced. 7. Remove the fuse using the fuse puller . , replace it with a new If the new fuse also opens, after installing, have the electrical system checked, and if necessary repaired, by a NISSAN dealer. Fusible links If any electrical equipment does not operate and the fuses are in good condition, check the fusible links. If any of these fusible links are melted, replace only with genuine NISSAN parts. JVM0474X SDI1754 8. If the fuse is open fuse . , replace it with a new 9. Install the glove box following removal steps in opposite sequence. If the new fuse also opens, after installing, have the electrical system checked, and if necessary repaired, by a NISSAN dealer. JVM0461X 8-22 Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-Chapter 8.indd 22 2021/03/02 03:34:41 PM LIGHTS Extended storage fuse switch (if equipped) How to remove the extended storage fuse switch: 1. To remove the extended storage fuse switch, be sure the ignition switch is in the “OFF” or “LOCK” position. 2. Be sure the headlights are off. 3. Remove the fuse box cover. 4. Pinch the locking tabs found on each side of the storage fuse switch. 5. Pull the extended storage fuse switch straight out from the fuse box . HEADLIGHTS Fog may temporarily form inside the lens of the exterior lights in the rain or in a car wash. A temperature difference between the inside and the outside of the lens causes the fog. This is not a malfunction. If large drops of water collect inside the lens, contact a NISSAN dealer. Replacing LED headlight If replacement is required, contact a NISSAN dealer. JVM0462X To reduce battery drain, the extended storage fuse switch comes from the factory switched off. Prior to delivery of your vehicle, the switch is pushed in (switched on) and should always remain on. If the extended storage fuse switch is not pushed in (switched on), the “Shipping Mode On Push Storage Fuse” warning may appear in the vehicle information display (models with color display). See "Vehicle information display warnings and indicators" (P.2-22). If any electrical equipment does not operate, remove the extended storage fuse switch and check for an open fuse. NOTE: If the extended storage fuse switch malfunctions or if the fuse is open, it is not necessary to replace the switch. In this case, remove the extended storage fuse switch and replace it with a new fuse of the same rating. Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-Chapter 8.indd 23 8-23 2021/03/02 03:34:41 PM Replacing halogen headlight bulb The halogen headlight is a semi-sealed beam type which uses replaceable headlight (halogen) bulbs. They can be replaced from inside the engine compartment without removing the headlight assembly. Aiming adjustment is not necessary if only the bulbs are replaced. When aiming adjustment is necessary, contact a NISSAN dealer. CAUTION: High-pressure halogen gas is sealed inside the bulb. The bulb may break if the glass envelope is scratched or the bulb is dropped. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Disconnect the electrical connector from the rear end of the bulb. 3. Pull off the rubber cap 4. Push and turn the retaining pin it. 5. Remove the headlight bulb. Do not shake or rotate the bulb when removing it. 6. Install the new bulb in the reverse order of removal. y When handling the bulb, do not touch the glass envelope. y Use the same number and wattage as originally installed: . to loosen CAUTION: Halogen headlight model High/low beam bulb: 60W/55W (H4) y JVM0470X 8-24 Do not leave the bulb out of the headlight reflector for a long period of time as dust, moisture and smoke may enter the headlight body and affect the performance of the headlight. Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-Chapter 8.indd 24 2021/03/02 03:34:41 PM EXTERIOR LIGHTS Item Front turn signal light Clearance light (Halogen headlight models) Clearance light and daytime running light (LED headlight models)* Front fog light (LED type)* (if equipped) Front fog light (bulb type) (if equipped) Side turn signal light* (on the outside rearview mirror) (if equipped) Side turn signal light (on the front fender) (if equipped) Rear combination light Turn signal Stop/tail (LED type)* (if equipped) Stop/tail (bulb type) (if equipped) Reverse License plate light (LED type)* (if equipped) License plate light (bulb type) (if equipped) High-mounted stop light* (if equipped) *: INTERIOR LIGHTS Wattage (W) 21 5 LED LED 55 LED Item Map light (LED type)* Map light (bulb type) Room light (if equipped) Step light (if equipped) Vanity mirror light (if equipped) *: Wattage (W) LED 5 10 3.4 1.8 See a NISSAN dealer for replacement. 5 21 LED 21/5 21 LED 5 LED See a NISSAN dealer for replacement. Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-Chapter 8.indd 25 8-25 2021/03/02 03:34:42 PM LIGHT LOCATIONS 1. Front turn signal light 2. Front clearance light and daytime running light (LED type) 3. Headlight (high beam) (LED type) 4. Map light 5. Room light (if equipped) 6. Front fog light (if equipped) 7. Headlight (low beam) (LED type) 8. Side turn signal light (if equipped) (on the front fender or the outside rearview mirror) 9. Step light (if equipped) 10. Clearance light (halogen headlight model) 11. Headlight (halogen type) 12. High-mounted stop light (if equipped) 13. Rear combination light (LED type) 14. Rear combination light (bulb type) 15. License plate light (LED or bulb type) : LED headlight model : Halogen headlight model : Models with LED type rear combination light : Models with bulb type rear combination light WAI0197X 8-26 Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-Chapter 8.indd 26 2021/03/02 03:34:44 PM Replacement procedures Removal of the front grille upper cover before replacing bulbs: Clearance light (bulb type) JVM0457X WAI0210X 1. Remove the clips. 2. Remove the front grille upper cover. Install the front grille upper cover after replacing bulbs. JVM0100X Side turn signal light (on the front fender) (if equipped) SDI2306 : REMOVE : INSTALL All other lights are either type A, B, C, D or E. When replacing a bulb, first remove the lens and/or cover. Front turn signal light JVM0456X Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-Chapter 8.indd 27 8-27 2021/03/02 03:34:44 PM Front fog light (if equipped) WAI0211X WAI0227X Rear combination light (models with truck box and LED type stop/tail light) : Turn signal light : Reverse light or Rear fog light (if equipped) 8-28 WAI0212X Rear combination light (models with truck box and bulb type stop/tail light : Stop/tail light : Turn signal light Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-Chapter 8.indd 28 2021/03/02 03:34:44 PM : Reverse light (if equipped) CAUTION: Do not use the rear combination light (LED type) with the rear combination light (bulb type) (and vice versa). Doing so may cause malfunction of the light. WAI0288X License plate light (models without rear bumper) Front map light (bulb type) Room light (if equipped) SDI2391 JVM0553X Step light (if equipped) Vanity mirror light (if equipped) SDI1845 Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-Chapter 8.indd 29 SDI1839 8-29 2021/03/02 03:34:45 PM TYRES AND WHEELS If you have a flat tyre, see "Flat tyre" (P.6-2). TYRE INFLATION PRESSURE Periodically check the pressure of the tyres, including the spare. An incorrect tyre pressure may adversely affect tyre life and vehicle handling. The tyre pressure should be checked when tyres are COLD. Tyres are considered COLD after the vehicle has been parked for 3 or more hours, or driven less than 1.6 km (1 mile). COLD tyre pressures are shown on the tyre placard. Insufficient pressure can lead to an overheating of the tyre and subsequent internal damage. At high speeds, this could result in tread separation and even bursting of the tyre. TYPES OF TYRES CAUTION: When changing or replacing tyres, be sure all four tyres are of the same type (that is, summer, all season or snow) and construction. A NISSAN dealer may be able to help you with information about tyre type, size, speed rating and availability. Replacement tyres may have a lower speed rating than the factory equipped tyres, and they may not match the potential maximum vehicle speed. Never exceed the maximum speed rating of the tyre. All season tyres NISSAN specifies all season tyres on some models to provide good performance all year, including snowy and icy road conditions. All season tyres are identified by ALL SEASON and/ or M&S on the tyre sidewall. Snow tyres have 8-30 better snow traction than all season tyres and may be more appropriate in some areas. Summer tyres NISSAN specifies summer tyres on some models to provide superior performance on dry roads. Summer tyre performance is substantially reduced in snow and ice. Summer tyres do not have the tyre traction rating M&S on the tyre sidewall. If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy or icy conditions, NISSAN recommends the use of snow or all season tyres on all four wheels. Snow tyres If snow tyres are needed, it is necessary to select tyres equivalent in size and load rating to the original equipment tyres. If you do not, it can adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle. Generally, snow tyres have lower speed ratings than factory equipped tyres and may not match the potential maximum vehicle speed. Never exceed the maximum speed rating of the tyre. If you install snow tyres, they must be the same size, brand, construction and tread pattern on all four wheels. For additional traction on icy roads, studded tyres may be used. However, some states and provinces prohibit their use. Check local, state and provincial laws before installing studded tyres. Skid and traction capabilities of studded snow tyres on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non-studded snow tyres. Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) model CAUTION: y Always use tyres of the same type, size, brand, construction (bias, bias-belted or radial), and tread pattern on all four wheels. Failure to do so may result in a circumference difference between tyres on the front and rear axles which will cause excessive tyre wear and may damage the transmission, transfer case and differential gears. y ONLY use spare tyres specified for the 4WD model. If excessive tyre wear is found, it is recommended that all four tyres be replaced with tyres of the same size, brand, construction and tread pattern. The tyre pressure and wheel alignment should also be checked and corrected as necessary. Contact a NISSAN dealer. TYRE CHAINS Use of tyre chains may be prohibited according to location. Check the local laws before installing tyre chains. When installing tyre chains, make sure that they are of proper size for the tyres on your vehicle and are installed according to the chain manufacturer’s instructions. Use chain tensioners when recommended by the tyre chain manufacturer to ensure a tight fit. Loose end links of the tyre chains must be secured or removed to prevent the possibility of whipping action damage to the fenders or underbody. If possible, avoid fully loading your vehicle when using tyre chains. In addition, drive at a reduced speed. Otherwise, your vehicle may be damaged and/or vehicle handling and Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-Chapter 8.indd 30 2021/03/02 03:34:45 PM performance may be adversely affected. Tyre chains must be installed only on the rear wheels and not on the front wheels. TYRE ROTATION TYRE WEAR AND DAMAGE Never install tyre chains on a temporary-use spare tyre (if equipped). Do not drive with tyre chains on paved roads which are clear of snow. Driving with chains in such conditions can cause damage to the various mechanisms of the vehicle due to some overstress. SDI1662 NISSAN recommends that tyres be rotated every 5,000 km (3,000 miles) for Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) or every 10,000 km (6,000 miles) for Two-Wheel Drive (2WD) model. However, the timing for tyre rotation may vary according to your driving habits and the road surface conditions. (See "Flat tyre" (P.6-2) for the tyre replacement.) WARNING: y After rotating the tyres, adjust the tyre pressure. y Retighten the wheel nuts when the vehicle has been driven for 1,000 km (600 miles) (also in cases of a flat tyre, etc.). y Do not include the spare tyre in tyre rotation. y Incorrect tyre selection, fitting, care or maintenance can affect vehicle safety with risk of accident and injury. If in doubt, consult a NISSAN dealer or the tyre manufacturer. SDI1663 : Wear indicator : Wear indicator location locations are shown by “ depending on tyre types. marks. The ”, “TWI”, etc. Tyres should be periodically inspected for wear, cracking, bulging or objects caught in the tread. If excessive wear, cracks, bulging or deep cuts are found, the tyre should be replaced immediately. The original tyres have a built-in tread wear indicator. When the wear indicator is visible, the tyre should be replaced. Improper service of a spare tyre may result in serious personal injury. If it is necessary to repair the spare tyre, contact a NISSAN dealer. Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-Chapter 8.indd 31 8-31 2021/03/02 03:34:45 PM TYRE AGE WHEEL BALANCE Never use a tyre over six years old, regardless of whether it has been used or not. Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle handling and tyre life. Even with regular use, wheels can get out of balance. Therefore, they should be balanced as required. Tyres degrade with age as well as with the vehicle usage. Have your tyres checked and balanced often by a repair shop or, if you prefer, a NISSAN dealer. CHANGING TYRES AND WHEELS WARNING: SPARE TYRE Conventional spare tyre A standard tyre (the same size as the road wheels) is supplied with your vehicle. Do not install a deformed wheel or tyre even if it has been repaired. Such wheels or tyres could have structural damage and could fail without warning. When replacing a tyre, use the same size, speed rating and load carrying capacity as originally equipped. (See "Tyres and wheels" (P.9-7) for recommended types and sizes of tyres and wheels.) The use of tyres other than those recommended or the mixed use of tyres of different brands, construction (bias, bias-belted, or radial), or tread patterns can adversely affect the ride, braking, handling, ground clearance, body-to-tyre clearance, snow chain clearance, speedometer calibration, headlight aim and bumper height. Some of these effects may lead to accidents and could result in serious personal injury. If the wheels are changed for any reason, always replace with wheels which have the same offset dimension. Wheels of a different offset could cause early tyre wear, possibly degraded vehicle handling characteristics and/or interference with the brake discs/drums. Such interference can lead to decreased braking efficiency and/or early brake pad/shoe wear. 8-32 Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-Chapter 8.indd 32 2021/03/02 03:34:45 PM 9 Technical information Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities.................. 9-2 Fuel information ................................................................................... 9-4 Recommended SAE viscosity number ............................... 9-4 Air conditioner system refrigerant and lubricant ....... 9-5 Engine .................................................................................................................... 9-6 Tyres and wheels........................................................................................... 9-7 Dimensions ........................................................................................................ 9-8 When travelling or registering in another country ............. 9-9 Vehicle identification .................................................................................. 9-9 Vehicle identification label............................................................ 9-9 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) label (if equipped)................................................................................................... 9-9 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)....................................... 9-9 Engine serial number .................................................................... 9-10 Tyre placard .......................................................................................... 9-10 Air conditioner specification label ....................................... 9-10 Installation of an RF-transmitter.................................................... 9-10 Radio approval number and information................................ 9-11 For South Africa ................................................................................. 9-11 For Ghana ............................................................................................... 9-12 For Nigeria.............................................................................................. 9-13 For Comoros ........................................................................................ 9-13 For Benin ................................................................................................. 9-14 For Zambia............................................................................................. 9-15 For Botswana ...................................................................................... 9-16 For Liberia and Seychelles ......................................................... 9-17 For Mauritius, Libya, Central Africa, Guinea Bissau and Zimbabwe.................................................................................... 9-17 9-Chapter 9.indd 1 2021/01/15 11:35:14 AM RECOMMENDED FLUIDS/ LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill quantities may be slightly different. When refilling, follow the procedures instructed in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity. Fluid type Fuel Engine oil*1 QR25DE Drain and refill *1: For additional information, see "Changing engine oil and oil filter" (P.8-8). Capacity (approximate) Recommended Fluids/Lubricants Metric US Imperial Measure Measure Measure 80 L 21-1/8 gal 17-5/8 gal • See "Fuel information" (P.9-4). With oil filter change 4.7 L 5 qt 4–1/8 qt Without oil filter change 4.4 L 4–75/8 qt 3–7/8 qt For 2WD models For South Africa • Genuine “NISSAN Motor Oil 5W-30 SN” is recommended. • If the above motor oil is not available, use “NISSAN Motor Oil” or equivalent that matches the following grade and viscosity. • Oil grade: — API SN, ILSAC GF-5 — ACEA A3/B3, A3/B4 or A5/B5 • SAE Viscosity: See “Recommended SAE viscosity number” (P.9-4). Except for South Africa • Genuine “NISSAN Motor Oil 5W-30 SN” is recommended. • If the above motor oil is not available, use “NISSAN Motor Oil” or equivalent that matches the following grade and viscosity. • Oil grade: API SN, ILSAC GF-5 • SAE Viscosity: See “Recommended SAE viscosity number” (P.9-4). For 4WD models • Genuine “NISSAN Motor Oil 0W-20 SN” is recommended. • If the above motor oil is not available, use “NISSAN Motor Oil” or equivalent that matches the following grade and viscosity. • Oil grade: API SN, ILSAC GF-5 • SAE Viscosity: See “Recommended SAE viscosity number” (P.9-4). YD25DDTi Engine coolant with reservoir QR25DE 5.3 L 5-5/8 qt 4-5/8 qt Without oil filter change 4.8 L 5-1/8 qt 4-1/4 qt With heater 8.1 L 8-5/8 qt 7-1/8 qt Without heater YD25DDTi 9-2 With oil filter change 7.3 L 7-3/4 qt 6–3/8 qt With heater 10.6 L 11-1/4 qt 9-3/8 qt Without heater 9.8 L 10-3/8 qt 8-5/8 qt • Genuine “NISSAN Motor Oil 5W-30 CF-4 or B1” is recommended. • If the above motor oil is not available, use “NISSAN Motor Oil” or equivalent that matches the following grade and viscosity. • Oil grade: — API CF-4*2 — ACEA B1, B3, B4 or B5 *2: Never use API CG-4. • SAE Viscosity: See "Recommended SAE viscosity number" (P.9-4). • Genuine NISSAN Engine Coolant (blue) or equivalent • Use Genuine NISSAN Engine Coolant or equivalent in its quality, in order to avoid possible aluminum corrosion within the engine cooling system caused by the use of non-genuine engine coolant. Note that any repairs for the incidents within the engine cooling system while using non-genuine engine coolant may not be covered by the warranty even if such incidents occurred during the warranty period. Technical information 9-Chapter 9.indd 2 2021/01/15 11:35:15 AM Capacity (approximate) Fluid type Metric Measure - US Measure - Imperial Measure - Recommended Fluids/Lubricants Front 0.85 L 7/8 qt 3/4 qt Rear 3.50 L 3–3/4 qt 3-1/8 qt Multi-purpose grease - - - • Genuine NISSAN Differential Oil Hypoid Super GL-5 80W-90 (mineral oil) or equivalent • NISSAN recommends using Genuine NISSAN Differential Oil Hypoid Super GL-5 80W-90 ONLY in NISSAN final drive. Do not mix with other fluids. Using fluids that are not equivalent to Genuine NISSAN Differential Oil Hypoid Super GL-5 80W-90 may damage the final drive. Damage caused by the use of fluids other than as recommended is not covered under the warranty. • Genuine NISSAN Differential Oil Hypoid Super-S GL-5 (synthetic oil) 75W-90 or equivalent • NISSAN recommends using Genuine NISSAN Differential Oil Hypoid Super-S GL-5 synthetic 75W-90 ONLY in NISSAN final drive. Do not mix with other fluids. Using fluids that are not equivalent to Genuine NISSAN Differential Oil Hypoid Super-S GL-5 synthetic 75W-90 may damage the final drive. Damage caused by the use of fluids other than as recommended is not covered under the warranty. • NLGI No. 2 (Lithium soap base) Air conditioner system refrigerant - - - • HFC-134a (R-134a) Air conditioner system lubricants - - - • NISSAN A/C System Oil Type S or equivalent Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) Manual transmission (MT) gear oil 2WD 4WD Transfer fluid Power steering fluid Brake and clutch fluid Differential gear oil • Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF • NISSAN recommends using Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF ONLY in NISSAN automatic transmissions. Do not mix with other fluids. Using fluids that are not equivalent to Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF may damage the automatic transmission. Damage caused by the use of fluids other than as recommended is not covered under the warranty. 3.0 L 3-1/8 qt 2-5/8 qt • Genuine NISSAN Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) HQ Multi 75W-85 • If Genuine NISSAN Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) HQ Multi is not available, API GL-4, Viscosity SAE 75W-85 may be used as a temporary 3.4 L 3-5/8 qt 3 qt replacement. However, use Genuine NISSAN Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) HQ Multi as soon as it is available. 1.5 L 1-5/8 qt 1-3/8 qt • Genuine NISSAN ATF D3M • Using fluid other than Genuine NISSAN ATF D3M may cause deterioration in driveability and transfer durability, and may damage the transfer, which is not covered by the warranty. Refill to the proper fluid level • Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent according to the instructions in the • DEXRONTM VI type ATF may also be used. “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” • Genuine NISSAN Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT 3 or DOT4 section. • Never mix different types of fluids (DOT 3 and DOT 4). Technical information 9-Chapter 9.indd 3 9-3 2021/01/15 11:35:15 AM FUEL INFORMATION RECOMMENDED SAE VISCOSITY NUMBER For QR25DE 4WD model QR25DE engine: Gasoline engine oil UNLEADED gasoline with an octane rating of at least 91 (RON). 5W-30 is preferable. If 0W-20 is not available, select the viscosity,from the chart below, that is suitable for the outside temperature range. Gasoline engine CAUTION: Do not use leaded gasoline. Using leaded gasoline will damage the three-way catalyst. 0W-20 is preferable. For QR25DE 2WD model If 5W-30 is not available, select the viscosity,from the chart below, that is suitable for the outside temperature range. Diesel engine* YD25DDTi engine: Diesel fuel above 50 cetane and with a maximum of 50 ppm of sulfur (EN590) must be used. *if two types of diesel fuel are available, use summer or winter fuel properly according to the following temperature conditions. y Above -7˚C (20˚F) - Summer type diesel fuel. y Below -7˚C (20˚F) - Winter type diesel fuel. y Do not use home heating oil, gasoline or other alternate fuels in your diesel engine. The use of those or adding those to diesel fuel can cause engine damage. y Do not use summer fuel at temperatures below −7˚C (20˚F). The cold temperatures will cause wax to form in the fuel. As a result, it may prevent the engine from running smoothly. CAUTION: STI0732 STI0589 9-4 Technical information 9-Chapter 9.indd 4 2021/01/15 11:35:15 AM Diesel engine oil AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM REFRIGERANT AND LUBRICANT 5W-30 is preferable. If 5W-30 is not available, select the viscosity, from the chart below, that is suitable for the outside temperature range. The air conditioner system of your vehicle must be charged with the refrigerant HFC-134a (R134a) and the lubricant NISSAN A/C System Oil Type S or equivalents. CAUTION: Use of any other refrigerants or lubricants will cause severe damage, and you may need to replace your vehicle’s entire air conditioner system. The release of refrigerants into the atmosphere is prohibited in many countries and regions. The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in your vehicle will not harm the Earth’s ozone layer. However, it may contribute in a small part to the global warming effect. NISSAN recommends that the refrigerant be appropriately recovered and recycled. Contact a NISSAN dealer when servicing the air conditioner system. STI0387B Technical information 9-Chapter 9.indd 5 9-5 2021/01/15 11:35:15 AM ENGINE Engine Model QR25DE Type Cylinder arrangement Bore × Stroke mm (in) YD25DDTi Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC Diesel, 4-cycle 4-cylinder, in-line 4-cylinder, in-line 89.0 × 100.0 (3.504 × 3.937) 89 × 100 (3.504 × 3.937) Displacement cm3 (cu in) 2,488 (151.82) 2,488 (151.82) Idle speed at the “N” (Neutral) position Ignition timing (B.T.D.C.) at the “N” (Neutral) position Spark plugs rpm 625±50 (4WD) 650±50 (2WD) 750±50*1 10°±2 - Type Standard FXE20HE11 - Gap mm (in) 1.0-1.1 (0.043) - Timing chain Timing chain Camshaft operation *1: When driving at high altitude, idling speed will increase. 9-6 Technical information 9-Chapter 9.indd 6 2021/01/15 11:35:15 AM TYRES AND WHEELS Tyre Conventional Spare Conventional Road wheel Spare Size Size Size Offset mm (in) Size Offset 205R16C AT 16 × 6J 55 (2.17) 255/65R17 AT Conventional 17 × 7J 45 (1.77) Conventional Conventional 255/60R18 108H 18 × 7J 45 (1.77) See the Tyre placard on your vehicle for the recommended COLD tyre pressure. Technical information 9-Chapter 9.indd 7 9-7 2021/01/15 11:35:15 AM DIMENSIONS mm (in) Destination For South Africa Body type Overall length Except for South Africa Single Cab Double Cab Single Cab Double Cab with rear bumper 5,335 (210.0) 5,260 (207.1) 5,335 (210.0) 5,260 (207.1) without rear bumper 5,235 (206.1) 5,210 (205.1) 5,235 (206.1) Overall width 1,790 (70.5) Two-Wheel Drive (2WD) models 1,750 (68.9) Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) models 1,760 (69.3) Overall height Front tread 1,550 (61.0) 1,850 (72.8) (without over fender) 1,875 (73.8) (with over fender) 1,815 (71.5) (without roof rack) 1,845 (72.6) (with roof rack) 1,825 (71.9) (without roof rack) 1,855 (73.0) (with roof rack) 1,570 (61.8) 1,790 (70.5) 1,755 (69.1) 1,760 (69.3) 1,550 (61.0) 5,210 (205.1) 1,850 (72.8) (without over fender) 1,875 (73.8) (with over fender) 1,805 (71.1) (without roof rack) 1,835 (72.2) (with roof rack) 1,810 (71.3) (without roof rack) 1,840 (72.4) (with roof rack) 1,570 (61.8) Rear tread 1,550 (61.0) 1,570 (61.8) 1,550 (61.0) 1,570 (61.8) Wheelbase 3,150 (124.0) 3,150 (124.0) 3,150 (124.0) 3,150 (124.0) 9-8 Technical information 9-Chapter 9.indd 8 2021/01/15 11:35:16 AM WHEN TRAVELLING OR REGISTERING IN ANOTHER COUNTRY When planning to travel in another country or region, find out whether the fuel required for your vehicle is available in that country or region. Using a low octane/cetane rated fuel may cause engine damage. Therefore, be sure that the required fuel is available wherever you go. For additional information regarding recommended fuel, see earlier in this section. When transferring the registration of your vehicle to another country, state, province or district, contact the appropriate authorities to find out that the vehicle complies with the local legal requirements. In some cases, a vehicle cannot meet the legal requirements, and it may be necessary to modify the vehicle to meet local laws and regulations. In addition, there may be possibilities that a vehicle cannot be adapted in certain areas. The laws and regulations for motor vehicle emission control and safety standards vary according to the country, state, province or district; therefore, the vehicle specification may differ. When any vehicles are to be taken into another country, state, province or district, its modification, transportation, registration, and any other expenses which may result, are the responsibility of the user. NISSAN is not responsible for any inconveniences that may result. VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION It is prohibited to cover, paint, weld, cut, drill, alter or remove Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN) LABEL (if equipped) VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION LABEL JVT0352X JVT0330X The vehicle identification label is affixed as illustrated. The vehicle identification number label is attached as shown. VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN) Built date (if equipped) Built date is stamped identification label. on the vehicle The built date means the calendar month and the year in which the body shell and power train sub assemblies are conjoined and the vehicle is driven or moved from the production line. STI0120A The vehicle identification number (chassis number) is stamped on the frame as shown. Technical information 9-Chapter 9.indd 9 9-9 2021/01/15 11:35:16 AM INSTALLATION OF AN RFTRANSMITTER ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER TYRE PLACARD For countries conforming to UN regulation No.10 or equivalent: The installation of a RF transmitter in your vehicle could affect electric equipment systems. Be sure to check with your NISSAN dealer for precautionary measures or special instructions regarding installation. Upon request, your NISSAN dealer will provide the detailed information (frequency band, power, antenna position, installation guide, etc.) regarding installation. QR25DE engine STI0435 JVT0370X The cold tyre pressures are shown on the tyre placard affixed to the driver’s side center pillar (Single Cab model and Double Cab model). AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION LABEL YD25DDTi engine STI0300A The number is stamped on the engine as shown. JVT0274X The air conditioner specification label is attached to the underside of the hood as shown. 9-10 Technical information 9-Chapter 9.indd 10 2021/01/15 11:35:16 AM RADIO APPROVAL NUMBER AND INFORMATION FOR SOUTH AFRICA Remote keyless entry system (if equipped) Front radar sensor (if equipped) Intelligent Key system (if equipped) JVT0141X JVT0500X JVT0494X Side radar sensor (if equipped) JVT0495X JVT0094X JVT0499X Technical information 9-Chapter 9.indd 11 9-11 2021/01/15 11:35:17 AM NISSAN Anti-Theft System (NATS) NCA APPROVED：ZRO-1H-7E3-151 JVT0185X Intelligent Key system (if equipped) NCA APPROVED：1R3-1M-7E1-x05 NISSAN Anti-Theft System (NATS) FOR GHANA Remote keyless entry system (if equipped) NCA APPROVED：NCA/TA/11/44 NCA APPROVED：NCA/TA/11/40 NCA APPROVED：NCA/TA/11/99 9-12 Technical information 9-Chapter 9.indd 12 2021/01/15 11:35:18 AM FOR NIGERIA NISSAN Anti-Theft System (NATS) Remote keyless entry system (if equipped) FOR COMOROS Intelligent Key system (if equipped) Remote keyless entry system (if equipped) Numéro d'agrément : 17/005/AGR/GF/DG Numéro d'agrément : 19/047/AGR/GF/DG Date d'agrément : 19/08/2019 Intelligent Key system (if equipped) Numéro d'agrément : 17/003/AGR/GF/DG Date d'agrément : 01/03/2017 Date d'agrément : 01/03/2017 Technical information 9-Chapter 9.indd 13 9-13 2021/01/15 11:35:18 AM Numéro d'agrément : 17/006/AGR/GF/DG Date d'agrément : 01/03/2017 FOR BENIN Intelligent Key system (if equipped) Remote keyless entry system (if equipped) AGREE PAR L'ATRPT BENIN Numero d'agrement ： 117/ARCEP/SE/DR/DAJRC/GU/2019 Date d'agrement ： 03/07/2019 AGREE PAR L'ATRPT BENIN Numero d'agrement ： 084/ARCEP/SE/DR/DAJRC/GU/2017 Date d'agrement ： 05/05/2017 NISSAN Anti-Theft System (NATS) Numéro d'agrément : 17/007/AGR/GF/DG Date d'agrément : 01/03/2017 AGREE PAR L'ATRPT BENIN Numero d'agrement ： 188/ARCEP/SE/DR/DAJRC/GU/2019 Date d'agrement ： 28/10/2019 9-14 AGREE PAR L'ATRPT BENIN Numero d'agrement ： 083/ARCEP/SE/DR/DAJRC/GU/2017 Date d'agrement ： 05/05/2017 Technical information 9-Chapter 9.indd 14 2021/01/15 11:35:19 AM NISSAN Anti-Theft System (NATS) AGREE PAR L'ATRPT BENIN Numero d'agrement ： 140/ARCEP/SE/DR/DAJRC/GU/2019 Date d'agrement ：26 /07/2019 ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2013/7/1 Intelligent Key system (if equipped) ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2017/2/14 NISSAN Anti-Theft System (NATS) FOR ZAMBIA Remote keyless entry system (if equipped) ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2017/2/13 ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2013/7/2 ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2019/7/108 Technical information 9-Chapter 9.indd 15 9-15 2021/01/15 11:35:20 AM FOR BOTSWANA Intelligent Key system (if equipped) NISSAN Anti-Theft System (NATS) Remote keyless entry system (if equipped) BOCRA REGISTERED No : BOCRA/TA/2019/4825 BOCRA REGISTERED No : BOCRA/TA/2019/4624 9-16 BOCRA REGISTERED No : BOCRA/TA/2019/4623 BOCRA REGISTERED No : BOCRA/TA/2019/4624 BOCRA REGISTERED No : BOCRA/TA/2019/4676 Technical information 9-Chapter 9.indd 16 2021/01/15 11:35:20 AM FOR LIBERIA AND SEYCHELLES Intelligent Key system (if equipped) This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. FCC CAUTION Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. FCC CAUTION Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. FOR MAURITIUS, LIBYA, CENTRAL AFRICA GUINEA BISSAU AND ZIMBABWE NISSAN Anti-Theft System (NATS) immobilizer (if equipped) JVT0495X Remote keyless entry system (if equipped) Remote keyless entry system (if equipped) This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. FCC CAUTION JVT0185X Intelligent Key system (if equipped) Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. JVT0094X NISSAN Anti-Theft System (NATS) immobilizer (if equipped) This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. JVT0141X JVT0494X Technical information 9-Chapter 9.indd 17 9-17 2021/01/15 11:35:21 AM MEMO 9-18 Illustrated table of contents 9-Chapter 9.indd 18 2021/01/15 11:35:21 AM 10 Index A ABS (Anti-lock Braking System).......................... 5-66 Air bag system Supplemental curtain side-impact air bag system................................................... 1-25, 1-31 Supplemental driver’s knee air bag system................................................... 1-25, 1-31 Supplemental front-impact air bag system................................................... 1-25, 1-31 Supplemental side-impact air bag system................................................... 1-25, 1-31 Air conditioner ................................................................. 4-18 Air conditioner operation ................................ 4-18 Air conditioner service ....................................... 4-23 Air conditioner specification label ............ 9-10 Air conditioning system refrigerant and lubricant recommendations ......................... 4-23 Antenna................................................................................ 4-58 Anti-lock Braking System (ABS).......................... 5-66 Anti-lock braking system (ABS) warning light .......................................................................................... 2-13 Appearance care Exterior appearance care .................................... 7-2 Interior appearance care ..................................... 7-4 Armrest ..................................................................................... 1-5 Audible reminders ........................................................ 2-17 Audio operation precautions ............................... 4-23 Audio system.................................................................... 4-23 Audio control steering switch .................... 4-56 FM-AM radio with compact disc (CD) player ....................................4-31, 4-36, 4-43, 4-49 Automatic air conditioner ...................................... 4-21 Auxiliary input jack .......................... 4-35, 4-54, 4-55 Average speed................................................................. 2-28 B Battery ....................................................................... 8-4, 8-18 Battery saver system............................ 2-35, 2-47 10-Index.indd 1 Intelligent Key battery discharge .............. 8-20 Intelligent Key battery replacement ...... 8-20 Remote controller battery replacement .............................................................. 8-19 Variable voltage control system ................ 8-21 Bleeding the fuel system ......................................... 8-11 Blind Spot Warning (BSW) ...................................... 5-30 Bluetooth® audio player operation ....................................................................................... 4-42, 4-54 Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System..................................................................... 4-59, 4-65 Brake Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) .................. 5-66 Brake assist ................................................................ 5-66 Brake booster ........................................................... 8-13 Brake fluid ................................................................... 8-14 Brake system ............................................................ 5-65 Parking brake check ............................................ 8-12 Parking brake operation .................................. 5-68 Warning light ............................................................. 2-13 Break-in schedule ............................................................. 5-4 Brightness control Instrument panel ................................................... 2-11 Bulb check/instrument panel ............................. 2-13 Bulb replacement ......................................................... 8-24 C C-Channel system ........................................................ 3-20 Card holder ........................................................................ 2-45 CD player operation .................................................... 4-33 CD/USB memory care and cleaning............... 4-56 Center ventilators ......................................................... 4-17 Child restraint installation using ISOFIX ..................................................................................... 1-18 Child restraint installation using threepoint type seat belt ..................................................... 1-21 Child restraints................................................................ 1-12 Child safety ............................................................................ 1-9 Child safety rear door lock ......................................... 3-5 Chimes, Audible reminders .................................... 2-17 Circuit breaker, Fusible link ................................... 8-22 Cleaning exterior and interior ...................... 7-2, 7-4 Clock ....................................................................................... 2-29 Clutch Clutch fluid ................................................................. 8-14 Cockpit ...................................................................................... 2-3 Cold weather driving .................................................. 5-67 Console box....................................................................... 2-43 Console light..................................................................... 2-46 Coolant Changing engine coolant ................................... 8-6 Checking engine coolant level ....................... 8-7 Corrosion protection ...................................................... 7-5 Cruise control................................................................... 5-41 Cup holders ....................................................................... 2-43 D Daytime running light system............................. 2-35 Defogger switch............................................................. 2-38 Dimensions ............................................................................ 9-8 Display Vehicle information display (models with color display) ................................................. 2-18 Vehicle information display (models without color display)......................................... 2-29 Door open warning light ......................................... 2-14 Draining water................................................................. 8-11 Drive belt.............................................................................. 8-11 Driving Cold weather driving .......................................... 5-67 On-pavement and off-road driving ............. 5-6 Precautions when starting and driving.... 5-4 Safety precautions ...................................................5-6 E ECO drive report ............................................................. 5-58 Economy, Fuel .................................................................. 5-59 2021/01/11 01:28:11 PM Elapsed time and trip odometer ....................... 2-28 Engine Break-in schedule ..................................................... 5-4 Changing engine coolant ................................... 8-6 Checking engine coolant level ........................ 8-7 Checking engine oil level ..................................... 8-8 Coolant temperature gauge ............................. 2-9 Engine compartment check locations...... 8-5 Engine cooling system .......................................... 8-6 Engine oil ......................................................................... 8-8 Engine serial number ......................................... 9-10 Engine specifications.............................................. 9-6 Engine start operation indicator (for Automatic Transmission (AT) models) ... 2-23 Engine start operation indicator (for Manual Transmission (MT) models) ......... 2-23 Fuel filter....................................................................... 8-11 If your vehicle overheats .................................. 6-10 Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide)............................ 5-5 F Flat tyre..................................................................................... 6-2 Floor mat cleaning ........................................................... 7-4 Fluid Brake fluid ................................................................... 8-14 Clutch fluid ................................................................. 8-14 Engine coolant ............................................................ 8-6 Engine oil ......................................................................... 8-8 Power steering fluid ............................................ 8-15 Window washer fluid................................ 8-4, 8-17 FM-AM radio with compact disc (CD) player............................................4-31, 4-36, 4-43, 4-49 Fog light switch .............................................................. 2-36 Front seat, Front seat adjustment ....................... 1-2 Fuel Bleeding the fuel system ................................. 8-11 Fuel economy ........................................................... 5-59 Fuel filter....................................................................... 8-11 Fuel information ......................................................... 9-4 Fuel octane (cetane) rating............................... 9-4 Gauge ............................................................................. 2-10 Fuel Efficiency and Carbon Dioxide Reduction driving tips ............................................... 5-59 Fuel-filler lid and cap................................................... 3-17 Fuses....................................................................................... 8-21 Fusible links ....................................................................... 8-22 G Gauge......................................................................................... 2-7 Engine coolant temperature gauge............ 2-9 Fuel gauge .................................................................. 2-10 Odometer ........................................................................ 2-9 Speedometer ................................................................ 2-9 Tachometer ................................................................... 2-9 Trip computer (with color display) .......... 2-27 Trip computer (without color display) ... 2-30 General maintenance .................................................... 8-2 Glove box ............................................................................. 2-43 H Hands-Free Phone System, Bluetooth® ....................................................................................... 4-59, 4-65 Head restraints ................................................................... 1-6 Headlights Bulb replacement .................................................. 8-24 Headlight switch .................................................... 2-32 Heater Heater and air conditioner operation .... 4-18 High beam assist ........................................................... 2-33 Hill start assist system .............................................. 5-25 Hood release..................................................................... 3-16 Horn......................................................................................... 2-39 I Impact sensing door lock releasing mechanism ............................................................................ 3-5 Indicator Vehicle information display (models with color display) ................................................. 2-18 Vehicle information display (models without color display)......................................... 2-29 Indicator lights ................................................................ 2-16 Instrument brightness control ........................... 2-11 Instrument panel .............................................................. 2-5 Intelligent Around View Monitor .......................... 4-8 Intelligent Driver Alertness..................................... 5-56 Intelligent Emergency Braking ........................... 5-43 Intelligent Emergency Braking system warning light .................................................................... 2-15 Intelligent Forward Collision Warning system ................................................................................... 5-49 Intelligent Key ...................................................................... 3-2 Intelligent Key battery ............................................... 8-20 Intelligent Key battery discharge...................... 8-20 Intelligent Key system ................................................... 3-6 Key operating range................................................ 3-8 Interior light switch ..................................................... 2-45 Interior lights .................................................................... 2-45 ISOFIX child restraint system ............................... 1-18 J Jump starting ...................................................................... 6-7 K Key Intelligent Key............................................................... 3-2 NISSAN Anti-Theft System (NATS*) key...... 3-2 Keys ............................................................................................. 3-2 For Intelligent Key system ................................. 3-2 Ignition switch ..................................................................... 5-8 Ignition switch (Push-button) ................................. 5-9 10-2 10-Index.indd 2 2021/01/11 01:28:12 PM L Labels Air conditioner specification label ............ 9-10 Engine serial number ......................................... 9-10 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)............. 9-9 Lane Departure Warning (LDW) ......................... 5-26 Light Bulb replacement ....................................... 8-2, 8-24 Fog light switch ...................................................... 2-36 Headlight switch .................................................... 2-32 Headlights bulb replacement ....................... 8-24 Indicator lights......................................................... 2-16 Interior lights............................................................. 2-45 Map lights .................................................................... 2-46 Replacement .................................................. 8-2, 8-24 Room light .................................................................. 2-47 Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders .................................................................... 2-12 Lock Vehicle speed sensing door lock mechanism .................................................................... 3-5 Low fuel warning........................................................... 2-24 Low fuel warning light............................................... 2-15 M Maintenance Battery ................................................................ 8-4, 8-18 General maintenance............................................. 8-2 Maintenance precautions ................................... 8-4 Maintenance requirement .................................. 8-2 Seat belt maintenance ...................................... 1-12 Malfunction indicator light (MIL) ........................ 2-16 Manual air conditioner and heater .................. 4-19 Map light control switch ......................................... 2-46 Map lights ........................................................................... 2-46 Master warning light .................................................. 2-15 Maximum load limits .................................................. 5-64 Mechanical key (Intelligent Key system) ......................................................................................................... 3-3 Mechanical key (NISSAN Anti-Theft System) ..................................................................................... 3-2 Meter Trip computer (with color display) ............ 2-27 Trip computer (without color display) ... 2-30 Meters and gauges .......................................................... 2-7 Instrument brightness control.................... 2-11 Mirror, Vanity mirror..................................................... 3-25 Moving Object Detection (MOD) ........................ 4-14 N New vehicle break-in ...................................................... 5-4 NISSAN Anti-Theft System (NATS*) key ............ 3-2 NissanConnect Owner’s Manual ........................... 4-3 O Odometer ............................................................................... 2-9 Oil Checking engine oil level ..................................... 8-8 Engine oil ......................................................................... 8-8 Oil control system ................................................. 2-30 Operating precautions.............................................. 5-63 Outside air temperature .......................................... 2-30 Overheat, If your vehicle overheats................. 6-10 P Parking Brake break-in.......................................................... 5-66 Parking brake operation .................................. 5-68 Parking sensor (sonar) function ........................ 4-13 Parking sensor (sonar) system ........................... 5-61 Phone Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System ............................................................. 4-59, 4-65 Power Auto slide back window system ................ 2-40 Power outlet .............................................................. 2-41 Power steering fluid ............................................ 8-15 Power windows ...................................................... 2-39 Pre-tensioner seat belt system ............. 1,28, 1-34 Precautions Audio operation ...................................................... 4-23 Cruise control ........................................................... 5-41 Driving safety ................................................................ 5-7 Maintenance ................................................................. 8-4 On-pavement and off-road driving ............. 5-6 Seat belt usage ........................................................... 1-8 When starting and driving................................. 5-4 Push starting .................................................................... 6-10 Push-button ignition switch .................................... 5-9 R Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) ............................ 5-36 Rear differential locking system ........................ 5-22 Rear door lock, Child safety rear door lock ......................................................................................................... 3-5 Rear ventilators .............................................................. 4-17 Rear view monitor ............................................................ 4-3 Remote controller battery ..................................... 8-19 Remote keyless entry system ................................ 3-5 Roof, Roof rack ................................................................ 2-44 Room light .......................................................................... 2-47 S Safety chains .................................................................... 5-64 Safety, Child seat belts .................................................. 1-9 Seat ISOFIX child restraint system ........................ 1-18 Seat adjustment, Front seats ................................... 1-2 Seat belt Child restraint installation using threepoint type seat belt .............................................. 1-21 10-3 10-Index.indd 3 2021/01/11 01:28:12 PM Seat belt(s) Child safety..................................................................... 1-9 Injured persons ....................................................... 1-10 Pre-tensioner seat belt system..... 1-28, 1-34 Precautions on seat belt usage ...................... 1-8 Pregnant women................................................... 1-10 Seat belt cleaning...................................................... 7-5 Seat belt maintenance ...................................... 1-12 Seat belt warning light ...................................... 2-15 Seat belts ......................................................................... 1-8 Shoulder belt height adjustment .............. 1-11 Seat(s) Seats.................................................................................... 1-2 Servicing air conditioner ......................................... 4-23 Shift lever Shift lock release.................................................... 5-15 Shift lock release Transmission ............................................................. 5-15 Shoulder belt height adjustment...................... 1-11 Side ventilators ............................................................... 4-17 Spare tyre ............................................................................ 8-32 Spark plugs ........................................................................ 8-12 Speedometer ....................................................................... 2-9 SRS air bag deployment conditions ............... 1-31 Starting Jump starting ............................................................... 6-7 Precautions when starting and driving.... 5-4 Push starting ............................................................ 6-10 Steering Audio control steering switch...................... 4-56 Power steering fluid ............................................ 8-15 Steering lock ............................................................. 5-10 Steering lock release malfunction indicator ....................................................................... 2-23 Tilting steering wheel ......................................... 3-23 Sun visors............................................................................ 2-45 Sunglasses holder ........................................................ 2-43 Supplemental air bag systems Supplemental curtain side-impact air bag system................................................................. 1-31 Supplemental driver’s knee air bag system ........................................................................... 1-31 Supplemental front-impact air bag system ........................................................................... 1-31 Supplemental side-impact air bag system ........................................................................... 1-31 Supplemental curtain side-impact air bag system ................................................................................... 1-25 Supplemental driver’s knee air bag system ................................................................................... 1-25 Supplemental front-impact air bag system ................................................................................... 1-25 Supplemental side-impact air bag system ................................................................................... 1-25 Switch Fog light switch ...................................................... 2-36 Headlight switch .................................................... 2-32 Ignition switch ......................................................... 5-10 Power door lock switch ....................................... 3-4 Steering switch ....................................................... 4-56 Turn signal switch ................................................. 2-35 T Tachometer ........................................................................... 2-9 Tailgate ................................................................................. 3-19 Temperature gauge, Engine coolant temperature gauge ......................................................... 2-9 Tie down hooks .............................................................. 3-20 Tilting steering wheel ................................................ 3-23 Tyre recommendation for 4WD .......................... 5-21 Tyres Flat tyre ............................................................................. 6-2 Tyre chains ................................................................. 8-30 Tyre pressure ............................................................ 5-64 Tyre rotation................................................... 8-3, 8-31 Types of tyres ........................................................... 8-30 Towing, Tow truck towing ...................................... 6-11 Trailer towing ................................................................... 5-63 Transmission, Transmission shift lever lock release ........................................................................ 5-15 Trip computer (with color display) ................... 2-27 Trip computer (without color display) ........... 2-30 Truck box ............................................................................. 3-19 Turbocharger system .................................................... 5-5 Turn signal switch ........................................................ 2-35 U Underbody cleaning ....................................................... 7-3 Universal child restraints for rear seats........................................................................................ 1-14 USB (Universal Serial Bus) charging connector ........................................................................... 2-42 USB (Universal Serial Bus) connection port .......................................................................................... 4-55 Using remote keyless entry system................... 3-6 V Vanity mirror ..................................................................... 3-25 Vanity mirror light ......................................................... 2-47 Variable voltage control system ........................ 8-21 Vehicle Dimensions .................................................................... 9-8 Identification Number (VIN) ............................... 9-9 Speed sensing door lock mechanism ...... 3-5 Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system ........................................................................... 5-23 Vehicle information display Vehicle information display warnings and indicators .......................................................... 2-22 Vehicle information display (models with color display) .................................................................... 2-18 How to use the vehicle information display ............................................................................ 2-18 Settings ......................................................................... 2-19 Startup display ........................................................ 2-19 Vehicle information display (models without color display) ................................................ 2-29 10-4 10-Index.indd 4 2021/01/11 01:28:12 PM Vehicle speed ................................................................... 2-28 Ventilators .......................................................................... 4-17 W Wiper Windshield wiper and washer switch ... 2-36 Wiper blades .............................................................. 8-16 Warning 4WD warning ............................................................ 5-20 Intelligent Forward Collision Warning system ........................................................................... 5-49 Lights .............................................................................. 2-13 Vehicle information display (models with color display) ................................................. 2-18 Vehicle information display (models without color display)......................................... 2-29 Warning lights, indicator lights and audible reminders ................................................. 2-12 Warning light Anti-lock braking system (ABS) warning light .................................................................................. 2-13 Brake warning light.............................................. 2-13 Door open warning light .................................. 2-14 Low fuel warning light ....................................... 2-15 Seat belt warning light ...................................... 2-15 Washer switch, Windshield wiper and washer switch ................................................................. 2-36 Washing .................................................................................... 7-2 Waxing ....................................................................................... 7-2 Welcome light and farewell light function .................................................................................... 3-9 Wheels and tyres Care of wheels ............................................................. 7-3 Cleaning aluminum alloy wheels................... 7-3 Tyres and wheels ........................................ 8-30, 9-7 Window washer fluid ....................................... 8-4, 8-17 Window(s) Auto slide back window system ................ 2-40 Cleaning................................................................. 7-3, 7-4 Manual windows .................................................... 2-39 Power windows ...................................................... 2-39 Windshield wiper and washer switch ............ 2-36 10-5 10-Index.indd 5 2021/01/11 01:28:12 PM MEMO 10-6 10-Index.indd 6 2021/01/11 01:28:12 PM GAS STATION INFORMATION GAS STATION INFORMATION FUEL INFORMATION RECOMMENDED ENGINE OIL Gasoline engine See "Recommended capacities" (P.9-2) QR25DE engine: UNLEADED gasoline with an octane rating of at least 91 (RON). CAUTION: Do not use leaded gasoline. Using leaded gasoline will damage the three-way catalyst. fluids/lubricants y TYRE COLD PRESSURE See the tyre placard affixed to the driver's side center pillar. In case of emergency - 6-1 (Flat tyre, engine will not start, overheating, towing) and y How to start the engine - 5-1 y How to read the meters and gauges - 2-1 y Maintenance and do-it-yourself - 8-1 y Technical information - 9-1 Diesel engine* YD25DDTi engine: Diesel fuel above 50 cetane and with a maximum of 50 ppm of sulfur (EN590) must be used. *if two types of diesel fuel are available, use summer or winter fuel properly according to the following temperature conditions. y Above -7˚C (20˚F) - Summer type diesel fuel. y Below -7˚C (20˚F) - Winter type diesel fuel. y Do not use home heating oil, gasoline or other alternate fuels in your diesel engine. The use of those or adding those to diesel fuel can cause engine damage. y Do not use summer fuel at temperatures below −7˚C (20˚F). The cold temperatures will cause wax to form in the fuel. As a result, it may prevent the engine from running smoothly. CAUTION: 11-Gas station information.indd 1 2020/11/23 12:50:57 PM